Hyperion® System™ 9 BI+™ Workspace™ Release 9.2 User`s Guide

Hyperion® System™ 9 BI+™ Workspace™ Release 9.2 User`s Guide
HYPERION® SYSTEM™ 9 BI+™
WORKSPACE™
RELEASE 9.2
USER ’S GU I DE
Copyright 1989–2006 Hyperion Solutions Corporation.
All rights reserved.
“Hyperion,” the Hyperion logo, and Hyperion’s product names are trademarks of Hyperion. References to other
companies and their products use trademarks owned by the respective companies and are for reference purpose only.
No portion hereof may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including
photocopying, recording, or information storage and retrieval systems, for any purpose other than the recipient’s personal
use, without the express written permission of Hyperion.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. Hyperion shall not be liable for errors contained
herein or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use hereof.
Any Hyperion software described herein is licensed exclusively subject to the conditions set forth in the Hyperion license
agreement.
Use, duplication or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions set forth in the applicable Hyperion license
agreement and as provided in DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) (1995), DFARS 252.227-7013(c)(1)(ii) (Oct
1988), FAR 12.212(a) (1995), FAR 52.227-19, or FAR 52.227-14, as applicable.
Hyperion Solutions Corporation
5450 Great America Parkway
Santa Clara, California 95054
Printed in the U.S.A.
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Document Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Where to Find Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Help Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
Additional Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Education Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Consulting Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxiii
xxiii
xxiii
xxiii
Documentation Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
CHAPTER 1 Setting Preferences and Personalizing Your Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Setting Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Setting General Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Setting Authentication Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Setting Explore Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
About Module Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Web Analysis Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Setting the Active Preference File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
User Preferences and Formatting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Default Formatting Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Web Analysis Database Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
About Alias Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Setting Alias Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Setting the Database Logon Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
About Point of View Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Generic and Specific Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Replacing Member Selection Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Default Dimension Layout and Member Selections for New Documents . . . . . . . . . 35
Session-based Point of View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Reloading Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Contents
iii
Point of View and Personal Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Personal Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generic and Specific Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Point of View and Personal Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Preferences for Financial Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Preferences for Production Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Preferences for Interactive Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up the User POV for Financial Reporting Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing Dimension Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Aliases and Descriptions in the User POV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
36
36
36
36
37
37
38
39
40
Personalizing Your Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resizing the View Pane and Content Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sorting Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Showing Specific File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
43
43
44
44
Standard Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
CHAPTER 2 Exploring and Managing Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Collections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supporting Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Standard Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
48
49
50
53
54
Basics of Explore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Viewing Priorities, Exceptions, and Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Managing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening or Selecting Files or Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Documents or Collections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving Files or Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Renaming Files or Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Files or Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Searching for Files or Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
56
57
57
57
58
58
58
59
Linking to Other Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Creating E-mail Links to Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Using the E-mail Recipient List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Using Ambiguous Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Registering a File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Exporting Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Exporting to Smart View for Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
iv
Contents
About Hyperion System 9 BI+ Smart View Export Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
About Interactive Reporting Import Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
About Smart Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Installing Smart View From the Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Specifying Your Version of Microsoft Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Exporting Financial Reports and Snapshots to Microsoft Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Exporting Web Analysis Documents to Microsoft Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Exporting Production Reporting Content to Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Changing Related Content Servers for Financial Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Changing Financial Reporting Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Changing Analytic Services and Planning Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Changing from Analytic Services to Planning Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Changing from Planning Details to Analytic Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Managing Database Connections for Financial Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Adding Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Editing Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Deleting Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
CHAPTER 3 Importing Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Interactive Reporting Documents and Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
HTML Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Importing Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Importing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Importing Multiple Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Importing Files as Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Importing a URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
URLs from Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Opening a URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Opening a URL in a New Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Updating a URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Importing Financial Reporting Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Setting Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Setting or Modifying Permissions on Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Setting Permissions on Interactive Reporting Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Creating Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Working with Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
General Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Advanced Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Interactive Reporting Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Production Reporting Properties and Generic Job Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
HTML File Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
URL Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Contents
v
Interactive Reporting Database Connection Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Working with Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening a Specific Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing or Modifying Properties of Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Properties of Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Listing Multiple Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
87
87
88
88
89
89
90
CHAPTER 4 Viewing and Organizing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
About Using Different File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Creating a New Book, Batch, or Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Selecting a Data Source for a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Using the Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Using Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Items to Your Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pushing Items to Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94
94
95
96
Using Subscriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Creating a Subscription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Modifying or Removing Subscriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Subscribing to Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Receiving and Viewing Subscriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Using Personal Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customizing Personal Page Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding or Removing Personal Page Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying HTML Content on Personal Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Embedding Interactive Reporting Document Sections in Personal Pages . . . . . . . .
Creating Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying the Layout of a Personal Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Colors on a Personal Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working With Personal Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Personal Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying a Personal Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Personal Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Publishing and Replacing Personal Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100
102
102
103
105
108
109
113
114
115
115
116
117
117
118
CHAPTER 5 Launching Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Launching Hyperion Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
vi
Contents
CHAPTER 6 Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Enterprise Metrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Using Enterprise Metrics Hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Using ZoomCharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Using the Monitor Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Monitor Section Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Selecting Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Using Hyperlinks to View Investigate Section Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Using Hyperlinks to View Pinpoint Section Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Using Page Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Displaying Chart Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Displaying Mini Report Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Using the Investigate Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Investigate Section Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Selecting Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Using Hyperlinks to View Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Sorting Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Changing Points of View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Drilling to View Additional Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Fast Scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Drilling to Additional Report Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Displaying Chart Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Using the Pinpoint Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Pinpoint Section Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Selecting Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Using Hyperlinks to View Additional Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Changing Points of View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Sorting Pinpoint Section Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Displaying Report Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Using the Dictionary Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Dictionary Section Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Displaying Object Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Chart Page Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Chart Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Metric Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Measure Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Report Page Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Mini Report Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Viewing Enterprise Metrics Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Accessing Enterprise Metrics Personalization Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Contents
vii
CHAPTER 7 Using Hyperion System 9 Performance Scorecard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Launching the Scorecard Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Viewing Employee Scorecards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Viewing Maps in Scorecard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Viewing Accountability Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Viewing Strategy Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Viewing Cause and Effect Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Exporting Scorecards to Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Exporting Cause and Effect Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Printing Scorecards and Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Setting the Default Workspace Start Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
CHAPTER 8 Using Financial Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Workspace Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Tips Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Interacting with Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Enabling Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Preview Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Logging On to Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Expired Passwords for Analytic Services Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Reports and Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing User POV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Responding to Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Expansions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Related Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Members for User POVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Page Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Members for Grid POVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
169
170
170
171
172
173
174
174
175
177
177
177
178
Viewing Snapshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Viewing Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Viewing Snapshot Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
CHAPTER 9 Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
About Designing Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Designing Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Creating Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Selecting Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Available Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Members Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
viii
Contents
Lists Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Functions Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Assigning Special Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Selecting the User Point of View as a Member in the Book Point of View . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Assigning Members Using Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Selecting Multiple Members Based on Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Searching for Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Previewing Selected Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Saving Books and Snapshot Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Opening Books or Snapshot Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Renaming Books and Snapshot Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Previewing and Printing Books and Snapshot Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Changing the Book Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Exporting Books and Snapshot Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Designing Batches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Defining Prompts for a Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Opening Batches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Assigning File Permissions to Snapshots and Snapshot Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
CHAPTER 10 Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Using Interactive Reporting Documents in the Hyperion System 9 BI + Workspace . . . . . . 200
Using the Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Standard Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Interactive Reporting Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Paging Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Shortcut Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Alert Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Interacting with Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Understanding Interactive Reporting Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Creating an Interactive Reporting Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Accessing Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Saving Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Saving an Interactive Reporting Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Using the Save Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Using the Save As Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Working with Document Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Sections Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Selecting Document Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Adding Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Moving Between Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Duplicating Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Renaming Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Deleting Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Contents
ix
Dashboard Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Refreshing Document Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Printing Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
x
Contents
Exporting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exporting a Section as a PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exporting a Section to MS Excel (.XLS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exporting a Document in Native File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211
211
212
212
Query Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interactive Reporting Database Connection Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Topics and Topic Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Query Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Building Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with Items on the Request Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Request Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing Request Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a Computed Item in Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arithmetic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comparison Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logical Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Computed Items and Data Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying A Query Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Variable Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying Query Sorts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refreshing a Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
213
213
213
214
214
214
215
216
216
216
216
217
218
219
219
220
220
221
221
222
223
224
225
226
Results and Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with Columns and Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AutoSizing a Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sorting Results/Table Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying a Results and Table Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Show Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Custom Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Custom SQL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
226
227
227
228
228
228
228
229
229
231
233
234
234
Modifying a Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Deleting a Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Results and Table Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Calculating a Grand Total for a Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Calculating a Break Total for a Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Adding a Computed Item in Results and Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Paging Through Results Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Chart Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Understanding Chart Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Changing Chart Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Chart Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Two-dimensional Chart Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Pie Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Showing Pie Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Showing Negative and Positive Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Showing Pie Percent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Bar Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Showing Bar Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Multidimensional Chart Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Viewing Three-dimensional Bar Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Clustered Bar Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Stacked Bar Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Area Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Stacked Area Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Line Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Ribbon Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Bar-Line (Combination) Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Working with Charted Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Adding a Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Adding Chart Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Removing Chart Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Focusing and Hiding Charted Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Grouping and Ungrouping Chart Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Working with Chart Facts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Paging Through the Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Pivot Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Pivot Table Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Working with Pivot Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Adding a Pivot Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Adding Pivot Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Deleting Pivot Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Auto-Sizing a Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Focusing and Hiding Pivoted Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Contents
xi
Working with Row and Column Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grouping and Ungrouping Pivot Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Swinging Pivot Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with Pivot Facts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Total Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cumulative Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surface Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analyzing Pivot Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paging Through Pivot Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
256
256
257
257
258
258
259
259
260
Common Chart/Pivot Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sorting Charts/Pivots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drill Anywhere into Charts/Pivots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DrillDown into Dimensional Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
260
261
262
262
OLAPQuery Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with OLAP Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OLAP Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto-Sizing a Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sorting OLAP Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drilling into OLAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drilling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OLAP Data Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
263
263
263
264
264
264
265
265
Dashboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Report Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Paging Through the Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
CHAPTER 11 Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Production Reporting Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Viewing a Production Reporting Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Viewing Functionality for HTML Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Navigation Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exporting Report Information from the Navigation Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Navigation Bar to Move Among Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigating with the Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
271
271
272
272
273
CHAPTER 12 Using Web Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation Access and File Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User and User Group Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Document and Folder References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference Reconciliation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
277
277
277
277
278
Opening Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Closing Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Web Analysis Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Creating Web Analysis Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
xii
Contents
Creating Documents from Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Modifying Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Selecting Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Advanced Member Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Advanced Member Selection by Data Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Searching for Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Searching for SAP BW Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Locating Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Selecting Members Using Analytic Services Subsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Wildcard Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
UDAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Selecting Financial Management User-Defined Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Filtering by SAP BW Member Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Using SAP BW Select Top/Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Selecting Financial Management Member Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Selecting Substitution Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Multiple Substitution Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Syntax Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Analysis Tools and Substitution Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Selecting Personal Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Applying Point of View (POV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Defining Dynamic Time Series Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Time Substitution Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Defining Previous Member Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Navigating Data Objects and Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Navigation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Repositioning Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Multiple-Page and Single-Page List Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Keep Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Remove Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Drilling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Default Drilling Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Drill-Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Changing Display Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Pinboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
SQL Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Freeform Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Resizing the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Managing Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Activating and Deactivating Analysis Tools Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Show/Hide Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Contents
xiii
Creating Show/Hide Only Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Editing Show/Hide Only Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Traffic Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Creating Traffic Lighting Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Editing Traffic Lighting Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Creating Sorting Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Editing Sorting Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Restrict Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Creating Restrict Data Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Editing Restrict Data Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Retrieve Only Top/Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Creating Retrieve Only Top/Bottom Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Editing Retrieve Only Top/Bottom Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Creating Data Formatting Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Editing Data Formatting Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analytic Services Attribute Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
319
324
326
326
Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Integrating OLAP and Relational Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Analytic Services Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Financial Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Financial Management Features Available in Web Analysis Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Financial Management Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
SAP BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Relational Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Controlling Query Result Set Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Custom Web Analysis Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Linking Components by Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Linking Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Edit Data Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Editing Data Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Copying, Cutting, and Pasting To and From Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Tips for Edit Data Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
CHAPTER 13 Scheduling Jobs and Batches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Scheduling and Running Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
About Job Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Job Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
xiv
Contents
Scheduling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Running a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Setting Job Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Scheduling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Using Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Modifying Job Output Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Viewing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Managing Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Creating Personal Recurring Time Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Viewing Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Modifying Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Deleting Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Managing Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Viewing Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Using the Consolidated Job Status List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Filtering Consolidated Job Status List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Modifying Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Deleting Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Adding Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Viewing Job Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Modifying Job Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Deleting Job Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Retrieving Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Scheduling Batches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Scheduling Batches to Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Selecting a Member for the Batch Point of View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Specifying the Batch Destination and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Selecting the Destination for the Scheduled Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Batch Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Deleting Batches from the Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Deleting Batches from the Batch Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Automatic Removal of Batch Scheduler Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Setting Up E-mail Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Retrieving the Exported Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Viewing the Status of Scheduled Batches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Viewing Details of a Scheduled Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Preparing Batch Files for the Command Line Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Providing Logon Credentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
CHAPTER 14 Using Interactive Reporting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Interactive Reporting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Import Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Pass-Through Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Contents
xv
Supporting Exceptions in Interactive Reporting Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Setting Interactive Reporting Job Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Data Source and Query Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Intelligence iServer General Properties and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Job Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
371
371
372
373
374
Selecting Database-Connection File Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Pass-Through Using Multiple, Interactive Reporting, Database-Connection Files . . . . 376
Setting Processing and Metadata Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Setting Job Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Single-Cycle Job Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying Job Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Multiple-Cycle Job Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
378
378
378
379
Job Parameter Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filter Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Filter Values for Relational Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Filter and Slicer Values for OLAP Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Action Options for Multiple-Cycle Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
381
381
382
383
385
386
Example: Importing and Scheduling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
CHAPTER 15 Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Prerequisites for Importing Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Job Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dependency Analysis Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connectivity and Run Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection and Run Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required-File Addition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Production Reporting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASK Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INPUT Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Custom Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter List Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Demand Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Output Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compile Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
394
394
395
396
396
397
398
398
399
400
401
402
404
405
406
406
407
408
408
Generic Job Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
xvi
Contents
Required Files for Generic Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Database Connectivity for Generic Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Modifying Production Reporting and Generic Job Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Setting Production Reporting and Generic Job Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Output Options for Scheduling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
E-mail Notification Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Output Directory Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Working with Secure Production Reporting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Access Privileges on Secure Production Reporting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Security Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Recommendations for Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Programmer Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Viewing Security Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Supporting Exceptions in Production Reporting or Generic Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Production Reporting Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Generic Report Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Setting Priority on Output Programmatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
CHAPTER 16 Using Custom Parameter Forms for Production Reporting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Customizing Parameter Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Parameter Form Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Assigning Parameter Forms Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Assigning the Standard Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Editing Parameter Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Parameter Form Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Element Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Basic Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Conditional Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Looping Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Required Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Name Specification Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Parameter List Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Parameter Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Nonrequired Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Standard Parameter Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Standard Parameter Form Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Parameter Forms: Example and Tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Contents
xvii
xviii
Contents
Preface
Welcome to the Hyperion System 9 BI+ Workspace. This preface discusses the following topics:
●
“Purpose” on page xix
●
“Audience” on page xix
●
“Document Structure” on page xix
●
“Where to Find Documentation” on page xx
●
“Help Menu Commands” on page xxi
●
“Conventions” on page xxii
●
“Additional Support” on page xxiii
●
“Documentation Feedback” on page xxiii
Purpose
This guide provides information that you need to use Hyperion System 9 BI+ Workspace. It
explains Workspace features and options and contains the concepts, processes, procedures,
formats, tasks, and examples that you need to use the software.
This guide explains Workspace features and options and contains the concepts, processes,
procedures, formats, tasks, and examples that you need to use the software.
Audience
This guide is for consumers and designers who are responsible for viewing and creating
documents.
Document Structure
This document contains the following information:
●
Chapter 1, “Setting Preferences and Personalizing Your Workspace” describes how to setup
preferences, start page and your desktop.
Preface
xix
●
Chapter 2, “Exploring and Managing Items” describes the basic tasks for exploring,
managing and searching for files in the repository.
●
Chapter 3, “Importing Items” describes how to import items to the repository and set item
properties.
●
Chapter 4, “Viewing and Organizing Information” describes the basic tasks for subscribing,
desktop, favorites and personal pages.
●
Chapter 5, “Launching Applications” describes how you can open a Hyperion System 9
Financial Management or Hyperion System 9 Planning application from Workspace.
●
Chapter 6, “Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Enterprise Metrics” describes the basic tasks for
viewing and interacting with Enterprise Metrics Studio documents.
●
Chapter 7, “Using Hyperion System 9 Performance Scorecard” describes the basic tasks for
viewing and interacting with Performance Scorecard documents.
●
Chapter 8, “Using Financial Reporting” describes the basic tasks for viewing and interacting
with Financial Reporting Studio documents.
●
Chapter 9, “Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books” describes
how to create books and batches for Financial Reporting Studio and how to create Web
Analysis documents.
●
Chapter 10, “Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting” describes the basic tasks
for viewing and interacting with Interactive Reporting Studio documents.
●
Chapter 11, “Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Production Reporting Documents” describes
the basic tasks for viewing and interacting with Production Reporting Studio documents.
●
Chapter 12, “Using Web Analysis” describes the basic tasks for viewing and interacting with
Web Analysis Studio documents.
●
Chapter 13, “Scheduling Jobs and Batches” describes how to schedule batches for Hyperion
System 9 BI+ Financial Reporting and how to schedule jobs for Hyperion System 9 BI+
Interactive Reporting Studio files and Hyperion System 9 BI+ Production Reporting Studio
files.
●
Chapter 14, “Using Interactive Reporting Jobs” describes the properties specific to
Interactive Reporting jobs and OCE files. OCE files are the connection files that Interactive
Reporting jobs and documents use to connect to data sources for processing queries.
●
Chapter 15, “Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs” describes the properties
specific to Production Reporting documents, generic jobs, Production Reporting jobs, and
Production Reporting job output.
●
Chapter 16, “Using Custom Parameter Forms for Production Reporting Jobs”
●
Glossary contains a list of key terms and their definitions.
●
Index contains a list of Hyperion System 9 BI+ Workspace terms and their page references.
Where to Find Documentation
All Hyperion System 9 BI+ Workspace documentation is accessible from the following
locations:
xx
Preface
●
The HTML Information Map is available from the Workspace Help menu for all operating
systems; for products installed on Microsoft Windows systems, it is also available from the
Start menu.
●
Online help is available from within Workspace. After you log on to the product, you can
access online help by clicking the Help button or selecting Help from the menu bar.
●
The Hyperion Download Center can be accessed from the Hyperion Solutions Web site.
➤ To access documentation from the Hyperion Download Center:
1 Go to the Hyperion Solutions Web site and navigate to Services > WorldWide Support > Download Center.
Note: Your Login ID for the Hyperion Download Center is your e-mail address. The Login ID and Password required for the
Hyperion Download Center are different from the Login ID and Password required for Hyperion Support Online
through Hyperion.com. If you are not sure whether you have a Hyperion Download Center account, follow the
on-screen instructions.
2 In the Login ID and Password text boxes, enter your e-mail address and password.
3 In the Language list box, select the appropriate language and click Login.
4 If you are a member on multiple Hyperion Solutions Download Center accounts, select the account that you
want to use for the current session.
5 To access documentation online, from the Product List, select the appropriate product and follow the
on-screen instructions.
Help Menu Commands
Table i describes the commands that are available from the Help menu in Workspace.
Table i
Help Menu Commands
Command
Description
Help on This Topic
Launches a help topic specific to the window or Web page.
Contents
Launches the Workspace help.
Information Map
Launches the Workspace Information Map, which provides the following assistance:
Technical Support
●
Online help in PDF and HTML format
●
Links to related resources to assist you in using Workspace
Launches the Hyperion Technical Support site, where you submit defects and contact
Technical Support.
Help Menu Commands
xxi
Table i
Help Menu Commands (Continued)
Hyperion Developer’s
Network
Hyperion.com
About Workspace
Launches the Hyperion Developer Network site, where you access information about
known defects and best practices. This site also provides tools and information to
assist you in getting starting using Hyperion products:
●
Sample models
●
A resource library containing FAQs, tips, and technical white papers
●
Demos and Webcasts demonstrating how Hyperion products are used
Launches Hyperion’s corporate Web site, where you access a variety of information
about Hyperion:
●
Office locations
●
The Hyperion Business Intelligence and Business Performance Management
product suite
●
Consulting and partner programs
●
Customer and education services and technical support
Launches the About Workspace dialog box, which contains copyright and release
information, along with version details.
Conventions
The following table shows the conventions that are used in this document:
Table ii
xxii
Preface
Conventions Used in This Document
Item
Meaning
➤
Arrows indicate the beginning of procedures consisting of sequential steps or
one-step procedures.
Brackets [ ]
In examples, brackets indicate that the enclosed elements are optional.
Bold
Bold in procedural steps highlights user interface elements on which the user
must perform actions.
CAPITAL LETTERS
Capital letters denote commands and various IDs. (Example: CLEARBLOCK
command)
Ctrl+0
Keystroke combinations shown with the plus sign (+) indicate that you should
press the first key and hold it while you press the next key. Do not type the plus
sign.
Ctrl+Q, Shift+Q
For consecutive keystroke combinations, a comma indicates that you press the
combinations consecutively.
Example text
Courier font indicates that the example text is code or syntax.
Courier italics
Courier italic text indicates a variable field in command syntax. Substitute a value
in place of the variable shown in Courier italics.
ARBORPATH
When you see the environment variable ARBORPATH in italics, substitute the
value of ARBORPATH from your site.
n, x
Italic n stands for a variable number; italic x can stand for a variable number or a
letter. These variables are sometimes found in formulas.
Table ii
Conventions Used in This Document (Continued)
Item
Meaning
Ellipses (...)
Ellipsis points indicate that text has been omitted from an example.
Mouse orientation
This document provides examples and procedures using a right-handed mouse.
If you use a left-handed mouse, adjust the procedures accordingly.
Menu options
Options in menus are shown in the following format. Substitute the appropriate
option names in the placeholders, as indicated.
Menu name > Menu command > Extended menu command
For example: 1. Select File > Desktop > Accounts.
Additional Support
In addition to providing documentation and online help, Hyperion offers the following
product information and support. For details on education, consulting, or support options,
click the Services link at the Hyperion Solutions Web site.
Education Services
Hyperion offers instructor-led training, custom training, and e-Learning covering all Hyperion
applications and technologies. Training is geared to administrators, end users, and information
systems professionals.
Consulting Services
Experienced Hyperion consultants and partners implement software solutions tailored to
clients’ particular reporting, analysis, modeling, and planning requirements. Hyperion also
offers specialized consulting packages, technical assessments, and integration solutions.
Technical Support
Hyperion provides enhanced telephone and electronic-based support to clients to resolve
product issues quickly and accurately. This support is available for all Hyperion products at no
additional cost to clients with current maintenance agreements.
Documentation Feedback
Hyperion strives to provide complete and accurate documentation. Your opinion on the
documentation is of value, so please send your comments by going to
http://www.hyperion.com/services/support_programs/doc_survey/index.cfm.
Documentation Feedback
xxiii
xxiv
Preface
Chapter
1
Setting Preferences and
Personalizing Your Workspace
This chapter describes preferences and personalizing Workspace.
In This Chapter
●
Preferences specify Workspace behavior and appearance for users. Set defaults for the user
interface, Explore, file types and Studios. See “Setting Preferences” on page 26.
●
Personalizing Workspace enables you to change the appearance of the user interface.
Changes display when you log onto Workspace. See “Personalizing Your Workspace” on
page 42.
Setting Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Personalizing Your Workspace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Standard Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Setting Preferences and Personalizing Your Workspace
25
Setting Preferences
Set defaults for general appearances of the user interface, Explore, file types and Studios. Use
these preferences tabs:
●
“Setting General Preferences” on page 26
●
“Setting Explore Preferences” on page 28
●
“About Module Preferences” on page 29
User interface settings made with the View menu override default settings defined from
General Preferences and stay until logging off. When you log on, user interface settings from
Preferences are used. Set General tab preferences to hide the Masthead; display the Masthead:
View > Masthead. User interface settings made with the View menu override settings made
with preferences until you logoff. See “Personalizing Your Workspace” on page 42.
Setting preferences saves time from doing it every time dialogs or Web pages are displayed.
Setting General Preferences
General preferences set defaults for the Masthead, View Pane, UI appearance, and default start
page for the Content area. Change passwords after logging on to the Workspace. This option is
available to users with native authentication parameters specified, not external authentication.
Changes made using Preferences go into effect next time you log on.
➤ General preferences:
1 File > Preferences.
2 Deselect options you do not want displayed.
Note: The e-mail address displayed is your e-mail address registered in your user’s security settings. You cannot update
it.
3 Hide document file paths in the progress bar by clearing Show Paths For Documents.
4 Workspace prompts you to save unsaved files by checking Prompt to Save Unsaved Files.
5 The Default Startup Options for the View Pane Tab are:
●
Document, if users have the Explorer role.
●
Navigate, if users do not have the Explorer role.
Note: If the default content does not have a Document tab and the default is set to Document, the View Pane Tab
defaults to Tips.
6 In Default Startup Options for Content, select an option to display by default whenever you log in to
Workspace. The default option is Explorer, if users have the Explorer role and None if not.
7 Depending on your selection in step 6, complete the following:
26
Setting Preferences and Personalizing Your Workspace
●
Desktop option, click Use Current Page to select a page you have open to display in the
Content area.
●
Explore option, click Select. From Select, select a folder and click Ok. The path and folder
displays in Folder.
●
Document option, select Select. From Select, select a document and click Ok. The path and
document name displays in the Document text box.
●
Favorite option, select one of the following:
❍
Click Use Current Page to select a page you have open to display in the content area.
❍
Select a page from Favorite. The page displays in Favorite.
●
Enterprise Metrics option, click Use Current Page to select a page you have open to display
in the content area.
●
Scorecard option, select one of the following:
❍
Click Use Current Page to select a page you have open to display in the content area.
❍
Enter a Scorecard/Map name in the text box.
8 Perform one of the following tasks:
●
Save changes, click OK.
●
Cancel changes, click Cancel.
Setting Authentication Preferences
Set Authentication preferences to change your Workspace login password.
➤ Set Authentication preferences:
1 File > Preferences, click Authentication.
2 In Change Password, enter your current password and a new password.
3 Re-enter your new password.
4 Click OK.
➤ For Interactive Reporting and Production Reporting authentication:
1 File > Preferences, click Authentication.
2 Repeat steps step 2 through step 4 above in the In Credentials Used for Pass-Through area.
Setting Preferences
27
Figure 1
Authentication Preferences
Setting Explore Preferences
Set Explore preferences to define default folders and default permissions for items that you
create or import. You can specify default permissions for specific users, groups or roles. If you
do not set these preferences, the Default folder, Desktop folder, and New Document folder are
set to the top-most or root folder and permissions for items are set to Empty.
You can modify the following Explorer Preferences:
●
Default Folder - Your default folder is shown when you use Explore. Set it to the folder you
access most frequently.
●
Desktop Folder - Your desktop folder is used as a scratch pad or to store items for access
from Viewer.
❍
From Viewer, items in the desktop display as icons.
❍
View the Desktop folder in Explore; the folder name displays, not the name Desktop.
●
New Document Folder -The New document folder is the default folder where the new
document wizard searches for Web Analysis database connection files and Interactive
Reporting documents. If you are creating new Interactive Reporting documents and browse
for data sources this folder is used.
●
Default File Permissions - Default file permissions are applied when you create or import
items. Default file permissions determine:
❍
The ability of a user, group, or role to access the item.
❍
Wether to automatically push the item to the user, group, or role favorites.
Note: These default file permissions are automatically applied to all items you create or import. You can override these
defaults by manually changing the permissions when you create or import the item.
➤ Set default folders:
1 File > Preferences, click the Explore tab.
28
Setting Preferences and Personalizing Your Workspace
2 Set the Default folder, Desktop folder and New Document folder.
3 Click Select, and do one of the following steps:
●
From Look in, select a folder.
●
From the list of names:
❍
Select a folder
❍
To navigate, double-click a folder
The folder you select is displayed in the Name text box.
Tip: Do not type a name in the Name text box.
4 From Default File Permissions, select one of the following:
●
Interactive Reporting documents
●
Interactive Reporting jobs
●
Production Reporting jobs
●
Generic jobs
●
All other documents
5 Click OK or Cancel
6 To continue setting default permissions, repeat step 3.
➤ Set default file permissions:
1 Select Set Permissions to set default permissions for users, groups, and roles. The Permissions dialog is
displayed. See “Set or modify permissions:” on page 81.
About Module Preferences
Web Analysis, Financial Reporting, Production Reporting, and Interactive Reporting
preferences are accessed from the Preferences dialog box:
●
Web Analysis Preferences are organized on three tabs. These options specify the active
preference file, set default leading and trailing data value formatting, numeric formatting,
and database connection parameters for Web Analysis documents.
●
Setting Preferences for Financial Reporting include options for how you want to preview
documents, POV settings, export options, and formatting options, preferences for
designing reports, the language to use, units of measure and guidelines document layouts.
●
Setting Preferences for Production Reporting include scanning folders for Production
Reporting Jobs.
●
Setting Preferences for Interactive Reporting include options for setting locale defaults
based upon the country of origin, date and time formatting, and number formatting.
Setting Preferences
29
➤ Display the Preferences dialog box:
●
File > Preferences.
●
In Explorer, right-click a preferences file and select Edit.
Web Analysis Preferences
Preferences are stored in the repository as preference files. A preferences file is located in every
user’s Profiles folder. Share preference files with other users. Although multiple preference files
can be defined, only one preference file can be active at a time.
Some formatting options and user preferences are identical. Preferences are applied to new
documents and can be overridden by database connection formatting and document-based
formatting.
Order of Precedence
1. Formatting options specified in the User Preferences dialog box
2. Formatting options saved with the database connection
3. Formatting options saved with documents
➤ Only subsets of Web Analysis preferences are set through the BI+ Workspace. The Web
Analysis Studio offers a comprehensive interface for specifying Web Analysis preferences. The
Workspace and the Web Analysis Studio modify the same files.
Setting the Active Preference File
The Preferences dialog box Active Preferences tab specifies this current preferences file.
Selecting Use My Preferences indicates you are using and editing the preferences file located in
your Profiles folder. Selecting Use Shared Preferences indicates you are using and editing the
preferences file at the specified repository location.
The Active Preferences controls do not display when accessing specific preferences files through
Explorer, or when you create new preferences files. It is assumed that you are focusing on the
specified file.
Changing the Active Preference does not impact opened documents in the content area. User
and shared preferences are only applied to subsequently created documents.
Upon editing shared preferences files, change the default behavior for users referencing that
file. To prevent users from changing your preferences, restrict yourself to using your own
preferences file.
User Preferences and Formatting Options
There are identical formatting options and user preferences. User preferences are global
settings applied to new documents. User Preferences can be overridden by database connection
formatting and document-based formatting.
30
Setting Preferences and Personalizing Your Workspace
Order of Formatting Precedence
1. Options saved with documents
2. Options saved with the database connection
3. Options specified in the User Preferences dialog box
Spreadsheet user preferences and chart user preferences are identical to spreadsheet options
and chart properties. They are only applied to subsequently created documents.
Default Formatting Preferences
Default Formatting preferences specify default data formatting for all subsequently created
reports. Options are organized by their ability to amend, format, or replace data returned from
the data source.
Table 1
Formatting Options
Description
Leading and Trailing Formatting
Currency Symbol
Inserts the following currency formatting symbols into the Positive Prefix and
Negative Prefix text boxes: Dollar ($), Cents (¢), Pound (£), Euro(E),
Deutschmark (DM), Franc (F), and Yen (¥).
Positive Prefix
Enters character to precede positive numeric values.
Positive Suffix
Enters character to follow positive numeric values.
Negative Prefix
Enters character to precede negative numeric values. Warning: The minus
sign (-) is the default prefix. Deleting the default prefix without replacing it
causes negative values to display positively.
Negative Suffix
Enters character to follow negative numeric values.
Numeric Formatting
Grouped Thousands Check Box
Displays numeric digits as grouped by thousands.
Minimum Decimals
Indicates the minimum number of decimal places to display.
Maximum Decimals
Indicates the maximum number of decimal places to display.
Scale
Enables abbreviated values by tens, hundreds, thousands, ten-thousands,
hundred-thousands, millions, and billions.
Use Negative Color Check Box
Indicates that negative numbers are signified by a selected color.
Select Negative Color
Enables you to select the color representing negative values.
Samples
Update Samples
Updates the samples panel based on the most recent formatting selections.
Replace Missing With
Replaces missing values with either a text string or zero.
●
Zero
●
Text
Setting Preferences
31
Web Analysis Database Preferences
Web Analysis Databases user preferences provide an inventory of available database servers and
database connections by listing the database connection name, description, alias table, and
repository location.
To review database connection names, click Edit. The Database Preferences dialog box is
displayed. It has three tabs:
●
Details
●
Point of View
●
Personal Variable
Click Connect to connect to data sources and retrieve values. If you are unable to connect, you
may browse to another database connection file.
See the Hyperion System 9 BI+ Workspace User’s Guide.
About Alias Tables
Alias tables are database tables that store aliases, or alternate description labels, for dimensions
or members. Analytic Services enables you to define multiple alias tables. Web Analysis user
preferences enable you to specify which alias table to use. The alias table selection is saved as a
Web Analysis Database user preference.
Label mode enables you to select whether dimension members are listed by ID number or
description. Label mode options are data source-specific, and are set for database connections,
specific documents, and specific dimensions.
Label mode indicates whether the description or ID number is used and the database alias table
provides the displayed value. Set the alias table before opening documents using Web Analysis
Database user preferences.
Specify which description label to use in specific dimensions, using Dimension Browser and set
a default label mode after querying the data source using Data Display options on the data
object right-click menu.
Setting Alias Tables
➤ Specify default alias tables for database connections:
1 File > Preferences.
Preferences is displayed.
2 Click Web Analysis.
3 Click Active Preferences, and select either Use My Preferences, or Use Shared Preferences. If you select
Use Shared Preferences, click Browse and select a shared preferences file from the repository.
4 Click to make the Databases tab the current tab.
The Databases tab lists all available database connections for the Active user.
32
Setting Preferences and Personalizing Your Workspace
5 Optional: To edit database preferences for a database connection, select the database connection from
the list then click Edit.
6 Optional: To add a database connection to the list, click Add.
The Database Preferences dialog box is displayed. It has three tabs: Details, Point of Views and
Personal Variables. Point of Views and Personal Variable tabs are disabled, until a database
connection is identified.
7 Optional: To identify database connection files, perform one:
●
Click Browse and navigate to a database connection file in the repository. Select the file,
click Open then OK.
●
Enter the repository location and filename for existing database connection files in the text
area.
If you do not have access to database connection files, consult your Web Analysis
administrator.
8 Click Connect to retrieve the latest values from the database connection.
To log on to the data source, enter log on credentials, click OK.
When you have connected to the data source, the Database File Location text area is disabled,
and the Connect button is converted to a Disconnect button. Data sources supporting Point of
View, Personal Variables and Alias Tables, have these controls.
9 Select an alias table from the Alias Table drop down list.
10 Click OK.
Whenever the specified database connection is used, the selected label mode is also used.
Subsequent label mode selections made in the Cube Navigator or the Dimension Browser
overwrite these default settings.
Setting the Database Logon Method
Web Analysis enables you to select among several data source log on options, and to save that
selection as a Web Analysis Database user preference.
➤ Set default log on methods for specific database connections:
1 File > Preferences.
The User Preferences dialog box is displayed.
2 Click Web Analysis.
3 Click Active Preferences, select Use My Preferences or Use Shared Preferences. If you select Use Shared
Preferences, click Browse and select shared preferences file from the repository.
4 Click to make the Databases tab the current tab.
The Databases tab lists all available database connections for the Active user.
5 Optional: To edit database preferences for a database connection, select the database connection from
the list then click Edit.
Setting Preferences
33
6 Optional: To add database connections, click Add.
The Database Preferences dialog box is displayed. It has three tabs: Details, Point of Views and
Personal Variables. The Point of View and Personal Variable tabs are disabled until database
connections are identified.
7 Optional: To identify database connection files, perform one:
●
Click Browse and navigate to database connection files in the repository. Select the file and
click the Open dialog box OK button.
●
Enter the repository location and filename for existing database connection files in the text
area.
If you do not have access to any database connection files, consult your Web Analysis
administrator.
8 Click Connect to retrieve the latest values from the database connection.
Enter valid log on credentials, click OK.
When you have connected to the data source, the Database File Location text area is disabled,
and the Connect button is converted to a Disconnect button. Data sources supporting Point of
View, Personal Variables and Alias Tables, have these controls.
9 Select one option from the Default Logon group:
Table 2
Default Logon Options
Description
Use User's ID and Password
Connects to the database connection using the Web Analysis user ID
and password.
Prompt for User ID and Password
Connects to the database connection by prompting the user for a Web
Analysis user ID and password.
Enter User ID and Password
Connects to the database connection using a user ID and password for
the database connection, if it varies from the Analyzer Login parameters.
You must enter the valid values in the corresponding text areas.
10 Click OK.
About Point of View Definitions
Point-of-view database preferences enable you to automatically insert dimensions and
members that are of interest to them into the documents of others. Point of View definitions
must be defined and activated specifically for a database connection.
When a point of view (POV) is activated, the Use Point of View check box in Cube Navigator
and the Document Creation wizard are enabled. All subsequently created and loaded
documents use the specified POV until it is deactivated. You can also deactivate use of POV by
deselecting the Cube Navigator Use Point of View option as needed.
Point of View definitions consist of both axes and dimension member selections. The entire
definition is used when new documents are created with the activated POV.
34
Setting Preferences and Personalizing Your Workspace
When you apply a point of view definition to an existing document, only the dimension
member selections are applied. This prevents points of view from automatically arranging
non-functioning layouts (such as moving all dimensions to a single axis).
If all POV member selections are custom filters, you may not see obvious changes to your
document. Check to see which POV is applied on the View Pane Information Panel tab, Point
of View segment.
Using a point of view definition is a three part process. First, create a point of view definition.
Next, activate the point of view definition. Lastly, set an existing document to use the activated
point of view definition or create a new document that uses it.
Consider the following benefits:
Generic and Specific Documents
Document designers in large enterprises can create sets of generic documents, knowing that
individual users can superimpose diverse and user-specific member selections into documents.
Replacing Member Selection Statements
Apply the complex calculations and analysis tool definitions of others' documents to the
dimensions and members they track, using Point of View. This eliminates the need for the user
to investigate and recreate these analyses.
Default Dimension Layout and Member Selections for New Documents
When Point of View is activated, the document-creation process is simplified. Cube Navigator
is loaded with the dimension member selections designated by the current Point of View.
Session-based Point of View
Point of View is session-based. Point of View definitions are saved and recalled as part of
individual database connections. This enables them to be used on all the documents using the
corresponding database connection.
Reloading Documents
You must reload the document for the applied Point of View definition to be displayed.
Point of View and Personal Variables
Point of View definitions replace all existing member selections for corresponding dimensions
and database connections. Personal variables augment existing member selections for single
dimensions.
Leverage personal variables in the creation of Point of View definitions.
See the Hyperion System 9 BI+ Workspace User’s Guide.
Setting Preferences
35
About Personal Variables
Define and name complex member selections. Leverage personal variables when they are
presented with the corresponding dimension and database connection.
Generic and Specific Documents
Other users create personal variables using the same name, dimension, and database
connection that contain the dimensions members that are of interest to them.
This technique creates hybrid documents with generic and user-specific content.
Point of View and Personal Variables
Point of View definitions replace existing member selections for corresponding dimensions
and database connections. Personal variables augment member selections for single
dimensions.
Leverage personal variables in the creation of Point of View definitions.
See the Hyperion System 9 BI+ Workspace User’s Guide.
Setting Preferences for Financial Reporting
➤ Set Financial Reporting preferences:
1 File > Preferences
2 Click Financial Reporting
3 From Financial Reporting, select HTML Preview or PDF Preview to indicate default preference when
previewing documents.
4 From User Point of View:
●
Select On to enable the User Point of View to display prior to running a report or Off to
disable. Off is the default.
●
Select where on the UI you want to display the Point of View. In View Pane is the default.
You can also select to display above the report or book.
●
Select Setup Members to select members you want available when using the User POV. The
Setup User POV dialog is displayed. See the “Setting Up the User POV for Financial
Reporting Documents” on page 38 for more information.
5 Select a character for the Thousands Separator. The options are comma (,), period (.), underscore (_), and
Space.
6 Select a character to represent decimal points (for example, 1,000.06) for the Decimal Separator. The
options are comma (,), period (.), underscore (_), and Space.
7 From Export to Office Application, select either Office 2000 or Office 2002 or higher as the version of
Microsoft Office that you have installed.
36
Setting Preferences and Personalizing Your Workspace
Note: If Office 2000 is selected, Excel is the only Microsoft Office application to which you can export; If Office 2002 or
higher is selected, Excel, Word, and PowerPoint are the applications to which you can export.
8 From the Financial Reporting Designer tab, use the drop-down menus to make selections for Language,
Units, and Guide lines. You can also select whether you want to enable XBRL editing. See the Hyperion
System 9 BI+ Financial Reporting Studio User’s Guide.
9 Select OK.
Setting Preferences for Production Reporting
Use this for Production Reporting files.
➤ Set preferences Production Reporting:
1 File > Preferences > Production Reporting.
2 Do one of the following:
●
Select All Folders to scan folders listed in Explore.
●
Select the Selected Folders option to search folders listed in the Folder window.
3 Use the Add and Remove buttons to add and delete folders from the Folder window. Selecting the Add
button opens a Select dialog from which you can select the folders to add to your search. To remove a
folder from the Folder window, select the folder and click the Remove button.
4 Select OK.
Setting Preferences for Interactive Reporting
➤ Set Interactive Reporting preferences:
1 File > Preferences > Interactive Reporting.
2 Select the country from the locale drop-down menu that you are setting the defaults for. The locale
selected sets the locale or country associated with the default format that you want to use. The locale that
you select determines the available number, date, and currency formats.
3 Select a format for the date, timestamp, time, and month from each of the drop-down menus. Date sets
the default date format, timestamp sets the default time and date format, time sets the default time
format, and month sets the default month format for the month used in Add Date Groups.
4 Select a format for the real number, integer, and null option from each of the drop-down menus. Null
sets the default format for null values. Null values are empty values for which no data exists. Null values
are not equal to zero. Real sets the default format for real values and integer sets the default format for
integer values.
5 Select OK.
Setting Preferences
37
Setting Up the User POV for Financial Reporting Documents
Dimensions often contain members that you may never access. Setting up the user POV
enables you to create a choices list for any dimension in a specified data source. If a choices list
is set up for a dimension, only the members in the choices list are displayed when the
dimension is accessed from the user POV. Any members not included in the choices list are
hidden. See “Displaying Aliases and Descriptions in the User POV” on page 40.
➤ Set up user POVs for Financial Reporting in the Workspace:
1 File > Preferences
2 Click Financial Reporting.
3 From the User Point of View area of the General tab, select the Setup Members button. The Setup User
POV dialog is displayed.
Tip: Select Refresh to update the list of database connections.
Figure 2
Setting Up User POV from Hyperion Reports Web
4 Select a data source from Database Connection.
38
Setting Preferences and Personalizing Your Workspace
5 If prompted, enter log on credentials, select OK.
Note: Use the Planning Details data source only if your grid will contain Supporting Detail or Planning Unit Annotations.
In all other cases, use Analytic Services as the data source.
6 Click Go to Member Selection: Dimension button,
, to select the members you want to be available
when using the User Point of View. The Setup User POV page is displayed for member selection.
Figure 3
Setup User POV Member Dialog box
7 Expand the views to select available members, then click the Add to Selected button,
. The selected
members are displayed in the Selected column and are in the Choices list.
Note: The Choices list is displayed whenever you are using the specified data base connection in a member selection.
Managing Dimension Members
The procedures for managing members are found here:
●
Showing Dimension Properties
●
Arranging the Selected Members
Showing Dimension Properties
Determine the properties to display for dimension members by performing the following.
➤ Modify the properties displayed for dimensions:
Note: The changes made apply only to the dimension selected. Each dimension has different display properties. The
properties list varies from one dimension to another.
Setting Preferences
39
1 On Select Members of the Setup User POV dialog box, click Show Properties,
. The dimension
properties list is displayed.
2 Perform one of the following:
●
Select an unchecked property to add the column to the table.
●
Select a checked property to remove the column from the table.
3 Repeat step 2 until only the desired columns are displayed.
4 Click OK to retain the changes.
5 The dimension properties table displays the choices you made.
Arranging the Selected Members
The members in the Setup User POV member selection Dialog box, can be arranged in a
particular order by performing the following procedure.
➤ To change the order in which members are displayed in the selected member list:
1 From the Select column of the Setup User POV member dialog box, select a member to move.
2 Perform one of the following:
●
Click Move Selected Up,
●
Click Move Selected Down,
to move members up.
to move members down.
3 Repeat the first two steps until the member order arrangement is complete.
4 Click OK to save all changes.
Displaying Aliases and Descriptions in the User POV
Select how members display in the user POV Financial Reporting documents in Workspace.
Members are displayed by name of member, by alias/description, or both member name and
alias/description. Specify how to display the member label or whether dimension labels are
included.
➤ Display aliases/descriptions in the user POV:
1 File > Preferences > Financial Reporting.
2 From User Point of View, click General, select Setup Members. The Setup User POV dialog is displayed.
Tip: Select the Refresh button to update the list of database connections.
40
Setting Preferences and Personalizing Your Workspace
Figure 4
Setting Up User POV from Hyperion Reports Web
3 Select data sources from Database Connection.
4 If prompted enter your log on credentials, click OK
Note: Use the Planning Details data source only if your grid will contain Supporting Detail or Planning Unit Annotations.
In all other cases, use Analytic Services as the data source.
5 Select the member label you prefer from Display Member Label. The label selection is based on the data
source you are using.
6 From the Dimension Labels are: drop-down list, select whether to include or not include dimension labels.
7 Perform one of the following tasks:
●
Click OK to save your current changes and return to the repository screen.
●
Click Cancel to cancel your current changes.
●
Click Apply to save the changes and continue manipulating dimensions for other database
connections.
Setting Preferences
41
Personalizing Your Workspace
When using Workspace, perform customization tasks to change the user interface appearance.
Use the View menu or user preferences for customization.
●
The user interface settings made with the View menu override the default settings defined
in the General Preferences tab and remain in effect until you log-off.
●
Each time you log on to Workspace user interface settings from the General Preferences tab
are used.
See the Hyperion System 9 BI+ Workspace Getting Started Guide.
Figure 5
Workspace User Interface
1
2
3
Table 3
42
User Interface Elements
Element
Number
Element Name
Description
1
Masthead
Top area that includes the Hyperion logo and product name. Identifies the
product in use, and enables companies to customize and co-brand part of
the user interface.
2
View Pane
Extends down the left side of the interface. The top of the view pane has
buttons enabling you to jump between panels. Each panel has specific uses
and corresponding controls. Displays lists of documents and modules.
Hiding this pane provides a larger content frame.
3
Content Area
Largest area of the interface. Located between the process bar and the
status bar, and right of the view pane. It reflects the current state of the view
pane. View documents, tasks, or files relevant to the active module.
4
ViewPane/Content
Area Adjuster
Adjust the size of the view pane and content area.
Setting Preferences and Personalizing Your Workspace
The following table describes the tasks you can perform to customize the Workspace user
interface.
Table 4
Customization Task
Modules
Menu Bar Command
Show / hide the Masthead
All modules
View > Masthead
Show / hide the View pane
All modules
View > View Pane
Resize the View pane and
content area
All modules
See “Resizing the View Pane
and Content Area” on
page 43
Which file types are listed in
the content area
Explore
View > Display Items of
Type. See “Showing Specific
File Types” on page 44
Whether to show hidden
files in the content area
Explore
View > Show Hidden
Which item properties are
displayed in the content
area
Explore
View > Show Columns. See
“Displaying Columns” on
page 43
Sort items in the content
area
Explore
See “Sorting Items” on
page 44
Resizing the View Pane and Content Area
➤ Resize the view pane and content area:
1 Drag the mouse and point to the column border between the View pane and the content area.
Tip: You must point to the View Pane/Content Area Adjuster which is displayed as a faint double
line in the border.
2
When the pointer changes to a horizontal double-headed arrow, drag the border to the right or left.
Displaying Columns
From Explore, items and properties display in the columns within the content area. The setting
you make for the columns are retained after you log-off.
➤ Hide or display columns:
1 View > Show Columns.
2 Display or hide columns by setting or clearing its check-box.
3 To specify the column width, click a column check box, and enter the new column width in pixels.
Personalizing Your Workspace
43
Note: You cannot specify the column width for exceptions, priority, or versions.
4 Click Save to save or Cancel to discard your changes.
➤ Reorder columns:
1 Do one of the following steps:
a. View > Show Columns.
❍
Click a column, use
and
arrows.
b. From the content area, drag and drop the columns.
➤ Resize column widths:
1 Drag the mouse and point to a column border in the column header.
2
When the pointer changes into a horizontal double-headed arrow, drag the border to the right or left.
Sorting Items
From Explore, alphabetically sort by items in the columns within the content area. Sort using
any column heading. Date columns are sorted chronologically.
➤ To sort a column, click the column heading, then do one of the following:
●
To sort items in ascending order, click the icon next to the column heading to point up.
●
To sort items in descending order, click the icon next to the column heading to point
down.
Showing Specific File Types
From the explore module, you can specify which file types to display in the content area.
Note: Your role and permissions also determine if an item is displayed.
➤ Display specific file types:
1 Do one of these steps:
●
View > Display Items of Type.
●
Select Types.
2 A list of file type groups are displayed. You can select only one file type group from the list.
44
Setting Preferences and Personalizing Your Workspace
Table 5
File Type Groups
Option
Description
All Types
Displays all items.
All Jobs (and Output)
Displays all jobs and all job output.
All Jobs
Displays all jobs. This includes all items imported as a job.
All Job Output
Displays all job output produced from running a job.
External Links
Displays all items imported as a URL.
All Office Files
Displays Micro-Soft Word, Excel, Power Point, and Project
files. It also displays files with the file extensions.mht,
.mhtml, or .nws.
All Reports
Displays:
●
Production Reporting documents
●
Interactive Reporting documents
●
Web Analysis documents
●
Financial Reporting reports, snapshot reports, books,
snapshot books and batches
All Financial Reporting Objects
Displays all Financial Reporting reports, snapshot reports,
books, snapshot books and batches.
All Connections
Displays all database connection files:
All Images
●
Interactive Reporting database connection
●
Web Analysis Analytic Services (Essbase) database
connection
●
Web Analysis Financial Management database
connection
●
Web Analysis Relational database connection
●
Web Analysis SAP Info Cube database connection
●
Web Analysis SAP Multiprovider database connection
●
Web Analysis SAP InfoSet database connection
●
Web Analysis SAP ODS database connection
●
Web Analysis SAP Query Cube database connection
Displays all image files with the following extensions:
●
.gif
●
.jpeg
●
.png
●
.bmp
●
.tiff
●
.xbm
●
.xwb
Personalizing Your Workspace
45
Table 5
File Type Groups (Continued)
Option
Hyperion
Standard
Other
Description
Displays the following:
●
Production Reporting documents
●
Interactive Reporting documents
●
Web Analysis documents, presentations, databaseconnection files.
●
Financial Reporting reports, snapshot reports, books,
snapshot books and batches
●
All jobs
●
All Job output
●
All connections
●
HTML files
●
SPF security files
DIsplays files with the following extensions:
●
.xls
●
.doc
●
.mpp
●
.ppt
●
.pdf
●
.html
●
.txt
●
.xml
●
.zip
●
.rtf
Select one file type to display from the list of file types.
Standard Files
Standard files include text files, log files, HTML files, and Microsoft Office files. The
administrator sets up the types of files that the repository supports. See Chapter 2, “Exploring
and Managing Items.” Open the following standard file types from Workspace:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
46
.xls
.doc
.mpp
.ppt
.pdf
.html
.txt
.xml
.zip
.rtf
Setting Preferences and Personalizing Your Workspace
Chapter
Exploring and Managing Items
2
This chapter explains the basic tasks for exploring, managing and searching for items in the
repository.
In This Chapter
Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Basics of Explore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Managing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Linking to Other Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Creating E-mail Links to Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Using Ambiguous Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Exporting Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Changing Related Content Servers for Financial Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Changing Financial Reporting Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Managing Database Connections for Financial Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Exploring and Managing Items
47
Workspace
Workspace and user credentials:
●
Workspace installs Enterprise Metrics, Web Analysis, Interactive Reporting, Financial
Reporting, Production Reporting, and Performance Scorecard. Available features are
determined by the modules installed. Web Analysis must be installed to view Web Analysis
documents. For more information contact your administrator.
●
Access privileges or permissions determine which items you can view, modify, run and
delete in the repository. See “Setting or Modifying Permissions on Items” on page 80.
●
Roles determine toolbars, menu bars, shortcut menus, and modules displayed on the user
interface and tasks you can perform. If your role enables you to create documents, the
toolbar menu item that creates documents (File > New Document) is displayed. See the
corresponding appendix in the Hyperion System 9 Shared Services User Management Guide.
●
Procedures describe how to perform tasks using the menu bar; tasks can also be performed
using the toolbar and shortcut menus. See the Hyperion System 9 Workspace Getting Started
Guide.
Items
Items are objects stored in the repository, including files, folders, URLS and shortcuts. Items
are HTML files, Interactive Reporting database connections, jobs, batches, documents, reports,
and presentations.
All items have properties which store information about files such as attributes and access
control information. Properties include: type, a description of the file, and search keywords.
Items are categorized into the following:
●
“Documents” on page 48
●
“Collections” on page 49
●
“Supporting Files” on page 50
●
“Other Standard Files” on page 53
●
“Folders” on page 54
Documents
Documents are files created using Hyperion applications. Documents include Interactive
Reporting documents, Financial Reporting reports, snapshots, Web Analysis documents and
Production Reporting documents. Documents are listed and viewed using Explore and Viewer,
respectively. Items opened from Explore display as tabs at the bottom of the Content area. The
following table describes viewable documents. Documents can contain and generate the
following:
●
48
Dashboard—Collection of metrics and indicators provide interactive summaries of your
business.
Exploring and Managing Items
●
Report—Formatted data values and interactive elements. Reports are displayed in tabular,
grid, or chart formats.
Note: Enterprise Metrics Studio and Performance Scorecard content is not stored in the repository; however you can
view it using Workspace.
Table 6
Type
Description
Created in
File Extension
Production
Reporting
document
Reports querying a relational
data source
Production Reporting Studio
.spf
Interactive
Reporting
document
Formatted, dynamic, document
that generates reports or
dashboard typically querying a
relational data source.
Interactive Reporting Studio,
Dashboard Development
Services, and Workspace
.bqy
Web Analysis
document
Web Analysis document
typically querying an OLAP data
source.
Web Analysis Studio and
Workspace
.ard
Financial
Reporting report
Highly formatted reports
containing dynamic data from
OLAP data sources.
Financial Reporting Studio
.des
Snapshot report
Highly formatted reports
containing static data from
OLAP queries.
Financial Reporting Studio
.rpt
Collections
Collections contain references to groups of documents, such as books, presentations, or job
output files. Collections are listed and viewed using Explore and Viewer respectively. Items
opened from Explore display as tabs at the bottom of the Content area.
Items
49
Table 7
Collections in the Repository
Type
Description
Created in
File Extension
Job Output
Collection of files resulting
from running a job.
Workspace
Files are a variety of
extensions, such
as.pdf,.html, or.txt.
●
Interactive Reporting job
output
●
Production Reporting
job output
●
Generic job output
Books
Collection of Financial
Reporting Studio
documents. Dynamically
specify dimension sections
and dimension changes for
Books.
Workspace
.kbk
Snapshot Books
Generated books containing
static data.
Workspace
.kbt
Batches
Collection of executable
Financial Reporting Studio
documents and books with
special properties and are
executed to generate
reports.
Workspace
.bch
Presentation
Collections of Web Analysis
documents.
Web Analysis Studio
.apt
Supporting Files
The following tables lists Workspace supporting files used when authoring or managing
documents or collections.
50
Exploring and Managing Items
Table 8
Type
Description
Studio created in
Job
Items with special
properties that execute
to generate output. Jobs
contain Interactive
Reporting documents,
Production Reporting
documents or generic
documents.
●
Interactive Reporting created with Workspace
by importing Interactive
Reporting documents.
●
Production Reporting created with Workspace
by importing Production
Reporting program files
(*.sqr).
●
Generic - created with
Workspace by importing
Oracle reports or batch
files. Generic reports
use a command line
interface.
File Extension
●
Interactive Reporting jobs do
not have file extensions.
●
Production Reporting jobs
have .sqr file extensions.
●
Generic jobs can have a
variety of file extensions, such
as .sh, .bat.
Interactive
Reporting
database
connection
Portable files defining
terms, conditions, and
methods for connecting
to data sources.
Interactive Reporting Studio
.oce
Production
Reporting Studio
files used by a
Production
Reporting
document or
Production
Reporting job.
Files that Production
Reporting program
references when
executed:
Production Reporting Studio
File extensions include .cvs .img,
or .inc.
Containers that
contains other folders
and files.
not applicable
none
Pointer to a repository
item. Creates shortcuts
when you want an item
to display in folder A,
though it is stored in
folder B.
not applicable
none
Link to Web sites or
HTML pages.
not applicable
none
Folder
Shortcut
URL
●
Include files
(#include
commands)
●
Input data files
(Open for-reading
commands)
●
Image files (printimage and declareimage commands)
Items
51
Table 8
52
(Continued)
Type
Description
Studio created in
File Extension
Grid
Financial Reporting
Studio object
containing data from
external sources. Grids
contain rows, columns,
and optionally, a page
axis.
Financial Reporting Studio
.rog
Chart
Financial Reporting
Studio object
containing charts.
Financial Reporting Studio
.roc
Image
Financial Reporting
Studio image object.
Financial Reporting Studio
.roi
Text
Financial Reporting
Studio text object.
Financial Reporting Studio
.rot
Exploring and Managing Items
Table 8
(Continued)
Type
Description
Studio created in
File Extension
Row and Column
Template
Templates used to
author Financial
Reporting reports.
Financial Reporting Studio
.ros
Portable files that
defines the terms,
conditions and
methods for connecting
to data sources for Web
Analysis documents.
Web Analysis Studio
.adc
●
Web Analysis
Essbase
database
connection
●
Web Analysis
Financial
Management
database
connection
●
Web Analysis
Relational
database
connection
●
Web Analysis
SAP Info
Cube
database
connection
●
Web Analysis
SAP
Multiprovider
database
connection
●
Web Analysis
SAP InfoSet
database
connection
●
Web Analysis
SAP ODS
database
connection
●
Web Analysis
SAP Query
Cube
database
connection
Other Standard Files
Other standard files include text files, log files and Microsoft Office files. The administrator sets
the types of files that the repository supports. See “Registering a File Type” on page 62.
Items
53
Folders
Folders are in the repository and are arranged in a hierarchical structure. Folders used to
organize items contain folders and items. Folder store jobs, documents, and URLs.
●
The root folder is specified by the slash character (/). It contains all files and folders. The root
folder in the repository is created automatically.
●
The desktop folder stores items accessible from Viewer. Files in the desktop folder are
displayed as icons in Viewer. See “Setting Explore Preferences” on page 28.
Basics of Explore
Use Explore to list, find or view content. Items opened Explore display as tabs at the bottom of
the Content area. The view pane displays folders. When Explore is active, the following buttons
display in the view pane:
●
Navigate
- Switch between modules.
●
Document
- View document control panels in the view pane that enables you to view
different sections of the document.
●
Actions
- Perform tasks, view tips that are Help topics, or view file or folder details, such
as name, type author and modified date.
●
Folders
- View a list of folders in the view pane.
When item have high priority, multiple versions, or is manually flagged as an exception, an
icon is displayed. In order to see these icons the priority, version or exception column must be
displayed.
➤ Folder Contents:
●
Sub-folders in the left pane; click the plus button next to the folder name.
●
Folders in the left pane and items in the content area; double-click the folder.
●
Contents in the content area; click an item.
Viewing Priorities, Exceptions, and Versions
When an item is listed in Explore, an icon displays indicating priorities, exceptions, or multiple
versions. You can view and set the following conditions:
●
54
Priority - High or low priority.
Exploring and Managing Items
Table 9
Priorities
File Type
●
Description
All items that have versions
Use version properties to set an item’s priority to Normal or
High. Only available if your administrator activated the
priority feature.
Note: Priorities for scheduled jobs differ from an item’s priority. Set priorities on schedules you associate with jobs. Priority
is a property of schedule. If multiple job are scheduled to run simultaneously, the high priority job is run first. The priority
icon is not displayed next to the job. See “Scheduling Jobs” on page 348.
●
Exceptions - Indicator of conditions or results such as a threshold being reached. Notify
subscribing users when an exception has been generated and monitor exceptions on the
Exceptions dashboard on your Personal Pages
Table 10
Exceptions
File Type
Exceptions
●
Items with versions
Manually flag an exception on an item. See “Properties of
Versions” on page 89.
●
Production Reporting jobs
●
Interactive Reporting jobs
Programmatically enable jobs to generate exceptions. The
exception icon is not displayed next to the job. See “Using
Exceptions” on page 109.
●
Generic jobs
●
Versions - Indicates an item has multiple versions. See “Working with Versions” on
page 87.
➤ To display the priority, versions or exceptions column:
1 View > Show Columns.
2 Click Priority, Version or Exception.
Managing Files
This section describes the following tasks associated with managing files and folders in the
repository.
“Opening or Selecting Files or Folders” on page 56
“Saving Files” on page 57
“Creating Folders” on page 57
“Creating Documents or Collections” on page 57
Managing Files
55
“Moving Files or Folders” on page 58
“Renaming Files or Folders” on page 58
“Deleting Files or Folders” on page 58
“Searching for Files or Folders” on page 59
Opening or Selecting Files or Folders
After opening files or folders, its contents display in the content area. Items have multiple
versions. Imported files are collections containing a single version. You can later save or import
additional versions. Versions can be revisions of the same file, or completely different files.
➤ Open files using the shortcut menu:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, right-click a file, from the shortcut menu select Open As, format. See one of the
following:
●
For Financial Reporting items, see “Viewing Reports” on page 170.
●
For Interactive Reporting items, see ““Accessing Documents” on page 205.
●
For Web Analysis items, see “Opening Presentations” on page 278 and “Creating
Documents from Documents” on page 282.
●
For Production Reporting items, see “Viewing a Production Reporting Document” on
page 270.
●
For generic files, you can select an option to open the file in a browser window.
➤ Open files using default formats:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, double-click the file or folder.
2 To view or interact or with the opened item, see “About Using Different File Types” on page 93.
➤ Open or select a file or folder:
1 File > Open > Document
2 Navigate to the file or folder, perform the following:
●
From Name, double-click the file or folder you want to open.
●
From Look in, select a folder.
●
To filter the list of items, from the Type list box, click the arrow, select the file type.
Tip: Click Up to move up the folder hierarchy specified in the Look in: text box.
3 Click Open.
4 Optional: To open a file with another application:
●
56
Click Options.
Exploring and Managing Items
●
From Open As: select an application to open the file.
Note: Every file type on your local system maintains information about which application will launch that type of file, and
where the application resides. See “Registering a File Type” on page 62.
5 Optional: To open a version of the item:
●
From Versions list, select the version, click Open.
6 To view and interact with the opened item, see “About Using Different File Types” on page 93.
Saving Files
Save files to replace them or save files using a new name, which creates a copy of the file. You
can save the following file in Workspace:
●
Interactive Reporting document
●
Web Analysis document
●
Snapshot Book
●
Book
●
Batch
➤ To save
1 Open the file and view it in Viewer. See “Opening or Selecting Files or Folders” on page 56.
2 File > Save.
3 To save the file with a new name; File > Save As, specify a name and location.
Creating Folders
Create folders to organize files and documents.
➤ To create folders:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, then the folder in which you want to create a folder.
2 Click the New Folder button.
3 Type a name for the folder, press ENTER.
Creating Documents or Collections
You can create the following documents or collections:
●
Interactive Reporting, see “Using the Toolbars” on page 200
●
Web Analysis, see “Creating Web Analysis Documents” on page 280
Managing Files
57
●
Book or Snapshot book, see “Creating Books” on page 183
●
Batch, see “Designing Batches” on page 194
●
Job, see “Importing Files as Jobs” on page 77
Moving Files or Folders
You can move a file or folder to another location.
Note: You cannot make a copy of a file or folder in the repository. An alternative solution for copying is to export the file
and import it with a new name.
➤ To move files or folders:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, then the file or folder you want to or move.
2 Edit > Cut.
3 Click the folder where you want to copy or move the item.
4 Edit > Paste.
Tip: To select consecutive files or folders to copy or move, select the first item, press and hold down
SHIFT, and select the last item. To select files or folders that are not consecutive, hold down
CTRL, and select each item.
Renaming Files or Folders
Rename files or folders by changing its properties.
➤ Rename files or folders:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, click a file or folder.
2 Edit > Rename.
3 Click OK.
Deleting Files or Folders
➤ Delete files or folders:
1 From Viewer, click Explore then the file or folder you want to delete.
2 Edit > Delete.
Caution! Deleted files cannot be restored.
58
Exploring and Managing Items
Tip: Delete files or folders by right-clicking then Delete.
Searching for Files or Folders
Search for files or folders with keywords. Keywords are defined for items in order for the search
to work. See “Advanced Properties” on page 84.
Narrow your search by specifying the folder or files location, date, file type, or priority. The
following rules apply:
●
Not case-sensitive.
●
The search
●
The search starts in the folder specified in the Look in: text box and searches all sub-folders
recursively.
icon displays on the toolbar when you are in Explore only.
➤ Search for files or folders:
1 From Viewer, click Explore then Search
.
2 In Keywords, type a keyword for the file. Wild cards are not supported in the Keywords text box.
As you type the keyword, it is also displayed in the content area tab for Search.
Tip: Multiple keywords are separated by a space. A keyword containing a space must be double
quoted.
3 For additional search criteria, click Options, specify the following options:
●
Use one method to locate the drive, folder or network you want to search:
❍
Look in text box.
❍
Select button.
●
Select Types to look for files of a type.
●
Select Date, to look for files from a time period.
●
Specify one of the following search methods:
●
❍
Match on any word (or), to match one word specified in the Keywords text box.
❍
Match on all words (and), to match words specified in the Keywords text box.
Select Find Only High Priority to find items marked as high priority.
4 Click Search Now.
Linking to Other Applications
You can open Web Analysis Studio and Enterprise Metrics Personalization Workspace from
Workspace.
Linking to Other Applications
59
➤ Link to applications:
1 Tools > Links, select one of the following:
Table 11
Link to
Description
Web Analysis Studio
Web Analysis Studio enables you to access and create
documents and presentations.
Enterprise Metrics Personalization Workspace
Enterprise Metrics Personalization Workspace enables
you to perform the same tasks as Workspace with
extended functionality. Personalization Workspace
enables you to personalize pages in the Monitor and
Investigate Sections. Additional tasks include:
●
Adding pages in the Monitor Section
●
Editing pages in the Monitor Section by adding
charts, modifying charts, or adding page links or
URLs, or adding mini reports
●
Editing Chart pages in the Investigate Section by
adding, modifying, or moving chart columns
●
Changing chart types and chart scales in the
Investigate Section
Creating E-mail Links to Items
E-mail links for items in the repository. E-mailing link rules:
●
Recipients must be defined as a user with a Workspace user ID and password to open the
linked item in a Web browser.
●
Recipients need proper access privileges to view the item.
●
Items in the link can be viewed in Web browsers. A link to the item is sent not the item.
When you click on the link, Workspace is opened and the item is displayed.
●
You cannot send an e-mail link to a folder.
●
You must select and send e-mail links one item at a time.
●
You can add text to the e-mail message.
➤ Create e-mail links:
1 From the repository, select the item to e-mail.
Tip: If the E-mail link option does not display for an item, that item cannot be sent as an e-mail
link.
2 File > E-mail Links. The E-mail Editor dialog box, containing the URL links, is displayed.
60
Exploring and Managing Items
Note: If your default e-mail address is not specified, you are prompted to select File > Preferences and provide your email address. Your e-mail address is used as the sender for the e-mail link.
3 Perform one of the following tasks:
●
Enter the recipient’s e-mail address.
●
Use the Recipient List, see Using the E-mail Recipient List.
4 Optional: Update the Subject text associated with the e-mail message.
5 Click OK.
6 Click Send.
Note: You cannot recall a message after it is sent.
Using the E-mail Recipient List
Use the e-mail recipient list to organize a list of recipients, to which you send e-mail links. By
entering addresses in this list you do not need to retype e-mail address again. Two e-mail
recipient lists are maintained; one for e-mailing links, one for e-mailing batch notifications, see
“Setting Up E-mail Notifications” on page 364.
➤ Use the e-mail recipient list:
1 Click the Select button to display the Select Recipients dialog box and select recipients.
2 Optional: To add a recipient, in New Recipient, type the e-mail address and click Add.
3 Optional: To delete a recipient, in Available Recipients, select a recipient, click Remove Addresses from
Available Recipients.
Using Ambiguous Items
It is possible for different items to have the same name and reside in the same folder. These are
ambiguous items. When ambiguous item is accessed, a list of items with the same name are
displayed. Select the item you want to use. This may happen when you perform the following:
●
Create e-mail links to an ambiguous item.
●
Prompted to select related content links that link to ambiguous item.
➤ Select ambiguous items:
1 From the list, select the item you want.
2 To determine the differences between the items, do the following:
●
To view the item properties, right-click the item, select File > Properties.
●
To open and view the item, see “Opening or Selecting Files or Folders” on page 56.
Using Ambiguous Items
61
Registering a File Type
The server maintains information about Repository items and which application to launch to
open that type of file, and where the application resides.
Administrators create file types (technically, new MIME Types), or add file extensions to file
types. You may be informed of the new type by your administrator, or you may discover it
while browsing or trying to open a file. If there is a file type that your browser cannot open, you
are prompted for a program to open it. To avoid that prompt, you need to register the type in
your browser or operating system.
The procedure to register new file extensions or MIME types varies with each operating
system, its version, your browser, and the browser’s version. Consult the documentation or online help of the browser or operating system, or ask your system administrator.
Exporting Items
From Explore, only Financial Reporting items have an export option. To use the export option
with an Interactive Reporting document or Web Analysis document you must be viewing it
using Viewer. Export items for the following usages:
●
Locations outside of Workspace. You can import items into a Studio or back into Workspace
later. Financial Reporting items can export from testing environments to production
environments.
●
For use in Smart View, see “Exporting to Smart View for Office” on page 63.
➤ Export items:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, select the item.
2 File > Export.
3 Type the path and item name in the Name text box.
4 To navigate to items, preform the following:
●
From the Name list, double-click the file or folder you want to open.
●
From the Look in: list box, select a folder.
●
To filter the list of items, from the Type list box, click the arrow, select the file type.
Tip: Click the Up button to move up the folder hierarchy.
5 Select the items, click OK.
6 Click Save.
7 Navigate to the location where you want to save the exported file.
8 Click Save.
62
Exploring and Managing Items
Exporting to Smart View for Office
This section describes Smart View functionality, concepts and procedures. Smart View
provides a common Microsoft Office interface for the following Workspace components:
●
Financial Reporting, see “Exporting Financial Reports and Snapshots to Microsoft Office”
on page 66
●
Production Reporting, “Exporting Production Reporting Content to Microsoft Excel” on
page 67
●
Web Analysis, “Exporting Web Analysis Documents to Microsoft Office” on page 67
●
Interactive Reporting, Interactive Reporting does not enable Smart View export options.
It also provides a common Microsoft Office interface for Hyperion Analytic Services, Hyperion
Financial Management and Hyperion Planning.
The centralized interface enables simultaneous use of multiple Hyperion products, and
improves integration with Microsoft Office (2000, 2002, and 2003). The Smart View
implementation provides the following Workspace functionality:
●
Exports the current page of the current data object to Excel, Word, or PowerPoint
●
Exposes Financial Management and Analytic Services functions in Excel, Word, and
PowerPoint content
●
Notifies you when you can upgrade to new releases of Smart View.
About Hyperion System 9 BI+ Smart View Export Options
Hyperion System 9 BI+ Smart View enables the following export options:
●
You can export the current page of the current data object to Word, PowerPoint or Excel as
an image. After insertion, you can re-query the corresponding Web application to refresh
the image.
You can export documents to Microsoft Excel as either query-ready HTML, or formatted
HTML:
●
When you export content as query-ready HTML, the current page of the current data object
is converted to HTML and Hyperion-specific formatting is removed. This enables Smart
View to re-query the data source independent of the Web application.
●
When you export content as Formatted HTML, the current page of the current data object
is converted to HTML with the Hyperion formatting definitions and calculated members.
This specific formatting content prevents Smart View from directly querying the data
source, but enables Hyperion content to be leveraged by Office applications.
Not all export options are supported by all data sources and Web applications. The following
table indicates export options to Smart View:
Exporting to Smart View for Office
63
Table 12
Smart View Export Options
Web Applications
Export Image to
Microsoft Word,
and PowerPoint
Export
Formatted HTML
to Excel
Export Query-ready HTML
to Excel
Analytic Services
Yes
Yes
Yes
Financial Management
Yes
Yes
Yes
Planning
Yes
Yes
Yes *
Financial Reporting
Yes
Yes
Yes
Interactive Reporting
N/A
N/A
N/A
Production Reporting
N/A
Yes
N/A
Web Analysis
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note: * To export Hyperion Planning data sources in query ready format, you must use the Hyperion Analytic Services
provider.
Note: Exporting charts from Production Reporting is not supported in this release.
Because Excel worksheets prevent users from entering data into read-only cells, some Excel
functions such as AutoSum, F9, and some formatting functions are disabled in Smart View.
Also note that you must have Microsoft Excel, Word and PowerPoint installed on the computer
running the Hyperion System 9 BI+ client.
About Interactive Reporting Import Options
Interactive Reporting does not enable Smart View export options. You can, however, import
Interactive Reporting content using the Smart View client.
Imported Interactive Reporting content is section-specific. Both the source of the import and
the destination of the data must be taken into consideration. The following table describes
Smart View import options for Interactive Reporting sections:
Table 13
64
Interactive Reporting Smart View Import Options
Section
Import Formatted HTML to Excel
Import Image to Microsoft Word, and PowerPoint
Table/Results
Formatted HTML
N/A
Chart
Formatted HTML
Image
Pivot
Formatted HTML
Image
Report
Formatted HTML
N/A
Exploring and Managing Items
Interactive Reporting Smart View Import Options (Continued)
Table 13
Section
Import Formatted HTML to Excel
Import Image to Microsoft Word, and PowerPoint
Dashboard
N/A
Image
Query
N/A
N/A
Data Model
N/A
N/A
About Smart Tags
Smart tags are predefined properties that associate available actions with a keyword. For
example, if the end user types smartview in an Excel cell, the smart tag icon is displayed next
to Smart View.
Smart View provides the following smart tag features:
●
Display functions:
❍
HsGetValue
❍
HsGetText (not supported in Analytic Services)
❍
HsCurrency (not supported in Analytic Services)
❍
HsDescription (not supported in Analytic Services)
●
Import content into Microsoft Office 2003
●
Refresh previously inserted content
For more information on how to use Hyperion System 9 Smart View for Office, see the
Hyperion System 9 Smart View for Office User’s Guide.
Installing Smart View From the Workspace
Smart View is installed with Hyperion System 9 BI+, but to use Smart View you must also
separately install a client component. This Office client component is displayed as a Hyperion
menu and toolbar within the Microsoft Office suite.
Before installing Smart View, exit the Interactive Web Client and Microsoft Office applications.
➤ To install the Smart View client from the Workspace:
1 Select Tools > Install> Smart View.
The Hyperion Smart View installation wizard is launched.
2 Accept the default installation options.
By default, the installation wizard installs Smart View program files to c:\program
files\HyperionSmartView. You can specify an alternative installation directory.
3 Restart your Windows operating system.
Exporting to Smart View for Office
65
Note: If Word fails to display the Hyperion menu, create a data source connection in Excel then restart Word.
Specifying Your Version of Microsoft Office
If you export Financial Reports and snapshots to Smart View, you must first specify the version
of Microsoft Office in user preferences.
➤ To specify your version of Microsoft Excel, Word, or PowerPoint:
1 Launch the Workspace.
2 Select File > Preferences > General then select the locally installed version of Microsoft Excel, Word, or
PowerPoint from the Export to Office Application list.
Your selection has the following implications:
●
When exporting to Office 2000 applications, you can only export to Excel, and the FullyFormatted Grid and Text option exports the entire report without images or charts.
●
When exporting to Office 2002 (and later) applications, the Fully-Formatted Grid and Text
option exports the entire report and converts charts to static images.
Exporting Financial Reports and Snapshots to Microsoft
Office
Note: To export financial reports and snapshots to Microsoft Word or PowerPoint as an image, you must install and
configure either GNU or AFPL Ghostscript on the Financial Reporting Print server.
➤ To export the current page of the current financial report or snapshot to Microsoft Excel, Word
or PowerPoint:
1 Select File > Export.
2 Select one of the following submenu commands:
●
To export the current page of the current financial report as query-ready HTML, select
Excel > Query-Ready Grid and Text.
You cannot use this option to export snapshots.
●
To export the current financial report as formatted HTML, select Excel > Fully-Formatted
Grid and Text.
●
To export the current page of the current financial report to Microsoft Word as a static
image, select Word.
●
To export the current page of the current financial report to Microsoft PowerPoint as a
static image, select PowerPoint.
Snapshots are always exported as static images.
The File Download dialog box displays profile information about exported content.
66
Exploring and Managing Items
3 Select one of the following options:
●
Select Open to display exported content in the specified application.
●
Select Save.
Exporting Web Analysis Documents to Microsoft Office
➤ To export the current page of the current data object of the current web analysis document, to
Microsoft Excel, Word, or PowerPoint:
1 Right-click a data object and select Export.
2 Select one of the following submenu commands:
●
To export the current page of the current data object as query-ready HTML, select Excel >
Query-Ready Grid and Text.
●
To export the current page of the current data object as formatted HTML, select Excel >
Fully-Formatted Grid and Text.
●
To export the current page of the current data object to Microsoft Word as a static image,
select Word.
●
To export the current page of the current data object to Microsoft PowerPoint as a static
image, select PowerPoint.
Although the image is static, you can re-query the Web application as needed.
Data is exported to the Microsoft Office application and displayed in a worksheet.
Exporting Production Reporting Content to Microsoft Excel
➤ To export Production Reporting content to Microsoft Excel as Fully-Formatted HTML:
1 Click Explore in the Viewer pane and choose File > Import > File as a job.
2 Click Browse and select an SQR job.
3 Proceed through the pages in the wizard. When you get to the last page, select Excel (xls) as the output
option.
4 Look in the Table of Contents for the Excel output.
Changing Related Content Servers for Financial Reporting
You can change the server for selected reports, grids, or both in the Workspace repository by
specifying a new URL or a substitution variable. For example, you may want to change the
related content servers when moving reports and grids from a development server to a
production server.
Changing Related Content Servers for Financial Reporting
67
➤ To change the related content server in Workspace repository:
1 Select the Explore module, then select Tools > Change Related Content Links.
2 In Select, click OK. Change Related Content Server is displayed.
3 In Change from the Related Content server named, change the URL to that associated with the selected
documents, if it is not already displayed.
4 In To Related Content server name, select an option:
●
To specify a server through a URL, select URL, then enter the path and server name in the
text box. The URL must start with either http:// or https://.
●
To specify a server using a substitution variable, select Substitution variable, then select a
variable from the drop-down list.
Note: For information on setting up substitution variables in the fr_subvars.properties file, see the Hyperion
System 9 BI + Financial Reporting Studio User’s Guide.
5 Click OK. The number of occurrences found and replaced is displayed
An information dialog shows the number of occurrences that were found and replaced.
6 Click OK.
Changing Financial Reporting Database Connections
You can change the database connection for reports and books in Workspace repository. You
may want to change the database connection when moving from a development environment
server to a production environment server.
When the dimensions in the changed database connections do not match the previous
dimensions, an error message similar to the following is displayed:
1012:Report contains an invalid grid. The following dimensions could not
be found: Measures
The following actions occur when you open and save a report that has mismatched
dimensions:
●
Dimensions that existed in the old database connection but not in the new database
connection are removed. The dimensions and its members that existed in the rows and or
columns are removed from the grid. If, as a result of the removal, no dimension exists in the
row or column, you need to add a valid dimension to the cleared row or column in order
for the report to run.
●
Dimensions that exist in the new database connection but not in the old one, are added to
the POV.
If the report contains at least one dimension in both the row and column, it can be run and
opened when the error message is received. The report can also be exported from the
repository.
68
Exploring and Managing Items
If you do not like the modifications that are automatically made for mismatched dimension,
you can close the report and change to the original database connection.
When you change the database connection for reports or books, you can also select to validate
that the databases have the same dimension. When this option is selected for a report, and
dimensions do not match, you are prompted that the action failed. Likewise, if dimensions do
not match for a specific report in a book, you are prompted that the action for the entire book
failed. If you do not choose to validate, the database connection for the reports and books are
changed and you are not prompted for mismatched dimensions. However, errors may occur
when you open or run the reports or books.
➤ To change the data source in the repository:
1 From Workspace, select Viewer > Explore, then select Tools > Change Database Connection.
2 In Select, select reports, grids, books, or row and column templates and click OK. Change Database
Connection is displayed.
3 In Find all references to the Database Connection, select the database connection to change.
4 In Replace With, select a database connection.
Note: To create a new database connection, click New Database Connection. See “Adding Database Connections” on
page 71.
5 Make changes to all items that you selected.
6 Click OK.
Changing Analytic Services and Planning Details
When changing a report from Analytic Services database connection to a Planning Details
database connection or vice versa, there are several restrictions. The data source reference is the
only change and there is no conversion.
Changing from Analytic Services to Planning Details
The following is a list of considerations when changing the database connection from Analytic
Services to Planning Details for a report:
●
The dimensions and functions defined in reports and books must exist in the target data
source. The following limitations apply:
❍
Attribute dimensions are not supported as dimensions in Planning Details.
❍
Hsp_Rates is not available as a dimension.
❍
The cell text function cannot be used, because Linked Reporting Objects (LROs) are
not supported.
❍
Only the member selection using a level 0 is supported.
Changing Financial Reporting Database Connections
69
●
Validate that dimensions exist prior to opening the report. If a dimension defined on a grid
is not available in the Planning Details data source, no change is made. If an invalid function
is used, an error is returned. The report designer has to remove the invalid function or
dimension.
Changing from Planning Details to Analytic Services
There are several features that may be defined in a Planning Details report that are irrelevant
for Analytic Services report, including PlanningAnnotations, Supporting Detail, and OrderBy.
If Supporting Detail is defined in the report, the details are ignored. If PlanningAnnotations or
OrderBy are used, they return an error. The report designer must remove the
PlanningAnnotation function and OrderBy for the report to run.
Managing Database Connections for Financial Reporting
The Database Connection Manager provides a means to manage reports, books, saved reports
objects (row/column templates, grids), batches, and scheduled batches. Reports and report
objects can be moved from a development environment to a production environment, or
between production servers. The Database Connection Manager provides the following
information about each database connection:
●
Name—The database connection name
●
Type—The data source type (Analytic Services, Financial Management, Planning, SAP BW)
●
Value—The connection path
❍
For Analytic Services, the connection path is Server:AppName:DBName.
For example: localhost:Sample:Basic
❍
For Planning, the connection path is AppName:DBName.
For example: Sample:Basic
❍
For Financial Management, the connection path is Server:AppName.
For example: localhost:Sample
A designer can use Workspace to create, maintain, and assign names to database connections.
Users can select an existing database connection when prompted throughout the Financial
Reporting Studio; for example, while adding a grid to a report.
A database connections consists of a unique database name, ID, password, and several values
that are different for each data source as shown in Table 14.
70
Exploring and Managing Items
Table 14
Valid Database Values by Database
Database
Values
Analytic Services
Server
Application
Database
Data Source Type
Financial Management
Server
Application
Data Source Type
Planning
Application
Plan Type
Data Source Type
SAP BW
Server
System Number
Client
Application
Database
For more information on managing database connections, see the following topics:
●
“Adding Database Connections” on page 71
●
“Editing Database Connections” on page 72
●
“Deleting Database Connections” on page 72
Adding Database Connections
When you create a database connection, it is appended to the list in the Database Manager
dialog box.
➤ To add a database connection
1 In Workspace, select Viewer > Explore. Then select Tools > Database Connection Manager.
2 Click New.
3 In Database Connection Properties, enter a Database Connection Name.
4 Select a data source Type.
5 The remaining values will differ, based on the data source selected. See Table 14 to view values that
display for each data source.
6 If you do not know the application and database names, select Application,
, and Database,
.
and make your selections.
Managing Database Connections for Financial Reporting
71
7 Click OK.
8 The database connection profile is appended to the list in Database Connection Manager Dialog.
Editing Database Connections
You can edit database connections, when required.
➤ To edit a database connection
1 In Workspace, select Viewer > Explore. Then select Tools > Database Connection Manager.
2 In Database Connection Manager, select the database connection to edit, then click Edit.
3 Make your changes, then click OK.
Deleting Database Connections
You can delete database connections, when required.
➤ To delete a database connection
1 In Workspace, select Viewer > Explore. Then select Tools > Database Connection Manager.
2 In Database Connection Manager, select the database connection to remove, then click Delete.
3 An information prompt is displayed. Select Yes to delete.
4 The database connection is removed from Database Connection Manager.
72
Exploring and Managing Items
Chapter
Importing Items
3
To import items, you must have the proper role. With the proper role, you can import items
to the Workspace repository. For more information on Hyperion System 9 BI+ roles, see
“Workspace” on page 48.
In This Chapter
Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Importing Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
URLs from Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Setting Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Creating Shortcuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Working with Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Working with Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Importing Items
73
Importing
Your role determines what you can import.
When importing to the repository, identify the item by specifying the path, the item name, and
description; this information comprises the properties. The path to a file might be
c:\test.doc; its name might be test.doc. File size and MIME type are updated
automatically.
Importing items to the repository makes them available to others. Give users different
permissions on the items you import. You might give users the ability to modify one item,
while limiting others to viewing (or reading) it. Refer to “Setting Permissions” on page 79 for
detailed information on permissions.
Note: If you try to import an item whose MIME type is not currently defined, you get an error message indicating that the
extension is unknown. Contact your administrator to create the MIME type.
Table 15 shows the Hyperion System 9 BI+ Workspace Studios and the items you can import.
Table 15
Studio
Description
Financial Reporting
●
Reports for interactive analysis (*.des)
●
Snapshot reports (*.rpt)
●
Books (*.kbk)
●
Snapshot Books (*.kbt)
●
Supporting files, see “Supporting Files” on page 50
●
Documents to view (*.spf)
●
Program files to run as jobs (*.sqr)
●
Supporting files, see “Supporting Files” on page 50.
●
Documents to view and modify (*.bqy)
●
Documents to run as jobs (*.bqy)
●
Supporting files, see “Supporting Files” on page 50
●
Documents for interactive analysis (*.arg)
●
Presentations (*.apt)
●
Supporting files are automatically imported with the
document or presentation, see “Supporting Files” on
page 50
Production Reporting
Interactive Reporting
Web Analysis
Interactive Reporting Documents and Jobs
Import Interactive Reporting documents as files or jobs, depending on how you intend it to be
used. Import an Interactive Reporting document as a file to make it available for interactive
analysis. Import an Interactive Reporting document as a job for scheduled or on-demand
execution and distribution of output. The import essentially creates the job.
74
Importing Items
Note: If the Interactive Reporting document you are importing uses row-level security, the row-level security feature is
applied when job queries are processed. When importing Interactive Reporting documents contain data, make
certain the data in the Interactive Reporting document is appropriate for the audience. Import Interactive
Reporting documents containing generalized summary data, such as “total sales for the company.” When users
process queries to get more detailed information, their row level security restrictions would be applied at the more
detailed levels, such as sales data for only their region or department.
Table 16 The following table describes usage of an Interactive Reporting document imported
as a file or as a job.
Table 16
A user can
File
Interactive with Workspace
X
Job
Schedule automatic execution
X
Distribute output via E-mail
X
Produce multiple-cycle output
X
Distribute output to network directories
X
Import current results for analysis with Interactive Reporting Web Client
X
FTP output
X
Print output
X
HTML Files
HTML image links and other HTML files are dependent on their directory locations. Ensure
the links remain functional after you import them:
●
Use relative links in the HTML
●
Create folders and subfolders that mirror the directory structure
Files are in this directory structure:
Company Handbook
index.html
Supporting Files
benefits.html
confidentiality.html
...
Images
co_logo.gif
hq_daycare.gif
...
Importing
75
where index.html links to files in the subdirectories \Supporting Files and \Images.
After importing index.html (in a folder of any name), create subfolders named
\Supporting Files and \Images, and import the files from corresponding subdirectories
into those subfolders.
Importing Items
Import from Explore using File > Import. This section provides instructions for the following:
●
Importing Files
●
Importing Multiple Files
●
Importing Files as Jobs
●
Importing a URL
●
Importing Financial Reporting Files
Importing Files
Import files into the repository with the following exceptions:
●
For Financial Reporting files, see Importing Financial Reporting Files.
●
For importing files as jobs, see “Importing Files as Jobs” on page 77.
●
For importing URLs, see “Importing a URL” on page 78.
➤ Import files:
1 In Viewer, click Explore, navigate to the folder where you want to import the item.
2 File > Import > File.
3 Browse to the file you want to import.
4 See “General Properties” on page 84 and “Advanced Properties” on page 84.
Required properties are marked with a red asterisk.
5 Click Edit Permissions, See “Setting or Modifying Permissions on Items” on page 80.
6 Click Next or Finish.
Note: If you need to return to previous pages of the importing process, click Back at the bottom of the page.
Importing Multiple Files
Import multiple files:
76
Importing Items
●
Files must be imported to the current folder.
●
Simultaneously import files that have different file extensions. Import text files with HTML
files and image files.
●
Multiple file importing does not work for Interactive Reporting files (*.bqy, *.oce) or
Production Reporting files (*.sqr, *.spf).
➤ Import multiple files:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, navigate to the folder in which you want the files to reside.
2 File > Import > File.
3 Click Multiple Files.
4 Make a list of the files you want to import.
Browse for the first file. click >> (right-facing arrows) to add the file to the list box. Add files to
the list box until you have everything you want. To delete files from the list, select the file and
click << (left-facing arrows).
5 Click Next.
6 Click Finish to import the item.
The items are imported into the current folder.
7 See “General Properties” on page 84 and “Advanced Properties” on page 84
Importing Files as Jobs
Import files as jobs to create Production Reporting jobs, Interactive Reporting jobs or generic
jobs. Import Interactive Reporting documents (*.bqy), Production Reporting program files
(*.sqr), or generic files as jobs. You can schedule, set options on and execute the job. You
specify how to run the job using the Schedule module, see “Scheduling Jobs” on page 348.
➤ Import files as jobs:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, navigate to the folder where you want to place the item.
2 File > Import > File as Job.
3 Browse to the item you want to import.
4 See “General Properties” on page 84 and “Advanced Properties” on page 84.
Required properties are marked with a red asterisk.
5 Click Next.
6 Click Edit Permissions, See “Setting or Modifying Permissions on Items” on page 80.
7 Optional: To define properties for Production Reporting jobs and Generic jobs, see “Using Production
Reporting and Generic Jobs” on page 393
8 Optional: To define properties for an Interactive Reporting job:
●
For Query properties, see “Setting Data Source and Query Properties” on page 372.
●
For Job properties, see “Setting Intelligence iServer General Properties and Options” on
page 373.
●
For Job defaults, see “Setting Job Defaults” on page 374.
Importing Items
77
9 Click Finish.
Importing a URL
Perform these steps to import URLs
➤ Import URLs:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, navigate to the folder where you want to place the item.
2 File > Import > URL, then enter the URL name.
3 See “General Properties” on page 84 and “Advanced Properties” on page 84.
Required properties are marked with a red asterisk.
4 Click Edit Permissions, to specify permissions for the item, see “Setting or Modifying Permissions on
Items” on page 80.
5 Click Finish.
URLs from Workspace
This section provides information for the following:
●
Opening a URL
●
Opening a URL in a New Window
●
Updating a URL
Opening a URL
Perform the following steps to open a URL.
➤ To open a URL:
1 Select File > Open > URL.
The URL dialog is displayed.
2 Enter the URL name.
3 Select OK.
Opening a URL in a New Window
Perform the following steps to open a URL in a full browser.
➤ To open a URL in a new window:
1 Complete step 1 thru step 3 from Opening a URL.
78
Importing Items
The content area displays the Web page.
2 Select the New Window button.
The URL in New Window dialog is displayed.
3 Enter the URL name.
4 Select OK.
Updating a URL
Perform the following steps to update the content of an existing URL displayed in the content
area.
➤ To update a URL:
1 Complete step 1 thru step 3 from Opening a URL.
The content area displays the Web page.
2 Select the Update URL button.
The Update URL dialog is displayed.
3 Enter the URL name.
4 Select OK.
Importing Financial Reporting Files
Use this procedure to import Financial Reporting files.
➤ Import Financial Reporting files:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, navigate to the folder where you want to place the item.
2 File > Import > Financial Reports.
3 Browse to the files you want to import, then select one or more files.
4 Click Import.
5 Optional: If you import an item that uses a data source connection you are prompted to select it.
Setting Permissions
The level of access - view, modify, full control - these are permissions. When you import items,
specify who gets access and to what level. You have full control over the items you import, and
can always change the permission level for all roles, groups, and users.
Setting Permissions
79
If your administrator has not specified how to grant permissions, choose through roles,
groups, or to individual users. Individual users you wish to grant the same permission, it is
more efficient to grant the permissions through roles or groups rather than to individual users.
Modify permissions:
●
Setting or Modifying Permissions on Items
●
Setting Permissions on Interactive Reporting Documents
Setting or Modifying Permissions on Items
Set permissions as you import items or modify permissions of items previously imported. Push
items to make them accessible in the repository or Favorites.
Rules for pushing items:
●
To push items, you need permissions to them and a role that enables you to push them. You
can push all types of items, except multiple-cycle jobs and folders.
●
Make items accessible to others by changing permissions. The item is accessible in the
repository.
●
Make items accessible to others by pushing it to Favorites. The item is listed and accessible
in Favorites.
➤ Modify permissions:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, navigate to the file or folder whose permissions you want to modify.
2 File > Properties
.
3 From General, click Edit Permissions.
80
Importing Items
➤ Set or modify permissions:
1 Populate the Available Users, Groups and Roles list in the Permissions dialog box, perform the following
steps:
a. To populate the list with all users, groups or roles leave the text box blank, click Next.
b. To populate the list with specified users, groups or roles:
i.
To filter the list by name, select begin with, contain, or are in group and enter letters.
You cannot use the are in group filter for roles.
ii. To filter the list by user type, select roles, groups, or users, click the Get List button.
The Available Users, Groups, and Roles column displays items based upon the
selections you made in the drop-down lists.
Note: If all of the users/groups/roles are not listed, filter the list with different criteria or contact your administrator. Your
administrator determines the maximum number of users/groups/roles to list. Wild cards are not supported and
the filter is not case sensitive.
2 Select names from Available Users, Groups and Roles list, then click the Add button,
.
3 From Selected Users, Groups and Roles list click an item, click the Edit button.
4 Set permissions:
Setting Permissions
81
●
Empty - Permissions are empty, this permission defaults to no access if this is the only
permission set. If user U1 is contained in group G1 and the following permissions are
assigned: modify permissions assigned to G1 and empty permissions assigned to U1; then
the empty permission is ignored. If empty permissions are assigned to G1, then the lowest
permission is used, which is no access.
●
No access - Cannot access the document in any manner.
●
View - Can only display the document.
●
Modify and Run - Change, but not delete.
●
Full control - Display, change, and delete.
See “Setting Permissions on Interactive Reporting Documents” on page 82.
5 Select PUSHED to push the item to the user’s Favorites.
6 Click OK.
7 Repeat step 1 on page 81 through step 6 on page 82 to set additional permissions for other users,
groups, or roles.
Note: If all of the users/groups/roles in which you have access to are not listed, filter the list with different criteria or
contact your administrator. Your administrator determines the maximum number of users/groups/roles to list.
8 To apply these permissions for an item, click Push this item to selected Users, Groups, and Roles check
box.
9 If you want permissions to apply to other imported content, make them your default permissions by
clicking Make these selected access privileges my defaults for all files I import.
By clicking this button you enable the system to automatically set the same permissions for all
files you import. Change permissions for each file or re-set your default access privileges
whenever.
10 Click OK.
Note: To remove a role, group, or user from the selected list, click the Remove button
be removed.
after highlighting the name to
Setting Permissions on Interactive Reporting Documents
These permissions apply to Interactive Reporting files and jobs:
●
Adaptive states specify what functionality is available to users when viewing an Interactive
Reporting document.
●
Only user who ran the job has access to the job output specifies you are the only user who
can access the job output.
Note: When importing an Interactive Reporting job, you need to assign an adaptive state on the job output to access it.
82
Importing Items
Table 17
Adaptive State
Description
Empty
Not set to anything. This permission defaults to view only if
this is the only permission set.
View Only
View document, but cannot modify.
View and Process
View documents and refresh data, cannot modify.
Analyze
Create and modify charts, pivots, and reports in the
document, but cannot modify the queries or refresh the
data.
Analyze and Process
Create and modify charts, pivots and reports in the
document and refresh data. Cannot modify the query.
Query and Analyze
Create and modify charts, pivots and reports in the
document and refresh data. Can build and limit queries
before processing.
Datamodel and Analyze
Create and modify charts, pivots and reports in the
document and refresh data. Can build and limit queries
before processing. Can create and modify data models.
Creating Shortcuts
You can create a shortcut to a file or document.
➤ Create shortcuts
1 From Viewer, click Explore, navigate to an item.
2 Right-click the item, click Create a Shortcut.
3 Enter the name.
4 Enter the folder.
5 See “General Properties” on page 84 and “Advanced Properties” on page 84.
Working with Properties
This section describes how to modify properties of repository items. You specify properties
when importing and modifying items. Refer to “Importing Items” on page 76 to learn how to
access properties pages while importing items.
Properties for items:
●
“General Properties” on page 84
●
“Advanced Properties” on page 84
●
“Interactive Reporting Properties” on page 86
Working with Properties
83
●
“Production Reporting Properties and Generic Job Properties” on page 86
●
“HTML File Properties” on page 86
●
“URL Properties” on page 86
●
“Interactive Reporting Database Connection Files” on page 87
➤ Access properties:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, select an item.
2 File > Properties.
General Properties
Most items have all of the general properties shown in Table 18.
Table 18
File
The file name and path is entered automatically. You can update this file manually.
Name
Contain letters, numbers, a space, and an underscore (_).
The Name by default is set to the file name without the extension, but you can change it to
something more meaningful or readable. You could change the name Jan03SR to January
2003 Sales Report.
Description
The length is limited to 254 characters.
Used to generate keywords for searching.
Owner
(Read-only) After importing, this property is automatically set to the User ID of the person who
imported the item.
Original File Name
(Read-only) The initial name of the file when it was imported or created by the owner.
Size
(Read-only) After importing, this property is automatically set to show the file size.
SmartCut
(Read-only) After importing, this property is automatically set to show the SmartCut.
A SmartCut is a URL you can copy and send to other users
Shortcut To
Specify the folder and subfolders when you create a shortcut.
Also store file in
compressed (.zip)
format
Specify this when you import the item. Check this button if you want to store the file in WinZip
format. This saves disk space, but slows down viewing.
Advanced Properties
Many, but not all items, have the advanced options shown inTable 19.
84
Importing Items
Table 19
MIME Type
(Read Only) Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions. MIME types are: MS Word file,
HTML file, and Personal Page.
This field is changeable for jobs and documents only.
Security Tags Included
(Read only) Indicates whether the job is secure or not. (Production Reporting jobs
only.) Secure jobs can have HTML output only.
Character Encoding
(For HTML files only) The character-encoding method used by the file, such as UTF8. This encoding must be specified so that Workspace can display the file correctly.
If the character encoding is not specified in this property setting, nor in the code of
an HTML file, Workspace uses the character encoding set by your administrator.
Hidden File
Indicates whether users can see items in Explore. Enable this option if you do not
want users to see the item.
Enable this option for image files needed by an HTML file. Image files can be in the
same folder as the HTML file, but users do not need to see them when they browse
the folder.
Auto-delete file on this date
Enable this option if you want the item to be automatically deleted. Select a date
from the month, day, and year drop-down list when the item is no longer relevant.
The default date is the next day.
Defining expiration dates removes the item from the repository when all of the
following conditions are met:
●
The expiration date has passed.
●
The Auto-delete check box is selected.
●
The system performs its regular garbage collection (up to an hour after the
expiration date).
●
For folders, set auto-delete to occur after all contents have been deleted from
the folder.
If Exceptions are generated,
allow users to add to their
Exceptions Dashboard
Automatically added to the Exceptions dashboard if exceptions occurs. The
Exceptions dashboard is displayed on a Personal Page.
Automatically generate
keywords
Generates default keywords based on words contained in the Name and Description
fields. For Interactive Reporting content, the section names are also used as
keywords. The search function uses these keywords to find an item.
Keywords
Add new keyword in the empty field and click the right-facing arrows to add it to the
list of keywords. To delete a keyword, select it from the list box and click the leftfacing arrows.
This field is not used for jobs. When an exception occurs during a job, users who
have subscribed to the job can be notified by E-mail or through an Exceptions
Dashboard indicator.
Creating keywords for each item is highly recommended so that users can search
the repository.
Auto Delete job outputs
after
When importing, click this if you want the job output to be deleted after a specified
time interval. Defining an expiration time interval removes the item from the
repository when all of the following conditions are met:
●
The expiration date has passed.
●
The Auto-delete check box is checked.
●
The system performs its regular garbage collection (up to an hour after the
expiration date).
Working with Properties
85
Interactive Reporting Properties
In addition to General Properties and Advanced Properties, Interactive Reporting files and jobs
have unique properties. See “Setting Interactive Reporting Job Properties” on page 371.
Production Reporting Properties and Generic Job Properties
In addition to General Properties and Advanced Properties, Production Reporting files and
Production Reporting jobs have unique properties. See “Job Properties” on page 394 and
“Generic Job Properties” on page 409.
HTML File Properties
In addition to General Properties and Advanced Properties, HTML files the following unique
properties shown in Table 20.
Table 20
Character encoding
Specify the method of character encoding for the web page.
Note: Use UTF8 for non-Latin-1 languages or when using WebSphere or iPlanet
native servlet engines.
Make displayable as a file
content window
Contents of this item can be displayed on Personal Pages. (Default is enabled.)
URL Properties
In addition to General Properties and Advanced Properties, URLs have the following
properties.
Table 21
URL (in the General
Properties group)
Enter the URL starting with either http:// or https://.
Make displayable as a
file content window
Contents of this item can be displayed on Personal Pages. (Default is enabled.)
Character encoding
Specify the method of character encoding for the web page.
Note: Use UTF8 for non-Latin-1 languages or when using WebSphere or IPlanet native
servlet engine.
86
Importing Items
Icon
Shows the icon that will be shown for the URL. To change the icon, click Change Icon.
Change Icon button
Select to add a GIF or JPG file from your PC or from the repository. Set the width and
height of the icon to smaller than 24 pixels.
Interactive Reporting Database Connection Files
These files are used by Interactive Reporting jobs and Interactive Reporting documents to
connect to databases. Separate Interactive Reporting Database Connection file must be
specified for each query of Interactive Reporting files or jobs, except for queries that use Local
Results, to enable users to process that query. See “Selecting Database-Connection File
Options” on page 375
Working with Versions
Repository items have multiple versions, except for jobs, job output, Interactive Reporting
database connection files, shortcuts, Web Analysis items and Financial Reporting items.
Typical files are collections of versions, even if you have not imported multiple versions. When
you import a file, the resulting item is a collection containing a single version. You can later
import additional versions.
Versions can be revisions of the same file or completely different files. If the file is considerably
different from the original file, you should import a new file with a unique name.
Note: To change imported versions for Interactive Reporting jobs or Interactive Reporting database connection files, use
Replace in General Properties. It is important to replace the Interactive Reporting job or Interactive Reporting
database connection file with a similar file. If the Interactive Reporting job is considerably different from the
original Interactive Reporting job, import a new job. The system accepts files as replacements for Interactive
Reporting jobs or an Interactive Reporting database connection files.
Working with versioned items is effortless. Click an item’s name for the latest version. When
you move or delete item, versions are included in the operation. You can also work with a
specific version when you want to.
Versions have their own properties that are distinct from the properties of their collection item.
This section describes properties of versions of files and explains how to manipulate specific
versions, including the following topics:
●
Opening a Specific Version
●
Viewing or Modifying Properties of Versions
●
Adding a Version
●
Listing Multiple Versions
●
Properties of Versions
●
Deleting Versions
Opening a Specific Version
You can open any version of an item. See “Opening or Selecting Files or Folders” on page 56.
Working with Versions
87
Adding a Version
You can add another file as a version to an item in the repository.
Note: All items in the repository can have multiple versions, except for jobs, job output, Interactive Reporting database
connection files, shortcuts, Web Analysis items and Financial Reporting items.
➤ Add versions:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, select the item.
2 File > Properties for the item.
The Properties dialog is displayed.
3 Click Versions, click Add New Version next to Add another version of this file.
4 Click Browse and select the file to add as a new version.
5 Do one or more of these optional steps:
●
Enter a Description.
●
Enable Flag as an exception, then enter a message. If an exception occurs, the message is
displayed on the Exceptions dashboard.
●
Set the priority to High or Normal.
6 Click Add Version.
The Modify File page is displayed with the new version listed in the Versions section. The
version is not added to the repository yet.
7 Click OK.
The version is added to the repository as the latest version.
Viewing or Modifying Properties of Versions
Each version has its own properties.
➤ View or modify properties of versions:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, navigate to the item whose version you want to edit.
2 File > Properties for the item.
The Properties dialog is displayed.
3 Click Versions.
4 Click Modify
for the item.
The properties of the version are displayed. The only properties you can modify are
Description, Priority, Flag as an Exception, and Message (when Flag as an exception is selected).
Refer to “Properties of Versions” on page 89 for information on each property.
88
Importing Items
5 After modifying properties, click OK.
Properties of Versions
Table 22 shows all of the properties of versions.
Table 22
Description
Enter meaningful description of versions that distinguishes it from other versions.
Using preliminary figures as of 2/03 or First draft with Marketing’s comments. The
length is limited to 254 characters.
Creation date
(Read-only) Date on which the version was created.
Last modified date
(Read-only) Date on which the version was changed. Changing versions can involve
replacing or modifying any of its properties.
Modified by
(Read-only) Name of the user who made the last modification to the version.
Priority
Specify values Normal or High. In Explore, the
icon displays next to items that
have a priority value of High. Users can sort on priority, and search for high-priority
items.
Note: The icon does not display for high-priority scheduled jobs.
This property is available if your administrator has activated the priority feature on
your system.
Size
(Read-only) The file size. This property is set automatically.
Flag as an exception
Select exceptions as an indicator of a condition or result, such as a threshold being
reached. Flag as an exception can be set manually by a user.
If you set this option on the latest version of an item, put the item on your Exception
Dashboard, its state is displayed on the Exceptions Dashboard. See “Using
Exceptions” on page 109.
Message
Enter text associated with an exception on this version. When an exception is
flagged on the version, reports print this message, or it may be visible from a user’s
Exception Dashboard.
Listing Multiple Versions
From the Explore module, the latest version of an item is displayed in the content area. You
cannot list more than one version of an item in the content area.
➤ List versions of items:
1 View > Show Columns.
2 Click Versions
Working with Versions
89
Deleting Versions
You can delete a single version or multiple versions at the same time.
➤ Delete versions:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, navigate to the item whose version you want to delete.
2 File > Properties.
The properties of the item are displayed.
3 Click Versions.
4 Select the check box next to the version you want to delete.
5 Click the Delete Selected button next to the item.
6 Click OK when prompted to delete the item.
90
Importing Items
Chapter
4
Viewing and Organizing
Information
Workspace provides easy access to items that are important to you. This chapter describes the
different ways you can organize and view items and information.
In This Chapter
Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Using the Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Using Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Using Subscriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Using Personal Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Viewing and Organizing Information
91
Viewing
Use Viewer to view, interact, and modify content within documents. The Navigate panel within
Viewer displays a list of items you can view, and are described below.
Figure 6
●
Desktop - Select to see its contents displayed as icons in the content area. You can browse
the desktop folder and open any document by double-clicking it.
●
Explore - Navigate through the Repository to locate files and folders.
●
Scorecards - Select Scorecards to perform one of the following tasks:
●
●
❍
View all the scorecards and maps that you are authorized to access
❍
Print scorecards and maps
❍
Export employee and measure scorecards to a Microsoft Excel worksheet
❍
Export Cause and Effect maps as an image file
❍
Launch Performance Scorecard
Enterprise Metrics - click Enterprise Metrics to view one of the following items:
❍
Metric data, based on customized views for your company’s particular business
models and input from your business analysts.
❍
Dynamic charts and reports that provide up-to-date visual data so you can quickly
recognize performance, events, or trends that require action to reduce inefficiencies or
identify areas where profitability can be further increased based upon upward trends.
❍
Daily updates to provide you with the information that enables you to act on a timely
basis versus reacting to information after the trend has passed.
❍
Hyperlinks from charts and reports that enable you to navigate to more detailed and
focused data.
❍
Personalized data display, filtering and sort options.
Document list - Select the document name to view it in the contents pane. Opened
documents display in this list. In Figure 6, the two documents BMV Book Mart Summary
and report are listed.
Use the buttons at the top right of the Viewer module to interact and view a document.
●
92
Navigate button
Viewing and Organizing Information
, switch between modules in the View pane.
●
Document button , navigate through specific information for the active document. If the
active document is a Web Analysis document the document panel displays filter, page, and
row sections in the Viewer > Document panel.
●
Tips button
, access tasks, tips and file details relevant to the active document.
About Using Different File Types
For information on how to view and use each file type, see:
●
“Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Enterprise Metrics” on page 121
●
“Using Hyperion System 9 Performance Scorecard” on page 149
●
“Using Financial Reporting” on page 165
●
“Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books” on page 181
●
“Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting” on page 199
●
“Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Production Reporting Documents” on page 269
●
“Using Web Analysis” on page 275
Creating a New Book, Batch, or Document
The new document wizard to creates items.
Can create the following items:
●
Web Analysis documents, see “Creating Web Analysis Documents” on page 280
●
Interactive Reporting documents see “Interacting with Documents” on page 203
●
Books, see “Creating Books” on page 183
●
Batches, see “Designing Batches” on page 194
Selecting a Data Source for a Document
When creating documents you need to specify the data source. This determines the document
type.
●
To create a Web Analysis document, specify a Web Analysis database connection. See
“Creating Web Analysis Documents” on page 280
●
To create a Interactive Reporting document, based on an existing document, specify a
Interactive Reporting document. See “Interacting with Documents” on page 203
Using the Desktop
Set up desktop folders using the following:
Using the Desktop
93
●
Desktop folders are used as scratch pads or to store items for access.
●
Access the desktop using Viewer. Items in the desktop are displayed as icons.
●
View the Desktop folder in Explore; the folder name is displayed, not the name Desktop.
●
See “Setting Explore Preferences” on page 28.
➤ Access the desktop:
1 From Viewer, click Desktop.
Using Favorites
User can set up their own Favorites. Administrators and users can push items to a user’s
Favorites. Use Favorites to track items you access frequently to view them in the future.
You need the proper role to push items to Favorites. See the corresponding appendix in the
Hyperion System 9 Shared Services User Management Guide. If you do not have the proper role
to access Explore, you can also see your Favorites list by selecting File > Open > Favorites.
You can do the following with Favorites:
●
“Adding Items to Your Favorites” on page 94
●
“Pushing Items to Favorites” on page 95
●
“Managing Favorites” on page 96
➤ Access Favorites
1 Click Favorites.
2 Click an item from the list of Favorites.
Tip: You can also access your personal pages, Enterprise Metrics or Performance Scorecard.
Adding Items to Your Favorites
Add items to your Favorites or push items to another user’s Favorite using the following:
●
You need view access privileges or higher.
●
Add any item to Favorites.
●
Add folders then use Favorites to access that folder; you cannot access items within the
folder directly.
➤ Add items to Favorites:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, navigate to the item.
2 Right-click.
94
Viewing and Organizing Information
➤ Add folders to Favorites:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, navigate to the folder.
2 Click Favorites > Add to favorites.
Pushing Items to Favorites
Push items to another user’s Favorites by specifying the user name, group, or role.
Figure 7
➤ Push item to Favorites:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, select an item.
2 File > Properties.
3 From Properties, click Edit Permissions.
4 Populate Available Users, Groups and Roles in the Properties dialog box with the following:
a. Leave the text box blank, click Next.
b. To populate the list with specified users, groups or roles:
i.
To filter by name, select begin with, contain, or are in group and then enter letters.
You cannot use the are in group filter for roles.
ii. To filter by user type, select roles, groups, or users, click Get List.
Using Favorites
95
The Available Users, Groups, and Roles column displays items based upon the
selections you made in the drop-down lists.
Note: If all of the users/groups/roles are not listed, filter the list with different criteria or contact your administrator. Your
administrator determines the maximum number of users/groups/roles to list. Wild cards are not supported and
the filter is not case sensitive.
5 Select users from the Available Users, Groups and Roles list, click Add,
.
6 From Selected Users, Groups and Roles list click a user, click Edit.
7 Click Pushed to push the item to the user’s Favorites.
8 Click Push this item to selected user, groups, and roles.
Note: If the Access to File option is set to Empty and there are no higher access rights for this item to inherit, then the
item is not pushed.
9 Repeat step 1 through step 8 to push other items to Favorites.
10 Click OK or Apply.
11 Optional: To change the appearance of the list of Users, Groups and Roles:
●
To resize column widths, drag the mouse over a column border, when the pointer changes
to a double headed arrow, drag the borders to the right or left.
12 Optional: If you want permissions to apply to other content you import, make them your default
permissions by selecting Make these selected access privileges my defaults for all files I import check box.
Selecting this enables the system to automatically set the same permissions for files you import.
You can change the permissions for each file or re-set your default permissions at any time.
Note: To remove a role, group, or user from the selected list, click Remove
removed.
after highlighting the name to be
Managing Favorites
➤ Manage items in Favorites:
1 Favorites > Manage Favorites.
2 To remove an item from your Favorites, click Remove next to the item you want to remove.
3 To display an item on your list of Favorites, click Show next to the item you want to show.
Note: If the favorite was pushed by the administrator or another user you can choose to not show it; however you cannot
remove it.
96
Viewing and Organizing Information
4 Optional: To resize column widths, drag the mouse over a column border, when the pointer changes to a
double headed arrow, drag the borders to the right or left.
Using Subscriptions
Subscriptions enable you to perform the following:
●
Receive e-mail notifications and links to items every time the particular item is modified, a
specific job runs, an exception is generated or anything in a folder changes. Subscribe to any
item in the repository and you send it to one or more e-mail addresses. See “Creating a
Subscription” on page 97.
●
If you subscribe to a folder you are notified of any new items imported or created in that
folder or any modifications to items within its subfolders. See “Subscribing to Folders” on
page 99
Note: You cannot subscribe to Personal Pages.
Creating a Subscription
Subscribe to items to be notified when it changes. Receive e-mail notifications that the item
changed or with the changed item attached.
Subscribe to be notified when exceptions occurs as opposed to receiving notification when an
item changes. The item’s owner must enable the item or job to generate exceptions for you to
subscribe. Items and jobs generate exceptions when the following steps are setup:
●
Production Reporting jobs and generic jobs can be programmatically set up to generate
exceptions. See “Supporting Exceptions in Production Reporting or Generic Programs” on
page 417.
●
Interactive Reporting jobs can be programmatically set up to generate exceptions. See
“Supporting Exceptions in Interactive Reporting Programs” on page 371
●
Manually set exceptions on items by setting the version property Flag as Exception;
indicating that the item generated an exception. See “Properties of Versions” on page 89.
The latest version of the item is used to determine if an exception is set.
➤ Create subscriptions:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, navigate to the item you want to subscribe to.
2 Right-click the item, click Subscribe.
3 On the Subscribe page, perform the following steps:
●
Select Subscribe and send e-mail notifications to.
●
In the text box, type one or more e-mail addresses for the recipient of the notification.
●
If you want to send the item as an attachment, select Attach.
Using Subscriptions
97
Tip: Your administrator determines the maximum size of attachments.
4 Optional: To subscribe to an item only when a programmatic exception occurs, select Exception Only. This
option is applicable to jobs only.
Note: If this option is not displayed, this item or job does not use exceptions.
➤ Add subscriptions to your default personal page:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, navigate to the item you want to subscribe to.
2 Right-click the item, click Subscribe.
3 Click the Personal Pages tab, perform the following:
Note: This option is not available for multiple-cycle Interactive Reporting jobs.
●
To add links to the subscription, click Add to My Bookmarks.
●
To add an image that links to the subscription, click Add as Image Bookmark.
You can use a preconfigured image or browse to an image in the repository.
❍
To use a preconfigured icon, click Use Preconfigured icon file.
❍
To use a custom icon, click Use Custom icon file and enter the path and file name or
use the Browse button.
❍
To specify the image size, enter pixel values in the width and height text boxes. If you
do not enter values the entire image is used.
4 Click OK.
➤ To add Interactive Reporting document sections to your default personal page:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, navigate to the item you want to subscribe to.
Note: The Interactive Reporting document must contain sections.
2 Right-click the item, click Subscribe.
3 From Add to Personal Pages, click Add Sections of Interactive Reporting document.
4 From Embed Section, select a section, click Add.
5 Repeat step 2 to add all desired sections.
6 Click OK.
98
Viewing and Organizing Information
Modifying or Removing Subscriptions
You can modify or remove subscriptions by managing a list of subscribed items.
➤ Modify or remove subscriptions:
1 Tools > Personalize > Show Subscribed Items.
2 Click a subscription, then click Open Subscriptions.
3 To remove the subscription, clear Subscribe and send e-mail notifications to.
4 To modify the subscription, use the steps described in “Subscribing to Folders” on page 99.
Note: If you remove a subscription, it is removed from all of your Personal Page Bookmark sections also.
5 Click OK.
Subscribing to Folders
When you subscribe to folders, you are notified of items imported to that folder or updates to
items within the folder or its subfolders.
If you are interested in the entire contents of a folder or sub folder, you can subscribe to the
folder or sub folder.
➤ Subscribe to folders:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, navigate to the folder to which you want to subscribe.
2 Right-click the item, from the shortcut menu click Subscribe.
3 On Subscribe Settings, select Subscribe and send e-mail notification to: to receive notification for this
folder and to change or enter your e-mail address.
4 Enter an e-mail address for one or more recipients of the subscription.
Note: You must enter the e-mail address, you cannot select from a list of recipients.
5 To receive notification when there are changes to the subfolders, select Notify on changes to sub-folders.
6 To receive notification only when items in the folder generate exceptions, select Exception Items.
7 To receive notification only when items in the folder are high priority items, select High Priority Items.
Note: This option is only available if the administrator has enabled priority ratings.
8 Click OK.
Using Subscriptions
99
Receiving and Viewing Subscriptions
Using a subscription e-mail notification you can access items directly without browsing the
repository.
E-mail notification comes in two formats:
●
E-mail with a link to the item or folder - Click the link; if you have access to that item, you
can open the document.
●
E-mail with the item attached - Follow the directions to either view the file where it is or
download the attachment to a file.
Using Personal Pages
Personal Pages are customizable pages enabling you to organize, view and access Workspace
items and other web content on Web pages. Items on personal pages do not interact with each
other. If items change it cannot propagate changes to items on the Personal Page. To build
interactive dashboards, see Object Model and Dashboard Development Services Developer’s
Guide Volume 1: Dashboard Design Guide.
Modify the content and layout of Personal Pages, create additional Personal Pages, and copy
and customize Personal Pages. Add links to repository items or to a Web site.
The components that make up a Personal Page are called content windows and file content
windows.
●
Content windows are collections of links to repository items or external sources, image
bookmarks, and Broadcast Messages.
●
File content windows display the contents of an item opposed to a link to the item. You can
display the contents of the following items:
❍
Embedded Interactive Reporting document sections
❍
HTML files
❍
HTML job output.
Add or remove content windows or file content windows. Content windows and file content
windows are optional except Broadcast Messages. You cannot remove Broadcast Messages, nor
delete a Personal Page that displays them, unless you have another Personal Page that displays
the Broadcast Messages.
Content on Personal Pages include:
●
Broadcast Messages - Link to special folders that the administrator populates. The contents
of this folder are displayed as one or more content windows and set up and managed by the
administrator.
Broadcast messages contains two sub-folders:
100
❍
Personal Page Content - Published personal pages.
❍
Sample Personal Page - Content on personal pages set up by the administrator and
content that you add to personal pages by subscribing to items.
Viewing and Organizing Information
●
My Bookmarks - Collection of links to web pages or repository items.
●
Image bookmarks - Graphic links to web pages or repository items.
●
HTML file or job output displayed as a file content window - Contents of Workspace
HTML items displayed on a Personal Page. URLs are also displayable.
●
Exceptions Dashboard - Add traffic light indicators for jobs enabled for exceptions, or items
flagged as exceptions. If the traffic light is red, the item was flagged as an exception or the
job generated an exception. If the traffic light is green, the job did not yet generate an
exception.
●
Displayable Interactive Reporting sections - Sections from Interactive Reporting
documents and Interactive Reporting job output to which you have access.
The following figure shows a variety of content windows and file content windows.
Figure 8
1
2
5
3
4
Note: If your administrator configured the use of heading bars, each content window’s title is displayed in a colored
heading on the Personal Pages as shown.
Table 23
Sample Personal Page Illustration
Number
Description
1
Broadcast Messages Heading Bar - Format the Heading bar for each content
window.
2
Links - links to HTML pages or Web sites.
3
Content Window - My Bookmarks that are set up using Subscriptions.
Using Personal Pages
101
Table 23
Sample Personal Page Illustration (Continued)
Number
Description
4
Exceptions Dashboard - Lists job exceptions and notification messages or items
that are flagged for exceptions.
5
File Content Window - Displays the contents of an HTML file.
Customizing Personal Page Content
You can specify information included and the appearance of your Personal Pages. Use the
following steps to customize your Personal Pages:
●
“Adding or Removing Personal Page Contents” on page 102
●
“Displaying HTML Content on Personal Pages” on page 103
●
“Embedding Interactive Reporting Document Sections in Personal Pages” on page 105
●
“Creating Bookmarks” on page 108
●
“Using Exceptions” on page 109
●
“Modifying the Layout of a Personal Page” on page 113
●
“Changing the Colors on a Personal Page” on page 114
Adding or Removing Personal Page Contents
➤ To add or remove content (content windows) to a Personal Page:
1 Tools > Personalize > Manage Personal Pages.
2 From Page Names, select a personal page.
3 Click the Content button.
The content of the selected personal page is displayed in the My Personal Page Content area.
4 Select the content you want to add from Select Content, click Add.
102
Viewing and Organizing Information
The items listed in the select content area are controlled by your administrator. You can also
add content through the subscribe feature. See “Using Subscriptions” on page 97.
5 To remove items, select the content you want to remove from My Personal Page Content and click Remove.
6 Click Save Settings or close the window to Cancel.
Note: If the personal page you are changing is opened, you must close it and reopen it to see your changes
Displaying HTML Content on Personal Pages
Add HTML items as a file content window on a Personal Page, which displays the content of
the item opposed to a link to the item.
Note: HTML job output from Production Reporting jobs and generic jobs must be enabled in order to display the HTML
job output as a file content window.
Displaying an HTML File on a Personal Page
➤ Display HTML files on Personal Pages:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, navigate the folders until you find the document you want to add to your
Personal Page.
2 Right-click the item, click Subscribe.
Using Personal Pages
103
3 On Subscribe, select Display file/output as a File Content Window.
If this option is not on the Subscribe Settings page, this file/output cannot be displayed as a file
content window.
4 Optional: To add the file content window to a personal page, click the desired personal page.
Figure 9
The HTML displays the embeddable content windows list.
Adding a File Content Window to Personal Pages
➤ Add file content windows to Personal Page:s
1 Tools > Personalize > Manage Personal Pages
The My Personal Pages page is displayed in the Content pane.
Tip: To define the location of the Broadcast Messages and content windows on your page, click
Layout
2 Select the Personal Page you want to add the file content window to and click Content.
104
Viewing and Organizing Information
The Content page is displayed.
3 From Embeddable Content Window, click the desired file content window(s) and add it to the Content list
for your Personal Page.
4 Click Save Settings.
Removing a File Content Window from All Personal Pages
➤ Remove file content windows from Personal Pages:
1 From Viewer, click Explore then navigate to the original HTML document/output file.
2 Right-click the item, Subscribe.
3 On Subscribe, clear Display file/output as a file content window.
4 Click Save Settings.
Embedding Interactive Reporting Document Sections in Personal Pages
Embed sections of Interactive Reporting documents or Interactive Reporting job output into
Personal Pages.
●
If the item is an Interactive Reporting job output, it must be HTML from a single-cycle job.
The most recent job output is displayed in the embedded section and it is not interactive.
●
Embedded Interactive Reporting sections are fully interactive, with options available from
the pop-up menu.
Specify whether to include the Interactive Reporting Main Menu bar or the Navigation bar as
part of the embedded section. Interactive Reporting document sections you can embed are:
●
Results - Reduced vertically to fit in the container, with horizontal scroll bars. To view more
vertical regions, use the page navigation options available on the Main Menu bar.
●
Tables - Reduced vertically to fit in the container, with horizontal scroll bars. To view more
vertical regions, use the page navigation options available on the Main Menu bar.
●
Pivot - Reduced vertically to fit in the container, with horizontal scroll bars. To view more
vertical regions, use the page navigation options available on the Main Menu bar.
●
Chart - Scaled proportionally to fit in the container.
●
Reports - Clipped to fit in the container.
●
Dashboard - Clipped to fit in the container.
Embedding a Interactive Reporting Section on a Personal Page
➤ Embed Interactive Reporting sections on a Personal Page:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, navigate to the Interactive Reporting document or job output file.
2 Right-click the item, click Subscribe.
Using Personal Pages
105
3 On Subscribe Settings, click personal pages.
4 Select Add sections of Interactive Reporting Document.
Figure 10
5 Select the Personal Page that you want to update.
Note: A list is displayed if you have more than one Personal Page.
6 Select the section you want to add from Embed Section.
7 Click Add.
The section is displayed in the list box.
8 Specify the size you want each section to be on the Personal Page.
Select the desired section from Embedded Interactive Reporting Sections and specify its height
and width in pixels in the respective field.
9 Click OK.
Editing Embedded Interactive Reporting Sections on a Personal Page
After you embed a Interactive Reporting section, you can edit its properties.
➤ Edit the appearance of embedded sections:
1 From the menu bar, select Favorites.
2 Click Edit
106
.
Viewing and Organizing Information
Figure 11
Edit Embedded Sections
3 Change the settings.
●
Replace embedded section - (Read only) Displays the section currently embedded.
●
With section - Select a section to replace the currently embedded section. The name of
currently embedded section is displayed by default.
●
Specify section size - Enter the size of the section in pixels.
●
Toolbar display - Select the Interactive Reporting Server toolbar to embed with the section
(the default is no toolbar).
❍
Select Navigation Only, to have the first page, previous page, next page, and last page
toolbar buttons only.
❍
Select Standard, to have all toolbar buttons except for the Interactive Reporting Server
help button.
❍
Select None, to have no toolbar displayed.
4 Click Save Settings.
The edited embedded section is displayed on your Personal Page.
5 Click Return to Personal Page.
Using Personal Pages
107
Figure 12
Removing Embedded Interactive Reporting Sections from a Personal Page
You can remove any embedded Interactive Reporting section from your Personal Page.
➤ To remove embedded Interactive Reporting sections from Personal Pages:
●
Click X in the title of the file content window containing the Interactive Reporting section
you want to remove.
➤ To remove an embedded Interactive Reporting section from all Personal Pages:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, navigate the folders until you find the item containing the embedded sections
you want to remove from your Personal Page.
2 Right-click the item, click Subscribe
.
3 On the Subscribe Settings page, navigate to Add Sections at the bottom of the page.
4 Select the section you want to remove from the list box and click Remove.
5 Click OK.
Creating Bookmarks
Include bookmarks on a Personal Page. A bookmark is a text link or image link to a item or to
a URL.
Adding Bookmarks for a Workspace Item
➤ Add Bookmarks for items:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, navigate to the item.
2 Right-click the item, click Subscribe.
3 On Subscribe Settings, under the heading Add to Personal Pages, select Add to My Bookmarks.
108
Viewing and Organizing Information
Note: The new bookmark is displayed on every Personal Page that includes the My Bookmarks item.
4 Click OK.
5 Go to your Personal Page.
The Bookmark is displayed in the My Bookmarks list.
Adding Image Bookmarks for a Workspace Item
Bookmarks are added for items you subscribe to, except for folders.
➤ Add image bookmarks for Workspace items:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, navigate to the original item.
2 Right-click the item, click Subscribe.
3 On Subscribe Settings, under Add to Personal Pages, select Add As Image Bookmark. Specify the
following information:
a. Specify graphic files you want to use. Select either:
❍
A preconfigured icon file from the drop-down list
❍
A custom icon file (your administrator needs to add your custom graphic to the
Workspace file system and give you the path to it). Using a graphic file from your local
file system does not work.
b. Enter the desired dimensions for displaying the image (in pixels).
4 Click OK.
Using Exceptions
Exceptions are conditions or results (such as a threshold being reached) requiring intervention.
Exceptions cause corresponding indicators on a subscribing user’s Exceptions Dashboard to
change, or a notification to be sent to users who have subscribed.
The exceptions dashboard is an optional content window used to monitor exceptions, it
displays on Personal Pages. Each indicator represents one exception-capable job or items with
manually flagged as an exception.
Use exceptions with jobs or items:
●
Using monitored exceptions with jobs:
❍
Programmatically enable monitored exceptions on jobs. The exception is set when
certain conditions or thresholds are met. Job exceptions are generated by Production
Reporting jobs, Interactive Reporting jobs, or generic jobs. See “Configuring
Exceptions” on page 110.
❍
Subscribe to jobs and choose to be notified by e-mail when the exception occurs.
Using Personal Pages
109
❍
●
Place jobs on the Exceptions Dashboard and view its exception status. For each job you
add to the Exceptions Dashboard, a green traffic light icon is displayed. If the job
generates an exception, the traffic light changes to red. “Using the Exceptions
Dashboard” on page 111
Using exceptions with items:
Note: An item must have version properties in order to use exceptions.
❍
Manually set exception status for items. See “Configuring Exceptions” on page 110.
❍
Subscribe to items and choose to be notified by e-mail when the exception occurs.
❍
You can place items on the Exceptions Dashboard and view its exception status. For
each item you add to the Exceptions Dashboard, a red traffic light icon is displayed.
Items cannot be added to the exception dashboard unless the exception status is set.
See “Using the Exceptions Dashboard” on page 111
You have only one Exceptions Dashboard, even if you put it on multiple Personal Pages. If you
modify the Exceptions Dashboard on one Personal Page, it changes on all of your Personal
Pages that include it.
Figure 13
Configuring Exceptions
Configure exceptions for jobs and items with version properties. There are two ways to
configure exceptions:
●
Programmatically set-up a job to generate exceptions if certain conditions are met. When
you run the job if an exception occurs, the exception status of the job is set.
●
Manually set exceptions on an item by setting the property to Flag as an Exception.
➤ Programmatically enable a job with monitored exceptions capability:
110
❍
Design the Production Reporting job (*.sqr) or generic jobs to write exceptions to the
output.properties file. See “Supporting Exceptions in Production Reporting or
Generic Programs” on page 417.
❍
Design the generic job, to write exceptions to the output.properties file.
“Supporting Exceptions in Production Reporting or Generic Programs” on page 417.
❍
Design the Interactive Reporting job to write exceptions. See “Supporting Exceptions
in Interactive Reporting Programs” on page 371.
Viewing and Organizing Information
➤ To set exception status for items manually:
●
From Explore, set the property Flag as an Exception for the latest version of the item. See
“Properties of Versions” on page 89.
Using the Exceptions Dashboard
The exceptions dashboard shows a traffic light indicator for each job or item you place on it.
The traffic light indicator changes to indicate if an exception occurred (red) or did not occur
(green).
Note: Items have version properties to use exceptions and the exceptions dashboard.
➤ Use Exceptions Dashboard with jobs:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, navigate to the job whose exception you want to monitor, right-click the job,
click Properties.
2 From Advanced, select If exceptions are generated, Allow users to their Exceptions Dashboard, click OK.
3 From Viewer, click Explore, navigate to the job, right-click the job, click Subscribe.
4 On Subscribe, click Add to Exceptions Dashboard (in the Add to Personal Pages section of the page).
If this option is not on the Subscribe Settings page, the file cannot be monitored for exceptions.
5 Click OK.
A traffic light is added to the exceptions dashboard. The traffic light indicator is green. If the
job is run and generates an exception, then the traffic light indicator changes to red.
➤ Use Exceptions Dashboard with items:
1 From Viewer, click Explore, navigate to the item that has an exception you want to monitor.
2 Right-click the item, click Properties.
3 From Advanced, select If exceptions are generated, Allow users to their Exceptions Dashboard.
4 From Versions, set the property Flag as an Exception for the latest version of the item, click OK.
5 From Viewer, click Explore, navigate to the item.
6 Right-click the item, from the shortcut menu, click Subscribe.
7 On Subscribe Settings, select Add to Exceptions Dashboard (in the Add to Personal Pages section of the
page).
If this option is not on the Subscribe Settings page, this file cannot be monitored for
exceptions.manage
8 Click OK.
A red traffic light is added to the exceptions dashboard, to indicate that an exception is set for
this item.
Using Personal Pages
111
Adding the Exceptions Dashboard to a Personal Page
Add the Exceptions Dashboard to Personal Pages or just one.
➤ Add Exceptions Dashboard to Personal Pages:
1 Go to the Personal Page to which you want to add an Exceptions Dashboard.
2 Click Content.
3 Click Exceptions Dashboard and click the right-facing arrow.
4 Select Exceptions Dashboard from Select Content and click the right-facing arrow.
5 Click Save Settings.
Customizing the Exceptions Dashboard
Customize the display of the Exceptions Dashboard.
➤ Customize Exceptions Dashboard:
1 Select Favorites, then select a Personal Page.
2 On Exceptions Dashboard, select Edit or the name Exceptions Dashboard.
3 To not show green lights, and have red lights displayed when an exception occurs, enable the Only display
monitored exceptions that have exceptions option.
Note: This option is applicable for monitored exceptions used with jobs. Traffic lights display when the exception status
is set. You cannot show a green traffic light for items.
4 When exceptions occurs and you want to see its exception text explanatory message next to its red light,
select Display exception messages next to graphic indicators option.
112
Viewing and Organizing Information
Note: There is a smartcut tag called getException() that displays exception messages on a Interactive Reporting
dashboard. For more information, see the Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting Studio User’s Guide.
5 Click Change Properties.
6 Click Return to Personal Pages.
Modifying the Layout of a Personal Page
Use the Layout button to select different layout styles for Personal Pages or to rearrange content
windows.
Specifying Layout Style
The layout style of a Personal Page includes how many columns or sections the page has and
where they are displayed on the page.
➤ Specify layout styles:
1 Tools > Personalize > manage Personal Pages.
2 Select a Personal Page, then click Layout.
The Content Layout page is displayed.
3 Click Select Layout Style.
4 Click a layout style.
5 If you want to put content windows in a section across the top or bottom of the Personal Page, click Show
Header Section or Show Footer Section.
6 Click Save Settings.
Rearranging Content Windows
➤ Move content windows:
1 Tools > Personalize > manage Personal Pages.
2 Select a Personal Page, then click Layout.
3 Select a content window you want to move.
4 If you want to move the selected content window up or down within the section (column, header or footer)
it is currently in, click a vertical arrow. If you want to move the selected content window to another section,
click a horizontal arrow.
5 Continue selecting and moving content windows until they are arranged as you want.
6 If you want to move the Broadcast Messages content windows, select Above all Content Windows or Below
all Content Windows in the Broadcast Messages section of the Content Layout page.
7 Click Save Settings.
Using Personal Pages
113
Changing the Colors on a Personal Page
Select color schemes for Personal Pages, or individually set colors for page elements.
➤ Change colors on Personal Pages:
1 From the menu bar, select Tools > Personalize > manage Personal Pages.
2 Click Edit from the Personalize bar.
3 Click a color scheme.
4 If you want to set colors individually, click Customize Colors for Custom. If not, go to step 7.
Each colorable Personal Page element displays an array of color samples above a My Own __
Color option. Select any color in the array by selecting its radio button. Colors shown next to
the My Own __ Color entry box is the current color of the element. In the picture below, My
Own Headings Color is currently set to bright yellow, but the user is changing it to violet.
114
Viewing and Organizing Information
5 Each element whose color you want to change, select the new color you want or enter a hexadecimal color
code (for example, #000000 is the hexadecimal color code for black) in the My Own __ Color entry box.
6 Click Save Settings.
7 Select a color scheme option:
●
Change all my Personal Pages to use this Color Scheme - Applies the specified color
scheme to all your existing Personal Pages
●
Use this as my default Color Scheme for all new Personal Pages - Applies the specified
color scheme to the current Personal Page and any future ones.
8 Click Save Settings.
Working With Personal Pages
Create multiple Personal Pages for different purposes, specify a default Personal Page if you
have more than one, and publish a Personal Page so that others can use it as their own.
●
“Creating a Personal Page” on page 115
●
“Copying a Personal Page” on page 116
●
“Deleting Personal Pages” on page 117
●
“Setting Defaults” on page 117
●
“Publishing and Replacing Personal Pages” on page 118
Creating a Personal Page
You can create multiple Personal Pages.
➤ To create a Personal Page:
1 From the menu bar, select Tools > Personalize > manage Personal Pages.
2 On the My Personal Pages page, click New Personal Page.
The New Personal Pages link is not displayed if you exceeded the number of Personal Pages
allowed by your administrator. You must remove a Personal Page for the link to display.
Using Personal Pages
115
3 On My Personal Page Content, use the Add arrows to add the content windows you want (listed on the left
side) to the Content list for your new Personal Page (on the right), click Next.
4 On Personal Page Layout Style, click a layout style and click Next.
layout styles only show the Personal Page portion of the browser window; the View pane also is
displayed on the left. A Header section is a wide area that contains one or more content
windows. A Footer section is the same, but located at the bottom of the page.
5 On the Choose Layout page, arrange the various content windows where you want them on your Personal
Page.
6 Select a content window and then a short arrow to move the content window between sections. Select a
content window and then a long arrow to change a content window’s position in a section. When you are
done, click Next.
7 On Edit Personal Page, enter a name and description for your Personal Page, click a color scheme, click
Finish.
You can further customize the colors at a later time if you wish. On the My Personal Pages page,
the new Personal Page is listed with your other ones.
8 Click Favorites, then select your Personal Page name to view your Personal Page.
Copying a Personal Page
In addition to publishing new Personal Pages, you can also copy a published Personal Page to a
new Personal Page.
➤ Copy published Personal Pages:
1 Tools > Personalize > manage Personal Pages.
116
Viewing and Organizing Information
2 Click New Personal Page.
3 Select Copy Published Personal Page, click Next.
The Add Existing Personal Pages page is displayed.
4 Select the personal page(s) you want to copy from the list, click Finish.
The page(s) now are displayed in the Personal Pages list in the Navigation pane.
Deleting Personal Pages
➤ Delete Personal Pages:
1 Tools > Personalize > manage Personal Pages.
2 Select the Personal Page you want to delete from the Page Names – Descriptions list.
3 Click Remove Page.
The selected Personal page is removed from the list.
Note: Click Restore Settings to restore the deleted Personal Page to the list.
4 Click Save Settings.
Setting Defaults
The first personal page in the list is the default personal page.
➤ Set default Personal Pages:
1 Tools > Personalize > manage Personal Pages.
The My Personal Pages page is displayed in the Content pane.
Using Personal Pages
117
2 On My Personal Pages, select the Personal Page you want to use as your default. Use the up arrow to move
this page to the top of the list.
3 Click Save Settings.
Publishing and Replacing Personal Pages
Publish new Personal Pages or replace published Personal Pages using the content of your
Personal Page. Publishing a Personal Page enables other users to copy it.
Note: To publish Personal Pages, you need the proper access privileges to the Personal Page folder.
➤ Publish or replace Personal Pages:
1 Tools > Personalize > manage Personal Pages
The My Personal Pages page is displayed in the Content pane.
2 On My Personal Pages, select the Personal Page you want to publish, click Publish.
3 To publish, Enter a name and a description in the Publish New Personal Page section, click Publish.
The name and description defaults to what you have already assigned to this Personal Page.
The name and description should communicate what is distinctive about this page.
4 To replace: In Replace Personal Page, select the page to replace, click Replace.
You can replace a published Personal Page with one that has a different name. The contents of
the published page are replaced and the published page name remains the same.
5 To set access control on the Personal Page you just published: From Viewer, click Explore, navigate to the
Personal Page Content folder in the Broadcast Messages folder.
6 From Viewer, click Explore, right click the Personal Page, from the shortcut menu, click Properties.
The default access privileges when publishing Personal Pages are the same as basic documents.
To set access privileges, see “Setting Permissions” on page 79.
118
Viewing and Organizing Information
Chapter
Launching Applications
5
This chapter explains the basic tasks for launching Hyperion applications.
In This Chapter
Launching Hyperion Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Launching Applications
119
Launching Hyperion Applications
From viewer, Applications contains a list of Planning or Financial Management applications
which you can open. Applications is displayed if both of the following are true:
●
A user has rights
●
Applications are available
The list of available applications is retrieved from Shared Services. When an application is
selected, it launches in a new window, passing the single sign on token so you are not
prompted again for credentials.
The list of available applications are filtered by the user's provisioned status. For example, if the
currently logged on user was not provisioned for a project that included the Planning Real
App, it would not be listed.
➤ To launch Hyperion applications:
1 From viewer, select the arrow next to Applications.
A list of available applications you have rights to are displayed.
2 Select the application you want to open.
The application you selected is opened in a new window.
120
Launching Applications
Chapter
6
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+
Enterprise Metrics
When you click Viewer > Enterprise Metrics in the Viewer Module, the Enterprise Metrics
Workspace automatically displays your default page in the Monitor Section. You can view, drill,
search, and sort metrics in the Enterprise Metrics Workspace. If you want to customize pages in
the Monitor or Investigate Section, however, you must use the Enterprise Metrics
Personalization Workspace. For additional information, see “Accessing Enterprise Metrics
Personalization Workspace” on page 146.
In This Chapter
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Using Enterprise Metrics Hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Using ZoomCharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Using the Monitor Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Using the Investigate Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Using the Pinpoint Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Using the Dictionary Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Viewing Enterprise Metrics Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Accessing Enterprise Metrics Personalization Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Enterprise Metrics
121
Overview
Enterprise Metrics provides access to metric summaries, analysis information, and reports
through these sections:
●
Monitor —Summary charts and reports that highlight key events and performance
indicators
See “Using the Monitor Section” on page 125.
●
Investigate —Detailed metrics using charts
See “Using the Investigate Section” on page 130.
●
Pinpoint—Tabular reports related to specific information, such as Customers, Products,
Sales, or Orders
See “Using the Pinpoint Section” on page 137.
●
Dictionary Section—Detailed descriptions for objects in Enterprise Metrics
See “Using the Dictionary Section” on page 142.
To access a section, click the section name in the View pane. The selected section appears
highlighted.
Using Enterprise Metrics Hyperlinks
Many charts, reports, text, and images in the Monitor, Investigate, and Pinpoint sections
incorporate hyperlinks. You can use these hyperlinks to drill to more details about metrics or
items. Your company’s business analysts and Enterprise Metrics Editor define an initial set of
hyperlinks.
An object with a hyperlink to a detail page shows a hand icon when you position the cursor
over it. For charts, a tooltip also is displayed when you rest the cursor over a chart. Charts can
hyperlink to a chart on a page in the Monitor or Investigate sections, or a report in the
Pinpoint Section. You can drill charts only when the cursor appears as a hand. You cannot drill
when the cursor is simply a pointer.
Note: The tooltip changes color, depending if it hyperlinks to a chart in the Investigate Section, a report in the Pinpoint
Section, a page in the Monitor Section, or a page on the World Wide Web.
In addition to Summary charts, pages in the Monitor Section also displays mini reports. A mini
report is a report component. It includes the report layout, headings, formats, hyperlinks, and
the query or queries to load the report. Each report can include one or more mini reports. For
mini reports, blue text indicates links to the Pinpoint Section.
Note: Hyperlinks displayed in blue text can be located in the Monitor Section or Pinpoint Section.
122
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Enterprise Metrics
➤ To drill from an object in the Monitor Section, click an item:
●
Chart
●
Minireport title
●
Blue text item in a mini report
●
Underlined blue text item
●
Image where the cursor is a hand
➤ To return to the Monitor Section, click Monitor in the View pane.
Using ZoomCharts
You can see detailed numeric information on ZoomChart metrics by zooming in on a chart.
➤ To enlarge a chart, use one procedure:
●
Click the + (plus sign) in the lower-right corner of the chart.
●
Right-click anywhere on the chart.
The ZoomChart window is displayed.
Using ZoomCharts
123
Figure 14
ZoomChart Window
1
4
5
6
2
3
Security restrictions affect the numerical information in the ZoomChart. The Process bar at
the top of the workspace window displays your security restrictions. Details about the metrics
in the chart appear at the bottom of the window.
The ZoomChart include these elements:
1
Legend
Colors used to chart each metric
If the chart is a Summary chart (such as a stacked bar or pie chart), the legend also includes the colors used
for each point of view.
2
3
ZoomChart Detail
Lines
Values for each charted period
Highlighting
If the Editor defines highlighting, the chart cell value or detail values highlighted with an underline in green,
yellow, or red
You may mouse over a detail line label to view its description.
Green indicates a good value, yellow is a warning, and red indicates a bad value.
4
Chart Cell Value
Metric 1 (default) or a value defined by your Enterprise Metrics Editor
Every chart has a chart cell value in the lower-right corner of the ZoomChart, Summary charts in the Monitor
Section, and Summary and Detail charts in the Investigate Section. When you click a chart to view the
ZoomChart, the chart cell value has a label. The value is usually for the current period and is never
extrapolated.
124
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Enterprise Metrics
5
As of Date
On the ZoomChart, a tick mark below the chart above the ZoomChart detail rows
Tick marks indicate the period beginning and end for stronger visual reference.
6
Extrapolation
A gray background with a white border indicating that you may move your mouse over the cell to see the
extrapolated value for an incomplete period
Extrapolation projects today’s value to the end of the current period based on the fraction of the period
complete. If you are viewing a detail value for the current period, the actual value is shown by default. If you
are viewing an extrapolated detail value that is not in the current period—for example, a cumulative metric in a
future period—the extrapolated value is shown by default with a white background. If highlighting is also
applied, the cell displays the colored underline.
Your Enterprise Metrics Editor determines when to apply extrapolation to a detail line.
Extrapolated values appear with a light shaded box behind the value.
When you are finished viewing the information in the ZoomChart, click Close.
If the chart’s x-axis displays points of views instead of time periods, extrapolation is not shown
in the chart, and detail lines are calculated without applying extrapolation. A message in the
bottom left corner of the ZoomChart reminds you that extrapolation is not shown.
Note: If you zoomed in on a stoplight chart, the ZoomChart shows the stoplight on the left and a Bar, Line chart on the
right.
Using the Monitor Section
Enterprise Metrics summarizes essential information in the Monitor Section. The Monitor
Section, like a newspaper front page, highlights important information and events and allows
you to monitor performance indicators. The data shown in the Monitor Section is generally
updated daily, reflecting information for the previous day. The Monitor Section helps you to
use timely and accurate information to manage the performance of your business operation.
The following topics explain how to use the Monitor Section to analyze key business
information:
●
“Monitor Section Elements” on page 125
●
“Selecting Pages” on page 127
●
“Using Hyperlinks to View Investigate Section Details” on page 127
●
“Using Hyperlinks to View Pinpoint Section Details” on page 128
●
“Using Page Links” on page 129
●
“Displaying Chart Descriptions” on page 129
●
“Displaying Mini Report Information” on page 130
Monitor Section Elements
The Monitor Section enables you to:
●
View summary metric information in charts
Using the Monitor Section
125
●
View summary report information in mini reports.
●
Drill to details
Figure 15
Enterprise Metrics Monitor Section—Quarter Performance Page
1
2
3
4
Monitor Section elements:
1
Page Title
Name that you or your Enterprise Metrics Editor defines
2
Links
Chart, mini report, page, and URL hyperlinks, as text or images
3
Summary Charts
Tool for understanding business problems and trends at a glance
Hyperlinks enable you to jump to details in the Monitor, Investigate, or Pinpoint sections. Tooltips are displayed
for Summary charts. (Tooltip color indicates whether the hyperlink is to a page in the Monitor, Investigate, or
Pinpoint Section.)
In Figure 15, the first Summary chart on the left shows Opp Deal Qty vs. Yago, for only the United States and
Canada. Each product represented in the stacked bar chart is color coded and described in the legend.
Some Summary charts display stoplights that identify values as good (green), at risk (yellow), or bad (red).
Summary charts may display a business hierarchy other than time along the x-axis. For example, the x-axis
might display Product hierarchy business units: Desktop, Network, and Enterprise. Such charts display metrics
for one time period, such as a month.
4
Minireports
High-level report information
Blue text hyperlinks enable you to jump to detail in the Pinpoint Section.
126
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Enterprise Metrics
Selecting Pages
Pages in the Monitor Section can be hyperlinked to walk you through analysis and decisionmaking. If your organization has user groups with diverse business interests, the Enterprise
Metrics Editor can also define pages using indicators relevant to a group’s interests.
➤ To select a page:
1 Click the Pages menu in the Console.
2 Select a page.
Tip: Click Previous to return to the previous page.
Using Hyperlinks to View Investigate Section Details
If you see numbers in the Monitor Section that you want to investigate, you can use the
hyperlinks that are automatically included on all charts to jump to the Investigate Section. The
Investigate Section enables you to obtain additional detail to resolve business anomalies.
➤ To display details for a chart in the Monitor Section:
1 Click a chart in the Monitor Section.
The linked page is displayed in the Investigate Section. For example, when the Opp Deal Qty
vs. Yago chart is clicked in the Monitor Section the Current Deals and Deal Forecast page
appears (showing only the geographies, United States and Canada).
Using the Monitor Section
127
2 To return to the Monitor Section, click Monitor in the View pane.
See “Using the Investigate Section” on page 130.
Using Hyperlinks to View Pinpoint Section Details
The Monitor Section makes it easy to drill to detailed report information because the blue
report title and text are hyperlinks.
➤ To jump to a report using a hyperlink:
1 In the Monitor Section, click blue text items or the mini report title.
The Pinpoint Section is displayed.
2 To return to the Monitor Section, click Monitor in the View pane.
See “Using the Pinpoint Section” on page 137.
Note: You can drill to detailed report information by clicking hyperlinks within a mini report in the Monitor Section. For
example, to view report detail on a customer, click the customer name.
Depending on your page setup, you can sometimes drill to report information from a chart
hyperlink. On the chart in the Monitor Section, blue tooltips indicate links to a pages in the
Investigate Section; gray tooltips indicate links to reports in the Pinpoint Section.
128
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Enterprise Metrics
Using Page Links
In addition to chart and report hyperlinks, the Monitor section contains other hyperlinks.
Depending on your page design, you may see links to other pages or URLs. You can design
charts to hyperlink to another page. Page link tooltips are pink; URL tooltips are yellow.
➤ To link to another page, click the page link.
Tip: Click Previous to return to the previous page.
Displaying Chart Descriptions
You can use the Describe feature to obtain additional information about a Summary chart
displayed in the Monitor Section.
➤ To display the chart description, right-click a chart header area in the Monitor Section and
select Describe from the shortcut menu.
Chart Description shows the chart subject and name. If a metric is extrapolated in the chart, an
(e) follows the metric label. Because the metric label and name can differ in the database, the
name is in parentheses () on the line after the label.
After listing the charted metrics, Chart Description shows definitions of the Chart cell value,
Highlighting value (which corresponds to a ZoomChart detail line), and thresholds applied for
cell value highlighting. An (e) in these definitions indicates that extrapolation is applied. For a
chart displaying a business hierarchy other than time on the x-axis, extrapolation is not
displayed on the chart or in detail value calculations, and a message in the Chart Description
notes that extrapolation is not applied.
For more information on the charted metrics and the ZoomChart detail lines see “Using the
Dictionary Section” on page 142.
Using the Monitor Section
129
Displaying Mini Report Information
Similar to displaying the chart description, you can show information for a mini report in the
Monitor Section.
➤ To view mini report information:
1 Right-click in the mini report header area and select Show Mini Info from the shortcut menu.
The Dictionary Section shows the mini report information.
2 To return to the Monitor Section, click Monitor in the View pane.
Using the Investigate Section
The Investigate Section displays multiple chart columns with charts that are calculated and
aggregated from underlying business measures from the Application Data. Several metrics may
be displayed on a Chart page in the Investigate Section, such as Actual versus Forecast sales.
Typically, Chart pages include metrics that are organized by a specific subject, such as Pricing
or Bookings.
The following topics explain how to use Chart pages to analyze business metrics:
130
●
“Investigate Section Elements” on page 131
●
“Selecting Pages” on page 132
●
“Using Hyperlinks to View Detail” on page 132
●
“Sorting Charts” on page 133
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Enterprise Metrics
●
“Changing Points of View” on page 134
●
“Drilling to View Additional Detail” on page 135
●
“Searching” on page 136
●
“Fast Scrolling” on page 136
●
“Drilling to Additional Report Detail” on page 136
●
“Displaying Chart Descriptions” on page 137
Investigate Section Elements
The Investigate Section enables you to:
●
View metric information in visually oriented charts.
●
Display metrics by business dimensions (point of views) and details.
●
Drill to more detailed information.
The metric and hierarchy data is generally updated daily, reflecting information for the
previous day. Make sure to view the “As of ” date on the Process bar. Metrics such as forecasts or
budgets may have another update frequency, which is typically a Fiscal Quarter or Fiscal Year.
Figure 16
Current Deals and Forecasts Page
4
1
2
5
3
The Investigate Section has the following elements:
Using the Investigate Section
131
1
Console
Where to change the point of view
For example, you can limit the data in the Content area by showing the Industry hierarchy for only one industry.
2
Color Indicators
A thick line above the Detail button, extending across all Detail charts in the row
These colors represent the colors in the Summary row chart. For example, the color indicators show each color
in the pie chart.)
3
Drill Buttons
For drilling to additional information
For example, click Drill for Finance, Insurance, or Real Estate to see details about that metric.
4
Summary Charts
Summaries of metrics for all subsequent charts in the column (the Detail charts); in the top row for each chart
column
In Figure 16, the second chart column shows Opp Deal Qty vs. Yago. The first chart in this column is a stacked
bar Summary chart. The Detail charts below it focus on four industries: Manufacturing, Finance, Mining and
Construction, and Service. The colors above the Drill buttons for the Detail chart rows are a key to the stacked
bar Summary chart above.
5
Detail Charts
For focusing on a business hierarchy slice (such as the Americas sales region), providing the detail behind the
column’s Summary chart; listed vertically below each Summary chart
For example, if the Summary chart shows a Pie chart for Worldwide Bookings, the Detail charts below
represent each slice: Americas, Europe-Africa, Asia-Pacific, and US.
The colors for each row, shown above each drill button, are a key to the Summary chart. These colors extend
across the entire row, and to identify which Summary chart portion represents each Detail chart row. For
example, blue always represents the first row of Detail charts, yellow the second, and so on. The charts change
automatically to match the colors.
Selecting Pages
➤ To view a page, use one option:
●
Drill from a Summary chart in the Monitor Section. See “Using Hyperlinks to View
Investigate Section Details” on page 127.
●
Select a page from the Pages menu in the Investigate Section.
Your Enterprise Metrics Editor creates pages that you can access to cover all topics that suit
your business needs.
➤ To return to the Previous page, click Previous.
Note: As you navigate from page to page, the point of view you selected on the Console remains.
Using Hyperlinks to View Detail
Many charts have hyperlinks for drilling to more focused or detailed metrics. A tooltip in the
chart header area shows the page that is displayed when you click the hyperlink. The tooltip
changes color if it links to a report.
132
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Enterprise Metrics
➤ To jump to another page using a hyperlink:
1 Click a chart.
When the mouse is moved over the Summary chart, the tooltip shows the page name; for
example, Prices.
After you click the Summary chart, the page is displayed. The page name changes in the Pages
menu and on the Process bar.
Note: You can drill charts only when the cursor is hand-shaped.
Depending on the page, you may be able to jump from a chart to a report. A green tooltip in
the chart header area indicates a links to a report.
Note: Tooltip colors may differ, depending on your monitor and display settings.
2 To jump to a report using a hyperlink, click a chart that links to a report.
3 To return to the page in the Investigate Section, click Investigate and select the page.
Sorting Charts
Enterprise Metrics allows you to sort the point of view on the page—that is, Detail chart
rows—based on a chart column. After you select the column, you can choose to sort in
ascending or descending order on the cell value or a charted metric (or not by that column at
all). Ascending order sorts chart rows from lowest to highest value, descending order from
highest to lowest.
You can permanently change the column sort order in Hyperion System 9 BI+ Enterprise
Metrics Personalization Workspace, but the change is only valid for the current session.
You may use only one column at a time to sort the Detail charts on a Chart page. Sorting by a
chart column replaces previous sorts. If you do not sort the Chart page by a chart column, the
rows typically are sorted alphabetically, by the values displayed on the Drill buttons. However,
your Editor may define a sort other than alphabetical as the default.
➤ To sort Detail chart rows (the point of view values) based on a chart column:
1 Click the dog-ear in the column header area, then select Sort.
A submenu is displayed.
2 Select Descending or Ascending.
Another submenu is displayed, from which you select the value to use for the sort. Select a
chart column cell value or a charted metrics as the value to use for sorting Detail chart rows on
the page.
If the chart cell value is a charted metric, the submenu displays (=cell value) to the right of that
metric name.
Using the Investigate Section
133
3 Select the value to use for the sort.
All Detail charts (the point of view rows) on the page are displayed in ascending or descending
order of the selected column.
After a column is used for sorting page Detail charts, an indicator is displayed in the lower left
corner of the Summary chart for that column. You may mouse over this sort indicator to see
which value from the chart was used for sorting. This example shows the Descending sort
indicator on a column’s Summary chart:
Note: Occasionally a sort fails because of the underlying data, or the point of view and drilling applied on the page. If
this occurs, the Detail charts are temporarily sorted alphabetically by the point of view value (or another default
sort defined by your Editor), and the sort indicator has a red, slashed circle.
Changing Points of View
The metrics on a page are arranged by a business dimension or point of view. A point of view is
used to limit the data that you see in Enterprise Metrics. Points of view are extremely powerful,
because they allow you to determine which data is included or excluded in a metric.
The point of view information is displayed in the Console. You can use the values in the
Console to change the breakdown of the data in the Content area. For example, to see data by
Sales Organization, click the Sales Org hierarchy in the Point of View area to highlight it.
134
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Enterprise Metrics
Figure 17
Sales Organization Point of View
➤ To change the point of view, click a value listed in the Console.
Drilling to View Additional Detail
You can use Drill buttons to drill to details for a chart. For example, if you are viewing 30
customers on a page, you can click a Drill button to show detail about one customer.
Note: The hierarchies of values displayed below the Summary charts are predefined by the Enterprise Metrics Editor.
➤ To drill to detail:
1 Click Drill for the value that you want to investigate.
Detailed values are displayed in the Detail charts and the Summary charts. The summary is
limited to the values you drilled on. For example, if the point of view is Sales Org. and you drill
on Americas, you can drill further and display Latin America, and the detail for Latin America
breaks down into the sales representatives.
Note: You may need use the scroll arrows to view additional Detail charts.
2 To drill deeper, click another Drill button.
Note: The Console helps you track which items you drilled.
Using the Investigate Section
135
If you drilled to detail, click an object to display the previous set of charts:
●
Top Drill button, left of the Summary charts
●
Previous
●
Reset (to remove all drills from the page and return to viewing the first hierarchy)
Note: You may be unable able to drill on some values. Value hierarchies are predefined by the Enterprise Metrics Editor.
If you use the Summary row Drill button to return to the previous display, you can continue to
click it to return to the highest level. For example, if you are viewing the lowest level detail level
for sales representatives, click the Summary row Drill button to return to see all sales reps for
Latin America. To return to show all sales organizations, click the Latin America Drill button
next to the Summary charts, then click the Americas Drill button next to the Summary charts.
Searching
For a large number of chart detail rows, use Search to find values quickly. If the Search button
is available, click the Search box, enter a value, and click Search. For example, to view only data
for BankUSA, type BankUSA and click Search.
If you are searching a large customer list and are unsure how to spell a name, you can type the
first characters. For example, you can type M in the Search box to jump to customers starting
with M.
Note: The Search button is available only if the Detail chart rows are listed alphabetically. If a chart column is sorted
numerically on the cell value, you must change the sort to Not by this Chart to make the Search button available.
Fast Scrolling
On page with more than 20 chart data rows, you can use the Fast scroll. buttons.The arrow
buttons are above the Detail chart column Drill buttons. To scroll quickly through 20 rows at a
time, click a directional arrow. To scroll quickly to the end of the charts on a page, click the
arrow with the vertical line on the right. Use the arrow with the vertical line on the left to
return to the first 20 charts.
Drilling to Additional Report Detail
Just as you can drill to detailed metric information on the page, you can also drill to a report.
The Enterprise Metrics Editor determines the drill path, so the ability to drill to reports
depends on your application configuration.
136
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Enterprise Metrics
Figure 18
Drill Button
Displaying Chart Descriptions
Use the shortcut menu to quickly show a chart column description.
➤ To show chart descriptions:
1 Click the dog-ear in the Column header area and select Describe from the shortcut menu.
Chart Description is displayed, showing the chart subject and name followed by a list of
charted metrics. If a metric is extrapolated in the chart, an (e) is shown after the metric label.
Because the metric label can differ from the metric name in the database, the Enterprise
Metrics metric name is displayed in parentheses () on the line after the metric label.
After listing the charted metrics, Chart Description shows definitions of the Chart cell value,
the Highlighting value (which corresponds to a ZoomChart detail line), and thresholds applied
for cell value highlighting. An (e) in these definitions indicates that extrapolation is applied.
You can also click Show Chart Info to display chart information in the Dictionary Section. See
“Using the Dictionary Section” on page 142.
2 Click Close.
For additional information on interpreting what you see in Chart Description and obtaining
additional information on the Chart page, see “Displaying Object Information” on page 143.
Using the Pinpoint Section
The Enterprise Metrics Pinpoint Section allows you to view metrics in a tabular report
format. You can easily view up-to-date information in the Pinpoint Section and drill to
additional detailed information by clicking the hyperlinks in the Content area.
The following topics explains how to use the Pinpoint Section to view detailed information:
●
“Pinpoint Section Elements” on page 138
●
“Selecting Pages” on page 139
●
“Using Hyperlinks to View Additional Detail” on page 139
●
“Changing Points of View” on page 140
●
“Sorting Pinpoint Section Data” on page 141
●
“Displaying Report Descriptions” on page 141
Using the Pinpoint Section
137
Although Hyperion System 9 BI+ Enterprise Metrics Workspace currently offers a very limited
printing capability, the Personalization Workspace offers advanced printing capabilities and
also allows export of data in various formats.
Pinpoint Section Elements
The Pinpoint Section enables you to:
●
View detailed reports in predefined, tabular layouts.
●
Apply points of view or parameters to the numerical information displayed.
●
Drill using the hyperlinks
Figure 19
Enterprise Metrics Pinpoint Section
1
2
3
Pinpoint Section elements:
138
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Enterprise Metrics
1
2
Mini Report /
Mini Report Title
A report component
Includes the report layout, headings, formats, hyperlinks, and queries to load the report. Reports can include
multiple mini reports, so you may see multiple titles.
Point of View
A data filter that you apply by entering values on the Console
The resultant report that is displayed on the right automatically dims until you click Refresh.
3
Report
Information in
the Content Area
Displayed in the Content Area, often with blue hyperlinks
Note: Reports are predefined by your company’s business analysts and Enterprise Metrics Editor. If you would like to see
reports in Enterprise Metrics that are not currently available, contact your Enterprise Metrics Editor.
Selecting Pages
You can access the Report page in these ways:
●
Click a report hyperlink in the Monitor Section. See “Using Hyperlinks to View Pinpoint
Section Details” on page 128.
●
Drill from an Investigate Section chart. See “Using Hyperlinks to View Additional Detail”
on page 139.
●
Click the Pinpoint Section, then choose a Report page from the Pages menu.
➤ To view report detail:
1 Click Pinpoint Section.
2 Click the Pages menu and select a Report page.
3 Click Refresh.
The report data is displayed in the Content area.
Using Hyperlinks to View Additional Detail
Blue text indicates hyperlinks you can use for drilling to additional information in a report.
➤ To use hyperlinks for drilling, click a blue item in the Content area.
Depending on the report, you may see an additional hyperlink to further detail, such as orders
for an area in a region.
Tip: Click Previous on the Console to return to the previous Report page, or use the Monitor or
Investigate Section to return to those pages.
Using the Pinpoint Section
139
Changing Points of View
You can filter data in the Pinpoint Section using the Console. The results report displayed on
the right automatically dims until you click Refresh.
Note: Depending on the report, you may see a point of view labeled Date Range. This is a very powerful point of view
that enables you to select a time period for the data you want to view in the report. For example, you may only
want to see customers that placed orders this month.
Each time you choose a point of view, view another Report page, or sort information using an
Ordering point of view, click Refresh to display the report detail.
Points of view are displayed in two ways: as a list where you select a value, or as a box where you
enter a value. You use the list for a small number of values and the box for a large number. The
Enterprise Metrics Editor determines the selection type when mini reports are created.
In some point of view boxes, you can enter the first few characters and click Refresh to display
only data starting with those letters. For example, if you type Ba and click Refresh, only
customer names that start with Ba are displayed in the Content area. Wildcards are available
when a field, such as customer name, order number, or opportunity ID, is included in a report.
You can also use % as a wildcard. For example, if you are unsure whether a customer name is
Privado, Pravado, or Provado, you can type in Pr%v to find this customer.
➤ To change the point of view:
1 Click the arrow of a point of view listed in the Console.
The report that is displayed in the Content area dims.
140
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Enterprise Metrics
2 Click Refresh.
The report is redisplayed with the point of view.
➤ To apply a date range point of view:
1 If a Date Range point of view is available, click the arrow to select a period.
2 Click Refresh.
Note: You can apply multiple points of view. To ensure that you interpret the results in the Content area correctly, view
the points of view selected on the Console often.
➤ To apply a text input point of view:
1 If a point of view box is available, click the box and enter the point of view.
2 Click Refresh.
Sorting Pinpoint Section Data
Some reports include a point of view to order by for sorting report results in differently. In a
Customer Summary report, for example, you could sort alphabetically by customer name, or by
quarter-to-date bookings. If you are viewing orders information, you can sort the orders by
size or date.
➤ To apply an Order By point of view:
1 If an Order By point of view is available on the Console, click the arrow to select a sort option.
2 Click Refresh.
Note: You can apply additional points of view to a report using the options in the Point of View area of the Console. For
example, you can filter by Sales Organization and sort by Customer name.
Displaying Report Descriptions
To better understand the report results that are displayed in the Content area, you can use the
Report Info feature to obtain additional information. When a report is created, the Enterprise
Metrics Editor provides a report description that delineates the information included in the
report.
➤ To view report information:
1 Right-click in the report header area and select Show Report Info from the shortcut menu.
The Dictionary Section shows the report information.
Tip: A report can include multiple mini reports. The mini report information is shown in the
Dictionary Section Content area.
Using the Pinpoint Section
141
2 To return to the Report page, click Pinpoint in the View pane.
Using the Dictionary Section
The following topics explain how to use the Dictionary Section to get information on objects
displayed in Enterprise Metrics:
●
“Dictionary Section Elements” on page 142
●
“Displaying Object Information” on page 143
Dictionary Section Elements
The Dictionary Section enables you to:
●
View detailed information on Enterprise Metrics objects.
●
Drill using the hyperlinks to view additional information.
Figure 20
Enterprise Metrics Dictionary Section
1
2
The Dictionary Section has these elements:
142
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Enterprise Metrics
1
Console
Display of all Enterprise Metrics objects
To select an object, select the object type from the Pages menu, then select the object in the Console.
2
Content Area
Information for the object selected in the Console
In the Figure 20, the Content area shows information for the Current Deals and Deal Forecast Chart page.
You can use the Dictionary Section to understand what metrics mean.
Questions you can answer in the Dictionary Section:
●
Does the Average Selling Price include or exclude spare parts?
●
Is this the Gross Revenue before or after Credit Memos were applied?
●
Does this Shipped Unit Quantity include intra-company transfers?
The Dictionary Section enables you to see the information that your Enterprise Metrics Editor
provides when creating and customizing your metrics application. It also provides an easy way
to show you how a metric may be derived from other metrics, how to interpret two metrics
compared in a chart, and how to get as much value as possible from a report. In addition to
understanding metrics, the Dictionary Section is where you view the business questions for
each metric or page, which helps you become proficient at quickly using the information.
Displaying Object Information
The Dictionary Section enables you to drill to more information on an object. This intelligent
drilling is among the most powerful uses of the Dictionary Section. If Dictionary includes a
hyperlink, you can quickly get to the detail you need with just a mouse click. For example, if
you are viewing information for a Chart page, you can click the hyperlink to view individual
chart information. To see the detailed description for a chart metric, click the hyperlink to
jump to the description.
While viewing the metric information, you can jump to the individual measure description
(which can show you the exact column in the database, including hard-coded filters on the
data). It is extremely important to understand what data is included or excluded in the
measure, because it influences your business decisions.
These topics explain how to obtain details about objects in the Dictionary Section:
●
“Chart Page Information” on page 144
●
“Chart Information” on page 144
●
“Metric Information” on page 144
●
“Measure Information” on page 145
●
“Report Page Information” on page 145
●
“Mini Report Information” on page 145
Using the Dictionary Section
143
Chart Page Information
➤ The Chart page information shows detail for all chart columns on the page. This information is
displayed in the Dictionary Section Content area, but you can click the blue hyperlink in the
content area for more detailTo view Chart page information:
1 Click Dictionary Section.
2 Select Pages > Chart Page.
3 Click a Chart page in the Console.
The Chart page information is displayed in the Content area.
4 Click a hyperlink in the Content area to view Chart information.
The Chart Dictionary is displayed.
Chart Information
The Chart Dictionary provides information on each chart you see in Enterprise Metrics. The
Enterprise Metrics Editor uses Enterprise Metrics Studio Utilities to create charts.
➤ To access chart information, use one method:
●
Click a chart hyperlink while viewing the Chart page information.
●
Select Pages > Chart.
The Chart Dictionary shows the metric used in the chart, chart cell value, ZoomChart detail
lines, highlighting value, and thresholds (if set).
➤ To view chart information:
1 Click a chart in the Console.
The information is displayed in the Content area.
2 To view detail for a metric in a chart, click a hyperlink in the Content area.
The Metrics Dictionary is displayed.
Metric Information
The Metrics Dictionary provides information on each metric in a chart, as provided by the
Editor. These descriptions explain the formula for the metric, which helps you to understand
the results you see in Enterprise Metrics.
➤ To access metric information, use one method:
144
●
Click a metric hyperlink while viewing the Chart page information.
●
Select Metrics from the Pages menu.
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Enterprise Metrics
➤ To view metric information:
1 Click a metric in the Console.
The information is displayed in the Content area.
2 To view the measure for a metric, click a hyperlink in the Content area.
The Measure Dictionary is displayed.
Measure Information
The Enterprise Metrics Editor creates metrics that can be built from one or more metrics, or a
measure that instructs the database to return data for only specific columns in the database
table. Although the Enterprise Metrics Editor has different ways of creating metrics, measures
are typically the building blocks. Viewing measure information is extremely important,
because it helps you understand where the information for a metric is in the database.
➤ To view measure information:
1 Click a measure in the Console.
2 Click a hyperlink from the Metrics Dictionary, or select a measure in the Console.
The information is displayed in the Content area.
Tip: Click Previous to return to the previous Dictionary. To return to the Monitor, Investigate, or
Pinpoint section, click the section name.
Report Page Information
The Report Dictionary provides a brief report description, written by the Enterprise Metrics
Editor. A report can comprise several mini reports, and the Report Dictionary can help you
understand which ones it includes.
➤ To view report information:
1 Select Pages > Report Pages.
2 Click a Report page in the Console.
The Report page description and mini report information is displayed in the Content area.
3 Click a hyperlink on the Report Dictionary to link to the Mini Report Dictionary.
Mini Report Information
Mini reports are Report page building blocks. The Mini Report Dictionary provides brief
descriptions of them.
➤ To view mini report information:
1 Select Pages > Mini Reports.
Using the Dictionary Section
145
2 Select a Mini Report on the Console.
3 To return to the Monitor, Investigate, or Pinpoint section, click the section name.
Viewing Enterprise Metrics Tips
You can view context-sensitive tips for each Enterprise Metrics section. For example, when you
are viewing the Investigate Section, and you click Tips in the View Pane, tips are displayed for
the Investigate Section only.
➤ To display a tip:
1 Click Tips in the View Pane.
The tip list is displayed in the View Pane.
The tips are context-sensitive for each section in Enterprise Metrics.
2 Click the tip in the list.
Enterprise Metrics online help displays the selected tip.
Accessing Enterprise Metrics Personalization Workspace
Enterprise Metrics Personalization Workspace enables you to perform the same tasks as
Workspace, but offers extended functionality. With the Personalization Workspace, you can
personalize pages in the Monitor and Investigate Sections.
146
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Enterprise Metrics
Additional tasks that you can perform:
●
Adding pages in the Monitor Section
●
Editing pages in the Monitor Section by adding or modifying charts, adding page links or
URLs, or adding mini reports
●
Editing Chart pages in the Investigate Section by adding, modifying, or moving chart
columns
●
Changing chart types and chart scales in the Investigate Section
You can access the Enterprise Metrics Personalization Workspace from the Hyperion System 9
BI+ Workspace.
➤ To access the Personalization Workspace:
1 Click Tools > Links (at the top of the Workspace window) and select Metrics Personalization Workspace.
When you access the Personalization Workspace, the original Hyperion System 9 BI+
Workspace module closes, because you cannot work in multiple Enterprise Metrics client
windows simultaneously.
2 When prompted, click OK.
3 Click Yes to accept the security certificate.
The Hyperion System 9 BI+ Enterprise Metrics Personalization Workspace is displayed.
Accessing Enterprise Metrics Personalization Workspace
147
148
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Enterprise Metrics
Chapter
7
Using Hyperion System 9
Performance Scorecard
Hyperion System 9 Performance Scorecard is accessed through the Viewer module. The
Scorecard module provides a user-oriented subset of Performance Scorecard information for
these tasks:
●
Viewing all scorecards and maps that you can access
●
Printing scorecards and maps
●
Exporting employee and measure scorecards to Microsoft Excel worksheets
●
Exporting Cause and Effect maps as image files
From Workspace, you can launch Performance Scorecard in a separate window to modify
scorecards or maps, create notes and annotations, modify performance indicators, or generate
reports.
To view Performance Scorecard through Workspace, you must have both applications running
and single sign-on enabled. Your permissions for accessing data in Performance Scorecard are
also used in Workspace. To view a page through Workspace, you need permission to view it in
Performance Scorecard.
Performance Scorecard users with User or Designer security roles can access all scorecard
functionality in Workspace.
In This Chapter
Launching the Scorecard Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Viewing Employee Scorecards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Viewing Maps in Scorecard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Viewing Accountability Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Viewing Strategy Maps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Viewing Cause and Effect Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Exporting Scorecards to Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Exporting Cause and Effect Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Printing Scorecards and Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Setting the Default Workspace Start Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Using Hyperion System 9 Performance Scorecard
149
Launching the Scorecard Module
The Workspace provides several ways to launch the Scorecard module.
➤ To access Performance Scorecard through Workspace:
1 Use one method:
●
From the Viewer module, select Scorecards from the available applications list.
●
Select File > Open > Scorecards.
●
Select Tools > Viewer > Scorecard if the application is on your Favorites list.
2 In the Scorecard Browser, expand Scorecards.
The expanded list displays scorecards and maps for the Performance Scorecard object types
that you are authorized to view:
●
Employees
●
Accountability Maps
●
Strategy Maps
●
Cause and Effect Maps
3 Expand the Employees or Maps tree.
4 Select an element.
The scorecard or map is displayed in the Contents pane, and a Scorecard tab is added to the
bottom. Each available view type may have a tab: scorecard, scorecard in Excel, and map (up to
three tabs). The tab in the Contents pane remains while the Performance Scorecard module is
open. When you open a second scorecard, it replaces the existing scorecard.
5 Use these procedures to view and work with the maps and scorecards in the Scorecard module:
Table 24
Scorecard Module Options
Element
Purpose
Procedure
Employees
Displaying employee names and performance indicators
“Viewing Employee Scorecards” on
page 151
Accountability
Map
Displaying available Accountability Maps
“Viewing Accountability Maps” on
page 154
Strategy Map
Displaying available Strategy Maps
Expanding map names to display associated map
elements.
Expanding map names to display associated map
elements.
Cause and Effect
Map
150
“Viewing Strategy Maps” on
page 156
Displaying available Cause and Effect Maps
“Viewing Cause and Effect Maps” on
page 158
Exporting an image of the selected Cause and Effect
Map
“Exporting Cause and Effect Maps”
on page 161
Using Hyperion System 9 Performance Scorecard
Table 24
Scorecard Module Options (Continued)
Element
Purpose
Procedure
All
Exporting scorecards to Excel
“Exporting Scorecards to Excel” on
page 160
Printing scorecards or maps
“Printing Scorecards and Maps” on
page 162
Setting the current page as the default Start Page for the
Workspace
“Setting the Default Workspace Start
Page” on page 163
For details on working with measures, scorecards and maps in Performance Scorecard, see the
Hyperion System 9 Performance Scorecard documentation that is available from the
application Information Map or the Hyperion Download Center.
Viewing Employee Scorecards
Scorecards are composed of measures for evaluating the performance of employees, strategy
elements, or accountability teams by measuring specific tasks or completion of goals. You can
build scorecards that use lower-level, child or descendant scorecards, which means that the
performance of scorecards at lower corporate levels can be communicated in the scorecards of
the levels above it.
Each item on a scorecard is weighted to reflect its relative importance to the score.
➤ To view an employee scorecard:
1 Launch Scorecard. (See “Launching the Scorecard Module” on page 150.)
2 Expand Scorecards.
The expanded list displays all Performance Scorecard elements that you are authorized to view.
Note: The Scorecard tab remains while the Performance Scorecard module is open, but the tab contents change as you
select from the Scorecard Browser. One scorecard at a time is displayed on the tab.
3 Expand Employees to list all employee scorecards that you are authorized to view. The name and
performance indicator for each employee is displayed in the View pane, and a Scorecard tab is added to
the bottom of the Contents pane. The performance indicator reflects the status for the employee for the
date and the default target.
4 Click a name to display the employee’s scorecard and its associated measures in the Contents pane.
Scorecard measures may be grouped by perspective, such as Internal Processes or Learning and Growth.
The report provides this information about each scorecard measure:
●
Notes attached to the measure
●
Performance indicator for the current date and default target
●
Trend indicator (whether results are improving or declining)
Viewing Employee Scorecards
151
●
Collected result value
●
Expected target value
●
Unit of measure
●
Current score and weight (as percentages)
The contents of this pane and the report columns may vary depending on customized settings
made in Performance Scorecard.
5 Select these items on the scorecard to view additional information:
●
Measure
●
Notes
●
Status
●
Trend
●
Result
Performance Scorecard opens in a separate window, displaying the screen for the selected
measure. From Performance Scorecard, you can view or modify information for the selected
item. For details on working with scorecards and measures, see the Hyperion System 9
Performance Scorecard Application Designer’s Guide.
152
Using Hyperion System 9 Performance Scorecard
6 Save your changes in Performance Scorecard.
Viewing Maps in Scorecard
Scorecard uses three kinds of maps to depict your organization’s strategy and accountability
structures,:
●
Accountability maps illustrate the individual business areas, departments, and teams in
your organization that are responsible for actions that must be performed to achieve the
strategic goals and objectives. See “Viewing Accountability Maps” on page 154.
●
Strategy maps are detailed strategy representations that are used to depict how your
organization translates its high-level mission and vision statements into lower-level,
constituent strategic goals and objectives. See “Viewing Strategy Maps” on page 156.
●
Cause and Effect maps show the strategic relationships between strategy elements that
comprise your organization’s strategic blue print and the framework used. See “Viewing
Cause and Effect Maps” on page 158.
As an end user, you can only view those business objects that you are authorized to view. Only
users with Designer permissions can modify a Map. Contact the Application Designer if
changes are required.
Viewing Maps in Scorecard
153
Viewing Accountability Maps
Accountability maps enable you to view teams, departments, committees, and individuals
responsible for tasks that realize key corporate goals. Accountability maps enable
accountability elements like departments and committees to understand how their actions are
aligned with individual strategic goals.
Accountability maps illustrate individual business areas, departments, and teams that are
responsible for actions that must be performed to achieve strategic goals and objectives.
➤ To view an accountability map:
1 Launch Scorecard. (See “Launching the Scorecard Module” on page 150.)
2 Expand Accountability Maps.
The expanded list displays all Performance Scorecard Accountability maps that you are
authorized to view.
3 Click the Accountability Map name.
The map is displayed in the Contents pane, and a Map tab shows at the bottom of the Contents
pane.
p
Note: The Map tab remains while the Performance Scorecard module is open, but the tab contents change as you select
from the Scorecard Browser. One map at a time is displayed on the Map tab.
4 Double-click any element on the map, or select the element from Scorecard Viewer.
154
Using Hyperion System 9 Performance Scorecard
The associated scorecard is displayed in the Contents pane, replacing the map. A Scorecard tab
is added if not present.
Scorecard measures may be grouped by perspective, such as Internal Processes or Learning and
Growth. The report provides this information about each scorecard measure:
●
Notes attached to the measure
●
Performance indicator for the date and default target
●
Trend indicator (whether results are improving or declining)
●
Collected result value
●
Expected target value
●
Unit of measure
●
Current score and weight (as percentages)
Note: The contents of this pane and the report columns may vary depending on customized settings made in
Performance Scorecard.
5 Select these items on the scorecard to view additional information:
●
Measure
●
Notes
●
Status
●
Trend
●
Result
Viewing Accountability Maps
155
Performance Scorecard opens in a separate browser, displaying the screen for the selected
measure. From Performance Scorecard, you can view or modify information for the selected
item. For details on working with scorecards and measures, see the Hyperion System 9
Performance Scorecard Application Designer’s Guide.
6 Save your changes in Performance Scorecard.
Viewing Strategy Maps
Strategy maps articulate an organization’s long-term goals in concrete terms, with progress
determined by measuring results.
For each strategic objective (SO), you determine a critical success factor (CSF) and create tasks
or actions for accomplishing the strategic objective. Each element on the Strategy Map is
associated with measures. For example, a CSF of the SO “Increase Revenue” might be “Repeat
Customer Business,” and the actions for meeting the objective might include “Improving
Brand Awareness” and “Effective Advertising.”
You can create multiple strategy maps to illustrate corporate and business unit or domain-level
strategy.
➤ To view a strategy map:
1 Launch Scorecard. (See “Launching the Scorecard Module” on page 150.)
The Viewer displays Scorecard as the available application.
2 Expand Strategy Maps.
The expanded list displays all Performance Scorecard Strategy maps that you are authorized to
view.
3 Click the Strategy Map name.
The map is displayed in the Contents pane, and a Map tab shows at the bottom of the Contents
pane.
Note: The Map tab remains while the Performance Scorecard module is open, but the tab contents change as you select
from the Scorecard Browser. One map at a time is displayed on the Map tab.
Depending on the framework type selected for your scorecards, the map may show multiple
strategy elements categories. For example, if you select the Balanced Scorecard Collaborative
framework, the Strategy Map contains these element categories:
156
●
SOs
●
CSFs
●
Actions
Using Hyperion System 9 Performance Scorecard
4 Double-click any element on the map to display the associated scorecard in the Contents pane, replacing
the map.
The Scorecard is displayed in the Scorecard tab. Scorecard measures may be grouped by
perspective, such as Internal Processes or Learning and Growth. The report provides this
information about each scorecard measure:
●
Notes attached to the measure
●
Performance indicator for the date and default target
●
Trend indicator (whether results are improving or declining)
●
Collected result value
●
Expected target value
●
Unit of measure
●
Current score and weight (as percentages)
Note: The contents of this pane and the report columns may vary depending on customized settings made in
Performance Scorecard.
Viewing Strategy Maps
157
5 Select these items on the scorecard to view additional information:
●
Measure
●
Notes
●
Status
●
Trend
●
Result
Performance Scorecard opens in a separate browser, displaying the screen for the selected
measure. From Performance Scorecard, you can view or modify information for the selected
item. For details on working with scorecards and measures, see the Hyperion System 9
Performance Scorecard Application Designer’s Guide.
6 Save your changes in Performance Scorecard.
Viewing Cause and Effect Maps
Cause and Effect maps depict how strategy elements and strategic themes in your application
are interrelated, and how they support your corporate strategy. For example, a strategic
objective called “Improved Product Quality” probably affects strategic objectives for “Reduce
product returns” and “Increase customer satisfaction.” They also present hypotheses about
possible causal relationships between strategy elements.
158
Using Hyperion System 9 Performance Scorecard
➤ To view a cause and effect map:
1 Launch Scorecard. (See “Launching the Scorecard Module” on page 150.)
The Viewer displays Scorecard as the available application.
2 Expand Cause and Effect Maps.
The expanded list displays all Performance Scorecard Cause and Effect maps that you are
authorized to view.
3 Click the Cause and Effect Map name.
The map is displayed in the Contents pane, and a Map tab shows at the bottom of the Contents
pane.
Note: The Map tab remains while the Performance Scorecard module is open, but the tab contents change as you select
from the Scorecard Browser. One map at a time is displayed on the Map tab.
Double-click any element on the map to display the associated scorecard in the Contents pane.
The Scorecard is displayed in the Scorecard tab.
Scorecard measures may be grouped by perspective, such as Financial or Customer. The report
provides this information about each scorecard measure:
●
Notes attached to the measure
●
Performance indicator for the date and default target
●
Trend indicator (whether results are improving or declining)
Viewing Cause and Effect Maps
159
●
Collected result value
●
Expected target value
●
Unit of measure
●
Current score and weight (as percentages)
Note: The contents of this pane and the report columns may vary depending on customized settings made in
Performance Scorecard.
4 Optional: Select items on the scorecard for additional information:
●
Measure
●
Notes
●
Status
●
Trend
●
Result
Performance Scorecard opens in a separate browser, displaying the scorecard for the selected
measure. From Performance Scorecard, you can view or modify information for the selected
item. For details on working with scorecards and measures, see the Hyperion System 9
Performance Scorecard Application Designer’s Guide.
5 Save your changes in Performance Scorecard.
Exporting Scorecards to Excel
Using Workspace, you can export an employee or measure scorecard to Excel.
You can modify the file contents in the Excel format, although this information cannot be
resaved to Performance Scorecard.
➤ To export an employee or measure scorecard to Excel:
1 Launch Scorecard, as outlined in. (See “Launching the Scorecard Module” on page 150.)
2 In the Scorecard Viewer, expand the list to locate the scorecard.
3 From the expanded list, select the scorecard.
The scorecard is displayed in the Contents pane.
4 Use one method to export the file:
●
Select File > Export to Excel.
●
Right-click the scorecard, and select View Scorecard in Excel from the shortcut menu.
5 Use one method to view the file:
●
160
Click Open to display the file in Workspace on a tab labelled <scorecard name>
(Excel).
Using Hyperion System 9 Performance Scorecard
●
Click Save, use Save As to save the scorecard as an Excel worksheet, and then open the
worksheet.
The default file name for the worksheet is scorecard.xls where scorecard is the
scorecard name.
6 Optional: Modify the data on the Excel worksheet, and click Save. Changes in the Excel worksheet cannot
be reimported to Performance Scorecard.
Exporting Cause and Effect Maps
Using Workspace, you can export a Cause and Effect Map as an image file (.bmp,.jpg or
.png). Accountability and Strategy Maps cannot be exported.
➤ To export a cause and effect map:
1 Launch Scorecard. (See “Launching the Scorecard Module” on page 150.)
2 In the Scorecard Viewer, expand Cause and Effect Maps.
The expanded list displays all Performance Scorecard Cause and Effect maps that you are
authorized to view.
3 Select the Cause and Effect map.
A Map tab shows at the bottom of the Contents pane.
Exporting Cause and Effect Maps
161
Note: The Map tab remains while the Performance Scorecard module is open, but the tab contents change as you select
from the Scorecard Browser. One map at a time is displayed on the Map tab.
4 From the Workspace main menu, select File > Export Map.
The Export To dialog box is displayed.
5 Navigate to the location for saving the image file.
6 Enter a file name, and click Save.
Printing Scorecards and Maps
Within Workspace, you can print any scorecard or map.
➤ To print a scorecard or map:
1 Launch Scorecard. (See “Launching the Scorecard Module” on page 150.)
2 In the Scorecard Viewer, expand the tree to display the scorecard or map.
The expanded list shows all objects that you are authorized to view.
3 Select the scorecard or map.
4 Select File > Print.
The Browser Print dialog box is displayed.
5 Specify a printer, properties, number of copies, and page or page range.
6 Click OK.
162
Using Hyperion System 9 Performance Scorecard
Setting the Default Workspace Start Page
You can set a specific scorecard or map as your default Workspace Start Page.
➤ To set Scorecard as your default Workspace Start Page:
1 Launch Scorecard. (See “Launching the Scorecard Module” on page 150.)
The Viewer displays Scorecards as the available application.
2 Select the scorecard or map to use as your Home Page.
3 From the Workspace, select File > Preferences.
Workspace Preferences is displayed.
4 Select the General tab.
5 From the Content List under Default Startup Options, select the default option you want to use when you
sign on to Scorecard:
●
None (Default)
●
Favorite - If you select Favorite, a list of Available Favorite pages is displayed from which
you can select the specific page.
●
Desktop
●
Scorecard
●
Click Use Current Page button to use the content of the active page, whether it is a map,
scorecard or report.
Setting the Default Workspace Start Page
163
6 From the View Pane Tab list under Default Startup Options, select the default tab you want to display in
the View pane when you sign on to Scorecard:
●
Navigate (Default)
●
Document
●
Tips
Note: The Navigate option cannot be changed unless an option other than None is selected from the Content List, as
outlined in step 5.
7 Click OK.
The next time you open Workspace, the Scorecard page is displayed.
164
Using Hyperion System 9 Performance Scorecard
Chapter
Using Financial Reporting
8
Workspace enables previewing of Financial Reporting documents, such as reports and books,
from the Explore module. You can preview reports and books in HTML or PDF format.
Note: You must have file permissions to view reports or books. See the Hyperion System 9 BI+ Workspace
Administrator’s Guide.
In This Chapter
Workspace Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Tips Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Interacting with Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Enabling Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Preview Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Logging On to Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Viewing Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Viewing Snapshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Viewing Books. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Viewing Snapshot Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Using Financial Reporting
165
Workspace Tasks
Tasks, other than previewing, performed through Workspace.
●
Customize report and book elements. For example, change the POV before or after running
the report or book.
●
Export reports, snapshot reports, XML (report-definition file), PDF, HTML, Word, Excel,
or PowerPoint.
●
Use Related Content to link to Financial Reporting reports and Workspace URLs.
●
Subscribe to Financial Reporting documents to receive e-mail notifications when reports
are modified and add notifications to your favorites. See Chapter 4, “Viewing and
Organizing Information.”
●
Modify permissions to Financial Reporting documents. See Chapter 4, “Viewing and
Organizing Information.”
●
Organize the E-mail Recipient list.
Types of reports and books available from the Explore module:
●
Reports—Populated with data from data sources; users can customize by selecting
members
●
Snapshots—Contain static data for a specific point in time; populated with data when
saved.
●
Books—Contain sets of dynamic reports and, optionally, tables of contents. Reports are run
for all specified member combinations.
●
Snapshot books—Contain sets of snapshot reports and, optionally, tables of contents; can
be viewed for multiple POVs
Designers incorporate Workspace features into reports and books to enable viewers to perform
tasks:
Table 25
166
Workspace Features
Reports
Snapshots
Books
Snapshot Books
Prompt
Yes
No
Yes
No
User POV
Yes
No
No
No
XML, HTML, and PDF
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page Axis
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Expansions
Yes
No
No
No
Related Content
Yes
No
No
No
Grid POV
Yes
No
No
No
Data Security*
Yes
No
Yes
No
Using Financial Reporting
Table 25
Workspace Features (Continued)
Reports
Snapshots
Books
Snapshot Books
Export to Word, Excel, and
PowerPoint
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
E-mail Links
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
* Data source security is applied.
Tips Panel
The Tips panel lists tasks, tips, and details relevant to the current document and to the object
selected in the Workspace content area.
For example, if you select a Financial Reporting book:
●
Object tasks are listed in the Tasks section.
●
A list of object-associated help topics is provided in the Tips section.
●
File properties (for example, object name, MIMEType, author, and most recent
modification date) are displayed in the Details section.
Tips Panel
167
Interacting with Documents
For Financial Reporting, you use Document panel within the view pane, which lists
information and interactive sections for the current document, to change the user POV for
reports and books.
Note: The Document panel is not displayed if you select to display the POV above the report or book. See Chapter 1,
“Setting Preferences and Personalizing Your Workspace”.
168
Using Financial Reporting
Enabling Viewing
Workspace viewing prerequisites:
●
For PDF, Acrobat Reader must be installed.
●
For reports in PDF, a PDF writer (Acrobat Distiller, GNU Ghostscript, or AFPL
Ghostscript) must be installed with the print server. If a PDF viewer is not available, only
report names are listed.
➤ To use Internet Explorer for viewing PDF reports in Workspace:
1 Open Internet Explorer.
2 Select Tools > Internet Options.
3 In Internet Options, select the General tab, and, in Temporary Internet Files, select Settings.
4 In Settings, Check for newer versions of stored pages, select Every visit to the page.
5 Click OK, click OK.
Preview Preferences
You can set how to view reports and books; PDF Preview or HTML Preview. See Chapter 1,
“Setting Preferences and Personalizing Your Workspace.”
Logging On to Database Connections
You must be defined as a user, with a user name and password, in the data source that your
report is using. For example, if you want to view a report that uses Analytic Services as a data
source, you must log on to the database connection with a user account defined in Analytic
Services.
Logging On to Database Connections
169
Logging on usually occurs automatically. However, if you are not registered in the database,
you are prompted to log on through the Database Connection Properties dialog box, which
displays the database connection name assigned by the report designer. Ask your administrator
for a user name and password. See Chapter 2, “Exploring and Managing Items”.
➤ To log on to a database connection:
1 In Database Connection Properties, enter your user name and password
2 Click OK.
Changing Expired Passwords for Analytic Services Users
Analytic Services administrators can set conditions to control when Analytic Services users
have to change their passwords in Financial Reporting.
➤ To change your expired Analytic Services password from Workspace, when prompted:
1 Log on with your current user name and password.
2 Click Go.
3 in Change Analytic Services Password, enter your old password and new password.
4 In Confirm Password, reenter the new password.
5 Click OK.
Viewing Reports
If the report contains dimensions on the user POV, they are displayed above the report or book
or in the Workspace document panel. Setting dimensions on the user POV enables
modification of the dimensions, which results in a modified POV and requires regeneration of
the report or book.
Note: In the repository, you can display the current user POV settings page before reports or books are run. Current user
POV settings can be edited after reports or books are run. See Chapter 1, “Setting Preferences and Personalizing
Your Workspace.”
Reports viewed in PDF are generated using the user POV and output in PDF. Reports with
multiple page members are generated for all page members and displayed in Acrobat Reader in
Workspace. HTML reports are generated using the user POV.
Viewing and customizing reports tasks:
170
●
“Printing Reports and Books” on page 171
●
“Changing User POV” on page 172
●
“Responding to Prompts” on page 173
●
“Using Expansions” on page 174
Using Financial Reporting
●
“Using Related Content” on page 174
●
“Selecting Members” on page 175
●
“Changing Members for Grid POVs” on page 178
➤ To view a report:
1 Select Viewer > Explore, then select a report or book that has prompts.
2 Select File > Open > Document.
Note: The file opens in PDF or HTML, as set Preferences. See Chapter 1, “Setting Preferences and Personalizing Your
Workspace.”
Tip: Select the report or book from the repository. Then, right-click the report, and select Open in >
HTML Preview or Open in > PDF Preview.
3 Optional: If the Current User POV Settings page is displayed, change the settings and click OK.
See “Changing User POV” on page 172.
If the page is displayed, User Point of View is selected in Preferences for Financial Reporting.
See Chapter 1, “Setting Preferences and Personalizing Your Workspace.”
4 After the report opens, in the View pane, click the database connection right arrow, and review POV settings.
5 Select a dimension to invoke Member Selection, select another member, then click OK.
Report content changes to reflect the POV change. For information Member Selection, see “Selecting
Members” on page 175.
6 Select View > Preview User Point of View.
7 In Preview User Point of View, change one or more dimension selections by clicking Select.
8 In Member Selection, select another member, then click OK, click OK.
The report is refreshed. See “Changing User POV” on page 172.
Printing Reports and Books
You can print any type of report or book. For dynamic reports and books, data is refreshed.
For snapshot reports and books data is not refreshed.
➤ To print a report:
1 From the Workspace repository, open the report.
Respond to prompts and modify as needed.
2 Select File > Print HTML or Print PDF.
Logging On to Database Connections
171
➤ To print a book:
1 From the Workspace repository, open the book.
Respond to prompts and modify, as needed.
2 Select File > Open In > Complete Book in PDF to create a PDF of the entire book, including all reports.
➤ To print a report from a book:
1 From the Table of Contents view, select a report in the book and select Show Report.
2 Select File > Print.
Changing User POV
User POV, which specifies members for dimensions not defined on report grids, is available
for dynamic reports and books, as specified during design-time. You can change user POV
members before running reports and books and then run the reports and books to display
new-member data. You can also edit user POVs after running reports and books.
When you view a report or book in HTML, the user POV can be displayed in the Document
Panel of the View pane or above the report or book table of contents in the Content area.
Figure 21
Financial Reporting HTML Report
Each dimension or member is a link. When a link is selected, it displays a Member Selection
page from which you can select members for the dimension. The members for a dimension are
shown in Tree view, which is a hierarchal view of the members of the dimension. By default,
Tree view shows only the top-level member. You can expand a member to see its children.
Note: Financial Management dimensions often have more than one top-level node.
Member-search methods:
●
Expand data-member rows, and search visually. You can use the Expand all Rows button to
expand the rows.
●
Use the Find text box to search by member or alias and description. Search criteria can
include wildcards; for example, * and ?.
See “Selecting Members” on page 175.
172
Using Financial Reporting
➤ To preview user POV settings prior to running a report or book:
1 Select File > Preferences > General, and select Preview User Point of View - On, to preview user POV as the
default.
2 From the Preferences-General dialog box, click OK.
3 From the repository, select the report or book.
4 Select File > Open In > PDF Preview or File > Open In > HTML Preview, or save the book as a snapshot
book. Preview User Point Of View is displayed.
5 Optional: Click Select, and, in Member Selection, modify the POV.
See “Selecting Members” on page 175.
6 In Preview User Point Of View, click OK.
Responding to Prompts
Some reports are designed with prompts, which are displayed when you view the reports or
books containing the reports. You respond to prompts and provide requested information by
selecting members from prompt lists. You can edit prompts manually. If the prompts contain
alias names, you convert them to member names.
➤ To respond to a prompt when previewing a report or book:
1 From Workspace repository, navigate to a report or book that has prompts.
2 Select the report or book and select File > Open In > PDF Preview or File > Open In > HTML Preview.
Note: The file opens in either PDF or HTML. This is set from the Preferences dialog box. For more information, see
Chapter 1, “Setting Preferences and Personalizing Your Workspace.”
3 Under the Selection column Respond to Prompts, perform an action:
Logging On to Database Connections
173
●
Enter the member name in the text box for the respective prompt, if known. If the text box
is disabled, the prompt contains alias names. To edit the text box, select Edit Member
Names. If more than one member is provided for the prompt, members must be separated
by commas.
Note: Selecting Edit Member Names displays the member names in the text box, not the alias names. Edit the member
name associated with that alias.
●
Click Go to Member Selection,
. Select Members is displayed. The default member is
listed in the right panel - Selected area. See “Selecting Members” on page 175.
4 Click OK.
5 Optional: To undo any changes, click Reset in Respond to Prompts.
6 Click Run. The report or book is displayed.
Using Expansions
Expansions, available only in HTML reports, enable report viewers to see children of members
and their corresponding data. Rows and columns for which expansions are enabled are
displayed with right-facing triangles, which you click to view associated detail. After
expansions are executed, pages are positioned near the rows or columns selected for
expansion. Expansions are set up during design-time.
➤ To use expansions, perform an action:
●
Click the right-facing triangle for a row or column to view the next level of detail.
You can click multiple times, to see multiple levels of detail.
●
Click the down-facing triangle for an expanded row or column to collapse its members.
Using Related Content
Related Content links to other Financial Reporting documents and to documents on other
Hyperion servers. Related Content, set up by report designers, is available in HTML or PDF, as
specified by the designers. You view Related Content links by clicking grid values, which are
underlined by default.
Members of the cell selected for Related Content are passed to the user POV and used in the
related content report. Thus, the context of the Related Content report is the cell selected in the
primary report. For example, if you select the Margin row, Boston column cell, Financial
Reporting sets the user POV for the Account dimension to Margin and for the Entity
dimension to Boston and then displays the Related Content report. See the Hyperion System 9
BI+ Financial Reporting Studio User’s Guide.
Related Content rules:
174
Using Financial Reporting
●
If only one action (HTML or PDF) is enabled for the object, actions are not listed on the
Related Content page.
●
The default action (HTML or PDF) is listed next to the object label.
●
Folders open in the Related Content area.
●
Object-level security is observed inside folders and when reports are requested to be viewed.
➤ To use Related Content:
1 In a report, click a Related Content link.
The report opens if a single report is selected in the list of Related Content and only one action
is specified. If multiple reports are selected or multiple actions are specified, the Related
Content page is displayed in a separate browser window.
2
If Related Content is displayed, click a link.
If the link you click is not a folder, the document or action combination clicked is displayed.
Selecting Members
For reports, member selection is used to retrieve data and to determine how many members
are displayed. You can also search for specific members.
Member selection tasks:
●
“Selecting Members for User POVs” on page 177
●
“Finding Members” on page 177
●
“Changing Page Members” on page 177
Logging On to Database Connections
175
Select a Member Page
Figure 22
Table 26
Items from the Member Selection Web Page
Item
Description
Cancels changes made to the Member Selection dialog box
Find button
Used to select the type of search. A member can be searched for and displayed
as the name of the member, the description or name in the alias table, and the
name of the member and description/alias from a particular table. To search,
click Find.
FInd text box
Enter search criteria (not case sensitive)
Displays members that match the search criteria
Use Wildcards
Enables use of wildcards in the Find text box (selected by default)
●
? for one character
●
* for multiple characters
Note: If search criteria includes a space, enclose the search phrase in double
quotation marks. For example, *IC Offset* is "*IC Offset*". If the "*" wildcard is at the
end only, for example, IC Offset*, quotation marks are not required.
Rows Per Page
Specifies a number of rows per page to be displayed on the member list (default
20). If the number of members exceeds the number of rows, use buttons on the
Edit Member Selection header to scroll through the rows:
- Next Page
- Previous Page
Note: To permanently set the rows per page to a value other than the 20-row default,
see your system administrator.
Displays one or more member properties
Expands all row members of the hierarchy down to the child level
Collapses all rows
176
Using Financial Reporting
Selecting Members for User POVs
You can use the Member Selection dialog box to select members for reports and books. Using
selected dimensions, you can locate members and run reports or books for them.
➤ To select a member for the user POV:
1 Open a report or book that contains a user POV.
2 Click a dimension or member link. Member Selection is displayed.
3 Click the plus sign (+) to display children.
4 Select a member, then click OK.
The reports runs for the member. Note that report content reflects the POV change.
Finding Members
From the Member Selection page, for the user POV, you can find and select members.
➤ To find a member:
1 From the Find list, select criteria.
The search-options list is based on the report data source.
2 In Find, enter complete or partial text. You can use partial text with * or ? wildcard symbols. Use Wildcards
is selected by default.
Tip: Use double quotation marks to search for members containing spaces.
3 Click Find to display search results.
4 Select a member, then click OK. The reports runs for the member.
Changing Page Members
You can change a page member only if, during report design, multiple members are assigned
to the page axis of a grid. You change a page member to see different report views—HTML
reports only. After you change a page member, the report is refreshed and populated with the
new page member.
➤ To change a page member:
1 From Workspace, open a report with page-axis members in a grid.
2 From Page, select a member. The report is run, and data is displayed for the selected member.
Note: For PDF, data for page members is displayed on different pages.
Logging On to Database Connections
177
Changing Members for Grid POVs
Grids on reports can have dimensions on the grid POV. You can use the default member for
each dimension or select a new member to run for a report.
➤ To change a member on the grid POV:
1 Open an HTML report that displays a grid POV.
2 Click a dimension or member link.
3 in Member Selection, select a member, then click OK. The report runs for the selected member.
Viewing Snapshots
Snapshots are similar to reports, except that they contain data for a specific point in time and
thus do not retrieve data dynamically. Therefore, data-level security from the data source is not
respected.
You can view snapshots in HTML or PDF. However, the print server and a PDF writer must be
available to display both HTML and PDF links. If the print server is not available, snapshots
are available only as HTML links.
See Table 25 for a list of features available in snapshots.
➤ To view a snapshot:
1 From Workspace repository, select View > Display Items of Type > Hyperion > Snapshot Book or Snapshot
Report.
2 Right-click the snapshot and perform an action:
●
To view the snapshot in HTML, and select Open In > HTML Preview.
●
To view the snapshot in PDF, and select Open In > PDF Preview.
Viewing Books
From Workspace, you can view books in HTML or PDF. In PDF, you can view the entire book
or individual reports in the book. The print server must be available to display both HTML
and PDF links. If the print server is not available, books are available only as HTML links.
When you select a report name, the report is generated for all member combinations specified
in the book. You can add reports to books and modify members. To create and modify books,
see Chapter 9, “Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books.” To select
and modify members, see “Selecting Members” on page 175.
You can preview user POVs before running books. When you view books, user POVs and
tables of contents are displayed. User POVs specify members for dimensions not defined on
report grids. You can change user POV members and then run books to display new-member
data. See “Changing User POV” on page 172.
178
Using Financial Reporting
You use tables of contents to locate reports that you want to view and to set options.
Note: The time required to generate and display books in Workspace varies, depending on book size. You can cancel
books at any time.
For reports with multiple page members, you can change page members and refresh the
reports to show the updated data. Reports are viewed in Acrobat Reader within Workspace.
➤ To view a book:
1 From the list of files in Workspace repository, select View > Display Items of Type > Hyperion > Book.
2 Right-click the book, then perform an action:
●
To view the book in HTML, and select Open In > HTML Preview.
●
To view the book in PDF, select Open In > PDF Preview.
3 Optional: If the Current User POV Settings page is displayed, change the settings, then click OK.
See “Changing User POV” on page 172.
If the page is displayed, User Point of View is selected in the Preferences dialog box for
Financial Reporting. See “Selecting Members” on page 175.
4 Optional: Modify the user POV, from the Book Table of Contents page, and run the report for the new POV.
5 In Book Table of Contents, review the list of reports and locate the report with the preferred members.
6 Perform an action:
●
For HTML books, click File > Open In > HTML Preview.
●
For PDF books, click File > Open In > PDF Preview to view individual reports, or click File >
Open In > Complete Book in PDF to view the entire book.
7 Optional: Perform one or two actions:
●
From the book editor, add reports and re-run the book.
See Chapter 9, “Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books.”
●
From the book editor or from the book POV, modify members.
See “Selecting Members” on page 175.
Viewing Snapshot Books
You can view snapshot books from Workspace in HTML or PDF. When you view snapshot
books in PDF, you can view the entire snapshot book or individual snapshot reports. The print
server must be available to display both HTML and PDF links. If the print server is not
available, snapshot books are available only as HTML links.
When you view snapshot books, tables of contents are displayed. You use tables of contents to
locate snapshot reports that you want to view and to set options.
Viewing Snapshot Books
179
➤ To view a snapshot book:
1 From the repository, select View > Display Items of Type > Hyperion > Snapshot Book.
2 Right-click a snapshot book, then perform an action:
●
To view the snapshot book in HTML, then select Open In > HTML Preview.
●
To view the snapshot book in PDF, select Open In > PDF Preview.
3 Optional: From the Table of Contents page, modify the user POV and run the report for the new POV.
4 In Book Table of Contents, review the list of reports and locate the report with the preferred members.
5 Perform an action:
180
●
For HTML snapshot books, click File > Open In > HTML Preview.
●
For PDF snapshot books, click File > Open In > PDF Preview to view individual snapshot
reports, or click File > Open In > Complete Book in PDF to view the entire snapshot book.
Using Financial Reporting
Chapter
9
Designing Documents for
Financial Reporting Batches and
Books
From the Financial Reporting module of Workspace, batches can be created, maintained, and
scheduled and books can be created, maintained, and run. Also, advanced member selection
provides capabilities such as member functions; for example, Children, Descendants and lists
which can be used when editing books.
In This Chapter
About Designing Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Designing Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Creating Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Selecting Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Saving Books and Snapshot Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Opening Books or Snapshot Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Renaming Books and Snapshot Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Previewing and Printing Books and Snapshot Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Changing the Book Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Exporting Books and Snapshot Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Designing Batches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Defining Prompts for a Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Opening Batches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Assigning File Permissions to Snapshots and Snapshot Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books
181
About Designing Documents
For Financial Reporting module, you can define and save batches using Workspace new
document wizard and copy and delete batches in the repository. Deleting a batch requires file
permissions to the batch. By default, only the scheduling user is assigned access rights to
snapshots and snapshot books in the repository. If you have file permissions to a batch, you
can run every report in the batch when scheduled. The scheduling user can assign file
permissions to other users and groups at the time of scheduling. For more information, see
“Assigning File Permissions to Snapshots and Snapshot Books” on page 196.
Scheduled batches have a scheduled batch POV (Point of View), which you can modify while
scheduling. You can also specify prompt information for the batch. The POV and prompt
information, provides values for the POV and prompts specified for each book and report
contained in the batch. You can schedule batches to be processed immediately or in the future.
For more information on the scheduled batch POV, see Chapter 13, “Scheduling Jobs and
Batches.”
Reports or snapshot reports created in Financial Reporting Studio, can be assembled into a
book, enabling you to generate their output in one session from Workspace. For example, you
can schedule a set of reports to run once a month. You can configure books to generate several
versions of a report and different member selections. A book containing those reports can be
run at once. The reports contained in the book can be printed or viewed individually in
entirety.
Two types of books can be define and saved to the repository:
●
Books—Comprises of reports and snapshot reports. When you run a book, the report data
is dynamically retrieved from the database; the snapshot data remains static.
●
Snapshot books—A book saved as a snapshot book. The data contained in the reports, as
well as a table of contents, is created when you save a book. Whenever a snapshot book is
viewed, data-level security does not apply; data-level security is applied when the snapshot
book is created and is based upon the data level security that is set for the user that saved
the snapshot book.
A book contains a book POV, which is a combination of all dimensions in the user POVs for
each report in the book. Dimensions that are not defined in a report, default to the user POV
member and the dimensions are displayed in the book POV of the Book Editor. You can also
select the user POV as a member on the book POV, allowing you to modify the parameters
since they are no longer stored in the book definition.
The member selected for a dimension in the book POV is used in each report referencing the
book POV for that dimension. The data sources in the POV match the data sources used by the
reports in the book.
Note: When a book scheduled as part of a batch, the dimension referring to the user POV are controlled by the
scheduled batch POV.
Tasks that can be performed with books and snapshot books:
182
Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books
●
Use batches to group and process sets of books. See Chapter 13, “Scheduling Jobs and
Batches.”
●
E-mail links to the books or snapshot books. See Chapter 2, “Exploring and Managing
Items.”
●
Change a book’s data source. See Chapter 2, “Exploring and Managing Items.”
●
Delete books or snapshot books. See Chapter 2, “Exploring and Managing Items.”
●
Import books and snapshot books from a file system outside of the repository. See
Chapter 3, “Importing Items.”
●
Export books and snapshot books. See Chapter 3, “Importing Items.”
●
Perform advanced member selection capabilities such as member functions for Children
and Descendants, and lists.
Designing Documents
From Workspace, you can create a book or batch using the Select a Task wizard. For more
information on these topics, see the following:
●
“Creating Books” on page 183
●
“Designing Batches” on page 194
Creating Books
Creating books includes the following:
●
“Saving Books and Snapshot Books” on page 191
●
“Opening Books or Snapshot Books” on page 191
●
“Renaming Books and Snapshot Books” on page 192
●
“Previewing and Printing Books and Snapshot Books” on page 192
Books are created, edited and saved in Workspace. You must have administrator or designer
rights to create a book. A book can include reports and snapshot reports. The reports can
contain prompts for member selection, which are defined when the book is run.
Note: When you save a book as a snapshot book, expansions and related content are removed.
When adding a report to a book, dimensions from the book POV can be set to multiple
members. When the book is run, the report iterates over each member. For example, if North,
South, East, West, Actual, and Budget are selected, the book contains six versions of this
report. You can collate the printed output by member selection if the same member selections
are used for all reports in the book. This enables, for example, all the reports for East, Budget to
be grouped.
Creating Books
183
You can copy report member selections between reports if they use the same data source. This
eliminates having to select shared members multiple times.
A table of contents is created for the book. You can collate the reports within the printed table
of contents by report or by member selection. For example, you can create the following two
books:
Book 1
Balance Sheet (New York, Boston), (Q1, Q2)
Cash Flows (New York, Boston), (Q1, Q2)
Book 2
Balance Sheet (Actual, Budget), (Q1, Q2)
Cash Flows (New York, Boston), (Q1, Q2)
If you collate reports in printed books by report, The first report for each set of member
selections is run, then the second report for each set of member selections is run. The following
book is generated:
Book1 Table of Contents
Balance Sheet
New York, Q1
New York, Q2
Boston, Q1
Boston, Q2
Cash Flows
New York, Q1
New York, Q2
Boston, Q1
Boston, Q2
If you collate reports in printed books by member selections, each report for the member
selection is run. The following book is created:
Book1 Table of Contents
Balance Sheet
New York, Q1
Cash Flows
New York, Q1
Balance Sheet
New York, Q2
Cash Flows
New York, Q2
Balance Sheet
Boston, Q1
Cash Flows
Boston, Q1
Balance Sheet
Boston, Q2
Cash Flows
Boston, Q2
➤ To create a book:
1 Launch the Workspace.
2 Select File > New Document. The 1. Select a Task wizard is displayed in the Content area.
184
Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books
3 Select Collect reports into a book. and click Next.
4
is displayed in the Content area.
5 In Step 2: Select Files, select reports from folders, then click Add to selected
.
Tip: Press the Shift key to select multiple consecutive reports. Press the Ctrl key to select multiple
non-consecutive reports.
6 Optional: To remove a report from the book, select the report, then select Remove from selected,
remove all reports from the book, select Remove all from selected,
. To
.
Note: If you move, delete, or rename a report in the repository, the report is removed from the book the next time the
book is opened. To include the report, add it to the book.
Tip: To change the order of the selected reports, use Move Up,
and Move Down,
.
7 When completed, click Finish to open the Book Editor.
Note: To display dimensions in the table of contents, select the dimension name in the Book Editor and select Edit >
Display Members in Table of Contents. The Table of Contents column of the Book Editor indicates whether the
member name is hidden or displayed.
8 Optional: Add or change members selections for the book POV:
a. In the Name column, double-click the dimension to display Member Selection.
b. Select the members. See “Selecting Members” on page 185.
c. Click OK.
9 Optional: Copying report member selections from one report to another in the Book Editor:
a. Highlight the report containing the members to copy.
b. Select Edit > Copy Member Selection to, then click a bold-formatted report.
10 Select File > Save to save the Book with a file name.See “Saving Books and Snapshot Books” on
page 191.
Selecting Members
You can select members, create and save member lists, and select functions that dynamically
retrieve members from the database connection.
Selecting Members
185
The following figure shows the Member Selection dialog box for the product dimension. The
left panel shows the Members, Lists, and Functions tabs. For information on member lists and
functions, see the Hyperion System 9 BI+ Financial Reporting Studio User’s Guide. You can add
additional column headings in the Members tab
Figure 23
Member Selection Dialog Box
Note: Substitution variables have been placed in a directory.
➤ To add column headings to the left panel of the Members tab display:
1 Select Show Properties,
, then select the column name.
➤ To view a hierarchy other than the one that is displayed:
1 Click a hierarchical dimension in the Available area of the Members tab.
2 Click the Hierarchy drop-down list, then select the hierarchy.
3 Click OK.
Note: The properties below the Available area are displayed only if you are reporting on Hyperion Financial Management
Organization by Period for the Entity dimension. Both the parent and the entities that belong to the parent are
displayed.
When you run a report, the entity name is displayed; not the parent name.
186
Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books
Available Area
Member Selection has three navigational tabs; Members, Lists, and Functions. In the left panel,
you can show individual members, member lists, and functions that dynamically select
members.
Members Tab
The Members tab shows members that are associated with the selected dimension. By default,
the members for a dimension are shown in tree view, which is a hierarchal view of the
members of the specified dimension. You can also show the members in a flat list. By default,
the tree view shows only the top-level member. You can expand the top-level member to see its
descendents.
Lists Tab
The Lists tab shows member lists used to perform a query or to select members for your report.
The type of lists are based on the database connection. Member lists can be:
System lists—Predefined in the database when you create user lists; you can include members,
member lists, and functions. System lists are available when using Hyperion System 9 BI+
Analytic Services, Hyperion System 9 Planning, or Hyperion System 9 Financial Management
as database connections.
User lists—Lists that are created by you. When you select print preview or Web preview, the
members in the user-defined list are displayed in the order that you specified during list
creation. User lists can be created when using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Analytic Services as a
database connection. See Hyperion System 9 BI+ Financial Reporting Studio User’s Guide.
Dynamic lists—Predefined lists that are used with the DynamicMemberList function.
Dynamic lists are available only when using Hyperion System 9 Financial Management as a
database connection. See Hyperion System 9 BI+ Financial Reporting Studio User’s Guide.
Functions Tab
You can specify functions to use when selecting members for your report or adding members
to member lists. Functions enable you to retrieve members and related members from a
database connection. You can specify one or more functions and edit the function parameters.
See Hyperion System 9 BI+ Financial Reporting Studio User’s Guide.
Assigning Special Members
Use the Select Members dialog box to select the special members Prompt, Same As, Current
Point of View, and User Point of View.
●
Prompt—Acts like a variable that asks the user to select members. Prompts enable the
report writer to filter the dimension members from which the user can select when running
the report.
Selecting Members
187
●
Same As—Creates a column or row member selection with the same member selection
setting as another column or row.
●
Current Point of View—Acts as a variable that employs the POV to specify the member of
a particular dimension when the report is run.
●
User Point of View—Can be selected as a member on the book POV. The parameters can
be modified by the end user.
Selecting the User Point of View as a Member in the Book
Point of View
When a report is added to a book, the dimensions that are on the user POV in the report
definitions are applied to the book POV. Members on the book POV default to the user POV in
the Book Editor.
➤ To select the user POV as a member in the book POV:
Tip: To filter the repository by books, select View > Display Items of Type > Hyperion > Book.
1 From Workspace repository, right-click a book, then select Open In > Editor. The Book Editor is displayed.
2 In the book POV view pane, click a dimension for which you want to set up a user POV.
3 In Member Selection, select User Point of View for....
4 Click OK.
Assigning Members Using Functions
You can use functions and edit their parameters to select members dynamically. For
information on the use of, and editing function parameters, see the Hyperion System 9 BI+
Financial Reporting Studio User’s Guide.
Selecting Multiple Members Based on Criteria
You can select members based on criteria. You define criteria by creating expressions of
members, Boolean operations, and commands.
Boolean operators enable you to specify precise member combinations for the report, useful
with large volumes of data. Use the AND, OR, UNION, and NOT Boolean operators,
combined with expression commands, to refine your member selections.
➤ To select multiple members based on criteria:
1 In Member Selection, click Show Advanced Options,
188
Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books
, located in the right panel Selected area.
Note: At least two members must be displayed in the Selected area before you can create criteria.
2 Build expressions by using one or more of the following operators and symbols:
●
Select the Not Boolean operator to the expression. Not is the inverse of the selected
condition.
●
Type a left parenthesis, ( ( ) , to add an opening character to the expression.
●
Type a right parenthesis, ( ) ), to add a closing character to the expression.
●
Click in the Operator column, then select:.
❍
And—When all conditions must be met.
❍
Or—When one condition of several must be met.
❍
Union—To combine the data.
Note: You must use double parentheses if you are using three members. For example, if you selected descendants of
Market and you want to exclude East, West, and South, your advanced member selection query should be as
follows:
Descendants of Market AND
NOT ( East
AND
NOT ( West
AND
NOT
SOUTH
))
3 Click OK.
Searching for Members
You can search for members to edit. You can search using a text string or property (that is,
name and description). You can use a blank space as a separator to perform simultaneous
searches. To search a string for an exact match, including blank spaces, enclose the string in
quotation marks.
If you are searching for a list or function, you must activate this function by using the Find
Next or Find Previous button.
Note: For Financial Management, when you search for an entity, you need to search on parent.entity (for example.
D62VIELO.D62475LO). When you search just the entity, you need to precede the entity with a wildcard, (for
example, *D62475LO).
Find options to locate members:
Selecting Members
189
Table 27
Option
Description
Find
Enter the characters for the search, or select a saved search criteria string from the list.
The search string can be a partial search string, one word or multiple words.
Click to display the members matching the search criteria.
Use Wildcards
Enter the FInd text with wildcard symbols (* and ?) to search for members. By default,
Use Wildcards is displayed.
●
Use ? to represent a single character search.
●
Use * to represent a multiple character search.
Note: If the search criteria has a space in it, enclose the search phrase in quotes. For
example, *IC Offset* should be "*IC Offset*". If the location of the "*" wildcard is at the end
only, for example IC Offset*, then you do not need to enclose the phrase in quotes.
In the List or Functions tab, highlights the previous item matching the search criteria.
In the List or Functions tab, highlights the next item that matches the search criteria.
➤ To search for members:
1 In Member Selection, enter text in the Find text box.
Note: The wildcard option is enabled.
2 Perform an action:
●
If you are searching in the Members tab, click the Find button
●
If you are searching in the Lists or Functions tab, click Find Next,
.
, or Find Previous,
3 Click OK.
Previewing Selected Members
You can preview the selected members. Members can include a list or function result from
evaluated member lists or functions, if applicable.
➤ To preview members:
●
190
In Member Selection, click Preview Selection,
Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books
, located in the right panel.
.
Saving Books and Snapshot Books
You can save books to the repository as a compilation of reports, snapshot reports, or reports
and snapshot reports. An existing book can be replicated by saving it with the Save As
command.
➤ To save a book or snapshot book:
1 From Workspace repository, right-click a book and select Open In > Editor to open it in Book Editor.
2 Select File > Save or File > Save As.
3 Select one of the following options from the Type drop-down list:
●
Book—Reports data will be dynamic when the book is run; snapshot report data will be
static, based on when the report was saved as a snapshot.
●
Snapshot Book —Reports data is saved and becomes static; snapshot reports data is static,
based on when the report was saved as a snapshot.
4 Enter a name and description, select a folder, then click Save.
Note: If you are saving as a snapshot book, the Respond to Prompts dialog box is displayed if any prompts exist in the
book or any report in the book and the Current User POV Settings dialog box is displayed. See Chapter 8, “Using
Financial Reporting.”
5 Navigate to the repository to establish file permissions for the book or snapshot book. See “Assigning File
Permissions to Snapshots and Snapshot Books” on page 196.
Opening Books or Snapshot Books
After you save a book, you can open it to maintain, print, or preview the book in HTML or
PDF format. When you preview a book, a table of contents is displayed with a list of reports in
the book. When you preview a snapshot book, the Table of Contents is displayed in PDF or
HTML format, depending on you preference setting. Snapshot books cannot be changed, but
they can be previewed, printed, and viewed from the repository. See “Previewing and Printing
Books and Snapshot Books” on page 192.
➤ To open a book or snapshot book:
1 From Workspace repository, navigate to a book or snapshot book and select File > Open In.
2 Perform an action:
●
To view a printed version of the book, select PDF Preview.
●
To view the book in HTML format, select HTML Preview.
3 The Content area displays the Book Table of Contents, the tab at the bottom of the browser displays the
book name and View (for example, TestBook - View). The report, snapshot or member name is displayed on
every row for which it applies in the Book Table of Contents.
Opening Books or Snapshot Books
191
4 Select one of the reports or snapshots in the Book Table of Contents, then click Show Report. The report or
snapshot is displayed in the Content area in HTML or PDF format, with the Report Name and POV in the tab
description.
5 To close the book or snapshot book, select File > Close.
Renaming Books and Snapshot Books
After saving a book or snapshot book or making a duplicate, you may want to rename the file.
➤ To rename a book or snapshot book:
1 Select the book in Explore and select File > Properties.
2 In Properties, select General.
3 Type another name and description into the Name and Description fields.
4 Click OK.
Previewing and Printing Books and Snapshot Books
You can preview books and snapshot books in PDF or HTML prior to printing. From the book
table of contents, you can select individual reports within a book to preview as PDF or HTML
or view the entire book with all of the reports in PDF.
You can also print an entire book or snapshot book or print individual reports in a book or a
snapshot book. When you print a book, the data is retrieved for the reports in the book and the
book is printed. When you print a snapshot book, the data has already been saved in the
reports when you save the book as a snapshot book.
Prior to running a book, you can preview the user Point of View and make any necessary
changes. This allows users to verify that the members on the user POV are appropriate before
running the report or book instead of after the output is displayed.
For more information on previewing and printing, see the following chapters:
●
Chapter 8, “Using Financial Reporting”
●
Chapter 2, “Exploring and Managing Items”
Note: Before you print a book, you should set the Book Setup options as described in the following section.
Changing the Book Setup
Book Setup options enable you to specify whether to include the printed table of contents, set
the page orientation, set the numbering of pages to consecutive, and include the table of
contents in the consecutive page numbering, collate the table of contents based on reports,
collate the table of contents based on the member selection, and select the member label you
want used in the table of contents for each data source.
192
Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books
➤ To change the book setup:
1 From Explore repository, right-click a book and select Open In > Editor to open the Book Editor.
2 Select File > Book Setup to display the Book Setup dialog box.
Figure 24
Book Setup Dialog Box
3 In the Page Setup section, select the following:
●
In Paper Size, select Letter, Legal, Ledger, A4 or A3.
●
To continue the page numbering from the previous report in the book, select Consecutive
Page Numbers. To begin each report in the book with page 1, deselect Consecutive Page
Numbers. To include the table of contents in the consecutive numbering scheme, select
Include Table of Contents.
Note: Page numbering must be specified in the header or footer of each report in the book before you can print the page
number.
●
In Collate Reports By, select an option for collating the printed table of contents:
❍
Select Reports to collate based on the reports.
❍
Select Member Selection to collate based on the member selection.
4 In the Table of Contents section of the dialog, select the following:
●
To include the book table of contents when printing, click Include Table of Contents in
Printed Output.
Note: For HTML or PDF preview, this option does not apply. The book preview always includes the table of contents for
the book.
Changing the Book Setup
193
●
Select Portrait or Landscape for the orientation of the Table of Contents.
●
In Member Labels in Table of Contents, select the member label to use in the table of
contents for the data source that you are currently using. The listed options depend on the
data source you are using.
5 Click OK, or click Cancel to reset your selections.
Exporting Books and Snapshot Books
You can export books and snapshot books from the repository. See Chapter 2, “Exploring and
Managing Items.”
Designing Batches
Using batches, you can process sets of reports and books simultaneously. Batch creation is
comprised of the name, the reports, books, snapshots, snapshot books, and prompts. The
prompt information is for the current batch you are running.
Saved batches can be modified, removed, or rescheduled. You can duplicate a batch to use
some or all of the same properties as the original batch.
➤ To design a batch:
1 Launch the Workspace.
2 Select File > New Document. The Select a Task wizard is displayed.
3 Select Batch Reports for Scheduling., then click Next.
4 In Type, filter your selection by Financial Reporting report, Snapshot report, Book or Snapshot book.
5 Select a report type and move it to the Selected Items panel by clicking Add to selected,
.
6 Optional: To remove a report type from Selected Items, select the report, then click Remove from
selected,
. To remove all reports from Selected Items, select Remove all from selected,
.
Note: If you move, delete, or rename a report in the repository, the report is removed from the book the next time the
book is opened. To include the report, add it to the book.
Tip: To change the order of the selected reports, use Move Up,
7 Click Finish to open the Batch Editor.
194
Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books
and Move Down,
.
Tip: If you select a report type multiple times, you are prompted to enter a new name for the
duplicate report type. The renamed report type is listed in the Batch Editor with its original
name followed by the new name in parentheses. To discard the duplicate report, click Cancel.
8 Respond to any prompts that are displayed. See “Defining Prompts for a Batch” on page 195.
9 Select File > Save As.
10 Select a folder, enter a name and description, and click Save.
➤ To duplicate and edit batch properties based on a scheduled batch:
1 From the Views panel, select Schedule, then select Batch Scheduler.
2 Select a Scheduled Batch select Edit > Duplicate and Edit Properties.
3 In Schedule Batch, perform an action:
●
To duplicate properties for a new batch in the repository, search and select the batch and
click Next.
●
To duplicate properties for the selected scheduled batch, click Next.
4 Edit the properties of the batch as needed. For example, you can change the Start Time or Destination
settings.
5 Click Finish.
➤ To modify a batch:
1 From the Views panel, select Schedule, then select Batch Scheduler.
2 Select Edit > Properties.
3 In Schedule Batch, select a batch and click Next.
4 Make changes, and click Finish.
➤ To delete a batch:
1 From the Views panel, select Schedule, then select Batch Scheduler.
2 In Batch Scheduler, select a batch, then select Edit > Delete.
3 Click Yes.
Defining Prompts for a Batch
Prompts are requests for members in the report or book. If reports or books in a batch have
prompts, the end user can select the members in the Batch Editor.
➤ To define prompts:
1 Select File > Open > Document.
Defining Prompts for a Batch
195
2 Select a batch. The dimensions that are set up with a prompt for the reports are displayed in the Member
Selection column Batch Editor.
3 Select a dimension, then select Edit > Member Selection.
4 In Member Selection, select the member you want to use in the report when the batch runs. See
“Selecting Members” on page 185.
5 Click OK to return to Batch Editor.
6 Perform an action:
●
Optional. Schedule the batch. See “Designing Batches” on page 194.
●
Save the batch by selecting File > Save, then File > Close.
Opening Batches
You open a batch to edit it or to schedule it.
➤ To open a batch:
1 Select File > Open > Document.
2 From the Type drop-down list, select Hyperion > Batch.
3 Navigate to the folder in which the batch resides.
4 Select the batch file and click Open.
Assigning File Permissions to Snapshots and Snapshot Books
To allow other users and groups to view snapshots and snapshot books in the repository that
you create when running a batch, you need to assign access rights to the users and groups.
➤ To assign or remove access to snapshots:
1 In the Viewer, select Schedule > Batch Scheduler.
2 Select a batch, then select Edit > Properties.
3 In Schedule Batch, click Next until the Destinations area of the Schedule Batch dialog is displayed.
4 Select Save As Snapshot in Repository.
5 Click File Permissions... and take an action:
●
To grant permission, click Get List. A list is displayed in the Available Users, Groups, and
Roles column. Select the users, groups, and roles, then click Add,
.
Tip: To display users, groups, or roles, select the Users, Groups, or Roles option from the drop-
down maneuver each respectively.
To manage access to objects and minimize maintenance, use groups.
196
Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books
Figure 25
●
Properties Dialog Box
To remove permission, select the users and groups in the Selected Users, Groups and
Roles column, the click Remove,
●
.
To grant an access right, select a user, group, or role from the Selected Users, Groups, and
Roles column.
❍
Click Edit.
❍
In Edit Permissions, select Empty, No Access, View, Modify, or Full Control as the access
right for that User, Group, or Role.
❍
Click OK.
Note: If you remove all users, groups, and roles for a batch, then only an administrator can see the snapshot output
generated by the batch in the repository.
6 Click OK.
7 Click Finish.
Assigning File Permissions to Snapshots and Snapshot Books
197
198
Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books
Chapter
10
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+
Interactive Reporting
This chapter describes the basic tasks for viewing and analyzing with Interactive Reporting
documents.
In This Chapter
Using Interactive Reporting Documents in the Hyperion System 9 BI + Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Using the Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Interacting with Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Working with Document Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Exporting Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Query Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Results and Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Chart Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Pivot Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Common Chart/Pivot Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Working with OLAP Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Dashboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Report Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
199
Using Interactive Reporting Documents in the Hyperion System
9 BI + Workspace
Hyperion System 9 BI + Workspace enables users to query relational databases and
heterogeneous sources (for example, users of SQL Server, Oracle, flat files, Production
Reporting/Web Analysis module content) and perform quick ad-hoc analysis by drilling down
and pivoting on the data to see patterns or exceptions. Many features help users to analyze their
data to conduct sales and key performance, financial, and forecasting analyses.
Three types of users can relational data source. “Developers” who have the database
connectivity software may use a full 32-bit application. “Power users” without this connectivity
or when there are more security concerns may be given access to query using a client connected
to the database through a server. Users can further given permission to create content
completely from scratch, using add-on software installed on their local machine and hosted by
the web browser. “Information consumer users” typically use a “thin client” approach; no
software is loaded for these users, who instead interact with a DHTML-based series of pages.
The topics in this section explain how use to an Interactive Reporting document (.bqy) in
Hyperion System 9 BI + Workspace for Information consumer users.
Using the Toolbars
Use the Standard and Interactive toolbars to navigate through the workspace and work with
common commands.
Standard Toolbar
The Standard Toolbar is used for common Hyperion System 9 BI + Workspace features:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
200
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
Table 28
Standard Toolbar Options
Element
Number
Element Name
Description
1
New Document
Displays the New Document Wizard, which enables you to create a document for Online Analysis,
collect highly formatted reports into a book, or batch highly formatted reports for scheduling.
2
Open
Displays the Open dialog box from which you can navigate to a file.
3
Logoff
Logs off without saving any information.
4
Viewer
Display many different types of documents and maintains a list of opened documents, so you can
switch quickly between multiple documents.
5
Schedule
Manage jobs, batches and events for automated processing.
6
Explore
Lists and the contents of the Repository, so that you can mange and control files and folders.
7
Administer
Enables you to manage users, user groups, user preferences, roles and authentication methods.
8
Impact Manager
Updates Interactive Reporting documents when the database structures, database connections or
links to external data sources change.
9
Desktop
Enables you to display items which are shown as icons. The purpose of the desktop is to store items
for quick reference or use for use as a scratch pad.
10
Home
Displays the Start Page for the Hyperion System 9 BI + Workspace.
11
Toggle Masthead
Toggles the display of the Masthead. The Masthead crosses the application window below the title
bar. It identifies the Hyperion product in use, and enables components to customize and co-brand
part of the user interface.
12
Toggle View Pane
Toggles the display of the View pane. The View Pane extends down the left side of the interface. At
the top of the View Pane is a series of buttons that enable you to jump between panels. Each panel
has a specific use and corresponding control.
13
Help
Launches the HTML Help page in a new browser.
Interactive Reporting Toolbar
The Interactive Reporting toolbar is specific to those features used exclusively for Interactive
Reporting documents:
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Using the Toolbars
201
Table 29
Interactive Reporting Toolbar
Element
Number
Element Name
Description
1
Data Layout
Enables the Data Layout feature.
2
Dashboard Home
Displays the Dashboard Home section.
3
Current Page
Shows the current page of the document.
4
Page Left
Moves one page in the left direction in the report sections. To move to the first page in the left
direction, select [Shift] + Click + left arrow. In the Chart section, this icon enables you to move one
view in the left direction.
5
Page Up
Moves one page in the up direction in the report sections. To move to the top view, select [Shift] +
Click + Up arrow. In the Chart section, this icon enables you to move one view up.
6
Page Down
Moves one page in the down direction in the report sections. To move to the bottom page, select
[Shift] + Click + Down arrow. In the Chart section, this icon enables you to move one view down.
7
Page Right
Moves one page in the right direction in the report sections. To move to the first view in the right
direction, select [Shift] + Click + right arrow. In the Chart section, this icon enables you to move one
view right.
8
Refresh
Refreshes only the current section against the database server to dynamically retrieve the most
current data set, with the exception of the Dashboard and Report sections. When the Refresh
command is selected in the Dashboard and Report sections, all queries in the document are
refreshed. Queries are refreshed in the order in which they are displayed in the section catalog of the
full client. For example, in a document with three queries, Query1, Query2, and Query3, the queries
are executed in that order when “Refresh All” is selected.
9
Export to PDF
Exports a section to Portable Document Format (PDF) and launches it inside your browser if the PDF
MIME type is set in your browser. The PDF format is created by Adobe and can be viewed outside of
your browser if you have Adobe Acrobat Reader installed. Adobe Acrobat Reader can be downloaded
from Adobe’s web site at http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep.html. If the PDF MIME
type is not set in the browser, the browser “Save As” dialog box is invoked.
10
Export to XLS
Exports a section to MS Excel and launches it inside your browser if the mime type has been set to
recognize the XLS file extension Thereafter, saving the file locally or manipulating the file is all done
by way of the MS Excel application. If the mime type is not set to recognize the XLS file extension, you
are prompted with a Save As Dialog and you must specify a local destination to save the XLS file for
future viewing of the data with the MS Excel.
11
Save
Saves the file locally and launches the document in the Interactive Reporting Web Client so that you
can view and save the Interactive Reporting document t to your desktop for offline viewing. The
Interactive Reporting document can only be viewed by the full desktop or web client. If the web client
has not been installed, the browser is launched automatically.
Tip: If you want to save the document to the Repository, use the File > Save or File > Save As command.
Paging Icons
Depending on how a report was designed, you may see an abbreviated version of the
Interactive Reporting toolbar referred to as the Paging toolbar. The paging icon version of the
Interactive Reporting toolbar contains the navigation controls for moving around a report.
202
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
Shortcut Menus
Use shortcut menus to perform operations on objects that you need to update and maintain.
Shortcut menus are context-sensitive menus that pop up.
For Windows users, shortcut menus are enabled by selecting an item and pressing [Shift] +
[F10] on the keyboard, or by right clicking the mouse. If the shortcut menu is enabled on the
keyboard, the menu is displayed at the upper, left most of the HTML frame.
If the shortcut menu is enabled by right clicking the mouse, the shortcut menu is displayed
next to the cursor pointer where you right-clicked the mouse button within the selected area or
on the item. Submenus derived from a shortcut menu are also available which group multiple
and related commands. Once you make a selection from a shortcut or submenu, the menu is
closed.
The table below lists the keyboard shortcuts:
Keyboard Shortcut
Description
Arrow Keys
Moves up, down, left and right on the shortcut menu.
[Enter]
Confirms and accepts an action associated with a shortcut menu item.
[Esc]
Closes a shortcut menu that is opening. You can also perform this action by selecting or
deselecting an item or pressing the [Tab] key.
Alert Dialog
An Alert dialog shows informational messages explaining why the alert is displayed. You are
required to acknowledge the alert before continuing since no other window can be active while
it is displayed. To dismiss the alert, click OK.
Interacting with Documents
This section describes how to work with an Interactive Reporting document (.bqy):
●
Understanding Interactive Reporting Documents
●
Creating an Interactive Reporting Document
●
Accessing Documents
●
Working with Document Sections
●
Refreshing Document Sections
●
Dashboard Home
●
Saving Documents
Interacting with Documents
203
Understanding Interactive Reporting Documents
An Interactive Reporting document (.bqy) is centered on data from queries (either relational
or OLAP) or from imported data. Any number of queries and Data Models can supply the data
in a document. A document can contain multiple queries with each query retrieving its data
from a different database including: relational databases, imported data files, local files and
OLAP servers. In the Workspace, the Data Model aspects of the document are not visible to the
end-user, but the ability to refresh data that come from these sources is. An end-user can
duplicate an existing query or create a query based on an existing Data Model.
Once a document has been created, it is saved to the Hyperion System 9 BI + Repository
located on the server.
When the Workspace user selects and retrieves a document from Section pane, the emphasis
becomes one of viewing, refreshing, and analyzing of the document instead of the query, Data
Model, layout, and report building of the document.
Creating an Interactive Reporting Document
Interactive Reporting documents (.bqy) are files that can be created in Hyperion System 9 BI +
Workspace, Interactive Reporting Studio and Interactive Reporting Web Client. They can be
stored either on your personal computer or the Hyperion System 9 BI + Repository. Each
document can consist of one or more sections. The document can be used to retrieve
information from a database, analyze the information, and build reports.
Documents are centered on data from queries (either relational or multidimensional), or from
imported data. Any number of queries can be in a document. A document can contain
multiple queries with each query retrieving its data from a different database including relation
databases, local files and OLAP servers.
➤ To create a document:
1 Select File > New Document.
The Step 1: Select a Task wizard is displayed.
2 Select the Create a document option.
The Step 2: Select Data Source wizard is displayed.
3 Enter the name of the data source or browse to locate the data source and click Next.
Verify that the object type is Interactive Reporting by changing the Type to “Interactive
Reporting document”.
The Preference Setting determines the default directory for data source files. To go to the
Preference Setting, select Explore > New Document Folder.
If you cannot locate the folder, ask your administrator where it is located within the Hyperion
System 9 BI + Repository.
4 Click Finish.
204
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
Accessing Documents
Use the following procedure to open and close a document.
➤ To open an existing document:
1 Specify the URL of the Workspace in your web browser.
The Workspace login dialog box is displayed.
2 Enter your user name and password and select Login.
3 Open a document.
A document can be opened:
●
from Explorer by navigating to a document and double clicking it
●
by selecting the document and clicking Open on the shortcut menu
●
selecting File > Open
●
selecting Favorites and choosing the document (if the document has been added to
Favorites)
The document is opened in the Workspace. If a Dashboard section has been included in the
document, it is displayed in creation date order. Typically, a Dashboard section is shown first. If
no Dashboard section has been included, the document opens on the last saved section. If the
last saved section is a Query or Data Model, or fails for some other reason, the document
attempts to open the next section from the Sections pane, working from the top to the bottom
of the Sections pane until a section can be displayed.
➤ To close a document, select File > Close.
If you have modified a document, you are prompted to save any changes.
Saving Documents
To ensure that changes made to a document are preserved after you have performed an analysis
on it, use the Save features. The Save features in Workspace enable you to save a document to
the Hyperion System 9 BI + Repository (importing). To save a document locally, see Exporting
a Document in Native File Format.
Saving an Interactive Reporting Document
When you modify an Interactive Reporting document (.bqy) or document job, you can save
the changed document to the Hyperion System 9 BI + Repository. The Hyperion System 9 BI +
Repository is an efficient way to manage documents and distribute documents over a wide
network for end-user query and reporting.
Saving the document to the Hyperion System 9 BI + Repository can be made either by saving
the document with changes to the original document (Save option), or by saving the document
as a new document (Save As). If you do not have permission to overwrite a document, then you
must use the Save As feature.
Interacting with Documents
205
Using the Save Command
Use the Save command to save the changes to the document that you have permission to write
to.
➤ To save a document to the Repository, select File > Save.
Optional: You can also click the Save icon on the Interactive Reporting toolbar.
Using the Save As Command
Use the Save As command to save the changes you have made to the document when you do
not have permission to overwrite the document, or you simply want to save and rename the
document with your changes.
➤ To save as to the Hyperion System 9 BI + Repository:
1 Select File > Save As.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.
2 Type the name of the document in the Name field.
3 Type a description of the document in the Description field.
4 Click the Save icon on the Interactive Reporting toolbar.
Working with Document Sections
Interactive Reporting documents are files created and used to retrieve information from a
database, analyze the information, and build reports. Since Interactive Reporting documents
are integrated query, analysis, and reporting tools, these documents have multiple sections,
each of which governs one part of the query and reporting refresh. You create sections
progressively as you query a database, retrieve results, and then generate reports.
Documents are divided into multiple sections, each of which governs one step of the reporting
procedure. Document sections are created progressively when a database is queried, results are
retrieved, and reports are generated.
Each section occupies an independent window and performs distinct operations. You can
move back and forth between sections at any time to rebuild your query or alter your result
data. You can also position sections side-by-side in a Dashboard section.
The end-user does not need to have a strong technical understanding of databases. Data Model
sections are not available, and these sections are not visible in the Sections pane. Each section
occupies an independent window in the browser and shows discrete views of data. For
example, the Pivot section resembles a spreadsheet or crosstab report that lets you perform
drill down analysis of different data relationships. The Chart section graphically depicts
summaries, trends, and relationships in your data.
206
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
When a document is opened, the default home page is the Dashboard section. If the
Dashboard Home section cannot be displayed, then the document opens on the last saved
section. If the last saved section is a Query or Data Model (which are not listed in the Section
Navigation drop-down menu), or fails for some other reason, then the document attempts to
open the next section from the Sections pane, working from the top to the bottom of the
Sections pane until a section can be displayed.
For more information on using document sections, see the following topics:
●
Sections Pane
●
Selecting Document Sections
●
Adding Sections
●
Moving Between Sections
●
Duplicating Sections
●
Renaming Sections
●
Deleting Sections
●
Refreshing Document Sections
●
Printing Sections
●
Dashboard Home
Sections Pane
The Sections pane shows the sections available in the current document. Possible sections
include:
●
Dashboard – Upon opening a document, a customized Dashboard section can appear as the
document front-end. Each button selection, item selection, or navigation sequence can
invoke a script. Behind the scenes, the Workspace refreshes the Dashboard script commands
that can perform actions such as retrieve data, populate controls, hide objects, navigate to
different sections, and specify report parameters.
●
Report – The Report section allows you to view high-quality and professionally designed
reports. These reports can span anywhere from a complex critical operational report to a
Results set, a Chart, and a Pivot table. Use the reports to help you evaluate your business,
expand communications, and assist in the decision-making process.
●
Query – The foundation of the Interactive Reporting document, the Query section enables
you to connect to a relational database and download a prebuilt query or data model.
●
Results – Created when you refresh a query. The Workspace retrieves data to your
document and displays it in the Results sections as columns in a table.
●
Pivot – An interactive table that quickly summarizes, or cross-tabulates, large amounts of
data. You can rotate its rows and columns to see different summaries of the source data, or
display the details for areas of interest.
●
Chart – A fully interactive, two- or three-dimensional view of your data that provides
powerful ways to visually analyze your data.
Working with Document Sections
207
●
Table – A single-dimension report that displays your data in columns. Tables are often used
as building blocks in other sections.
●
OLAPQuery – A query section specifically designed for connecting to multidimensional
databases.
By default, an Interactive Reporting document has at least one Query section and one Results
section. Each section occupies an independent window and performs distinct operations.
You can move back and forth between sections at any time to rebuild your query or alter your
result data.
Selecting Document Sections
Sections associated with the document are shown in the Sections pane.
➤ To select a section, click the desired section from the Sections pane.
➤ To scroll up and down through a section, use the scroll bar on the right side of the browser.
Adding Sections
A new section is added based on an existing query and results set.
➤ To insert a new section in a document, select Actions > Insert > New Section.
For example, to insert a new Chart, select Actions > Insert > Chart, to insert a new Table, select
Actions > Insert > Table.
The Workspace inserts the new section and adds a new section label to the Sections pane. The
section label is based on the type of section added. A sequence number is added to the section
label if a section with the same name already exists.
Moving Between Sections
Although each section occupies an independent window and performs distinct operations, you
can move back and forth between sections at any time to rebuild your query or alter your
results data. You can also position sections side-by-side in multiple windows.
You can easily navigate between sections to work on queries, results, and reports.
➤ To move between sections, select the desired section from the Sections pane.
If necessary, use the up and down scrollbar to vertically through the Sections pane.
208
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
Duplicating Sections
A section that has been duplicated retains all of the content and formatting of the original
section. In addition a new section is added to the Sections pane. The new section label is based
on the original section label, but a sequence number is appended to the label. For example, if
you duplicate a section named SalesChart three times, the Sections pane shows: SalesChart,
SalesChart2, SalesChart3, and SalesChart4.
➤ To duplicate a section, select the section to duplicate in the Sections pane and select Duplicate
on the shortcut menu.
You can also duplicate a section by selecting a section from the Sections pane and choosing
Edit > Section > Duplicate.
Renaming Sections
The first section that you create is given the default section name, for example, Query or
Results. When you insert new sections of the same type as those that already exist, they are
numbered sequentially, for example, Query2, Results2, and so on. To assign sections different
or unique names based on your application, use the Rename command.
➤ To rename a section:
1 In the Sections pane, select the section name to rename.
2
Select Rename on the shortcut menu.
You can also select the section to be renamed and choose Edit > Section > Rename.
The Input Section Name dialog is displayed.
3 Type the new name for the section and click OK.
Deleting Sections
You can delete a section, but do so with care. Some sections are dependent on other sections.
Deleting one section could also delete one or more sections that you did not want to delete.
Note that you cannot restore a deleted section.
➤ To delete a section:
1 In the Sections pane, select the section to be deleted.
2 Select Delete on the shortcut menu.
You can also select the section and choose Edit > Section > Delete.
The Confirm Deletion dialog box is displayed.
3 Click OK.
Working with Document Sections
209
Dashboard Home
Upon opening a document, a customized Dashboard section can be displayed as the document
front-end. Each button selection, item selection, or navigation sequence can invoke a script.
Behind the scenes, the Workspace refreshes the Dashboard script commands that can perform
actions such as retrieve data, populate controls, hide objects, navigate to different sections, and
specify report parameters.
➤ To go to Dashboard home, click the Dashboard Home icon on the Interactive Reporting toolbar.
Refreshing Document Sections
You refresh a document section to retrieve the most current data set from the database to your
document. The Refresh command can be used in any of the query reporting sections. Once the
data set has been refreshed in one section, all sections attached to the document are refreshed
as well.
By default, the Workspace uses the Refresh Current command (refreshes the current object) in
all sections except Dashboard and the Report section. In some cases more than one query may
be refreshed, if for example, a report references results sets from multiple queries.
In the Dashboard and Report sections, the Workspace uses the Refresh All command to refresh
all queries in the document. Although queries are not visible in to the end-user, they are
executed in the order in which they display in the section catalog in the full client version. For
example, in a document with three queries, Query1, Query2, and Query3, the queries are
executed in that order when the Refresh All command is selected.
If a variable filter has been set for the query by the designer of the Interactive Reporting
document, the filter selections must be resolved before the query is refreshed. At that time the
user is prompted to select or enter filter values and complete the constraint.
➤ To refresh a section, click the Refresh icon on the Interactive Reporting toolbar.
Printing Sections
When you print a section, it is printed to a PDF file and launched inside your browser if the
PDF MIME type is set in your browser. The PDF file can be viewed online, or printed if you
need a hard copy of a report.
The PDF format is created by Adobe and can be viewed outside of your browser if you have
Adobe Acrobat Reader installed. Adobe Acrobat Reader can be downloaded from Adobe’s web
site at http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep.html. If the PDF MIME type is not
set in the browser, the browser “Save As” dialog box is invoked.
Note: A Query section cannot be printed.
210
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
➤ To export a document to PDF, select File > Print via PDF.
Optional: You can also print a section by clicking the Export to PDF icon on the Interactive
Reporting toolbar.
Tip: Printing a section and Exporting a Section as a PDF are equivalent features.
Exporting Data
Interactive Reporting documents can be exported in several formats, including:
●
Exporting a Section as a PDF
●
Exporting a Section to MS Excel (.XLS)
●
Exporting a Document in Native File Format
Exporting a Section as a PDF
Exporting a section to Portable Document Format (.PDF) allows you to preserve the layout
and format of the original section and transfer it across multiple platforms (such as Windows,
Unix and the Macintosh). It also enables you to save, print and distribute the file easily and
effectively.
To display and print a PDF file you must have Adobe® Acrobat® Reader™ installed. Acrobat
Reader is a self-contained application that can behave as an Internet Browser plug-in or as a
stand-alone application.
Acrobat Reader enables you to view, print and share a PDF file, but does not enable you to
create or modify it. The Acrobat Reader is free and can be downloaded from Adobe’s web site.
When the Acrobat Reader has been installed, you might have to configure your browser to use
it. For example you may need to associate Acrobat Reader as the application to read PDF files,
or have the PDF display in a separate window instead of the same window. You open a PDF file
by double clicking the PDF in the Explore module.
To save a PDF to your desktop for offline viewing, click the Acrobat Reader Save as Copy icon
on the Acrobat Reader toolbar. You are prompted to specify the directory in which to save the
file.
To print a PDF, click the Acrobat Reader Print icon. You are prompted to specify print
parameters and to print the report.
If the Acrobat Reader has not been installed, the File download dialog is displayed. You can save
the file to disk and open it from a location that you specify.
➤ To export a document to PDF, click the Export to PDF icon on the Interactive Reporting toolbar.
Optional: You can also print a document to PDF by selecting File > Print via PDF.
Exporting Data
211
Exporting a Section to MS Excel (.XLS)
You can export a section to Microsoft Excel and launch it inside your browser if the mime type
has been set to recognize the XLS file extension. From this point, you can save the file locally
and work with the data directly in the Microsoft Excel application. If the mime type is not set
to recognize the XLS file extension, you are prompted with a Save As Dialog and must specify a
local destination to save the XLS file for future viewing of the data with the Microsoft Excel.
➤ To export a document to Excel (XLS):
1 Click Export to XLS.
If the mime type has been set to recognize the section, it is launched automatically in Microsoft
Excel.
If the XLS file extension in not recognized, the Save As dialog box is displayed. Complete Step
2.
2 If desired, enter a new name for the section in the File Name field.
3 Select Microsoft Excel Workbook (.XLS) in the Save as Type field.
4 Select Save.
Exporting a Document in Native File Format
When a document is exported in native file format, the Workspace checks if the Interactive
Reporting Web Client has been installed and if so, launches the document in a browser. The
Interactive Reporting Web Client is a special application file placed in a web browser’s plug-in
directory. Plug-ins add seamless functionality to a web browser, enabling the browser to open a
plug-in’s particular file type as if it were an HTML file.
Any changes made to the document are not replicated to the original Interactive Reporting
document selected from the document list in the Hyperion System 9 BI + Repository (which
resides on the server and can only be changed by importing the Interactive Reporting
document again).
➤ To export a file in native file format, select File > Export > Native File Format.
If the Interactive Reporting Web Client has been installed, make any desired changes and save
the document to the Hyperion System 9 BI + Repository. If you do not have permission to
overwrite the document, use the Save To Repository As command to rename the document
and save it to the repository.
If the Interactive Reporting Web Client has not been installed, the File Download dialog box is
displayed. You can either open the document from its current location, or you can export the
file to disk and open it from an alternate location.
212
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
Query Section
The Query section is the foundation of any Interactive Reporting document. An Interactive
Reporting document can contain multiple Query sections that can access a wide range of data
sources (relational databases, OLAP servers, imported data sets, and local joins). Each Query
section has its own Results section and can be associated with the same database or different
databases (that is, the connection file or data model used is defined independently in each
query).
This section includes the following topics:
●
Interactive Reporting Database Connection Files
●
Data Model
●
Topics and Topic Items
●
Query Restrictions
●
Working with Queries
●
Working with Items on the Request Pane
●
Adding a Computed Item in Query
●
Computed Items and Data Functions
●
Data Functions
●
Applying A Query Filter
●
Applying Query Sorts
●
Refreshing a Query
Interactive Reporting Database Connection Files
Whenever you use the Workspace to query a relational database and retrieve information, the
Interactive Reporting database connection file and data model are used to interact
transparently with the database. The Interactive Reporting database connection file and data
models are not visible to the end user in Interactive Reporting.
The Interactive Reporting connection file encapsulates and stores connection information used
to connect Hyperion applications to a database. Interactive Reporting database connection
files specify the database API(ODBC, SQL*Net, etc.,), database software, the network address
of the database server, and your database user name. An end-user can specify the Interactive
Reporting database connection file and database password and logon. It is required for a
document to reference live information from the database.
Data Model
You use a data model to interact with a database to create queries that specify which data to
fetch from the database.
Query Section
213
Data models make the database more accessible because they display database tables
graphically as topics. They also:
●
Substitute descriptive names for arcane database table and column names. Create custom
views of the data.
●
Add computed fields for performing calculations on the retrieved data.
Data Models are not visible in Interactive Reporting. If a master copy of a data model has been
associated with a query, you can link a query to it.
Topics and Topic Items
A topic refers to a database table in the database and if is displayed in the Catalog List. Topics
are part of data models displayed in the Query section and can contain one or more items.
A topic item is an individual items in a topic or metatopic.
You build queries by adding topics from the Catalog list to the Request pane. You can also drag
and drop any topic item to the Request pane. When you refresh a query, data for all the topic
items present on the Request pane are returned.
Query Restrictions
The following Query features are either unavailable or restricted in scope in the Hyperion
System 9 BI + Workspace:
●
The Query Log and Custom SQL options are not available.
●
A subquery is indented in the Section pane, but it is displayed as a regular query in the
Workspace. A subquery cannot be added in the Workspace.
●
If a Interactive Reporting document contains a union query, the first query is displayed. The
Request and Filter panes in the Data Layout for the union query are read-only. In addition,
there is no Union Controller line. A new Union Query section cannot be created in the
Workspace.
●
Local Results can be displayed, but a new local result table cannot be created in the
Workspace.
●
Derived queries can be displayed, but a new derivable query cannot be created in the
Workspace.
Working with Queries
All Query sections in the Interactive Reporting document are displayed in the Section pane.
For each Query section, you can build a query by adding topics to the Request pane. You can
also apply filters to the data, or specify columns by which to sort the data that is returned from
the database.
214
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
Building Queries
You build queries by selecting the data you want to retrieve from a visual representation of the
database. Once you have selected the items to include in the query and refresh it, a Results set is
generated.
The Workspace offers two query method for building queries:
●
Duplicate and modify an existing Query section, which has been provided to you in the
Section pane
●
Link to predefined data model, known as a Master Data Model (if the appropriate adaptive
states have been granted)
➤ To build a query by linking to a Master Data Model:
1 Select Actions > Insert > Query.
A shortcut menu of available Master Data Models is displayed.
2 Select a Master Data Model.
The Request, Filter and Sort panes are displayed.
3 Click the Document icon.
Each table is referred to as topic. Individual items in a topic are called topic items.
4 Expand the Tables icon.
A list of topics is displayed.
5 Expand a topic to view and select the item(s) to include in the query.
6 Drag the topic items from the tables to query from the Catalog list to the Request pane.
Optional: You can also select the topic item in the Catalog list and click Add to Request on the
shortcut menu.
Tip:
You can also select a topic item and select Add Selected Items in the Catalog list or select
Actions > Add to Request.
Optional: To add an entire a topic to the Request pane, select the topic and drag it to the Request
pane.
If you add more items than the Request pane can display, resize the browser.
➤ To duplicate a Query section, select the query to duplicate in the Sections list, and choose
Duplicate on the shortcut menu.
The Workspace duplicates the section and adds a new section label to the Sections pane. The
new section label is based on the original section label, but a sequence number is appended to
the label. For example, if you duplicate a section named SalesChart three times, the Sections
pane shows: SalesChart, SalesChart2, SalesChart3, and SalesChart4.
Query Section
215
Working with Items on the Request Pane
As you build your query, you can add and remove item to and from the Request pane. This
allows you to change the way in which the query refreshes and displays.
●
Adding Request Items
●
Removing Request Items
Adding Request Items
Queries are built by adding topic items from the Catalog list to the Request pane.
➤ To add a topic item to the Request pane, select the topic item in the Catalog list and choose Add
to Request on the shortcut menu.
Removing Request Items
You can remove items in the Request pane to exclude the data from your query or Results set.
➤ To remove an item from the Request pane, choose the desired item and select Delete on the
shortcut menu.
Dependent sections that use the request item are not affected by the removal of an item until
the query is refreshed.
Note: Remove items with caution as a computed item or report may draw data from the item that you delete.
Adding a Computed Item in Query
In the Query section, a computed item is a set of instructions to the database server. The
Workspace uses the computing power of the database server to perform calculations as it
retrieves data from the database.
For this reason, the Query section allows you to use computed items in a way that is not
possible in the other sections. Instead of creating a new data item, the new values simply
replace the original values in the data item as they are retrieved from the database.
Additionally, you can compute items using any topic item in the data model and any scalar
functions provided by your RDBMS.
➤ To create a computed item in the Query section:
1 Select an item in the Request pane and choose Actions > Add Computed Item.
The Computed Item dialog box is displayed.
Optional: You can also select a request item and choose Add Computed Item on the shortcut
menu.
2 Enter a name for the computed item in the Name field.
216
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
The default name is Computed, which is numbered sequentially if there is more than one
computed item. If you assign a name to a computed item that is identical to an existing scalar
function name, the Workspace numbers the name starting with the number 2.
3 Select the data type of the computed item to build from the Data Type list box.
See also “Adjusting Data Types” on page 217.
4 Enter the definition of the computed item in the Definition text box.
●
See “Operators” on page 218.
●
Click Reference to display the Reference dialog box, and select items to place in the
equation. See also “Reference” on page 221.
You can also type any portion of the equation or the entire equation directly into the
Definition text box using JavaScript. The names are case sensitive, and you must replace spaces
in item names with underscores (‘_’).
5 When the equation is complete, click OK.
In the Query section, the computed item is displayed on the Request pane with its new name.
When the query is refreshed, the computed item is listed in the Results Data Layout pane, and
it is displayed as a column in the results set.
Adjusting Data Types
Since computed items are new data items, confirm or change the data type of the item to
preserve the precision of a mixed-data type computations, or to change the way a data item is
handled (for example, interpreting number as strings). This ensures the correct handling of
data in server computations.
Attention to data types is most important when computing items in the Query section. Here
the computation is performed on the database server, and the computed item may be handled
with an unanticipated data type.
Local calculations (Results or Pivot) are handled internally, and adjustment between 16- and
32-bit integers can be handled safely using the automatic or number data type specification.
Table 30
Data Type Specifications
Data type
Specification
Automatic
A data type is determined automatically given the data type of the reference items and the
computations performed
Blob
Binary large object which is truncated at 64,000 bytes
Byte
Variable data type of length determined by a single byte of computer storage. Bytes can store
numeric values from 0 to 255, or a single text character
Date
Calendar date in server default format (typically mm/dd/yy)
Integer (16-bit)
Retains a 16-bit value (2 bytes). A 16-bit integer stores integer values from 0 to 16,777,216,
and signed integers between +8,388,608 and –8,388,608.
Query Section
217
Table 30
Data Type Specifications (Continued)
Data type
Specification
Integer (32-bit)
Retains a 32-bit value (4 bytes). A 32-bit integer has a range of 0 to 4,294,967,296 if
unsigned. If signed, -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647.
Long Text
Character data (long text) exceeding 255 bytes (use the string data type for text strings up to
255 characters). The maximum long text retrieved is 4000; characters anything greater than
that is silently truncated
Packed Real
Real numbers packed for use with EDA middleware. The results in Hyperion Intelligence Clients
are the same as real numbers
Real
Decimal numbers up to 5 positions right of the decimal
String
Text strings to a maximum length of 256 characters
Time
Time in format set by user preference
TimeStamp
Date/time combination in format set by user preference
Operators
You can add operators in the Computed Item dialog box to add arithmetic or logical operators
to a computation in the Definition text box. Operators are added at the insertion point. You
can use any of the following types of operators:
●
Arithmetic Operators
●
Comparison Operators
●
Statements
●
Logical Operators
The following guidelines are applicable when using operators:
218
●
Type the word null (no quotes) into the Expression text box to represent null values.
●
Enclose all text string constant values and date constant values entered in expressions in
single quotes. (Numbers can be entered without quotes.)
●
To join items with a space or other character, reference or type items and strings into the
Expression text box and join them with the + operator (for example, City + ‘,’ +
State). To join without additional characters, use the Concat function.
●
In division operations, the divisor may not be null or equal to zero. If a data item serves as
the divisor in an expression (for example, 5000 / Units_Sold) and includes null or zero
values, first create a computed item using if/else logic to remove null and zero values, and
then compute the item containing the division operation.
●
Two date items can be subtracted, but not added. The Add Month function adds an integer
value to a date.
●
You cannot nest functions inside the Sum, Cume, Chr, and Breaksum functions.
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
Arithmetic Operators
Arithmetic operators take numerical values (either logical or variables) as their operands and
return a single numerical value.
Table 31
Arithmetic Operators
Operator
Name
Used at the:
+
Add
Server level and the local metatopic level for all sections
-
Subtract
Server level and the local metatopic level for all sections
*
Multiply
Server level and the local metatopic level for all sections
/
Divide
Server level and the local metatopic level for all sections
(
Begin suboperations
Server level and the local metatopic level for all sections
)
End suboperations
Server level and the local metatopic level for all sections
++
Increment
Server level and the local metatopic level for all sections except the
Query section
--
Decrement
Server level and the local metatopic level for all sections except the
Query section
Mod (%)
Modulus
Local metatopic level only
The modulus operator returns
the remainder of dividing var1
by var2.
For example, 5% 4 returns 1.
Tip: If a computed item is displayed on a Request pane, and the definition of item uses subtraction,
such as "Mytable.Column1-5", a SQL error can occur. The exact error depends on the database,
but the most common error indicates an undefined name was used. Because databases allow
hyphenated names, the Workspace attempts to deal with such names intuitively. Thus, an item
definition like "Mytable.Column1-5" is interpreted as a name. In order to ensure it is treated as
subtraction, include a space on either side of the hyphen/subtraction operator. For example,
entering the computed item definition as Mytable.Column1 - 5" ensures that the correct SQL is
generated.
Comparison Operators
A comparison operator compares its operands and returns a logical value based on whether the
comparison is true. The operands can be numerical or string values. When used on string
values, the comparisons are based on the standard lexicographical ordering.
Note: The comparison operators in the following table are only available at the local metatopic level. For the examples in
the table var1 has been assigned the value 3, and var2 has been assigned the value 4.
Query Section
219
Table 32
Comparison Operators (Local Metatopic Level)
Operator
Return “true” if the:
==
Operands are equalFor example, 3 == var1
!=
Operands are not equalFor example, var1!= 4
<
Left operand is less than the right operandFor example, var1 < var2
<=
Left operand is less than or equal to the right operandFor example, var <= var2, var2 <= 5
>
Left operand is greater than the right operandFor example, var2 > var1
>=
Left operand is greater than or equal to the right operandFor example, var2 >= var1, var1 >= 3
Statements
Executes a set of statements if a specified condition is true. If the condition is false, another set
of statements can be executed.
Table 33
If...else statement
Statement
Description
if…else
if executes a set of statements if a specified condition is true. The specified condition may be
another statement and can include other nested if statements. Braces, {}, must enclose multiple
statements. If the condition is false, another set of statements can be executed if the optional else
statement has been included in the script.
A sample if … else statement looks likes this:
if (condition) {
statements1
}
else {
statements2
}
Logical Operators
Logical operators take Boolean (logical) values as operands and return a Boolean value.
Table 34
Logical Operators
Operator
Description
AND (&&)
Connects two conditional expressions and retrieves records only if each expression is
true.Computed items are not retrieved if any condition belonging to a conditional expression is
false.The AND logical operator is usually nested within another conditional expression, for example,
expressions which use if and else statements. For example:
if ((OS == ‘Windows’) && (Item type == ‘Modem’)) {‘Windows’} else {‘other’}
220
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
Table 34
Logical Operators (Continued)
OR (||)
Specifies a combination of expressions and retrieves records that include at least one of the
expressions. For example, if one of the words is Washington or Oregon, every record with the
expression “Washington” and every record with the word “Oregon” is included.Typically the OR (||)
is nested within other conditional expressions, for example, expressions which use if and else
logical operators. For example if you want to assign Washington and Oregon to the "Northwestern
Region" and all other states to "Other Regions", enter:
if ((State = = ‘Washington’)|| (State == ‘Oregon’)) {‘Northwestern Region’} else {‘Other Regions’}
NOT (!)
Computes and shows items more accurately stated in a negative way. In effect, all records are
retrieved except those that fulfill the conditional expression.
You enter the conditional expression with the NOT (!) logical operator preceding the conditional
expression.The conditional expression can be a simple value or nested within other conditional
expressions, for example, expressions using AND and OR.
A combined condition expression that uses NOT is true if the conditional expression following NOT
is false. A combined conditional expression is false if the conditional expression following NOT is
true.For example, suppose you are looking to list all states that are not in the Northwestern region.
In this case, enter the conditional expression:
if ( ! (State = = 'Northwestern Region')) {‘Other Regions’}
Reference
Use the Reference dialog box to select the topics and topic item from which to build the
computed item definition.
The Reference dialog box is split between topics in the left pane and topic items in the right
pane. The topics displayed in the left pane are derived from the topics in the Request pane.The
items displayed in the right pane are the values which make up each topic. Before you can select
a topic to use in a computed item expression, you must select it and a topic item.
Computed Items and Data Functions
Computed items and data functions are fundamentally different, and the functions available in
the Computed Item dialog box do not calculate data in the same way as data functions.
●
Computed items calculate a fresh value for each original value, based on the computation
(for example, Revenue calculated from Price and Units Sold). The new values are part of a
new data item or replace the original values. Computed items never reduce the original
number of records.
●
Data functions, by contrast, summarize groups of database records and replace the original
values with new summary data. Because data functions summarize values, the number of
records are frequently reduced.
Query Section
221
Data Functions
Data functions compute aggregate values, including averages, maximums, counts and other
statistics. These functions summarize groupings of data. You can use data functions to
aggregate and compute data from the server before it reaches the Results section, or compute
different statistics for aggregated Results totals and report items.
The effects of data functions are most dramatic in the Query section. For example, Dollars is an
item of sales transaction records for your stores in London and Madrid. You can apply a data
function to this item, consolidate the data, and calculate sum totals, average sale values,
number counts of individual sales records, or minimum sale values with respect to each city,
once the data is retrieved to Results.
➤ To apply a data function, select the item or column, and choose Data Function on the shortcut
menu.
Optional: You can also select the item or column and choose Actions > Data Function, and select
the (function).
Table 35
222
Data Functions
Function
Returns
Availability
None
Unaggregated values as stored in the database. This is the default in Query.
Query
Sum
Sum of underlying values. This is the default in Results and report sections.
All
Average
Average of underlying values
All
Non-Null
Average
Average of underlying values; null values excluded
Pivot, Chart,
Report
Minimum
Lowest of underlying values
All
Maximum
Highest of underlying values
All
Count
Number of underlying values
All
CountDistinct
Number of distinct values in a column. This function is not supported by all
database servers
Query
Null Count
Number of nulls among underlying values
Pivot, Chart,
Report
Non-Null Count
Number of underlying values; null values excluded
Pivot Chart,
Report
Standard
Deviation
Standard deviation of values. This function is not supported by all database
servers.
Query
Variance
Variance of values. This function is available through Oracle servers only.
Query
Weight
Use for computing weighted items in Pivot reports.
Query
% of Column
Sum of all underlying values as a percentage of their respective surface
column
Pivot
% of Row
Sum of underlying values as a percentage of their respective surface row
Pivot
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
Table 35
Data Functions (Continued)
Function
Returns
Availability
% of Grand
Sum of underlying values as a percentage of all surface values in the report
PivotChart
% of Category
Group total percentage of the selected value
Report
Increase
Calculates the increase between the previous two rows or columns
Pivot
%Increase
Calculates the percentage increase between the previous two rows or columns
Pivot
Title
Column names
Report
Null values are empty values for which no data has been specified; null values are not equal to
zero.
Applying A Query Filter
When building a query, you usually do not want to see information associated with every
product. Instead you want to see information that relates only to a specific product or product
line. Similarly, you may not want to see this information for every year the product has been
available, but only for recent periods.
When you set a filter in the Query section, data is returned from the database only if it meets
the specified conditions. For example, suppose you only want to see your most important
customers who spend more than $400,000 per year, or who buy gardening products in the
Midwest. By applying a filter you are instructing the database to “give me only the data which
satisfies the following conditions” (sales > $400,000; or, state is in Midwest Region and Product
Line = Garden).
In another example, a filter placed on Item Type (which includes an “=” (equal) operator and
value “Keyboard”) returns only records associated with keyboard sales. Records associated with
all other products are excluded from the Results set. The data set could be expanded to include
modem sales records by adding the value “Modem” to the filter expression.
Similarly, the filter “> 5000” applied to the Amount Sold item filters out all sales transactions
less than or equal to $5,000. Alternately, the expression “between 5000, 10000” exclude
transactions above $10,000 and eliminates any below or equal to 5,000.
Another advantage of Query filters is that you can apply a filter to any Topic item, even if the
item is not on the Request pane. For example, if you request State, Year, and Units Sold, you
can filter any of these items.
You can also place a filter on the Operating System if it appears in one of the topics in the
Contents pane. For example, if you filter the Operating System to the UNIX only, the server
retrieves only sales information related to the UNIX operating system. You do not need to
place the Operating System on the Request pane.
Note: If a query contains an aggregate filter, it is added to the Data Layout. However, this aggregate filter line is read only
and a new aggregate filter cannot be created.
Query Section
223
➤ To set a query filter:
1 Select a topic item in the Catalog list and select Add to Filter on the shortcut menu.
Optional: You can also drag one or more topics from the Catalog list and drop them into the
Filter pane.
The Filter dialog box is displayed.
2 Define a pool of the potential filter values by selecting one of the following options:
●
“Show Values” on page 233 – Supplies database values associated with the item.
●
“Custom Values” on page 234 – Supplies an empty text box for entering custom values.
●
“Custom SQL” on page 234 – Supplies an empty text box for entering a Structured Query
Language (SQL) clause to be included in the query statement.
3 If you are working with the Show Values or Custom Values options, select Include Null to include data
where the data item has no value.
Retrieves records where the filtered item has no value; for example a field in which no data has
been entered. A null value is not equal to zero.
If you are working with the Custom SQL option, skip the remaining steps, enter your Custom
SQL and click Set.
4 Select the NOT check box to negate the operator it precedes.
If you select NOT, the results of the equation are reversed.
5 Select a comparison operator to use for filtering values.
For example, if you specify the > Greater Than and specify a value of 10,000, values greater
than 10,000 are returned.
For a list of valid comparison operators, see “Comparison Operators” on page 219.
6 Select the values to apply as a filter.
7 Select Set.
To suspend a filter temporarily without deleting it, click Ignore.
Variable Filters
A variable filter is a preset filter that is associated with the Interactive Reporting document by
the designer and resolved only when the query is refreshed. At that time, you are prompted to
select or enter filter values and complete the constraint. A variable filter prompt is displayed
only if one has been set in the underlying document.
Variable filters work particularly well with custom lists. If a custom list has been created, you
can respond to the prompt by simply selecting a value from the custom list. For example, you
may have a document you use monthly to monitor inventory levels. Each time you use the
document, you run it separately for each product line you carry. You can accelerate the process
by making the filter variable on the product line item, and create a custom values list. Each
time you refresh the document, you can select a new product line without redefining filters.
You can select from three types of filters from which to apply a variable constraint, including:
224
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
●
“Show Values” on page 233 – Supplies database values associated with the item.
●
“Custom Values” on page 234 – Supplies an empty text box for entering custom values.
●
“Custom SQL” on page 234 – Supplies an empty text box for entering a Structured Query
Language (SQL) clause to be included in the query statement.
If you do not need to select specific variable filters for the query, choose “Set” to accept the
predefined filters and refresh the query. If you want to modify or add other values, complete
steps 2 and 3 below.
➤ To specify a variable filter.
1 Click Refresh on the Interactive Reporting toolbar.
The Filter dialog box is displayed.
2 If you are working with the Show Values or Custom Values options, select Include Nulls to include data
where the data item has no value.
Retrieves records where the filtered item has no value; for example, a field in which no data has
been entered. A null value is not equal to zero.
If you are working with the Custom SQL option, skip the remaining steps, enter your Custom
SQL and click Set.
3 Select the NOT check box to negates the operator it precedes.
Selecting NOT reverses the results of the equation.
4 Select a comparison operator to use for filtering value.
For example, if you specify the > Greater Than and then specify a value of 10,000, then values
greater than 10,000 are returned.
For a list of valid comparison operators, see “Comparison Operators” on page 219.
5 Select the values to apply as a filter.
6 Select Set.
The filter is applied in the Results set.
To suspend a filter temporarily without deleting it, click Ignore.
To see the result of setting the variable filer, select the Refresh command after the variable has
been set.
Applying Query Sorts
Sorting simplifies the process of data analysis. After data is sorted, the answers to questions are
often readily at your fingertips because sorting ranks data to reveal trends and margins. If you
apply simple sort conditions in the Query section, the database server sorts the data while
refreshing the query before it is retrieved to your document.
Typically, you can place an ascending or descending order on a sort condition that you place on
a column.
Query Section
225
➤ To apply a sort to the query, drag one or more items in the Request pane and drop them into
the Sort pane.
Optional: A sort can also be applied by selecting a request item Actions > Add to Sort.
When the query is refreshed, the request item is sorted in the Results set.
➤ To sort in ascending order:
1
Drag one or more items in the Request pane and drop them into the Sort Pane.
2
Select Sort Ascending on the shortcut menu.
➤ To sort in descending order:
1
Drag one or more items in the Request pane and drop them into the Sort Pane.
2
Select Sort Descending on the shortcut menu.
➤ To delete a sort, select the sort value to remove from Sort pane and choose Delete on the
shortcut menu.
Deleting a sort returns the data to its original display.
Refreshing a Query
After you build your query and apply filters computations, sorts, and any other adjustments to
further refine your request, refresh it to get the results of your query. Refreshing your query
may take a few moments if your query is complex or if the data in linked report sections needs
to be refreshed.
When you refresh your query, the data is retrieved to the Results section in tabular form. You
can refresh your query at any time and in any section to refresh the data. You can also return to
the Query section from any other section at any time to alter the query and refresh it.
➤ To refresh a query, click Refresh icon on the Interactive Reporting toolbar.
Optional: You can also select View > Refresh.
Results and Tables
When you refresh a query or import data, the Workspace retrieves data to your browser and
displays it in the Results section. Although the query may have accessed several different
database tables, the results set is displayed as a single table. Each requested item is displayed as
a column in the table and each database record is a row.
Use the Results section to:
226
●
Verify that your query returned the correct information.
●
Refine and extend the data set by applying filter conditions or create new computed or
grouped items.
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
●
Sort or use text and column formatting features to enhance the appearance of data results.
●
Add summary totals or subtotals and compute them with data functions.
●
Print or export the retrieved data to other applications.
All reports, including tables, pivots, charts, are based on the data that is retrieved to the Results
section.
Hyperion System 9 BI + Workspace provides several ways for you to view the results of a
database query for better analysis:
●
Adding a Table
●
Working with Columns and Rows
●
Sorting Results/Table Items
●
Number Formatting
●
Applying a Results and Table Filter
●
Results and Tables
●
Show Values
●
Results and Table Totals
●
Adding a Computed Item in Results and Tables
●
Paging Through Results Data
Adding a Table
➤ To create a table based on data in the Results section:
1 Select Action > Insert > Table.
2 Drag Results items from the Catalog list to the Table Data Layout.
The table columns are populated automatically.
Working with Columns and Rows
Columns and rows can formatted to your specific needs:
●
Adding a Column
●
Deleting a Column
●
AutoSizing a Column
●
Deleting a Row
Results and Tables
227
Adding a Column
If you have removed a column from the results set, you can easily add it back. However, any
data values derived from the re-added column are not automatically update an existing column
either in the results/table section or another section, which draws from the results set.
➤ To add a column:
1 Select any column.
2 Select Add Column on the shortcut menu.
Deleting a Column
You may need to delete a column in order to view the data set in a new way or maybe you want
to concentrate on selected columns of interest. This option is available for all columns. Note
that column deletion should be approached with caution since other sections draw data values
from the results set.
➤ To remove a column, choose the column and select Delete Column on the shortcut menu.
The column is deleted. If you need to add the column back to the Results section, select Add
Column on the shortcut menu.
AutoSizing a Column
By default, the Workspace truncates columns evenly and without regard to the length of data
values. With the auto-size column width feature, you can automatically size any column to fit
the text of the largest value in the column.
➤ To autosize a column:.
1 Select a column.
2
Select Auto-Size Column Width on the shortcut menu.
Deleting a Row
You can delete a row if it is a grand total or break. Note that the grand total is shown in the last
row on the last page of the table.
➤ To delete a row:
1 Select a row.
2 Select Delete Row on the shortcut menu.
228
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
Sorting Results/Table Items
Data in the Results section is sorted in the order returned by the database. You can change the
order in which a column is sorted either in ascending or descending order.
➤ To sort a column:
1 Select the column you want to sort on.
Selecting multiple columns invokes a “nested sort.”
2 Select Sort on the shortcut menu.
The Sort submenu is displayed.
3 Select either the Ascending or Descending sort item.
➤ To delete the current sort order:
1 Select any column in the Results or Table section.
2 Select Sort on the shortcut menu.
The Sort submenu is displayed.
3 Select Delete All.
Number Formatting
You can change the way numbers, currency values, and dates are displayed throughout
Hyperion System 9 BI + Workspace or create new custom formats.
Results and Tables
229
➤ To apply number formatting, select the format from the Format drop down list box.
Table 36
Formatting Categories
Option
Description
Category
Select a category for which you want to display number
formats. When you select a category, the formats for that
category are displayed in the Format field.
To create a custom format, select Custom and enter the
desired format in the Format field. Enter symbols,
decimals, commas, and so on to indicate how to display
the format. For example, enter 'MM/DD/YY' to display
the date as `01/01/99', or enter $$#.###.00 to show
two dollar signs before the number and a decimal to
mark the thousands' place. When you create a custom
format, it appears as a category on the machine on
which it was created. If an item already has a custom
format applied to it, the custom format is in read-only
mode.
Format
Displays the format for the selected category. If you are
creating a custom category, you can enter the desired
format directly in the edit field.
The following table lists available numeric categories.
Table 37
Numeric Categories
Option
Description
Number
Sets the default format for real or integer values.
Currency
Applies currency formatting to the selected number
object(s).
Percentage
Applied percentage formatting to the selected numeric
object.
The following table lists the available formatting options and definitions along with examples
for the above categories.
230
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
Table 38
Formatting Options and Descriptions
Option
Description
Example
0
Integer placeholder or zero value. If a
number has an integer value in this
position relative to the decimal
point, the inter is displayed.
Otherwise a zero is displayed.
Apply 0 to show 123.
#
Integer placeholder. If a number has
an integer value in this position
relative to the decimal point, the
integer is displayed. Otherwise,
nothing is displayed.
Apply #,##0 to show 1,234.
()
Formats with parenthesis options
display negative values in
parentheses. Otherwise, negative
values are displayed with a minus
sign.
Apply (#,###0) to show (1,234).
;
A semicolon operates as a separator
between two number formats. The
semicolon separates a positive
integer and a negative integer.
Apply #, ##0;(#,##0) to show 1,
234 or apply (1, 234) for a negative
number.
$ %
Adds the respective character to
numeric values in the same position
relative to the decimal point.
Apply $#,##0.00 to show
$1,234.56.
m d yy
Displays month, day, and year in
respective positions for date-coded
information.
Apply mm dd yy to show 05 07 99
-/
Adds the respective character to
date-coded values in the same
position relative to variables.
Apply mm/dd/yy to show
06/23/99
Apply 0.00 to show 123.45.
Apply 0% to show 3%.
Applying a Results and Table Filter
Because local filters only hide data from the display, they are a good way to filter the data set to
reflect temporary and hypothetical situations. You can always remove the filter to return data
to the display and make it available for reporting.
Applying filters to your results/table sets allows you to narrow your request. That way you can
work with relevant data, saving time and conserving database and server resources.
You can add, modify and remove filters to columns in the Tables/Results section. The column
to which the filter is applied must exist in the table, and a filter cannot be placed on a hidden
column.
See also:
Results and Tables
231
●
Show Values
●
Custom Values
●
Custom SQL
●
Modifying a Filter
●
Deleting a Filter
➤ To add a results/table filter.
1 Select a column on which to apply the filter.
2 Select Filter on the shortcut menu.
The Filter submenu is displayed.
3 Select Apply/Modify on the Filter submenu.
The Filter dialog box is displayed.
4 Define a pool of the potential filter values by selecting one of the following options:
●
“Show Values” on page 233 – Supplies database values associated with the item.
●
“Custom Values” on page 234 – Supplies an empty text box for entering custom values.
5 If you are working with the Show Values or Custom Values options, select Include Nulls to include data
where the data item has no value.
Retrieves records where the filtered item has no value; for example, a field in which no data has
been entered. A null value is not equal to zero.
If you are working with the Custom SQL option, skip the remaining steps, enter your Custom
SQL and click Set.
6 Select the NOT check box to negate the operator it precedes.
Selecting NOT reverses the results of the equation.
7 Select a comparison operator to use for filtering values.
For example, if you specify the > Greater Than and then specify a value of 10,000, then values
greater than 10,000 are returned.
For a list of valid comparison operators, see “Comparison Operators” on page 219.
8 Select the values to apply as a filter.
9 Select Set.
The filter is applied in the Results set.
To suspend a filter temporarily without deleting it, click Ignore.
232
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
Show Values
The Show Values feature provides a list of values derived from the content of the Results or
Table section. Because Show Values retrieve every unique value available, it is best not to use
this feature when the data item is large, consists mostly of unique values, or does not change
frequently (for example, telephone numbers). In this situation, custom values are
recommended when you want to avoid extra calls to the database.
The value list that initially displays was saved with the imported Interactive Reporting
document, and it is not the latest value list from the database.
To show the latest value list, select View > Refresh.
➤ To specify a database filter value:
1 Select the Show Values tab.
2 Select Include Nulls to allow nulls to pass the filter and display in the data set.
3 Expand the Operator drop down and select a comparison operator for the filter expression.
Check Not to reverse an operator condition.
For example, if you specify the > Greater Than and then specify a value of 10,000, then values
greater than 10,000 are returned. Values which pass the comparison test are included. Valid
operators include:
Table 39
List of Comparison Operators
Operator
Retrieves Records Where the Filtered Item:
Equal (=)
Equals the specified value(s).
Not Equal (<>)
Does not equal the specified value(s).
Less Than (<)
Less than the specified value(s).
Less or Equal (<=)
Equal to or less than the specified value(s)
Greater Than (>);
Is greater than the specified value(s).
Greater or Equal (>=);
Is equal to or greater than the specified value(s)
Begins With
Begins with the specified value(s) up to and including the end value.
Contains
Contains the specified value(s) regardless of location.
Ends With
Ends with the specified value(s).
Like (with wildcards)
Retrieves records where a text string is displayed and reflects the placement of the
specified value(s).
For example, a Name Like %ZE_ retrieves records for all employees whose names have
the letters Ze followed by a single character at the end
s Null
Has no value; for example a field in which no data has been entered.
Between
Retrieves records where the value of the filtered item lies between (and does not
equal) the specified values.
Not (with operator)
Negates the operator it precedes, reversing the results of the equation
Results and Tables
233
4 Highlight the values to include as filters from the Values list.
To select an individual value, highlight it in the Values pane.
To select multiple and contiguous values in the Values pane, hold the[Shift] and scroll down to
or up to the items.
To select multiple, but non-contiguous values in the Values pane, hold the [Ctrl] key and
highlight the items.
5 Click Set.
To suspend a filter temporarily without deleting it, click Ignore.
Custom Values
A Custom Values list can be used to set a filter and are created by or supplied to you. One
reason to use custom lists with a distributed document is that many data items change very
rarely. For example, a Gender item has three consistent values (male, female, and unknown). A
Product line item has many more items, but may only change every year or so. Under these
circumstances, it makes sense for you to select from a custom values list.
The initial custom values shown in the values pane originate and are saved with the Interactive
Reporting document.
➤ To apply a custom value as a filter:
1 Select Include Nulls to include data where the data item has no value.
Retrieves records where the filtered item has no value; for example a field in which no data has
been entered. A null value is not equal to zero.
2 Select a comparison operator to use for filtering value.
Select the NOT check box to negate the operator it precedes.
For example, if you select the > Greater Than operator and specify a value of 10,000, values
greater than 10,000 are returned.
For a list of valid comparison operators, see “Comparison Operators” on page 219.
3 In the Values field, enter the values to which you want to set as a filter.
4 To add the value, click + (the addition sign).
To remove a value from the Values panel, highlight the item in the Values pane and click the (subtraction sign).
5 Click Set.
To suspend a filter temporarily without deleting it, click Ignore.
Custom SQL
If you are familiar SQL, select the Custom SQL feature and type a SQL where clause to be
included in the query statement.
234
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
➤ To add a custom SQL statement:
1 Select the Custom SQL tab.
2 Type your SQL where clause containing the expression to use for the filter in the Values pane.
3 Click Set.
To suspend a filter temporarily without deleting it, click Ignore.
Modifying a Filter
Once a filter exists for data in your query or results, you can later add or modify filter
conditions.
➤ To modify a filter:
1 Select the column to which the filter has been applied.
2 Select Filter on the shortcut menu.
The Filter submenu is displayed.
3 Select Apply/Modify on the Filter submenu.
The Filter window is displayed.
4 Select the filter value and click Set.
The following table provides a quick reference to the Modify Filter option:
Command
Description
Set
Applies the filter value.
Ignore Filter
Ignores a filter without deleting it.
Cancel
Cancels any filter applied in the current sessions.
Deleting a Filter
Deleting a filter adds the original values that were filtered into the data set.
➤ To delete a filter, select the columns that has the filter value to be deleted and select Actions >
Filter > Delete on the shortcut menu.
Results and Table Totals
Totals and subtotals can help to consolidate a large results set. If you need individual data
records and plan to print the Results and Table section as a quick report, add totals and
subtotals to break your report into manageable sections.
Results and Tables
235
See also:
●
Calculating a Grand Total for a Column
●
Calculating a Break Total for a Column
Calculating a Grand Total for a Column
You can calculate a grand total for any numeric data column and specify the original total value
with a new type of function. For example, by default the totals for a column are sums of the
values in those columns. But you can change the totals to averages instead of sums. These
Results/Table section functions include:
Data Function
Returns the:
Sum
Sum of all underlying values.
Average
Average of all underlying values.
Maximum
Highest of underlying values.
Minimum
Lowest of underlying values
Count
Number of underlying values.
➤ To apply a grand total to a column:
1 Select the column and choose Grand Total on the shortcut menu.
A submenu showing all available total functions is displayed.
2 Select a total function.
The grand total is displayed in a new row at the bottom of the last page in the selected column.
➤ To remove all grand totals:
1 Select a column to which a grand total was applied and choose Grand Total on the shortcut menu.
A submenu showing all available total functions is displayed.
2 Select Delete All.
236
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
➤ To remove a selected grand total:
1 Select the row to which a grand total was applied and choose Grand Total on the shortcut menu.
A submenu showing all available total functions is displayed.
2 Select Delete.
Calculating a Break Total for a Column
You can add subtotals to the same column by choosing another column of non-numeric data
to serve as a “break column.” The break column is used as a reference point to determine where
to break the data in the target column. The data in the subtotal column is subtotaled for each
distinct range of identical values in the break column.
Once a break total is placed on one column, the break total is applied to all numeric columns.
Like the total functions you can use when adding a grand total, a break total can also consist of
different functions. These functions include:
Data Function
Description
Sum
Sum of all underlying values
Average
Average of all underlying values
Maximum
Highest of underlying values
Minimum
Lowest of underlying values
Count
Number of underlying values
➤ To apply a break total:
1 Select the column and choose Break Total on the shortcut menu.
A submenu showing all available break total functions is displayed.
2 Select a total function.
The default total function is “Sum”.
Break totals are displayed in the target column along with the break total function name.
➤ To delete all break totals:
1 Select the column to which the break total was applied.
2 Select Break Total on the shortcut menu.
3 Select Delete All.
➤ To remove a selected break total:
1 Select the row to which a break total was applied and choose Break Total on the shortcut menu.
A submenu showing all available total functions is displayed.
Results and Tables
237
2 Select Delete.
Adding a Computed Item in Results and Tables
In the Results and reporting sections, computations are performed in the document. The
computations involve only the data in your Results set or on the surface of a reporting section.
In these sections you can only create new computed items: you cannot modify original data
items retrieved directly from the database. cannot be modified
Computed items in the Results and reporting sections differ in two respects:
●
In the Results and Table sections, reference items are limited to the items that is displayed
on the Request line.
●
In the remaining reporting sections (excluding the Report Designer section), items in any
data layout are available in the Reference dialog box. Computations in these sections work
on the aggregated cell values that make up the core of the report. To perform computations
on data before it is aggregated, compute the new item in the Results section.
●
In the Report Designer section, the break totals of a table can be calculated.
➤ To add a computed item in the Results and Table sections:
1 Select an item in the Request pane and choose Actions > Add Computed Item(s).
The Computed Item dialog box is displayed.
2 Enter a name for the computed item in the Name field.
The default name is Computed, which is numbered sequentially if there is more than one. If
you assign a name to a computed item that is identical to an existing scalar function name, the
Workspace numbers the name starting with the number 2.
3 Select the data type of the computed item from the Data Type list box.
For information about data types, see “Adjusting Data Types” on page 217
4 Enter the definition of the computed item in the Definition text box.
●
You can type operators to insert arithmetic and logical operators at the insertion point. See
also “Operators” on page 218.
●
Click Reference to display the Reference dialog box, and select items to place in the
equation. See also “Reference” on page 221.
You can also type any portion of the equation or the entire equation directly into the
Definition text box using JavaScript. The names are case sensitive, and you must replace spaces
in item names with underscores (‘_’).
5 When the equation is complete, click OK.
238
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
Paging Through Results Data
By default the Workspace shows a fixed number of rows in a table when a user views a page in a
browser. Often data extends beyond the vertical and horizontal rows shown on the page.
Table 40
Results and Table Paging Options
Paging Option
Description
Current Page
The tooltip shows the current page in the report.
Page Up
Moves one page up. To move to the top page, select [Shift] + Click + Up arrow.
Page Down
Moves one page down. To move to the first page in the down direction, select [Shift] + Click +
Down arrow.
Chart Section
Charts are fully interactive, three-dimensional views of data. A chart is a graphical
representation of a Pivot section. With a varied selection of chart types, and an arsenal of tools
like grouping, drill-down and drill to detail, the Chart section is built to support simultaneous
graphic reporting and ad-hoc analysis. You can add, move, cluster, focus and drill down into
chart objects to gain customized views of the data.
●
Understanding Chart Dimensions
●
Legends
●
Chart Types
●
Two-dimensional Chart Types
●
Multidimensional Chart Types
●
Viewing Three-dimensional Bar Charts
Understanding Chart Dimensions
A Chart can be referenced at three points: height, width and depth (x, y and z in Cartesian
space). To understand the differences among charts, you have to distinguish between
dimensions in space and dimensions of data. The two dimensions are distinct.
Data can either be represented in two or in three dimensional space. In two dimensions, data is
represented along the x and y axis. In three dimensions, data is projected back along the z axis.
Two dimensions of data must be represented in two dimensional space. At least three
dimensions of data are necessary to use the third spatial dimension.
But three or more dimensions of data can be represented in two dimensional space. For
example, cluster and stack represent data categories in the bar chart of two spatial dimensions
(x and y axes only).
Chart Section
239
y axis
z axis
x axis
Chart Data Layout CategoriesThe Chart Section opens with an initial plot area
for the chart. Because you manage chart construction and manipulation is with the Chart Data
Layout plotting, viewing and reviewing are easy and intuitive.
You construct a chart by dragging items from the Catalog pane to a Data Layout pane. At least
one items must populate the Data Layout to plot a usable chart.
The Data Layout consists of the following items:
Table 41
Data Layout Pane
Description
X Axis
The X- Axis is used for those items to place on the x axis, which is a straight line on the chart. It
is used as a qualitative data label for categorizing information. To place items on the x axis, use
the X-Axis pane.
Slice
240
Chart Data Layout
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
Table 41
Chart Data Layout (Continued)
Data Layout Pane
Description
Stack
The Stack Cluster or Depth pane represents the third dimension of data, that is, the z axis that
projects out toward you or a location in space. This axis can either be qualitative or quantitative.
Cluster
Depth
For a Stack pane, each dimension of data of the charts is represented by only one bar. This bar
consists of as many components as the data file has data rows, with the data from each row
stacked onto the previous row. For example, a single bar can represent the amount of sales for
CD-ROM drives in one year on top of a bar representing sales for other years. You can stack the
bar charts vertically or horizontally. By stacking items and assigning a different color to each
item, you can display trends among comparable or related items, or emphasize visually a sum
of several indicators.
For a Cluster pane, data extended in the third dimension is shown as clusters displayed in the
foreground. This category creates a vertical column (and only a vertical column) for each data
value. If the chart is showing multiple data series, the values are grouped based upon the
category value. For example, use clustered bars to compare stores of different types.
Alternatively, cluster bars can be used to compare two different values items, such as Amount
of Sales and Units Sold.
For the Depth, data extends the length of the chart along the z axis.
Fact
Fact (Stack)
Fact (Depth)
The Facts pane indicates height in the coordinate system. It is used as a quantitative label as a
way of categorizing information on the y axis.
For the Fact (Stack) pane, each dimension of numeric data is represented by only one bar.
and shows the grouping along the y axis. This bar consists of as many components as the data
file has numeric rows, with the numeric data from each row stacked onto the previous row. For
example, a single bar can represent the amount of sales for CD-ROM drives in one year on top
of a bar representing sales for other years. You can stack the bar charts vertically or horizontally.
By stacking items and assigning a different color to each item, you can display trends among
comparable or related items, or emphasize visually a sum of several indicators.
For the Fact (Depth) pane, numeric data extends the length of the chart along the z-axis.
Legends
A chart legend can be set on the x, y or z axis enabling you to shift your focus to data listed on a
particular axis. This is a great way to view values on the selected axis without having to view
another chart report.
The following three examples shows how to set the legend on different axes to alter the
appearance and data shown by the same chart.
In the first example, the legend has been set on the x axis:
Chart Section
241
In the second example, the legend has been set on the y axis:
In the third example, the legend has been set on the z axis:
➤ To set the chart legend:
1 Select the axis on which to set the legend.
2 Select Set Legend on from the shortcut menu.
The Axes drop-down list box is displayed.
3 Select either the x, y or z axis.
242
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
Changing Chart Properties
You can change the properties of a chart to view it in different perspectives:
●
Chart Types
●
Two-dimensional Chart Types
●
Showing Pie Values
●
Showing Negative and Positive Values
●
Showing Pie Percent
●
Showing Bar Values
●
Multidimensional Chart Types
Chart Types
Chart types are defined by how they represent data graphically and how they plot values and
labels along the x, y or z axes. There are eleven chart types, each of which may be switched from
a two-dimensional to a three-dimensional view (with the exception of the pie chart). Chart
types include:
●
Bar Charts
●
Stacked Bar Charts
●
Clustered Bar Charts
●
Pie Charts
●
Area Charts
●
Line Charts
●
Ribbon Charts
●
Bar-Line (Combination) Charts
➤ To change a chart type:
1 Select an item on the chart.
2 Select Change Chart Type on the shortcut menu.
3 Select another chart type from the submenu.
Two-dimensional Chart Types
Pie and bar charts (of the non-stacked variety) lend themselves to representing two dimensions
of data. For example, imagine charting the amount of sales by product type. In pie charts, the
two dimensions are represented by slices of a pie. In bar charts, the data is represented by bars
along the x and y axes. Two-dimensional chart types include pie and bar charts.
●
Pie Charts
●
Multidimensional Chart Types
Chart Section
243
Pie Charts
Pieces (slices) of the pie are drawn to depict the relative value of a measurable item category to
the whole. Pie charts represent additional dimensions of data by further subdividing the pie.
Showing Pie Values
Pie slices show only label names.
➤ To toggle the display of pie values, choose a slice of the pie and select Show Pie Values on the
shortcut menu.
Showing Negative and Positive Values
Pie slices can show both positive values and negative values.
➤ To toggle the display of negative values, select a slice of the pie and select Show Negative Values
on the shortcut menu.
Showing Pie Percent
Pie slice values can be expressed as a percentage.
➤ To toggle the display of each pie slice value as a percentage, select a slice of the pie and choose
Show Pie Percentages on the shortcut menu.
Bar Charts
Bar charts are the most common type of business chart and are especially useful for
comparative analysis when you want to focus on comparing values and place less emphasis on
time. Use a bar chart to illustrate comparisons among individual items.
In a vertical bar chart, items in the y axis form the chart bars. Items in the x axis and z axis
itemize the bars.
244
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
In a horizontal bar chart, items in the y axis form the chart bars, and items in the x and z axes
itemize the bars.
Showing Bar Values
➤ To toggle the display of values, select a bar and choose Show Bar Values on the shortcut menu.
Multidimensional Chart Types
Frequently you may want to view data represented in more than two dimensions. For example,
you may want to see how the sales of product types break down by years or quarter. There are
numerous ways to chart three or more dimensions of data. You can project data into the third
dimension of space. You can also represent the data in two spatial dimensions.
●
Viewing Three-dimensional Bar Charts
●
Clustered Bar Charts
●
Stacked Bar Charts
●
Area Charts
●
Stacked Area Charts
●
Line Charts
Chart Section
245
●
Ribbon Charts
●
Bar-Line (Combination) Charts
Viewing Three-dimensional Bar Charts
You can add more information to your bar chart by adding an additional item or items to the z
axis of the chart. Using multidimensional charts, you can show various relationships between
three or more items in easy-to-understand bar chart formats.
Clustered Bar Charts
Cluster bar charts can be used to juxtapose categories in one label item category. For example,
use clustered bars to compare stores of different types. luster bars can also be used to compare
two different value items, such as Amount of Sales and Unit sold.
You can change your chart perspective so that the z axis data extended in the third dimension is
shown as clusters displayed in the foreground. This charting type is useful when z axis bars are
hard to distinguish in standard bar formats.
Cluster charts can be used to juxtapose categories in one label item. For example, use clustered
bars to compare stores of different types. Alternatively, cluster bars can also be used to compare
two different value items, such as Amount of Sales and Unit Sold.
Clustered bar charts are only displayed in a vertical format.
Stacked Bar Charts
One way to represent the third dimension of data is through stacking. In this way, a single bar
on the chart can show data for more than one category of data. For example, a single bar can
represent amount of sales for CD-ROM drives in one year on top of a bar representing sales for
other years. Stacked bar charts can stack vertically or horizontally.
The following is an example of a vertical stacked bar chart.
246
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
The following is an example of a horizontal stacked bar chart.
Area Charts
Area charts are essentially bar charts with discontinuous breaks removed along the horizontal
axis. Data is not broken into discrete bars, but is displayed in a continuous ebb and flow as
defined against the y axis. Consequently, area charts are particularly useful for emphasizing the
magnitude of change over time. In addition, area charts can be used for the same purpose as
bar charts.
Because area charts do not break data along the horizontal axis, they are most useful for
charting three dimensions of data. The z axis should be used to either project data into a thirdspatial dimension, or to track two categories of data in a stacked area chart.
In the area chart, items in the y pane determine the height of the line, and items in the x pane
itemize the line sections. You can create multiple lines by adding items to the z pane.
Chart Section
247
Stacked Area Charts
Stacked area charts are essentially bar charts with the discontinuous breaks removed along the
horizontal axis, and categories of data are “stacked” on top of each other. Data therefore is not
broken into discrete bars, but is displayed in continuous ebb and flow as defined against the y
axis. A stacked area chart is an excellent way to display data that shows the relationship of parts
to the whole. Consequently, stacked area charts can be particularly useful for illustrating
changes that are plotted over a period of time.
Line Charts
Line charts show trends in data at equal intervals and are effective for comparing highs and
lows in a continuum. Items on the y axis determine the height of the line, and items in the XCategories itemize the line sections. You can create multiple lines by adding items to the ZCategory.
Line charts have one advantage over bar charts. They do not enable one set of data to obstruct
the representation of another. Since lines are thin compared to bars, the data displayed in the
front does not block out the data behind.
248
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
As a result, data that is not easily represented in bar or area charts work well in line charts.
Many more dimensions of data can be superimposed without impairing the chart’s
effectiveness.
Ribbon Charts
A ribbon chart is very similar to a line chart, but with a few visual differences. In ribbon chart,
values in the y axis determine the height of the line, and values in the x axis itemize the line
sections. You can create multiple lines by adding items to the z axis.
Bar-Line (Combination) Charts
Bar-Line charts (also known as Combination charts) combine some of the strengths of bar
charts with the advantages of line charts. Solid bars can be used for the most important data
against which other dimensions are represented in lines. In this way, emphasis is give to a
portion of data based on its importance. A combination chart is especially useful for
comparing two numeric values, such as amount and units of sales.
Chart Section
249
Note: A combination chart is most effective when the y axis contains only two value items. It represents one value as
bars and the other value as a line. When more than two values are present, the chart alternates between bars and
lines in depicting the values (1st, 3rd, 5th... items are bars; 2nd, 4th, 6th... items are lines).
Working with Charted Data
Workspace provides several ways for you to dynamically manage your chart data for better
analysis. Review the following topics for information on:
●
Adding Chart Items
●
Removing Chart Items
●
Focusing and Hiding Charted Data
●
Grouping and Ungrouping Chart Labels
Adding a Chart
➤ To create a Chart based on the Results section data:
1 Select Actions > Insert > Chart.
2 Drag Results items from the Catalog List to the Chart Data Layout.
The table columns are populated automatically.
3 Select a Chart type on the shortcut menu.
Adding Chart Items
Interactive charts consist of two layout elements: graphical elements (for example, Chart bars
or pie slices) and axis labels. When you add items to a chart, they become values or dimensions
in your report.
➤ To add a chart item:
1 Select a Chart item and choose Add item on the shortcut menu.
250
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
The x axis, y axis and z axis submenus are displayed. The z axis submenu does not display for a
pie chart.
2 Select a data label from the x axis submenu.
3 Select a fact item from the y axis submenu.
4 Select a data label item from the x axis (or Z-Cluster for a clustered chart, or Z-Stack for a stacked chart)
submenu to add a third dimension to the chart.
Removing Chart Items
Removing a plotted items in the Chart sometimes helps to simplify a chart display. However,
you do need at least one fact item in order to display a chart accurately.
➤ To remove a chart item:
1 Select the item to be removed in the Chart from the Data Layout.
2 Select Delete on the shortcut menu.
The chart is redrawn to reflect the new configuration of items in the chart.
Focusing and Hiding Charted Data
A straightforward way to refresh your view of a chart is to single out items for closer focus or to
hide some of the charted elements. This allows you to concentrate on particular items of
interest.
Focusing redraws the chart report to show only the item you have chosen. This feature is only
available for items on the x axis or z axis.
The Show All command updates the chart to include all items removed by focusing. Note that
this command is available only when a Chart item has been focused.
Generally, you should only hide items on the x or z axis. Hiding the y axis causes the entire fact
to be hidden.
The Show Hidden Items command restores any hidden item.
➤ To focus on a chart item:
1 Select one or more item on which to focus.
The selected items are displayed with a dotted outline.
2 Select Focus on the shortcut menu.
The chart is redrawn to display only the chart item selected.
Chart Section
251
➤ To show all items in a chart, select a chart item and choose Show Hidden on the shortcut menu.
➤ To hide charted data:
1 In the Chart, select the objects to hide.
The selected item(s) are displayed with a dotted outline.
2 Select Hide Item on the shortcut menu.
The chart is redrawn to hide the item.
➤ To show hidden items, select a chart item and choose Show Hidden on the shortcut menu.
Grouping and Ungrouping Chart Labels
You can merge Chart axis labels using the Group feature. When combined, the data associated
with labels is aggregated, creating a new summary label category. With grouping, only your
view of the data is changed. You can easily ungroup grouped categories and return to your
original label values.
For example, your chart report is structured with data item Units (sold) dimensioned by Year
and Quarter. You can group the first and second quarters together to summarize activity for
the first half of the year. The data is aggregated in a new label.
This feature is available only for items on the x axis or z axis.
➤ To toggle the group axis labels feature:
1 Select the individual labels to be grouped.
(You can group contiguous or discontiguous labels, but the labels must be part of the same
dimension item or axis.)
2 Select (Un)Group Items on the shortcut menu.
The selected labels, and their associated data values or chart objects, are combined. The
resulting label is displayed with an asterisk (*) to indicate a grouping.
To ungroup items, reselect the grouped items and choose (Un)Group Items on the shortcut
menu.
Working with Chart Facts
Data functions in the Chart section are particularly useful if you want your report to display
different types of values. Data functions summarize groups of database records and replace the
original values with new summary data.
For example, in the Pivot section, you can show either the total sale, average sale, or the
maximum sale of each product by quarter. Each of these dimensions is based on the same
underlying values. They differ only in the data function that is applied.
The following table shows the Chart Functions:
252
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
Table 42
Chart Data Functions
Data Function
Returns the:
Sum
Sum of all underlying values.
Average
Average of all underlying values.
Count
Number of underlying values.
Count Distinct
Number of distinct values in a column.
Maximum
Highest of underlying values.
Minimum
Lowest of underlying values
Perc of Grand
Sum of underlying values as a percentage of all surface values in the report.
NonNullCount
Number of underlying values; null values are excluded.
➤ To apply a data function:
1 Select a bar or row of facts (such as Amount).
2 Select Data Function on the shortcut menu.
A shortcut menu of available data functions is displayed.
Optional: You can also select the item or column and choose Actions > Data Function, and select
the (function).
3 Select the function.
Each column is recalculated according to the data function applied to the underlying value.
Paging Through the Chart
By default the Hyperion System 9 BI + Workspace shows a fixed number of rows in a table
when a user views a page in a browser. Often data extends beyond the vertical and horizontal
rows shown on the page. To view your paging options, see the table below.
Table 43
Chart Paging Options
Paging Option
Description
Current Page
Tooltip shows the current page.
Page Left
Moves one view in the left direction. To move to the first view in the left direction, select [Shift]
+ Click + left arrow.
Page Up
Moves one view up in the Chart sections. To move to the top view, select [Shift] + Click + Up.
Page Down
Moves one view in the down direction. To move to the first view in the down direction, select
[Shift] + Click + Down arrow.
Page Right
Moves one view in the left direction. To move to the first view in the right direction, select [Shift]
+ Click + right arrow.
Chart Section
253
Pivot Section
Pivot tables are analytical tools that resemble spreadsheets or crosstab reports. Data can be
sliced and diced for ad-hoc, interactive and multidimensional analysis. You can pivot your data
at any time to change the way you view it, or you may drill down, or drill to detail to see how it
all adds up or summarizes. Pivot tables also allow you to add, move, focus on and group
dimensions to gain customized views of the data.
●
Pivot Table Components
●
Working with Pivot Data
●
Focusing and Hiding Pivoted Data
●
Working with Row and Column Labels
●
Analyzing Pivot Data
●
Working with Pivot Facts
●
Paging Through Pivot Data
Pivot Table Components
A pivot table is composed of three components:
●
Facts – The numeric values broken up in the body of the pivot table. Facts may also be
referred to as data values.
●
Data Labels – The column and row headings on the top and sides of the Pivot and define
the categories by which the numeric values are organized.
●
Dimensions – A full row or column of labels.
Working with Pivot Data
The Workspace provides several ways for you to dynamically manage your pivot data for better
analysis:
254
●
Adding a Pivot Section
●
Grouping and Ungrouping Pivot Labels
●
Deleting Pivot Items
●
Auto-Sizing a Column
●
Focusing and Hiding Pivoted Data
●
Swinging Pivot Dimensions
●
Grouping and Ungrouping Pivot Labels
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
Adding a Pivot Section
➤ To create a table based on the Results section data:
1 Select Actions > Insert > Pivot.
2 Drag items from the Catalog list to the Pivot Data Layout.
If the Data Layout is not displayed, select View > Data Layout.
The Workspace populates the cells, rows and columns automatically.
Adding Pivot Items
You can add items from the Results set to view and analyze different scenarios in your Pivot.
➤ To add a pivot item:
1 From the Catalog list, select any item and click Add Items on the shortcut menu.
A shortcut showing Row, Column or Facts is displayed.
2 Select the value you want to add.
Deleting Pivot Items
➤ To delete a pivot item:
1 Select the item to be removed from the Facts, Rows or Columns Data Layout.
2 Select Delete on the shortcut menu.
The Pivot is redrawn to reflect the new configuration of items.
Auto-Sizing a Column
By default, the Workspace truncates columns evenly and without regard to the length of data
values. With the Auto-Size Column Width feature, you can automatically size any column to fit
the text of the largest value in the column.
➤ To autosize a column:
1 Select the column.
2 Select Auto-Size Column Width on the shortcut menu.
Focusing and Hiding Pivoted Data
A straightforward way to refresh your view of a pivot table is to single out items for closer focus
or to hide some of the pivot elements. This allows you to concentrate on particular items of
interest.
Pivot Section
255
Focusing redraws the pivot table to show only the item you have chosen to focus on.
The Show All Items command updates the pivot table to include all items removed by focusing.
This command is available only when a pivot dimension label has been focused.
Hiding columns is a good way to temporarily suspend the display of a column.
➤ To toggle the focus on a pivot item:
1 Select one or more dimension labels (either side or top).
2 Choose Focus on the shortcut menu.
The Pivot is redrawn to display only the chart object selected.
➤ To show all items, select a dimensional label and choose Show All on the shortcut menu.
➤ To hide pivoted data:
1 Select an item.
2 Select Hide Items on the shortcut menu.
The Pivot is redrawn to hide the selected object.
➤ To restore a selected hidden item, select a pivot item and choose Show Hidden on the shortcut
menu.
Working with Row and Column Labels
Row and column labels can be grouped and reoriented:
●
Grouping and Ungrouping Pivot Labels
●
Swinging Pivot Dimensions
Grouping and Ungrouping Pivot Labels
You can merge pivot labels using the Group feature. When combined, the data labels are
aggregated, creating a new summary label category. With grouping, only your view of the data
is changed. You can easily ungroup grouped categories and redisplay original label values.
For example, your pivot table is structured with data item Units (sold) dimensioned by Year
and Quarter. You can group the first and second quarters together to summarize activity for
the first half of the year. The data is aggregated in a new label.
➤ To toggle the group dimensional label feature:
1 Select the individual labels to be grouped.
(You can group contiguous or discontiguous labels, but the labels must be part of the same
dimension item or axis.)
2 Select (Un)Group Items on the shortcut menu.
256
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
The selected labels, and their associated data values or chart objects, are combined. The
resulting label is displayed with an asterisk (*) to indicate a grouping.
To ungroup items, reselect the grouped items and choose (Un)Group Items on the shortcut
menu.
Swinging Pivot Dimensions
The swing feature allows you to re-orient the axes of a pivot table and view your data in new
ways. When you “swing” a dimension, you can move it up, down or to the opposite axis. This
feature is a powerful tool that makes pivot table reporting more powerful than a common
spreadsheet.
Note: You can swing pivot dimensions by moving items within and between Data layout panes,
➤ To swing a dimensional label:
1 Select a dimensional label and choose Swing on the shortcut menu.
2 Select a direction.
Valid swing positions are:
●
Vertical
●
Horizontal
●
Up
●
Down
●
Left
●
Right
●
Before
●
After
If you select the “before” swing positions, you must choose the dimension label before which
you wish to place the selected label. This behavior applies to the “after” selection as well.
Working with Pivot Facts
Core numeric data that you slice and dice dimensionally in your analysis are called facts. Facts
can be summed to create totals.
You can calculate totals for both columns and rows in a Pivot report. If you layered dimension
items along the top or side labels of your report, you can calculate the totals for any level in the
hierarchy. When you select an inner dimension for totaling, subtotals are created for each of
the categories in the outer dimensions. Totals in the Pivot section include:
●
Total Function
●
Cumulative Totals
Pivot Section
257
●
Surface Values
Total Function
You can quickly add totals to your pivot table data. The new total value is created as an
additional column. Total functions can be applied to:
●
Underlying values from the original results sections
●
Surface values displayed in the Pivot
Depending on which set of values you apply the total function, different results are yielded.
Consider a simple pivot table with two values of 20 and 30. Each of these is already a total of
underlying values (20 = 8 +12 and 30 = 10 + 20). An average of the underlying value yields the
result of 12.5 = (8 + 12 + 10 + 20) /4). An average of the surface values yields the results 25 =
(20 +30) / 2).
➤ To add totals to a Pivot:
1 Click a row or column label handle to select it.
Selecting the outermost label creates a total; selecting an inner label creates a subtotal.
2 Select Add Total on the shortcut menu.
A submenu of data functions is displayed.
3 Select a data function.
Cumulative Totals
By adding cumulative running totals to a pivot table, you can break totals by dimension to
restart at each dimensional grouping in the report.
➤ To add a cumulative calculation:
1 Select a fact item in the data grid of the Pivot.
2 Select Add Cume on the shortcut menu.
The Add Cume shortcut menu is displayed.
3 Select a scope from the Add Cume shortcut menu.
A new data values item named “Cume of X” is displayed across each row of the report. The new
cume item maintains a cumulative running sum of the original data values item.
Note: Cumulative totals are most effective when all dimensions are located on a row or column of the report, and data
label column heads are placed orthogonally.
➤ To modify a cumulative calculation:
1 Select a column in which a cume has already been place in the pivot table’s data grid.
258
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
2 Select Modify Cume on the shortcut menu.
The Modify Cume submenu is displayed.
3 Select a scope from the Modify Cume shortcut menu.
Surface Values
You can use underlying or surface values when working with totals in Pivot sections.
Underlying values refer to values from the original results section. Surface values refers to
values in the actual report section. The two approaches yield different results, and produce
values that may be displayed incongruous with the values in the report.
To understand this difference between underlying and surface values, consider a simple pivot
table with two values of 20 and 30. Each of these is already a total of underlying values (20 = 8
+12 and 30 = 10 + 20). An average of the underlying value yields the result of 12.5 = (8 + 12 +
10 + 20) /4). An average of the surface values yields the results 25 = (20 +30) / 2). By default,
the surface value feature is not active.
➤ To activate surface values, select a pivot item and Surface Values on the shortcut menu.
Analyzing Pivot Data
Data functions in the Pivot section are particularly useful if you want your report to display
different types of values. Data functions summarize groups of database records and replace the
original values with new summary data.
For example, in the Pivot section, you can show either the total sale, average sale, or the
maximum sale of each product by quarter. Each of these dimensions is based on the same
underlying values. They differ only in the data function that is applied.
Table 44
Pivot Data Functions
Data Function
Returns the:
Sum
Sum of all underlying values.
Average
Average of all underlying values.
Count
Number of underlying values.
Count Distinct
Number of distinct values in a column.
Null Count
Number of nulls among underlying values.
Non-Null Count
Number of underlying values; null values are excluded.
Maximum
Highest of underlying values.
Minimum
Lowest of underlying values
% of Row
Sum of underlying values as a percentage of their respective surface row.
Pivot Section
259
Table 44
Pivot Data Functions (Continued)
Data Function
Returns the:
% of Column
Sum of underlying values as a percentage of their respective surface column.
% of Grand
Sum of underlying values as a percentage of all surface values in the report.
➤ To apply a data function:
1 Select a row or column of facts (such as Amount).
2 Select Data Function on the shortcut menu.
A shortcut menu of available data functions is displayed.
Optional: You can also select the item or column and choose Actions > Data Function, and select
the (function).
3 Select a function.
Each column is recalculated according to the data function applied to the underlying value.
Paging Through Pivot Data
By default the Workspace shows a fixed number of rows in a table when a user views a page in a
browser. Often data extends beyond the vertical and horizontal rows shown on the page. To
view your paging options, see the table below.
Table 45
Pivot Paging Options
Paging Option
Description
Current Page
The tooltip shows the current page in the report.
Page Left
Moves one page in the up direction. To move to the top page, select [Shift] + Click + Up.
Page Up
Moves one page in the down direction. To move to the first page in the down direction, select
[Shift] + Click + Down arrow.
Page Down
Moves one page in the left direction. To move to the first page in the right direction, select
[Shift] + Click + right arrow.
Page Right
Moves one page in the left direction. To move to the first page in the left direction, select [Shift]
+ Click + left arrow.
Common Chart/Pivot Features
The Interactive Reporting document management features allow you to easily tailor the look of
reports. The features shown below are common in the Chart and Pivot sections:
260
●
Sorting Charts/Pivots
●
Drill Anywhere into Charts/Pivots
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
●
DrillDown into Dimensional Data
Sorting Charts/Pivots
In the Chart and Pivot sections, data is sorted alphabetically. You can override this default and
sort dimensional data with reference to other data, rather than alphabetically.
For example, if a chart lists each type of item your company sells and the total amount sold of
each, initially the item types are alphabetically ordered. But this data becomes more
meaningful when you instead sort the item types with reference to the total sales revenue
produced by each. This approach allows you to rank each product type from highest to lowest
total sales.
When you want to apply a sort criteria there are three components used to define the sort
condition:
●
Sort Items – Consists of those items that can be sorted in ascending or descending order. In
the Chart section, sort items refers to the chart axes. In the Pivot section, sort items refers to
the pivot dimensions.
●
Referential Items – Refers to the numeric data item included in the Chart or Pivot section,
and also the keyword “labels.” These selections provide two ways to sort the selected Chart
or Pivot item.
●
❍
Sorting by labels – Dimensional data items are sorted alphabetically by name when the
chart section is created: this is equivalent to sorting by “labels.” When selected, the
“labels” keyword simply indicates that the item chosen from the submenu are sorted
by label or name, rather than by reference to corresponding numeric data values in the
report.
❍
Sorting by values – Sorting by a numeric data item orders each value of the target item
specified by its corresponding numeric value in the second list. Sorting by values
produces an entirely different sort order. For example, your chart may list each state in
which your company has made sales revenue and the total cost-of-sales for each. The
data items are initially listed in alphabetical order, that is, sorted by “labels.” When you
sort instead by cost-of-sales, the states are ranked in order by each corresponding costof-sales figure.
Functions – Refers to aggregate statistical functions available when you sort by values.The
functions generally duplicate the data functions available in the chart section.
When you sort by values, dimensional data is sorted by the corresponding numeric values of
the referenced item. (For example, sorting states by the sum total of the cost of good sold in
each state).
➤ To specify a sort:
1 Select an item to sort in the Chart or Pivot sections.
2 Click either Sort Ascending or Sort Descending on the shortcut menu.
3 Select Label to sort the item alphabetically, or select the numeric value item as a sort reference.
Common Chart/Pivot Features
261
4 If you selected a numeric value, choose an aggregate function on the shortcut menu.
Drill Anywhere into Charts/Pivots
The Drill Anywhere feature allows you to drill into and add items in the Chart and Pivot
sections that are resident in the Results section, but have not been included in the Chart and
Pivot you are viewing. Drill anywhere items are broken out as a new label item(s)
automatically. The advantage of this feature is that it instantly allows you to add items to the
data set to reflect temporary and hypothetical situations.
The extent to which you can drill into your data depends on how the original query was built,
since Drill Anywhere retrieves data from the Results section.
➤ To drill anywhere into a Chart:
1 Select a pivot dimension or chart item for analysis.
2 Select Drill Anywhere on the shortcut menu.
A shortcut of drill anywhere items displays.
3 Select an item on which to drill down.
The report is redisplayed, breaking out the additional data as a new label item.
Note: If no options are available in the Drill Anywhere drop down list, all available items have been referenced in the
chart.
DrillDown into Dimensional Data
The DrillDown feature enables you to use a predefined drill-down path to go directly to the
next item in a hierarchy when working with dimensional analysis. For example, you may need
to find out if a particular product sells better in different regions of the country. Using a drilldown path, all you have to do is follow the drilldown path to discover which state or even city is
a more appropriate market for your product.
➤ To drill down into a Pivot or Chart label:
1 Select any label for drill-down analysis.
Because the drill-down into feature is not context sensitive, access the drill-down from any
label shown.
2 Click Drilldown into on the shortcut menu.
All available drill-down paths are displayed. Each drill-down path shows the topic which is
being drilled into, and the label from which it was drilled.
3 Click the drill-down label.
After you specify the drill down label, the label is added to the Data Layout and breaks out the
additional data according to the label selected for drill-down.
262
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
➤ To drill up from data:
1 Click the label that has been drilled downed.
2 On the Pivot or Chart menu, select Drill Up.
The report is redisplayed, reversing the drill-down and displaying the original item.
OLAPQuery Section
The OLAPQuery section is designed for viewing and analyzing queries based on
multidimensional databases (MDD). This section includes the following topics:
●
Working with OLAP Data
●
OLAP Data Functions
Working with OLAP Data
The Workspace provides several ways for you to dynamically manage your OLAP data for
better viewing analysis:
●
OLAP Terminology
●
Auto-Sizing a Column
●
Sorting OLAP Dimensions
●
Drilling into OLAP
●
Drilling up
●
OLAP Data Functions
OLAP Terminology
Cube – The data in OLAP databases is stored in cubes. Cubes are made up of dimensions and
measures. A cube may have many dimensions.
Dimensions – In an OLAP database cube categories of information are called dimensions.
Some dimensions could be Location, Products, Stores, and Time.
MDX – MDX (Multi Dimensional eXpressions) is the language used to give instructions to
OLE DB for OLAP- compliant databases. When an OLAP query section is built, Interactive
Reporting is translating those into MDX instructions. When the query is refreshed, MDX is
sent to the database server. The data the server returns to the document is the collection of
records that answers the query.
Measures – Measures are the numeric values in an OLAP database cube that are available for
analysis. The measures could be margin, cost of goods sold, unit sales, budget amount, and so
on.
OLAPQuery Section
263
Members – In a OLAP database cube, members are the content values for a dimension. In the
location dimension, they could be San Francisco, Japan, Paris, 35 Main Street, Tokyo, USA,
France, Rome, and so on. These are all values for location.
Multidimensional – Multidimensional databases create cubes of aggregated data that
anticipate how users think about business models. These cubes also deliver this information
efficiently and quickly. Cubes consist of dimensions and measures. Dimensions are categories
of information. For example, locations, stores and products are typical dimensions. Measures
are the content values in a database that are available for analysis.
Auto-Sizing a Column
By default, the Workspace truncates columns evenly and without regard to the length of data
values. With the Auto-Size Column Width feature, you can automatically size any column to fit
the text of the largest value in the column.
➤ To auto-size a column:
1 Select the column.
2 Select Auto-Size Column Width on the shortcut menu.
Sorting OLAP Dimensions
In the OLAP section, data can be sorted in ascending or descending order.
➤ To specify a sort:
1 Select an item to sort in the OLAP sections.
2 Select either Sort Ascending or Sort Descending on the shortcut menu.
3 Select Label to sort the item alphabetically, or select the numeric value item as a sort reference.
4 If you select a numeric value, choose an aggregate function on the Function shortcut menu.
Drilling into OLAP
The Drill Down feature retrieves data from the MDD cube following the hierarchy down to the
granular level. When you find a specific item to learn more about, such as a product line, you
can drill down into the item label. You can drill down on more than one item and additionally
drill down on all items at the same time.
For a member drill down, any row or column label can be drilled into so that you can view the
structure of the hierarchies for any particular dimension. Every time you select a specific label
in a dimension row or column, you show only the data for that label value. When you select the
dimension tab for a level, you show all the members of that dimension level.
For a measure drill down, you can show how different measures consolidate together. A drill
down on a measure is done on a progressive basis, one level at a time on a 1 to n path
(sequential rather than nested). For example, if Profit is the parent of Tax and Pre-Tax Profit,
264
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
and Revenue and Expenses are children of Pre-Tax Profit, then the Tax and Pre-Tax columns
are drilled down first and you must select the Pre-Tax label to display the Revenue and Expense
columns.
Note: You cannot set filters while in a drilled-down state on a dimension.
➤ To drill down on a label:
1 Select a label.
2 Click Drill Down on the shortcut menu.
You can select a label and choose Action > Drill Down.
Note: Analytic Services For a measure drill down, you can show how different measures consolidate together. A drill
down on a measure is done on a progressive basis, one level at a time on a 1 to n path (sequential rather than
nested). For example, if Profit is the parent of Tax and Pre-Tax Profit, and Revenue and Expenses are children of
Pre-Tax Profit, then the Tax and Pre-Tax columns are drilled down first and you must double-click the Pre-Tax label
to display the Revenue and Expense columns.
Drilling up
If you used the drill-down feature, you return to your original view of the data by drilling up
one level at a time. To drill up, you simply select the level to drill up.
➤ To drill up on a label:
1 Select the label that has been drilled down.
2 Select Drill Up on the shortcut menu.
Optional: You can also select a label and choose Action > Drill Down.
OLAP Data Functions
Column or row totals added to your OLAPQuery are aggregates (literally, totals of totals), and
can be recalculated using data functions. When applied to totals, data functions apply to the
calculation to “surface” values.
When applied to surface values, data functions recalculate the values in the visible cells or
“surface” of the OLAPQuery. For example, you can show the total sale, average sale, and
maximum sale of each product by Quarter. Each of these dimensions is based on the same
value. They only differ in the data function that is applied.
Table 46
OLAP Data Functions
Data Function
Returns the:
Sum
Sum of all values.
Average
Average of all values.
OLAPQuery Section
265
Table 46
OLAP Data Functions (Continued)
Data Function
Returns the:
Count
Number of values.
Maximum
Highest of values.
Minimum
Lowest of values
% of Row
Surface values as a percentage of their respective row item.
% of Column
Surface values as a percentage of their respective column item.
% of Grand
Surface values as a percentage of all like values in the report.
➤ To apply a data function:
1 Select a row or column of facts (such as Amount) On the shortcut menu.
2 Select Data Function.
A list of available data functions is displayed.
Optional: You can also select the item or column and choose Actions > Data Function.
3 Select the function.
Each column is recalculated according to the data function applied to the underlying value.
Dashboards
The Dashboard section is a streamlined, push button approach to querying a database.
Dashboards are ideal for users who do not have the time to build a query or design a report
section. Up to the minute thumbnail views of data allow you to explore what is behind trends
and indicators.
On opening the file, you have a customized dashboard, which may show embedded reports
and navigational buttons and boxes that allow you to retrieve data, and populate controls.
Each button selection, item selection, or navigation sequence can invoke a script created by a
Designer. Behind the scene, Interactive Reporting refreshes the Dashboard script commands
that allow you to retrieve data, populate controls, hide objects, navigate to different sections,
and specify report parameters.
Report Section
The Report section allows you to view high-quality and professionally designed reports. These
reports can span anywhere from a complex critical operational report to a Results sets, a chart,
and a pivot table. Use the reports in this section to help you evaluate your business, expand
communications, and assist in the decision-making process.
266
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
The reports found here are dynamic and provide you with an almost unfiltered framework
from which to view and analyze data. You can resort and apply data functions, which allow you
to display different types of values.
Paging Through the Report
By default the Workspace shows a fixed number of rows in a table when a user views a page in a
browser. Often data extends beyond the vertical and horizontal rows shown on the page. To
view your paging options, see the table below.
Table 47
Report Paging Options
Paging Option
Description
Current Page
The tooltip shows the current page in the report.
Page Left
Moves one page in the left direction. To move to the first page in the left direction, select [Shift]
+ Click + left arrow.
Page Up
Moves one page up. To move to the top page, select [Shift] + Click + Up.
Page Down
Moves one view in the down direction. To move to the first page in the down direction, select
[Shift] + Click + Down arrow.
Page Right
Moves one page in the right direction. To move to the first page in the right direction, select
[Shift] + Click + right arrow.
Report Section
267
268
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
Chapter
11
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+
Production Reporting
Documents
This chapter describes the basic tasks for viewing and interacting with Production Reporting
documents.
In This Chapter
Viewing a Production Reporting Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Viewing Functionality for HTML Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Production Reporting Documents
269
Viewing a Production Reporting Document
➤ To view a Production Reporting document in the Hyperion System 9 BI+ Workspace:
1 Run a Production Reporting job in the Workspace.
2 Double-click the job output and view the available output formats.
Depending on the output formats selected when you ran the job, see “Output Options” on
page 406, you can select from some or all of the following output formats:
●
HTML file (HTML)
●
Portable Document Format file (PDF)
●
Comma Separated Value file (CSV)
●
Interactive Reporting Data file (BQD)
●
Microsoft Excel file (XLS)
●
Production Reporting Document (SPF)
●
PostScript file (PS)
●
HP Printer file (HP)
●
Line Printer file (LP)
3 Select the desired output format and click Open.
Figure 26 shows some sample output formats for a Production Reporting job.
270
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Production Reporting Documents
Figure 26
Sample Output Formats for a Production Reporting Job
Viewing Functionality for HTML Reports
When you view a Production Reporting document in an HTML format, you can navigate from
page to page, move to a specific page, or browse with a table of contents. You can also export
report information to different output formats directly from the navigation bar that appears at
the top of the report.
Using the Navigation Bar
The navigation bar provides options for navigating to different pages within the HTML report
and for viewing the report in multiple output formats. Figure 27 labels each item in the
navigation bar.
Viewing Functionality for HTML Reports
271
Figure 27
HTML Navigation Bar
Display as XML
Display as BQD
Display as CSV
Display as PDF
Display Table of Contents
Go to Page X of Y
Go to First Page
Go to Previous Page
Go to Next Page
Go to Last Page
Exporting Report Information from the Navigation Bar
The navigation bar displays icons for viewing an HTML report in different file formats. The
icons that appear on the navigation bar are defined in the Navigation Bar tab in the Production
Reporting Studio preferences. (See Volume 1 of the Production Reporting User’s Guide for more
information.) Table 48 describes the export options on the navigation bar.
Table 48
Icon
Export Options on the Navigation Bar
Message
Description
Display Table of Contents
Displays the Table of Contents frame.
Display PDF file
Displays the report in a Portable Document Format (PDF) and launches it
in a new browser window.
Download the Data in CSV
(comma-delimited) format
Downloads the report data in a Comma Separated Value format (CSV)
and displays it in a new browser window.
Download the Data in BQD
format
Downloads the report data in a Brio Query Data format (BQD) format and
displays it in a new browser window.
Display XML file
Displays the report in an XML format and launches it in a new browser
window.
Note: The HTML navigation bar only displays a subset of all the available output formats. See “Viewing a Production
Reporting Document” on page 270.
Using the Navigation Bar to Move Among Pages
You can navigate among the pages of a multi-page HTML report by using the paging options
on the navigation bar. Table 49 describes the navigation options on the navigation bar.
Table 49
Icon
272
Navigation Options on the Navigation Bar
Message
Description
Go to First Page
Displays the first page of the report in the current browser window.
Go to Previous Page
Displays the previous page of the report in the browser window.
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Production Reporting Documents
Table 49
Icon
Navigation Options on the Navigation Bar (Continued)
Message
Description
Go to Next Page
Displays the next page of the report in the browser window.
Go to Last Page
Displays the last page of the report in the browser window.
Navigating with the Table of Contents
The table of contents offers standard functionality for navigating through a document.
Figure 28 shows an HTML report with the table of contents displayed.
Figure 28
Table of Contents Displayed for an HTML Report
Viewing Functionality for HTML Reports
273
274
Using Hyperion System 9 BI+ Production Reporting Documents
Chapter
Using Web Analysis
12
This chapter describes Web Analysis functionality.
In This Chapter
Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Opening Presentations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Closing Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Web Analysis Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Creating Web Analysis Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Creating Documents from Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Modifying Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Selecting Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Advanced Member Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Searching for SAP BW Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Navigating Data Objects and Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Navigation Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Changing Display Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Pinboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
SQL Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Freeform Grids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Resizing the Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Managing Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Show/Hide Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Traffic Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Restrict Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Retrieve Only Top/Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Database Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Analytic Services Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Financial Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
SAP BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Relational Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Using Web Analysis
275
Custom Web Analysis Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Linking Components by Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Linking Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Edit Data Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Editing Data Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Copying, Cutting, and Pasting To and From Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Tips for Edit Data Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
276
Using Web Analysis
Presentations
Presentations, playlists of Web Analysis documents, enable documents to be grouped,
organized, ordered, distributed, and reviewed. Presentations are lists of pointers that reference
repository documents, not documents copied into sets.
Presentation properties govern display and content; file properties control identification,
access, and security.
Presentation Access and File Permissions
Because file permission and presentation access operate independently, presentations may be
distributed to users who cannot access the documents within them.
Documents for which users do not have list file permission are not listed; documents for which
users do not have read file permission cannot be opened.
File permissions that withhold document access prevent all access, directly or through
presentations. Presentation permissions that withhold access do not prevent direct document
access.
User and User Group Permissions
Users can access presentations assigned to them or the user groups to which they belong.
Both presentations and the documents within them must be assigned to user groups.
Otherwise, user group members can access the presentations but not the documents within
them (unless granted individual access).
To mitigate the risk of conflicting permissions, store presentations and their documents in the
same folder. Whenever possible, distribute documents and presentations to user groups. It is
easier to set permissions for all files in a folder and all users in a group than to manage
permissions for individual files and users.
Document and Folder References
You can add two kinds of references to presentations:
●
Document—When you add documents directly to a presentation, a reference to a unique
document identifier is created in the presentation. Wherever the document is moved, the
presentation can locate and present the document.
●
Folders—When you add folders to a presentation, the folder reference is directly added to
Presentation Content, but documents in the folder are dynamically referenced. Documents
added or removed from the folder are automatically added or removed from presentations
referencing that folder.
Note: You cannot dynamically include descendant folders, or presentations in target presentations. When adding a
folder to a presentation, only documents immediately in the selected folder are dynamically added to the target
presentation.
Presentations
277
Benefits and Considerations
Folder references simplify presentation maintenance because Web Analysis synchronizes
presentation playlists with referenced folder content. You can also change folder content
without editing its presentation. You must limit write access to the folder to prevent other
users from inadvertently adding content to a folder, and subsequently your presentation.
While document references are less flexible and require more maintenance, presentation
content is fixed.
Reference Reconciliation
When presentations are opened, Web Analysis first attempts to reconcile document references,
and then folder references.
If files are copied and the original file deleted, Web Analysis cannot locate the unique file
identifier. In this case, Web Analysis searches for files of the correct name at the same location.
When a reference cannot be found by means of identifier or location, the reference displays as
red in the Presentation Wizard.
Opening Presentations
Options for opening presentations:
●
Select File > Open > Document or the open toolbar button, and select a presentation file
from the Open dialog box.
●
Use File > Open > Desktop, and select a presentation from the Desktop folder.
●
Use the view pane Tools menu or Viewer toolbar button to access the Viewer module, and
select a presentation from the Desktop folder.
●
Use the view pane Tools menu or Explore toolbar button to access the Explore module, and
navigate to and select a presentation from a repository location.
➤ To open a presentation, using the Open dialog box:
1 Perform an action:
●
Select File > Open > Document.
●
Select the open button.
The Open dialog box displays. It lists current folder content, as specified by Look in.
2 Optional: From Type, select AllFilesor Hyperion > Presentation.
3 Navigate to the presentation:
●
From Look In, select a location from the drop down list.
●
Click the Go Up A Level button to display the contents of the parent folder in the selection
frame.
As you navigate, the selection frame lists the files and folders indicated by the Files of Type list.
278
Using Web Analysis
4 Select the presentation.
5 Click OK.
If the first presentation document uses a database connection requiring log on, the Database
Login dialog box is displayed.
6 If prompted by the Database Login dialog, enter a valid user name and password, select Save User ID and
Password, and click OK.
The selected presentation (and any other selections) display as content tabs below the content
area. The first presentation document is opened and displayed as the current document.
Notes on Opening Presentations
●
In the Open dialog box, you can select documents, presentations, or both. Multiple files are
opened in the order that the Selection frame lists them. The order of documents inside the
presentation is observed in the context of the other files being opened.
●
If multiple presentations contain multiple instances of a document, only the first instance
is opened. It may seem that the document did not open or that documents opened in the
wrong order. Only one instance of a document can be opened (and modified) at a time.
Closing Presentations
Unchanged files close. Changed repository files prompt for changes to be saved. Files not
previously saved to the repository trigger the Save As dialog box.
➤ To close all opened documents, select File > Close All.
Web Analysis Documents
Web Analysis documents display in data objects the data values returned from data sources. A
document can have multiple data objects, and data objects have a display type:
●
Spreadsheet
●
Chart
●
Pinboard
●
SQL spreadsheet
●
Freeform grid
You can review all display types, but you can create spreadsheets and charts only by using the
new document wizard.
To create a document you are required to specify:
●
Data source—provides data values
●
Data object—displays these values
Web Analysis Documents
279
●
Query—gets data values from the data source and returns them to the data object.
Properties customize each of these elements.
The database connection wizard specifies the type of data source, logon credentials, database
applications, dimension formatting and drill-through properties.
Each data object can be set to a display types that features specific formatting options.
Queries can be explicit, requesting information on particular dimension members, or
dynamic, requesting information about any dimension member that satisfies a set of criteria.
You have two document creation options:
●
Use the new document wizard
●
Modify Web Analysis documents and save them under new names or to new locations
Creating Web Analysis Documents
A wizard guides you through creating Web Analysis spreadsheets and charts. The wizard
requires a database connection. You must know where this database connection is located, and
have permission to use it.
➤ To create a document, using the new document wizard:
1 Select File > New Document, or select the toolbar New Document button.
The new document wizard displays. Depending on the modules installed, you may be
prompted to indicate the kind of document you want to create.
2 Optional: To create a Web Analysis document, select Create a Web Analysis document, and click Next.
If you are not prompted, proceed to the next step.
The content area displays Select a Data Source. Because the repository stores document
definitions and not document data, you must identify a data source and the parameters for
connecting to it.
3 Perform one:
●
In the text area, enter the path, including the file name, from the root directory (/) to a
database connection.
●
Click Browse, select a database-connection file from the O pen dialog box, and click OK.
4 Optional: Select Use my active POV, to populate the query from a predefined point of view definition, and
click Next.
Performing this step enables you to load members from predefined point of view definitions
and to insert dimensions and members with one click. You can define many point of view
definitions, but Use my active POV applies only the definition set in user preferences as the
current point of view.
5 Optional: Select Automatically select one dimension, to populate and display a simple spreadsheet, and
click Finish.
280
Using Web Analysis
Performing this step skips the remaining steps, and uses the highest aggregate members of the
time and measures dimensions to populate spreadsheet row and column axes (the quickest
method to use the new document wizard to display a spreadsheet).
Selecting Automatically select one dimension and Use my active POV and clicking Finish,
skips the remaining steps and displays a simple spreadsheet using the current point of view
definition.
6 Click Next.
In Select Row Dimension, you must select the dimensions to be used on the Rows axis. You are
required to have at least one row axis dimension and one column axis dimension.
7 To move a dimension name from Filters to Rows, select the name, and click the right arrow.
The dimension name is displayed in the Rows frame. If no point of view definition was
previously applied, the highest aggregate member of the dimension is used. If a point of view
definition was applied, its members are used.
8 Optional: To select members, in Rows, double-click a dimension name.
The Dimension Browser dialog box displays. The dimension is presented as a node tree in
the Browse frame. You select members from the Browse frame and move them to the
Selections frame, using the following methods:
●
To expand or contract the hierarchy, click the plus sign (+) or minus sign (-) nodes, or
double-click the dimension name.
●
To select members, right-click the dimension name, and select Select Member.
Member names are displayed in the Selections list.
●
To select members dynamically, right-click a member name, and select an advanced
member selection method.
●
Set the label mode for each dimension to the default label, an ID label, or the alias table
description set in database connection properties.
For descriptions of Dimension Browser dialog box options, see “Selecting Members” on
page 284.
9 After indicating row-axis dimensions and selecting members, click Next.
10 Using the methods used to define the row axis, move a dimension name from Filters to Columns.
11 Optional: To select members, double-click a dimension name in Columns.
12 Using Dimension Browser methods, select members, set options, and click OK.
13 Click Next.
In Step 5, you select page-axis dimensions. Although document intersections are relative to
member selections, you can organize row and column intersections by page members.
14 Optional: Using the methods used to define row and column axes, move a dimension name from Filters to
Pages.
15 Optional: Using Dimension Browser methods, select page members.
16 Click Next.
Creating Web Analysis Documents
281
In Step 6, you select filter-axis members.
All dimensions participate in all spreadsheet intersections, regardless of the axes to which
dimensions are assigned. Intersection arrangement is defined by row, column, and page axes.
Data values displayed at intersections are determined by member selections.
All data-object intersections are relative to filter member selections, which focus intersections,
data values, and, consequently, data-object analysis.
Filter-axis dimensions are by default represented by the highest aggregate member defined in
the data source outline. If a point of view definition was applied, its member selections are
used. If you select Filter members, all intersections are relative to the selections.
17 Optional: To display the Dimension Browser for Filter axis dimensions, double-click a dimension name.
18 Optional: Using Dimension Browser methods, select Filter axis members, and click OK.
19 Click Next.
20 Optional: Select a layout option:
Chart—displays the result set as a chart data object.
Spreadsheet—displays the result set as a spreadsheet data object.
Vertical Combination—displays the result set as both a chart data object and a spreadsheet
data object stacked vertically.
Horizontal Combination—displays the result set as both a chart data object and a spreadsheet
data object arranged side-by-side.
You can change the display type of Vertical and Horizontal Combination layouts; for example,
you can convert the spreadsheet to another chart type. The objects, however, are linked and
maintain a coordinated context.
21 Click Finish to submit the query to the data source.
The data source is queried. The result set returned displays as a data object (or objects) on a
Web Analysis document.
Creating Documents from Documents
When you save documents with new names or to new locations, you use data sources, data
objects, and queries defined in existing documents, leveraging documents to save time and
effort. You can modify documents before you save them to new names or locations.
➤ To create a document from a document:
1 Perform one:
●
Select File > Open > Document.
●
Select the open button.
The Open dialog box displays. A selection frame lists contents of the current folder, specified
by Look in.
2 Optional: From Type, select All Files or Hyperion > Web Analysis Document.
282
Using Web Analysis
3 Navigate to the document to be copied.
4 Select the document, and click Open.
If the document uses a database connection requiring log on, the Database Login dialog box
displays.
5 If prompted by the Database Login dialog, enter a valid user name and password, select Save User ID and
Password, and click OK.
The selected document displays.
6 Modify the document.
7 Perform one:
●
Select File > Save As.
●
Click the toolbar Save As button.
The Save As dialog box displays. A selection frame lists the contents of the current folder, as
specified by Look in.
8 Navigate to the folder into which to save your modified document.
9 Optional: After you navigate to the location to save the file, enter a new filename in Name.
10 Click Save.
The modified document is saved to the specified location with the specified name.
Modifying Queries
Data Layout is a query editing interface. Data Layout displays dimensions returned by the
database connection, arranged on four axes:
●
Rows
●
Columns
●
Pages
●
Filters
Database connections return three types of dimensions.
Table 50
Icon
Dimension Type
Dimension Type
Standard
Attribute
Attribute Calculations
Modifying Queries
283
All queries must have at least one dimension assigned to the row axis and one dimension
assigned to the column axis; multiple dimensions can be nested on one axis. You can organize
row and column dimensions by assigning dimensions to the page axis. Dimensions not
assigned to rows, columns, and pages are in the filter axis.
All dimensions, regardless of the axes to which they are assigned, participate in all intersections
displayed by a data object. You use Data Layout to arrange dimensions, to specify level of
detail, and to set query options.
Note: All data objects start as spreadsheets. Charts and pinboards are organized by the four axes, despite using
different metaphors to display data.
➤ To redefine the query and dimension layout of the current data object of the current
document, click the toolbar Data Layout button.
➤ To move a dimension between axes, drag the dimension to the other axis.
➤ To select members, double-click the dimension name.
Dimension Browser is displayed. See “Selecting Members” on page 284.
Modifying Filter Dimensions
All data-object intersections are relative to filter member selections, which focus intersections
and data values, and consequently, analysis.
Filter-axis dimensions are by default represented by the highest aggregate member defined in
the data source outline. To focus analysis on members other than the highest aggregate, you
can select filter members.
Filter member selections do not rearrange dimensions or reorganize pages, but focus analysis
on specific intersections.
Selecting Members
Dimension Browser, an interface for selecting members and refining database queries, is used
with the new document wizard, Cube Navigator dialog box, Information panel, or on its own.
The Dimension Browser presents dimensions as a node tree in the Browse frame. You must
select dimension members from this Browse frame and move them to the Selections frame.
Members can be selected individually, by familial relationships, by data-source-specific option,
or from predefined selection lists.
➤ To access Dimension Browser:
284
●
Right-click a member label on a data object, and select Browse.
●
In the view pane Information panel, select a dimension name.
Using Web Analysis
●
Click the Data Layout button, and double-click a dimension name.
●
In the new document wizard, double-click a dimension name.
➤ To expand or collapse hierarchies in Dimension Browser, click the plus sign (+) or minus sign
(-) nodes, or double-click a dimension name.
➤ To select a member, right-click the member, and select Select Member.
The member name is displayed in the Selections list. You cannot select the database
connection name at the top of the node tree.
➤ To select a member dynamically in Dimension Browser, right-click the member, and select an
advanced member selection method from the list.
See “Advanced Member Selection” on page 285.
➤ To remove a member from the Selections list, perform an action:
●
Right-click the member in the Browse or Selections list, and deselect the selected selection
method.
●
Select the member in the Selections list, and click Remove.
➤ To remove all members from the Selection list, click Remove All.
➤ To preview members returned by advanced member selection, before you quit Dimension
Browser, click Preview.
➤ To set dimension label mode, select a Dimension Labels opttion.
●
Use Default
●
Descriptions—the current alias table
●
IDs—the unique ID label
●
Both—ID label and description (used in Financial Management)
The label displayed by description is drawn from the alias table specified by the active user’s
database preferences. You can set an alias table for each Active Preferences user ID or user
group ID.
Users can specify label mode in specific dimensions, using Dimension Browser.
Advanced Member Selection
In dimensions with large member sets, users can define selections by using the Dimension
Browser right-click menu. Right-clicking member names enables selection by familial
relationship and data-source-specific options.
Advanced Member Selection
285
Table 51
Icon
286
Dimension Browser Right-Click Menu
Command
Description
Select Member
Selects the currently member
Also Select Children
Selects the current member and its children
Also Select Descendants
Selects the current member and its descendants
Select Parent
Selects the parent of the current member
Also Select Ancestors
Selects the current member and its ancestors
Also Select Siblings
Selects the current member and members on its level and of its
parent.
Select Dim Bottom
Selects lowest-level members
Select Dim Top
Selects the highest ancestor
Also Select Level
Selects the current member and all members on its level
Also Select Generation
Selects the current member and all members of its generation
Also Select Previous
Displays the Previous Selection dialog box, typically used to select
previous members at the current level
Also Select Subset
Displays the Subset dialog box, used to select an Analytic Services
member subset.
No
Icon
Substitution Variables
Displays the Substitution Variables dialog box, used to set a
substitution variable as the dimension selection
No
Icon
User Defined Fields
When Financial Management is used as a data source, displays the
User Defined Fields dialog box, in which you can specify one of three
pre-defined attribute values, select members featuring the specified
attribute values, and compose compound selection statements with
AND and OR
No
Icon
Dynamic Time Series
Displays the Analytic Services Dynamic Time Series menu (for
example: History To Date, Quarter To Date)
No
Icon
Search
Displays the Search dialog box, in which you use search criteria to
locate members of large dimensions (adds found members to the
Selection list)
No
Icon
Find In Tree
Locates members in large dimensions; expands the dimension
hierarchy but does not add found members to the Selection list
Using Web Analysis
Advanced Member Selection by Data Source
Different data sources support different member selection methods.
Table 52
Advanced Member Selection by Data Source
Data Source
Advanced Member Selection Methods
Analytic Services
●
Also Select Children
●
Also Select Descendants
●
Select Parent
●
Also Select Ancestors
●
Also Select Siblings
●
Select Dim Bottom
●
Select Dim Top
●
Also Select Level
●
Also Select Generation
●
Also Select Previous
●
Select Subset
●
Substitution Variables
●
Dynamic Time Series
●
Search
●
Find in Tree
●
All Members
●
Select Dim Top
●
Select Dim Bottom
●
Also Select Descendants
●
Select Parent
●
Also Select Ancestors
●
Also Select Children
●
Also Select Siblings
●
Also Select Level
●
Select At Level
●
Also Select Previous
●
Also Select Next
●
Dynamic Time Series
●
Select Top/Bottom
●
Filter on Member Properties
●
Find in Tree
SAP BW
Advanced Member Selection
287
Table 52
Advanced Member Selection by Data Source (Continued)
Data Source
Advanced Member Selection Methods
Financial Management
●
All Members
●
Select Dim Top
●
Select Dim Bottom
●
Also Select Descendants
●
Member List
●
Also Select Children
●
User Defined Field
●
Search
●
Find in Tree
●
Also Select Children
●
Also Select Descendants
●
Select Parent
●
Also Select Ancestors
●
Also Select Siblings
●
Select Dim Bottom
●
Select Dim Top
●
Also Select Generation
●
Find in Tree
JDBC Relational Data Sources
Consider relational-hierarchy implications in advanced member selections on relational data
sources. When highest ancestors are selected, default members, rather than aggregations, may
be used. For example, the relational hierarchy may equate Also Select Children and Also Select
Descendants.
Searching for Members
Analytic Services and Financial Management users can locate members in large dimensions by
using search criteria. Searches can be conducted inside Dimension Browser (during query
creation) or from the data-object right-click menu (during document analysis).
➤ To search for Analytic Services or Financial Management members in Dimension Browser:
1 Right-click a member.
2 Select Search.
3 Enter search criteria in the text boxes.
Table 53
Member Search Criteria
Search Criteria
Member
288
Using Web Analysis
Control
Description
Searches by text string
Table 53
Member Search Criteria (Continued)
Mode
ID
Searches by member name
Description
Searches by member alias
Both
Searches by ID and description (Financial Management data sources
only)
Find In Tree
If Expand Tree is selected, adds found members to the Selections list
and expands the Browse node tree to display the members in the
hierarchy (only the first search-criteria instance is selected)
If Expand Tree is not selected, adds found members to the Selections
list
Range
Option
Searches the entire dimension or down the hierarchy from the rightclicked member
Whole
Searches for the whole member name or alias
Substring
Searches for the first, last, or middle part of the member name, in the
order entered in the member text box
Beginning
Searches for the start of the member string
Ending
Searches for the end of the member string.
4 Click OK.
➤ To search for Analytic Services members in a Web Analysis data object:
1 Right-click a member, and select Search from the right-click menu.
2 Enter search criteria in the text boxes, and click OK.
Note: Search performance is directly related to size and complexity of the dimension hierarchy.
Searching for SAP BW Characteristics
SAP BW users can locate characteristics in large dimension hierarchies by using search criteria.
The searches can be conducted only inside Dimension Browser during composition of a query.
➤ To locate SAP BW members in Dimension Browser:
1 Right-click a member.
2 Select Search.
3 Enter search criteria in the text boxes.
Searching for SAP BW Characteristics
289
Table 54
SAP BW Search Criteria
Search Criteria
Control
Description
Mode
ID
Searches by member technical name
Description
Searches by member alias
Search Criteria
Searches using an operand:
●
Equal To
●
>=
●
<=
●
>
●
<
●
Between
●
Contains Pattern
Searches by text string.
Execute
Runs the search function
Filtered
Members
Displays the search result set
Add
Moves the selected member from the Filtered Members list to the
Selected Members list.
Remove
Moves the selected member from the Selected Members list to the
Filtered Members list
Selected
Members
OK
Displays members of the search result set
Add All
Moves all filtered members to the Selected Members list
Remove All
Moves all selected members to the Filtered Members list
Adds the Search Selected Members list to the Dimension Browser
Selections list
4 Click Execute to run the search function using the criteria specified in the Mode and Search Criteria group
boxes.
The search result set is displayed in the Filtered Members box.
5 Select members from the Filtered Members list, and click Add to add them to the Selected Members list.
Only Selected Members list members are added are added to the Dimension Browser
Selections list when you click OK.
6 Click OK.
290
Using Web Analysis
Locating Members
In large or complex dimension hierarchies, you can locate known members to select other
members, rather than composing search strings for unknown members.
➤ To find a known member in the dimension hierarchy:
1 In Dimension Browser, from Selections, right-click a member.
2 Select Find In Tree.
In the Browse frame, the dimension hierarchy is expanded, and the first instance of the selected
member is highlighted. You can now select members based on their relationship to the selected
member.
Selecting Members Using Analytic Services Subsets
Analytic Services users can define rules that select dimension member subsets by criterion.
These rules are composed of the following items:
●
UDA—user-defined attributes
●
Generation—generation within the dimension hierarchy
●
Level—level within the dimensional hierarchy
●
Expression—pattern of wildcard characters
●
Attribute dimensions—database-defined attributes
●
Conditional logic—advanced subset member selection criteria
You can search all selected member descendants using a maximum of 50 subset conditions.
Subset criteria are saved by document in the repository. Because the filter panel cannot
accommodate lengthy selection lists, subset member selections made in Filters are summarized
with a description.
➤ To define a member subset selection:
1 In Dimension Browser, right-click a member.
2 Select Select Subset.
The Subset dialog box displays. At the top, it indicates dimension members against which the
rule is applied. Use the Individual Selection Rule control to compose a rule by selecting
components from drop down lists.
3 Select a type: UDA, Generation, Level, Expression, or Attribute.
4 Select an operand: is (=) or is not (not equal).
5 From the last list, select a value.
6 Click Add.
Searching for SAP BW Characteristics
291
You must add the rule to Total Subset Definition for it to be used. You can define compound
and conditional rules by adding multiple rules to the definition and using the Advanced
button to connect them.
Table 55
Advanced Subset Options
Option
Submenu
Description
Add
Rule added to Total Subset Definition
Update
Rule replaced by another rule
Validate
Parenthetical syntax of Total Subset Definition verified
Remove
Rule deleted from Total Subset Definition
Remove All
All rules deleted from Total Subset Definition
Connect
Move
Parenthesis
And
AND inserted at end (AND is used by default when multiple rules are
added to the definition.)
Or
OR inserted at end
Move Up
Rule moved up in Total Subset Definition
Move Down
Rule moved down in Total Subset Definition
Add (
Open parenthesis inserted at beginning
Add )
Close parenthesis inserted at end
Remove (
Open parenthesis deleted
Remove )
Close parenthesis deleted
Remove All ()
All parentheses deleted from Total Subset Definition
Substitution
Variable
Substitution Variable dialog box presented, enabling you to select a predefined substitution variable for the rule value
7 Optional: To compose a compound subset definition, repeat steps 3 through 6.
8 Click OK.
Wildcard Characters
Supported wildcard characters include the question mark (?) and the asterisk (*), which can be
used only once in an expression and only at the end of a text string.
292
Using Web Analysis
Expressions
Subset queries defined by expressions are not dependent upon label mode, returning all strings
satisfying the expressions regardless of the alias table. Users must determine whether value
sources are ID, description, or from alias tables and refine queries as needed.
UDAs
Web Analysis enables Analytic Services users to create user-defined attributes (UDAs), words
or phrases associated with and defining characteristics of members, for member subsets.
Selecting Financial Management User-Defined Fields
Financial Management users can select members with specified attribute criteria. User-defined
fields define compound selection rules for attributes of a specified value.
➤ To define a user-defined field selection:
1 In Dimension Browser, right-click a member.
2 Select User Defined Field.
The User Defined Field Selection dialog box is displayed. The controls at the top prompt you
to compose a rule.
3 Select a field: UserDefined1, UserDefined2, or UserDefined3.
The equal sign is the sole operand for the rule.
4 Enter a value.
5 Click Add.
To be used, the individual rule must be added to the Selection Criteria. Define compound and
conditional rules by adding multiple rules to the frame, and using Advanced options to
connect them.
Table 56
Option
Advanced User-Defined Field Options
Submenu
Description
Add
Rule added to Selection Criteria
Update
Rule replaced by another rule
Remove
Rule deleted from Selection Criteria
Remove All
All rules deleted from Selection Criteria
Connect
Move
And
AND inserted at end (AND is used by default when multiple rules are
added to the definition.)
Or
OR inserted at end
Move Up
Rule moved up in Selection Criteria
Searching for SAP BW Characteristics
293
Table 56
Advanced User-Defined Field Options (Continued)
Option
Parenthesis
Submenu
Description
Move Down
Rule moved down in Selection Criteria
Add (
Open parenthesis inserted at beginning
Add )
Close parenthesis inserted at end
Remove (
Open parenthesis deleted
Remove )
Close parenthesis deleted
6 Optional: To compose compound subset definitions, repeat steps 3 through 5.
7 Click OK.
Filtering by SAP BW Member Properties
SAP uses the term member properties to refer to member attributes. You can select SAP BW
members and filter them by their member properties. You select the members and then define
filtering definitions on the selections.
➤ To select SAP BW members by their member properties:
1 In Dimension Browser, select a member.
The member is displayed in the Selection frame.
2 Right-click the member, and select Filter on Member Properties.
The Member Properties dialog box is displayed. The controls at the top prompt you to
compose a rule.
3 From the list, select a member property.
4 Select an operand.
5 In the text area, enter a value for the member property.
6 Click Add.
You must add the rule to the filter definition for it to be used. You can use multiple rules to
create compound definitions.
Table 57
Option
294
Advanced Filter on Member Properties Options
Submenu
Description
Add
Rule added to the filter definition
Update
Rule replaced by another rule
Remove
Rule deleted from the filter definition
Using Web Analysis
Table 57
Advanced Filter on Member Properties Options (Continued)
Option
Submenu
Remove All
Parenthesis
Connect
Move
Description
All rules deleted from the filter definition
Add (
Open parenthesis inserted at beginning
Add )
Close parenthesis inserted at end
Remove (
Open parenthesis deleted
Remove )
Close parenthesis deleted
And
AND inserted at end (AND is used by default when multiple rules are
added to the definition.)
Or
OR inserted at end
Move Up
Rule moved up in the filter definition
Move Down
Rule moved down in the filter definition
7 Optional: To compose compound definitions, repeat steps 3 through 6.
8 Click OK.
Using SAP BW Select Top/Bottom
SAP BW enables you to limit the size of and rank query result sets. You select members and
then define filtering definitions on the selections.
➤ To limit and rank SAP BW members as part of the query:
1 In Dimension Browser, select a member.
The member is displayed in the Selection frame.
2 Right-click the member, and select Select Top/Bottom.
The Top/Bottom dialog box is displayed.
3 Select Top or Bottom.
You cannot select both, as you can with Analytic Services.
4 From Using Function, select Percent, Sum, or Count.
You can determine rank by only one method.
5 In the text area, enter a value for the selected method.
For Percent, use a value between one and one hundred. For Sum, enter a threshold. All
member values summed up to and including the threshold are returned. For Count, provide
an integer, to indicate how many top or bottom members to return.
6 In Order By, select a dimension.
Searching for SAP BW Characteristics
295
Because all dimensions participate in all intersections, you must identify the intersection by
which the selected dimension is ranked.
7 Optional: Click Selection.
Dimension Browser for the Order By dimension is displayed. You can select a member of the
Order By dimension by which to rank the selected dimension.
8 Click OK.
Selecting Financial Management Member Lists
Member lists are predefined variables, used for frequently changing information, created using
Financial Management, and identified by variable names.
➤ To use a Financial Management member list in a Dimension Browser member selection:
1 In Dimension Browser, right-click a member.
2 Select Member List.
The Choose Member List dialog box is displayed.
3 From Choose Member List, select a member list.
4 Click OK.
Selecting Substitution Variables
Substitution variables are predefined variables, used for frequently changing information,
created using Analytic Services, and identified by variable names.
Substitution variables simplify document maintenance, enabling fluctuating values to be
adjusted centrally (in Analytic Services) and to be referenced dynamically (by Web Analysis
documents).
➤ To use a substitution variable in a Dimension Browser member selection:
1 In Dimension Browser, right-click a member.
2 Select Substitution Variable.
The Substitution Variable dialog box is displayed.
3 Select a substitution variable.
4 Click OK.
Multiple Substitution Variables
Multiple substitution variables can be used using Subset Member Selections.
296
Using Web Analysis
Syntax Tips
Substitution variables have specific rules and syntax requirements:
●
For substituted values, use dimension or member names.
●
Do not use ampersands (&) as the first character of member names.
Analysis Tools and Substitution Variables
When member selections defined by substitution variables are used in analysis tool definitions,
the variables are resolved to their current values, ensuring accurate aggregations, comparisons,
and calculations, regardless of the substitution-variable definition.
Selecting Personal Variables
Personal variables, containers for ad hoc collections of otherwise unrelated members, enable
users to define and name complex member selections. To leverage personal variables, you
must be presented with relevant dimensions and database connections.
Defining personal variables does not include them in queries. You select personal variables
from Dimension Browser when you define queries.
➤ To use a personal variable in a query, select the personal variable definition from the
Dimension Browser Browse panel.
Applying Point of View (POV)
POV database preferences enable users to insert dimensions and members into the documents
of others. Definitions must be defined and activated for specific database connections.
When a POV is activated, the Use Point of View check box in the new document wizard is
enabled. Documents created when Use Point of View is selected use the active POV.
Workspace users cannot create or activate POV definitions. But, they can select database
connections with activated POV definitions and apply the definitions to documents that they
are creating. Workspace users cannot apply POV definitions to documents.
POV definitions consist of axes and member selections. Entire definitions are used when
documents are created with activated POVs.
If all POV member selections are custom filters, you may not see changes in your document.
You can check Point of View, of the view pane Information tab, to see which POV, if any, is
applied.
Using POV definitions is a three-part process:
1 Use Web Analysis Studio to create a POV definition.
2 Use Web Analysis Studio to activate the definition.
3 Set a document (existing or newly created) to use the definition.
Searching for SAP BW Characteristics
297
➤ To apply an activated POV definition to a new document:
1 Perform an action:
●
Select File > New Document.
●
Click the new button.
The steps for creating documents are displayed.
2 Click Browse.
3 From the Open dialog box, select the file of the database connection that uses the activated POV definition
that you want to use, and click OK.
Defining Dynamic Time Series Selections
You can select Dynamic Time Series (DTS) definitions, created in Analytic Services, for query
selection statements. To define time periods, users select DTS definitions and time members.
Time Substitution Variables
You can select DTS substitution variables.
Substitution variables are predefined placeholders, used for frequently changing information,
identified by variable names, and having temporary values that define data type. When
substitution variables are used, temporary values are replaced by current values. Substitution
variables are stored at the database level in Analytic Services.
➤ To define a DTS selection:
1 In Dimension Browser, right-click a time member.
2 Select Dynamic Time Series.
The Dynamic Time Series dialog box is displayed, listing DTS definitions as option buttons
and substitution variables in a list.
3 Select a DTS definition option.
4 Perform an action:
●
Select the Substitution Variables tab, and then select a substitution variable.
●
Select the Members tab, and then select a member to represent the date in the X-to-date
definition.
5 Click OK.
Defining Previous Member Selections
Selecting Also Select Previous from the Dimension Browser right-click menu displays the Also
Select Previous dialog box, used to select previous members at one dimension level.
298
Using Web Analysis
➤ To define a previous member selection:
1 In Dimension Browser, in Browse, right-click a member.
2 Select Also Select Previous.
The Also Select Previous dialog box is displayed.
3 Specify how many previous members to retrieve.
4 Click OK.
Dimension Browser is displayed. The member that you right-clicked is displayed in the
Selections list with the Also Select Previous icon.
Navigating Data Objects and Sources
Web Analysis documents can contain a variety of data objects:
●
Spreadsheets
●
Charts
●
Pinboards
●
SQL spreadsheets
●
Freeform grids
Despite their diversity, data objects are not static. You can rearrange, expand, change, and
concentrate dimension intersections. These methods, called navigation methods, enable travel
through dimensional hierarchies.
Navigation methods are specific to data object and data source.
Table 58
Supported Data Sources
Type
Data Source
OLAP
Analytic Services
IBM DB2 OLAP Server
SAP BW
Hyperion
Financial Management
Planning
Relational
IBM DB2 Enterprise Server Edition
Microsoft SQL Server
Oracle
Teradata
Other JDBC RDBMS
OLAP data sources support the navigation methods described in this chapter. Other Hyperion
data sources and relational data sources support fewer navigation methods.
Navigating Data Objects and Sources
299
Navigation Methods
Hyperion System 9 uses various navigation methods:
Table 59
Navigation Methods
Navigation
Description
Method
Move
Relocates dimensions on datalayout axes
Position dimensions on or between axes, using the Data
Layout dialog box, Information panel, or new document
wizard
Paging
Maintains dimensions on their
row and column axes, while
changing their intersections on
the page axis
Click or scroll the Page Control panel. See “Paging” on
page 301.
Keep Only
Retains one member of the
selected dimension, while
deselecting all other members
Right-click a member and select Keep Only. See “Keep
Only” on page 302
Remove Only
Deselects the selected
member, removing it from the
query result set
Right-click a member, and select Remove Only. See
“Remove Only” on page 302.
Drilling
Increases or decreases
dimension detail by displaying
or not displaying members in
the hierarchy
Double-click members. You can customize drilling behavior.
See “Drilling Options” on page 302.
Drill-Linking
Navigates to other documents
or executables
Click a linked cell and pass the cell and the dimension
context to another data object or document
Custom Controls
Define Web Analysis navigation
Use a custom document component to change the query.
While Web Analysis users can use custom document
components, you can only create these components in the
Web Analysis Studio.
Navigation method specifics:
●
Drilling—Navigates to related members
●
Linking (called drill-linking)—Passes selected members to other documents
●
Linked reporting objects (LROs)—Open executables to display cell-notes, Windows
executables, or Web page URLs.
Repositioning Dimensions
You can rearrange intersections by repositioning dimensions on or between axes.
➤ To reposition a dimension, using the Data Layout dialog box, click the data layout button, and
drag the dimension from its current positions to another position on the current axis or to
another axis.
300
Using Web Analysis
Note: Document creators use Properties to lock the ability to swap and move dimensions.
➤ To reposition a dimension, using the view pane Information panel:
1 Select View > View Pane.
2 Click the information panel button to make Information the current tab.
3 Scroll to the Filter, Page, Row, and Column trees to review placement of the current data object.
4 Drag the dimension from one axis tree to another axis tree.
Note: You must have at least one row and one column dimension. If repositioning leaves a row or column axis empty,
use Data Layout to rearrange the dimension layout.
Paging
Paging maintains dimensions on row and column axes, while changing their intersections on
the Page axis.
You can jump or scroll through pages of intersections by using the Page Control panel.
➤ To display the Page Control panel, select View > Pages.
The Page Control panel displays in the content area above the relevant data object, organizing
Page axis intersections so that each page is relevant to one Page member.
➤ To navigate the Page dimension, perform an action:
●
Click < and > to move up and down in the page series.
●
From the list box, select a page member by name.
Pages
Think of the Page axis as the Z-axis of a three-dimensional graph. Visualize a stack of
spreadsheets. You navigate the stack to compare values among pages. The spreadsheets
represent Page axis dimensions, and the pages represent Page axis members or member
combinations.
Multiple-Page and Single-Page List Boxes
When you work with page dimension combinations, the Page Control panel can display
multiple-page list boxes, which display all possible page combinations, whether or not data
exists. Single-page list boxes omit page combinations that do not contain data. Hyperion
recommends using single-page list boxes when working with sparse dimensions.
Navigating Data Objects and Sources
301
➤ To separate or combine Page dimensions into multiple-page list boxes, click Toggle Multipage.
Keep Only
Keep Only deselects all but one member of the selected dimension.
➤ To deselect all but one member of a dimension, right-click the member, and select Keep Only.
Remove Only
Remove Only deselects a member, removing it from the query result set.
➤ To remove one member from the query result set, right-click a member, and select Remove
Only.
Drilling Options
Drilling increases or decreases data-object detail by changing the member display. Because
drilling is customizable, the term drilling refers to almost any hierarchical navigation prompted
by clicking a dimension label.
Three types of drilling options:
●
Drilling options specify the result set.
●
Expand on Drill specifies whether the result set replaces or augments the currently
displayed members.
●
The Selected Member data-display option specifies whether the drilled member is included
in the result set.
Web Analysis users must use the data-object, right-click menu to set drill options. Expand on
Drill and Selected Member options are set by user preferences in Web Analysis Studio.
Default Drilling Behavior
Default drilling behavior for Web Analysis documents:
●
Drill Down displays children.
●
Drill Up displays parents.
●
Drill to Top displays the highest ancestor.
Drilling options are data-source specific. If, in user preferences, you set drilling options that
are not supported by the current data source, drilling defaults to Drill to Next Level.
302
Using Web Analysis
Drill-Linking
Drill-linking enables you to navigate to other documents by clicking cells with preplaced links.
Drill-linking differs from both drilling and linked reporting objects. Drilling navigates the
dimensional hierarchy. Drill-linking passes the current member selection to other documents
and executables. Linked reporting objects are linked to cell notes, file attachments, and URLs.
Changing Display Types
Documents display data values returned from data sources in data objects. Web Analysis
documents can have multiple data objects, and each data object can have a different display
type:
●
Spreadsheet
●
Chart
●
Pinboard
●
SQL spreadsheet
●
Freeform grid
Each display type has numerous prerequisites. Because SQL spreadsheets and freeform grids
can be created only in Web Analysis Studio, you cannot change them.
Pinboards require traffic lighting definitions, so you can change spreadsheets or charts to
pinboards, only if the pinboard definition is defined.
➤ To change the display type of the current document, select Format > Display Type >, and
select a display type or chart type.
Note: Web Analysis Studio users can lock the display type to prevent subsequent users from altering a document.
Pinboards
Pinboards are custom, graphic representations of multiple dimensions. Pinboard dimensions
are represented by graphics, pin icons on graphics, and color (or state).
Pinboards Prerequisites
Because pins change image or color dynamically, based on traffic-lighting cues, you must
create the spreadsheet and apply traffic lighting before creating the pinboard in Web Analysis
Studio.
Pinboards
303
Pinboard Series
A pinboard series enables drilling from one pinboard to another. You create the first pinboard
and then use the Web Analysis Studio Pinboard Designer right-click menu to generate
subsequent pinboards, each of which uses the children of the preceding pinboard. The
pinboard that represents the dimension bottom is the last in the series.
Pins
You can use the default pins provided by Web Analysis Studio or use Pin Designer to create
create pins. Pins change their image or color, based on traffic lighting.
Figure 29
Default Pin, Image Pin, and Color Pin
Traffic-Lighting Control Panel
If multiple traffic-lighting definitions are defined on a document, the pinboard display type
displays a traffic-lighting control panel, which enables you to scroll through the traffic-lighting
definitions.
SQL Spreadsheets
SQL spreadsheet data objects enable users to query relational data sources and display the
returned data values on custom documents:
●
SQL spreadsheets can be created only on custom documents.
●
You must understand how to compose SQL queries to create SQL spreadsheets.
●
You must be able to connect to a relational data source using supported JDBC drivers.
Alternatives for accessing relational data:
304
●
In Web Analysis Studio, you can create a relational database connection to be used by
spreadsheets, charts, and pinboards.
●
You can use freeform grids, which leverage custom document database connections, to
combine data values from multiple data sources in one data object.
●
In Web Analysis Studio, you can create a relational drill-through connection from an OLAP
database connection to a relational data source.
●
You use the Related Content dialog box to leverage pre-defined Analytic Integration
Services drill-through reports.
Using Web Analysis
Freeform Grids
Freeform grids present OLAP, relational, and manually entered data on a data object, enabling
you to leverage multiple data sources in integrated, dynamic calculations.
Freeform grids are comprised of rows and columns; page dimensions are not visually
represented. You can use OLAP database connections with members assigned to the page axis,
but you cannot navigate through page dimensions unless you create additional subscription
controls. In short, only the first page of a multidimensional cube is displayed.
Resizing the Display
You can resize large Web Analysis documents in the content area:
●
Auto-Resize—attempts to fit the current data object into the current content area
●
Custom Resize—fits the current data object to a manually specified pixel area
➤ To auto-resize the current data object, select Format > Auto-Resize.
➤ To size the current data object to a specified size, select Format > Custom Resize, and, when
the Custom Resize dialog box is displayed, enter the preferred number of horizontal and
vertical pixels.
Managing Analysis Tools
You can leverage tools, advanced-analytical-formatting and data-source-specific, from the
workspace. Analysis tools expedite comparisons, visually organize data, and promote
structures and conclusions.
Analysis tools are data-source-specific; not all tools are available in all data objects.
Analysis tools are centrally organized and applied by Analysis Tools Manager, accessed using
the data-object, right-click menu. Analysis Tools Manager features an Ordered By panel,
which shows the number and order of tool definitions activated on the current data object.
You can create analysis tools, using the data-object, right-click menu.
Table 60
Analysis Tools
Tool
Description
Traffic Lighting
Displays the Traffic Lighting dialog box, used to color-code member
values based on fixed limits or value comparison
Traffic Lighting visually associates member values, whether or not
they are sorted or ranked.
Sorting
Displays the Sorting dialog box, used to order the query result set
Retrieve Only Top/Bottom
Displays the Retrieve Only Top/Bottom dialog box, used to limit and
rank the query result set
Managing Analysis Tools
305
Table 60
Analysis Tools (Continued) (Continued)
Tool
Description
Restrict Data
Displays the Restrict Data dialog box, used to restrict the query
result set based on criteria
Calculations
Displays the Calculations dialog box, used to create calculated rows
and columns
Show/Hide Only
Displays the Show/Hide dialog box, used to filter data by color,
value, and member
Data Formatting
Displays the Data Formatting dialog box, used to format data values
based on member or value criteria
Related Content Definitions
Related Content definitions can be managed from the Related Content dialog box and Analysis
Tools Manager. Edits, including remove and remove all, made in the Related Content dialog
box change definition content but do not impact definition existence. In Analysis Tools
Manager, you can activate, deactivate, reorder, and remove, but not edit, definitions.
Order of Definitions
The order in which Analysis Tools definitions are applied affects data object behavior. Users
can edit application order by moving Analysis Tools definitions up and down in the Ordered
By panel.
Default Analysis Tools Definitions
Analysis Tools Manager displays default formatting, measures formatting, and spreadsheet
option definitions at the top of the Ordered by list panel. Definitions originating from user
preferences, database connection properties, and data object properties are applied before
Analysis Tools definitions and can be edited, but not removed or disabled.
Activating and Deactivating Analysis Tools Definitions
You can activate and deactivate Analysis Tools definitions without removing them from
Analysis Tools Manager; thus, you can use many different Analysis Tools combinations.
306
Using Web Analysis
➤ To deactivate an Analysis Tools definition, in the Ordered By panel, select the appropriate
Active check box.
Show/Hide Only
You use the Show/Hide Only analysis tool to include or exclude members in or from data
objects. Using member name, traffic lighting color, or data value criteria, you enabled focused,
value-based analysis.
The Information panel displays the Show/Hide Only definitions that restrict or display
current-document information.
Asymmetrical Analysis
Asymmetric documents feature nested dimensions that differ (by at least one member) across
an axis. You can hide rows, columns, and chart objects and thus enable assymmetrical analysis.
Multiple Show/Hide Only Definitions
Multiple Show/Hide Only definitions are applied in order, enabling simultaneous control by
member, color, and values.
Differences in Show/Hide Only Definitions
Different types of Show/Hide Only definitions operate differently:
●
Calculations displays or hides all calculated members.
●
Members displays or hides specified members of the dimension right-clicked in the
document.
●
Values displays or hides members on the axis opposite the dimension right-clicked in the
document.
●
Colors displays or hides members on the axis opposite the dimension right-clicked in the
document.
Show/Hide Only definitions are created in the Show/Hide Only dialog box.
Table 61
Show/Hide Only Dialog Box
Control
Description
Select Method
Show—Displays items that satisfy definition criteria
Hide—Hides items that satisfy definition criteria
Where
Calculations
Shows or hides all calculated members
Member
Bases definitions on specified, current-axis members
Show/Hide Only
307
Show/Hide Only Dialog Box (Continued)
Table 61
Control
Description
Any Values
Tests whether any opposite-axis member contains values that satisfy current-axis
criteria
All Values
Tests whether all opposite-axis members contain values that satisfy current-axis
criteria
Any Colors
Tests whether any opposite-axis member contains colors that satisfy current-axis
criteria
All Colors
Tests whether all opposite-axis members contain colors that satisfy current-axis
criteria
Set Condition
Operator menu
Enables selection of a criteria operator: Greater than (>), Greater Than or Equal To
(>=), Equal to (=), Less Than or Equal To (<=), or Less Than (<), Not Equal To (<>)
Value Text box
Enables users to enter values for conditions
Color
Opens the Select Color dialog box, used to set condition color
Members
Lists members and attributes to which the current definition applies
Advanced
Aggregates or separates member combinations
Apply
Applies new definitions to documents
Creating Show/Hide Only Definitions
➤ To create a Show/Hide Only definition:
1 Right-click a member, and select Analysis Tools > Show/Hide Only.
The Show/Hide Only dialog box is displayed.
2 From Select Method, select Show or Hide.
3 Define a Show/Hide Only definition option:
●
To show or hide calculated members, in Where, select Calculations.
●
To show or hide specific members, in Where, select Members, and, from Members, select
members.
●
To show or hide members, if any member satisfies the specified condition.
i.
In Where, select Any Values.
ii. From Members, select members.
iii. Use the operator list and the value text area to define the condition.
●
To show or hide members, if all members satisfy the specified condition:
i.
In Where, select All Values.
ii. From Members, select members.
308
Using Web Analysis
iii. Use the operator list and the value text area to define the condition.
●
To show or hide members, if any member satisfies the specified traffic-lighting color
condition:
i.
In Where, select Any Colors.
ii. From Members, select members.
iii. From the operator list, select Equal To (=) or Not Equal To (<>).
iv. From Color, select an option.
●
To show or hide members, if all members satisfy the specified traffic-lighting color
condition:
i.
In Where, select All Colors/
ii. From Members, select members.
iii. From the operator list, select Equal To (=) or Not Equal To (<>).
iv. From Color, select an option.
Note: Show/Hide Only Members is applied to the named member, and Show/Hide Only Values and Show/Hide Only
Colors are applied to the opposite axis, using the values in the selected axis.
Color options are enabled only for data objects that feature active traffic-lighting definitions.
An Advanced check box enables you to specify conditions for member combinations. The
Apply button enables you to apply the current definition to the current data object, without
exiting the dialog box. You may have to drag the dialog box title bar to see the data object.
4 Click OK.
The definition is added to Analysis Tools Manager.
5 Click Close.
Editing Show/Hide Only Definitions
➤ To edit a Show/Hide Only definition:
1 Right-click a member, and select Analysis Tools > Analysis Tools Manager.
Analysis Tools Manager is displayed.
2 Right-click a Show/Hide Only definition, and select Edit.
The Show/Hide Only dialog box is displayed.
3 Make selections and define parameters.
4 Click OK.
Show/Hide Only
309
Traffic Lighting
The Traffic Lighting analysis tool color-codes data cells. You can base color-coding on twomember comparisons or single-member fixed limits. Colors graphically associate member
values, whether or not they are sorted or ranked. Traffic Lighting definitions are created in the
Traffic Lighting dialog box and maintained as the document is pivoted and changed.
The Information panel displays the Traffic Lighting definitions that color-code the current
data object.
Table 62
Traffic Lighting Dialog Box
Control
Description
Create Criteria
Apply Traffic Lighting To
Specifies the dimension to which traffic lighting is applied
Comparing It To
Specifies the dimension to which the preceding dimension is compared
Assign Limits
Specifies the interval, set point, and color parameters that compose the
traffic lighting definition
% Differences
Indicates that color-coding is based on the percent difference between
compared members. If not enabled, color-coding is based on value
difference.
Enable Financial Intelligence
Enables Hyperion data sources to treat expenses and liabilities as
negative values. Works with % Differences to reflect variance and variance
percent calculations for the Traffic Lighting dialog box.
Advanced
Aggregates or separates member combinations
Apply
Applies the definition to the document
Financial Intelligence Variations
% Differences and Enable Financial Intelligence cooperate to provide four calculations for the
Traffic Lighting dialog box:
●
Neither selected—Traffic Lighting compares members, using a subtraction calculation.
●
Only % Differences selected—Traffic Lighting compares members, using a percent
difference calculation.
●
Enable Financial Intelligence selected—Traffic Lighting compares members, using an
advanced variance calculation that recognizes specific expense and liability members as
negative values.
●
Both selected—Traffic Lighting compares members, using an advanced variance percent
calculation that recognizes specific expense and liability members as negative values.
Assign Limits Box
In the Assign Limits box, you indicate the number, color, and criteria for color-coding traffic
lighting ranges.
310
Using Web Analysis
Table 63
Assign Limits Box
Control
Description
Add to End
Inserts set points within ranges
Remove Last
Removes the last traffic lighting range and set point
Set Color button
Opens the Select Color dialog box, used to set range colors
Note: Setting traffic lighting colors to the colors used by Spreadsheet Options may obscure member color-coding.
Creating Traffic Lighting Definitions
➤ To create a traffic lighting definition:
1 Right-click a member, and select Analysis Tools > Traffic Light.
The Traffic Lighting dialog box is displayed.
2 From Apply To, select the member to which traffic lighting is to be applied.
3 From Comparing It To, select the member to which the previously selected member is to be compared.
●
Compare to a fixed limit by, in Assign Limits, deselecting % Differences or, from
Comparing It To, selecting Fixed Value.
●
Select Advanced twice, first to separate members into combinations and second to select
from aggregated members.
Assign Limits contains three default set points and colors. Set points divide values into ranges
identified by color.
4 For each set point, indicate a set point operand.
The first list prompts you to specify whether the setpoint value is in the range; you choose
greater than (>) or greater than and equal to (>=).
5 In the text box, enter a setpoint value, to specify the threshhold that separates ranges.
The second list prompts you to specify the setpoint value; you enter positive or negative
decimal values.
6 Optional: To change the range color, click Color, and select a color square.
The Color button displays a color-square palette. Selecting a square assigns it to the current
traffic lighting range and displays the hexidecimal value of the color in the neighboring textentry field.
7 Optional: To change color opacity, enter a value in the last text-entry box for each range.
You can specify a percentage from zero (transparent) to one hundred. Transparency is
sometimes used to reveal background graphics.
8 Optional: To add a set point, click Add to End, and repeat steps 4 through 7.
9 Click OK.
Traffic Lighting
311
Editing Traffic Lighting Definitions
➤ To edit a Traffic Lighting definition:
1 Right-click a member, and select Analysis Tools > Analysis Tools Manager.
Analysis Tools Manager is displayed.
2 Right-click a Traffic Lighting definition, and select Edit.
The Traffic Lighting dialog box is displayed.
3 Make selections, and define parameters.
4 Click OK.
Sorting
The Sorting analysis tool orders dimensions of the query result set in ascending or descending
alphanumeric order. Sorting definitions, which are created in the Sorting dialog box and
displayed in the Information panel, are dynamic—applied as documents are drilled, pivoted,
and changed.
You can use client-side and server-based sorting definitions:
●
Client-side sorting—provided by Sorting and executed on local computers
●
Server-based sorting—provided by Retrieve Only Top/Bottom and executed on Analytic
Server; performed prior to returning the OLAP query result set to the client, thus
minimizing the result set and network traffic
Multiple sorting definitions are applied in the order presented by Analysis Tools Manager.
Sorting definitions applied to axes with equal values may be rearranged by sorting definitions
applied to axes with diverse values. The document display is the result of the cumulative
application of all active sorting, client-side and server-side, but it may seem that only the last
sorting definition was applied.
Table 64
Sorting Dialog Box
Control
Description
Sort On
Specifies the member to which the sorting definition is applied
Order
312
Ascending
Selects ascending alphanumeric order
Descending
Selects descending alphanumeric order
Apply
Apply the definition to the document
Using Web Analysis
Creating Sorting Definitions
➤ To create a sorting definition:
1 Right-click a member, and select Analysis Tools > Sort.
The Sorting dialog box is displayed.
2 From Members, select the member to which sorting is to be applied.
3 Select Ascending or Descending.
4 Click OK.
Editing Sorting Definitions
➤ To edit a sorting definition:
1 Right-click a member, and select Analysis Tools > Analysis Tools Manager.
The Analysis Tools Manager is displayed.
2 Right-click a sorting definition, and select Edit.
The Sorting dialog box is displayed.
3 Make selections and define parameters.
4 Click OK.
Restrict Data
The Restrict Data analysis tool narrows the return set by requiring data values to be relevant to
rules and operands. Data can be restricted by two-column comparison or single-column fixed
limits.
The Information panel displays Analytic Services Restrict Data definitions for the current
document.
Because Restrict Data is executed by Analytic Services, the network server is protected from
transmitting and the client is protected from processing large result sets.
Users can apply Restrict Data to result sets of processed queries (using the Analysis Tools rightclick menu) and of unsubmitted queries. The last step of the new document wizard enables
users to create Restrict Data definitions.
Restrict Data
313
Table 65
Restrict Data Dialog Box
Control
Description
Select Column
Displays the Select Column dialog box, used to select a column from the
current document
Operator menu
Specifies an operator: Greater than (>), Greater Than or Equal To (>=),
Equal to (=), Less Than or Equal To (<=), Less Than (<), Not Equal To
(<>)
Operand menu
Specifies one of three operands:
Value Text box
●
A value Of—restricts data to a value or range of values
●
The Data Value of Column—displays a secondary Select Column
button, used to compare two columns
●
A Missing Value—restricts missing values
Specifies values for Restrict Data conditions
Note: It is advised to use one member per dimension in filters when restrict data or retrieve top/bottom is applied. If
multiple members are selected per dimension, the application aggregates results. Because restrict data and
retrieve top/bottom are parts of Analytic Services queries, aggregation occurs after queries are returned and may
result in unexpected result sets.
Creating Restrict Data Definitions
➤ To create a Restrict Data definition:
1 Right-click a member, and select Analysis Tools > Restrict Data.
The Restrict Data dialog box is displayed.
2 From Select Column, select a column on which to restrict data.
3 From Operator, select an operator.
4 From Operand, select an operand: A Value Of, The Data Value of Column, or A Missing Value.
5 Depending on the selected operand, perform an action:
●
A Value Of—For Value, enter a data value.
●
The Data Value of Column—From the relevant list, select a column.
●
A Missing Value—Do nothing.
6 Click Add.
Four buttons are available: Add, Update, Remove, and Remove All.
Restriction criteria is listed in the Restriction Definition frame. You can use the Advanced
button to create compound definitions.
314
Using Web Analysis
Table 66
Option
Advanced Options
Submenu
Description
Add
Add the rule to Total Subset Definition
Update
Replace the selected rule with the current rule
Validate
Verify the parenthetical syntax of Total Subset Definition
Remove
Remove the rule from Total Subset Definition
Remove All
Remove all rules from Total Subset Definition
Connect
Move
And
Insert AND at the end of the rule. AND is used by default when multiple
rules are added.
Or
Insert OR at the end of the rule
Move Up
Move the rule up in Total Subset Definition
Move Down
Move the rule down in Total Subset Definition
7 Optional: To compose a compound rule, select an advanced connect option, and repeat steps 2 through 7.
8 Click OK.
Editing Restrict Data Definitions
➤ To edit a Restrict Data definition:
1 Right-click a member, and select Analysis Tools > Analysis Tools Manager.
Analysis Tools Manager is displayed.
2 Right-click a Restrict Data definition, and select Edit.
The Restrict Data dialog box is displayed.
3 Make selections and define parameters.
4 Click OK.
Retrieve Only Top/Bottom
The Retrieve Only Top/Bottom analysis tool, central to top/bottom analysis, leverages Analytic
Services server-based sorting and ranking to control the size and order of OLAP query result
sets. Thus, the network server is protected from transmitting and the client is protected from
processing large result sets.
Retrieve Only Top/Bottom
315
You can apply Retrieve Only Top/Bottom to result sets of processed queries (using the Analysis
Tools right-click menu) and to result sets of unsubmitted queries. Prior to sending queries,
click the Data Layout Options button and select Retrieve Only Top/Bottom. During query
creation, use the last step of the new document wizard.
The Information panel displays all Analytic Services Retrieve Only Top/Bottom definitions for
the current document.
Server-Based Sorting
Server-based sorting is provided by Retrieve Only Top/Bottom and executed on Analytic
Server. Server-based sorting is performed by the server prior to returning the OLAP query
result set to the client, thus minimizing the result set and network traffic.
Multiple, Filter-Axis Members
Multiple, filter-member selections impact Retrieve Only Top/Bottom.
Multiple filter-axis members are aggregated before they are to sent queries. Because clientbased aggregation does not exist in data source servers, queries are processed using server data
values. The discrepancy between client aggregations and server-based sorting and ranking
results in irregular result sets.
Note: Users are strongly advised to use one member per dimension in filters when using Retrieve Only Top/Bottom and
Restrict Data.
Table 67
Retrieve Only Top/Bottom Dialog Box
Control
Description
Select Column
Specifies the columns to which the Retrieve Only Top/Bottom definition is to be applied
Show
Limits the result set to the specified criteria
Top
Selects the highest data value, as indicated by the number in the relevant box
Bottom
Selects lowest data value, as indicated by the number in the relevant box
Sorting
316
Ascending
Displays the result set in ascending alphanumeric order
Descending
Displays the result set in descending alphanumeric order
Clear
Deletes all Retrieve Only Top/Bottom definitions
Using Web Analysis
Creating Retrieve Only Top/Bottom Definitions
➤ To create a Retrieve Only Top/Bottom definition:
1 Right-click a member, and select Analysis Tools > Retrieve Only Top/Bottom.
The Retrieve Only Top/Bottom dialog box is displayed.
2 From Column, select the column to which the Retrieve Only Top/Bottom definition.
3 Limit the result set by selecting Top or Bottom and, in the relevant box, indicating the number of members.
4 Sort the result set by selecting Ascending or Descending.
5 Optional: To remove all selections from the current definition and start over, click Clear.
6 Click OK.
Editing Retrieve Only Top/Bottom Definitions
➤ To edit a Retrieve Only Top/Bottom definition:
1 Right-click a member, and select Analysis Tools > Analysis Tools Manager.
Analysis Tools Manager is displayed.
2 Right-click a Retrieve Only Top/Bottom definition, and select Edit.
The Retrieve Only Top/Bottom dialog box is displayed.
3 Make selections and define parameters.
4 Click OK.
5 Click Close.
Data Formatting
Data Formatting options enable you to format members and data values for members and
criteria.
Although formatting options are fixed, formatting scope varies, depending on the formatting
source.
➤ To create a Data Formatting definition, right-click a member, and select Analysis Tools >
Format.
The Formatting dialog box indicates the member to which the formatting definition is to be
applied.
Formatting tasks:
●
Format member, font properties
●
Format member, data-value, font properties
Data Formatting
317
●
Edit member selections
●
Restore Default Formatting User Preferences settings
Table 68
Formatting Dialog Box
Controls
Description
Selections
Displays all member selection definitions
Remove All
Deletes all member selection definitions from Selections
Remove
Deletes specified member selection definitions from Selections
Edit
Displays the Edit Formatting Selections dialog box, used to define member selection
definitions.
Header
Font
Displays the Font Properties dialog box
Data
Format Data
Displays the Format Data dialog box, used to specify text and numeric formatting.
Conditional Formatting
Enables conditional formatting of member selections, based on criteria defined for
operand and value
Operand
Specifies the conditional formatting operand.
Value
Specifies the conditional formatting value
Restore Defaults
Restores the settings specified by default formatting user preferences
Creating Data Formatting Definitions
➤ To create a data formatting definition:
1 Right-click a column or row header, and select Analysis Tools > Format.
The Formatting dialog box is displayed. The Selections panel displays the member selection.
2 To specify a formatting definition, perform an action:
●
From Header, Font Family, specify header-cell font properties (point size and font style
and color) for the member selection.
●
From Data, Font Family, specify data-cell font properties (point size and font style and
color) for the member selection.
●
Click Data Format to display the Format Data dialog box, used to specify leading and
trailing text, numeric formatting, and missing values.
●
Select Conditional Formatting, enter a value, and select an operand.
3 Click OK.
The formatting definition is listed in Analysis Tools Manager, and the definition is applied to
the document.
318
Using Web Analysis
Conditional Formatting
You can refine formatting definitions by using conditional formatting, which requires member
selection values to satisfy additional criteria before formatting is applied.
Conditional formatting criteria is defined in the Formatting dialog box by selecting
conditional formatting, selecting an operand, and entering a value.
Editing Data Formatting Definitions
➤ To edit a data formatting definition:
1 Right-click a member, and select Analysis Tools > Analysis Tools Manager.
Analysis Tools Manager is displayed.
2 Right-click a formatting definition, and select Edit.
The Formatting dialog box is displayed.
3 Make selections and define parameters.
4 Click OK.
Calculations
You can create members as the products of calculations (client-side calculated members) and
edit, delete, and analyze calculations.
Calculation-definition order in Analysis Tools Manager prescribes the order in which
compound calculations are executed. To change the order, select definitions and click the up
and down arrow.
The Creating Calculations procedure describes Calculation analysis tool options in context.
Average
●
Function Performed: Sum of arguments divided by number of arguments
●
Number of Arguments: Two or more members or existing calculations
●
Options: Whether missing values are set to 0 and included in the number of arguments
Example: If Actual is 100 and Budget is 200, the average of Actual and Budget is 150.
Cumulative
●
Function Performed: A running total
●
Number of Arguments: One member or existing calculation
●
Options: Whether missing values are set to 0
Calculations
319
Example: Consider a spreadsheet with Actual as a column and Colas, Root Beer, and Cream
Soda as rows. If Actual values for the products are 100, 200, 300, Cumulative values are 100,
300, 600.
Difference from Average
●
Function Performed: Difference between the average value and the occurrence of an
argument
●
Number of Arguments: One member or existing calculation
●
Options: Whether missing values are set to 0
Example: Consider a spreadsheet with Actual as a column and Colas, Root Beer, and Cream
Soda as rows. If Actual values for the products are 100, 200, 300, the average is 200, and
Difference from Average values are -100, 0, 100.
Divide
●
Function Performed: Arithmetic division
●
Number of Arguments: Two members or existing calculation
●
Options: Whether missing values are set to 0
Linear Regression
●
Function Performed: Straight-line linear regression. Looks at all occurrences of the
specified argument and uses a linear regression algorithm to calculate a straight line
through the occurrences
●
Number of Arguments: One member or existing calculation
●
Options: Whether missing values are set to 0 in the calculation
Example: Consider a spreadsheet with Actual as a column and Jan, Feb, Mar as rows. If the
Actual values for the time periods are 100, 300, 600, the linear regression values are 83, 333, 58.
Notice that there is a constant difference between values (250). All points in the sequence are
adjusted. A chart of the numbers produces a straight line that intersects the original data
points.
Maximum
320
●
Function Performed: Given two or more arguments, the name of the member or existing
calculation with the maximum value
●
Number of Arguments: Two or more members or existing calculations
●
Options: Whether missing values are set to 0
Using Web Analysis
Example: Consider a spreadsheet with East and West as columns and Jan, Feb, Mar as rows. If
East values are 100, 300, 600 and West values are 200, 200, 300, Maximum values are West,
East, East.
Maximum Value
●
Function Performed: Given two or more arguments, the value of the member or existing
calculation with the maximum value
●
Number of Arguments: Two or more members or existing calculations
●
Options: Whether missing values should be set to 0
Example: Consider a spreadsheet with East and West as columns and Jan, Feb, Mar as rows. If
East values are 100, 300, 600 and West values are 200, 200, 300, Maximum Value values are
200, 300, 600.
Minimum
●
Function Performed: Given two or more arguments, the name of the member or existing
calculation with the minimum value
●
Number of Arguments: Two or more members or existing calculations
●
Options: Whether missing values should be set to 0
Example: Consider a spreadsheet with East and West as columns and Jan, Feb, Mar as rows. If
East values are 100, 300, 600 and West values are 200, 200, 300, Minimum values are East,
West, West.
Minimum Value
●
Function Performed: Given two or more arguments, the value of the member or existing
calculation with the minimum value.
●
Number of Arguments: Two or more members or existing calculations
●
Options: Whether missing values are be set to 0
Example: Consider a spreadsheet with East and West as columns and Jan, Feb, Mar as rows. If
East values are 100, 300, 600 and West values are 200, 200, 300, Minimum Value values are
100, 200, 300.
Multiply
●
Function Performed: Arithmetic multiplication
●
Number of Arguments: Two members or existing calculations or one member or existing
calculation and a constant.
●
Options: A constant as an argument (if you want to work with one rather than two existing
members or calculations) and whether missing values are set to 0
Calculations
321
Percent
●
Function Performed: Percentage calculation
●
Number of Arguments: Two members or existing calculations or one member or existing
calculation and a constant.
●
Options: A constant as an argument (if you want to work with one rather than two existing
members or calculations) and whether missing values are set to 0
Example: Consider a spreadsheet with Actual and Budget as columns and Jan, Feb, Mar as
rows. If Actual values are 100, 300, 600 and Budget values are 200, 200, 400, Percentage values
(Actual % Budget) are 50, 150, 150.
Percent Difference from Average
●
Function Performed: The Difference from Average result displayed as a percentage of the
average
●
Number of Arguments: One member or existing calculation
●
Options: Whether missing values are set to 0
Example: Consider a spreadsheet with Actual as a column and Colas, Root Beer, and Cream
Soda as rows. If Actual values for the products are 100, 200, 300, the average is 200, and the
Difference from Average (%) column values are -50, 0, 50.
Percent of Difference
●
Function Performed: Percentage difference calculation
●
Number of Arguments: Two members or existing calculations or one member or existing
calculation and a constant.
●
Options: A constant as an argument (if you want to work with one rather than two existing
members or calculations) and whether missing values are set to 0
Example: Consider a spreadsheet with Actual and Budget as columns and Jan, Feb, Mar as
rows. If Actual values are 100, 300, 600 and Budget values are 200, 200, 400, Percentage
difference values (Actual % diff Budget), calculated as ((Actual -Budget) / Budget) * 100, are
-50, 50, 50.
Percent of Member
322
●
Function Performed: A member argument as a percentage of another member argument.
The second argument is defined by a member intersected on an opposite axis.
●
Number of Arguments: Two or more members or existing calculations or one member or
existing calculation and a constant.
●
Options: Whether missing values are set to 0
●
Procedure: Select a Percent of Member calculation from the Function list, select a member
argument, and select a member from the opposite axis, using the Opposite Member list.
Using Web Analysis
Percent of Total
●
Function Performed: Percentage of total
●
Number of Arguments: One member or existing calculation
●
Options: None
Example: Consider a spreadsheet with Actual as a column and Jan, Feb, Mar as rows. If Actual
values are 100, 300, 600, Percentage of Total values are 10, 30, and 60.
Rank Ascending and Rank Descending
●
Function Performed: Ranking
●
Number of Arguments: One member or existing calculation
●
Options: Ascending or descending (the default). If ascending, the smallest value is ranked
as 1. If descending, the largest value is ranked as 1.
Example: Consider a spreadsheet with Actual as a column, Jan, Feb, Mar as rows, and Actual
values of 100, 300, 600. If descending is selected, Rank values are 3, 2, 1. If ascending is selected,
Rank values are 1, 2, 3.
Subtract
●
Function Performed: Arithmetic subtraction
●
Number of Arguments: Two or more members or existing calculations or one member or
existing calculation and a constant.
●
Options: Whether missing values are set to 0
Sum
●
Function Performed: Arithmetic addition
●
Number of Arguments: Two or more members or existing calculations or one member or
existing calculation and a constant.
●
Options: Whether missing values are set to 0
Trend
●
Function Performed: Trend based on straight-line linear regression; that is, the slope of the
straight line that a linear-regression calculation plots between original, data-series points
●
Number of Arguments: Two or more members or existing calculations
●
Options: Whether missing values are set to 0
Calculations
323
Variance
●
Function Performed: Arithmetic subtraction that uses Financial Intelligence account
metadata to interpret Financial Management expense and liability items as negative values
●
Number of Arguments: Two or more members or existing calculations or one member or
existing calculation and a constant.
●
Options: Whether missing values are set to 0
Variance Percent
●
Function Performed: Percentage difference calculation that uses Financial Intelligence
account metadata to interpret Financial Management expense and liability items as
negative values
●
Number of Arguments: Two members or existing calculations or one member or existing
calculation and a constant.
●
Options: A constant as an argument (if you want to work with one rather than two existing
members or calculations) and whether missing values are set to 0
Complex Calculations
Hyperion recommends dividing complex calculations into components and combining the
components into a compound calculation.
Example: To set up a calculation for (A + B) / (C x 2), where A, B, and C are members, you
divide the formula into steps:
●
Set up Sum for A + B, and name it Step 1.
●
Set up Multiply for C x 2, and name it Step 2.
●
Set up Divide for Step 1 result divided by Step 2 result, and name it Step 3.
●
Use Show Only Members to hide Step 1 and Step 2. If you want to switch between seeing
only members, seeing only calculations, and seeing both, you can use the Hide option in
your document right-click menu.
Creating Calculations
➤ To create a calculation:
1 Right-click a member, and select Analysis Tools > Calculation.
The Calculation Definition dialog box is displayed, providing seven control groups:
324
●
Name
●
Function
●
Select Position
●
Select Members
Using Web Analysis
●
Arguments
●
Missing Values
●
Formula
2 For Name, enter a name for the Calculation definition.
3 From Function, select the calculation type.
The calculation type is displayed in the Function box.
4 From Select Position, select an option.
●
Front/Top
●
Back/Bottom
●
Insert Before
●
Insert After
If you select Insert Before or Insert After, select an insertion point from the relevant list box.
The calculated row or column is inserted before or after the specified dimension.
5 To specify an argument, perform an action:
●
Select a member, and then click the arrow (>) to replace the undefined argument (?) with
the member.
●
For Constant, enter a value, and click the arrow (>) to replace the undefined argument (?)
with a value.
●
Select Advanced, select a member combination, and click the arrow (>) to replace the
undefined argument (?) with the member combination.
●
Select All Members to select all available members, and, if you want to exclude calculated
members from the equation, select Ignore Calculations.
The calculation definition is displayed in the Formula box.
6 Optional: To indicate how to handle missing values, from Missing Values, select an option:
●
Include—Calculates missing values as they are stored
●
Exclude—Removes arguments populated by missing values
●
Treat as Number—Populates the argument with the indicated value (default zero)
7 Optional: To evaluate a member argument as a percentage of a member argument located on the opposite
axis:
a. From Function, select Percent of Member.
b. Select a member argument.
c. Select a member from the opposite axis, using the Opposite Member box.
8 Click OK.
Calculations
325
Modifying Calculations
➤ To modify a calculation:
1 Right-click a member, and select Analysis Tools > Analysis Tools Manager.
Analysis Tools Manager is displayed.
2 Select a calculation definition, and click Edit.
The Calculation Definition dialog box displays the arguments for the calculation definition.
3 Optional: To change the calculation definition name, for Name, enter a name.
4 Optional: To move calculation position, select a different position option.
5 Optional: If you selected Insert Before or Insert After, from the relevant list box, select an insertion point.
The calculated row or column is inserted before or after the dimension.
6 Optional: To change calculation type, from Function, select a calculation type.
Changing calculation type requires that the user redefine all arguments. For instructions, see
“Creating Calculations” on page 324.
7 Optional: To change arguments: perform an action:
●
Select first an argument and then a member, and then click the arrow.
●
Select an argument; for Constant, enter a value; and click the arrow.
●
Select first Advanced, second an argument, and third a member combination, and click
the arrow.
The calculation definition is displayed in the Formula box.
8 Click OK.
Analytic Services Attribute Calculations
You can leverage server-based Analytic Services attribute calculations in the client. Because
server-based calculations are performed before OLAP query results are sent to clients, network
traffic and the result set are minimized.
To use attribute calculations, you use Data Layout to select the attribute calculations
dimensions to participate in the query. Then you use Dimension Browser to select the serverbased calculations to be returned by the query result set.
Note: You can reproduce many attribute calculations on the client, but you are responsible for defining the calculations,
and the client is responsible for processing the result set.
Reasons to use attributes in calculations:
326
●
To select, aggregate, and report on data that shares attributes
●
To select attributes by data type: text, numeric, Boolean, and data type
Using Web Analysis
●
To group numeric data types into statistical ranges
●
To use sum, count, min, max, and average functions on the attribute calculations
dimension automatically generated by Analytic Services
●
To use numerical attribute values from calculation scripts and member formulas in
calculations
●
To create crosstabs of attribute data for a dimension and analyze the dimension in terms of
each attribute
Database Connections
Database connections are portable files that define terms, conditions, and methods for
connecting to data sources. You must use Web Analysis Studio, not Web Analysis, to create
and modify database connections.
Documents are dependent on database connection files to query data sources. A document can
use multiple database connections to connect to one or more data sources.
To access data sources, you may be prompted to provide logon credentials.
Information provided in the view pane Information tab:
●
Database—displays the database connection name for the current data object
●
Database User Name—displays the user name by which access to the database connection
is granted
Data sources and database connections supported by Web Analysis documents:
●
●
●
OLAP data sources
❍
Analytic Services 6.5.6, 7.0.1, 7.1, and 7.1.2
❍
IBM DB2 OLAP Server 7.1 Service Pack 11, 8.1 Service Pack 3, and 8.2
❍
SAP BW 3.0, 3.1, and 3.5
Hyperion data sources
❍
Financial Management 3.4, 3.5, 3.5.1, and 4.0
❍
Planning 3.3, 3.5 with Analytic Services 3.5.1, and 4.0
Relational database connections:
❍
IBM DB2
❍
Microsoft SQL Server
❍
Oracle
❍
Teradata
System RDBMS requirements vary. See the Hyperion System 9 BI+ Financial Reporting,
Interactive Reporting, Production Reporting and Web Analysis Installation Guide for Windows or
UNIX for descriptions of relational system requirements.
Database Connections
327
Database Connection Files
Database connections are stored as repository files and adhere to most file management
conventions. You see only database connections that you own or to which you are granted
permissions. Various kinds of permission are needed to read, write, edit, and change database
connection file properties.
Database Connection Access and Document Permissions
Documents or presentations distributed to users may require database connections that the
users cannot access. Document access is independent of database connection access.
Database connection permissions that deny access may prevent access to only one connection.
Users can use other connections to the primary data source or to alternate data sources. Users
can leverage document definitions independently of database connections.
User and User Group Permissions
Users can access database connections assigned to them or to user groups to which they
belong.
When documents are assigned to user groups, the database connections that the document
uses must also be assigned to the user groups. Otherwise, user group members can access the
document, but not its data values (unless they are granted individual user access).
To mitigate the risk of conflicting permissions, store documents and their database
connections in the same folders. Whenever possible, distribute documents and database
connections to user groups. It is easier to set permissions for all files in a folder and all users in
a group than to manage permissions for individual files and users.
Integrating OLAP and Relational Data
Web Analysis Studio users can construct seamless liaisons between OLAP data and relational
data sources. Navigation from OLAP to relational data is called relational drill-through.
After relational drill-through is configured, users can navigate from the dimension bottom
(level 0) of the OLAP database and drill down to relational data.
Relational drill-through is a client-based integration solution comparable to the server-based
Analytic Integration Services drill-through.
The Relational Drill-Through dialog box is a graphical user interface for creating SQL
relational database queries. Users can use complex SQL syntax to specify table joins and to
select and order by clauses.
Note: Relational drill-through supports an array of JDBC relational data sources but does not support queries by levels,
generations, or previously selected members.
Relational drill-through definitions are saved as properties of database connection files.
328
Using Web Analysis
Analytic Services Database Connections
Analytic Services, the analytic solution that integrates data from multiple sources and meets
the needs of users across an enterprise, enables the quick and easy implementation of
solutions, adds value to previously inaccessible data, and transforms data into actionable
information.
Analytic Services integrates with existing business intelligence infrastructure, requiring a
minimum of IT overhead and enabling organizations to realize maximum return on their IT
investments.
Various Analytic Services features are extended through the Web Analysis graphical user
interface:
Restrict Data
Restrict Data narrows the return set by requiring data values to be relevant to specific rules and
operands. Data can be filtered by two-column comparison or by single-column fixed limits.
Retrieve Only Top/Bottom
Retrieve Only Top/Bottom Analysis leverages Analytic Services sorting and ranking to control
the size and order of OLAP query result sets, thus protecting the network server from
transmitting and the client from processing large result sets.
Edit Data
If you have permission, you can edit data values and write edits back to Analytic Services
databases. After edits are applied, users can recalculate the databases and measure the impact
of changed values.
Suppress Missing Rows, Zeros, and Shared Members
Web Analysis documents leverage Analytic Services to suppress missing rows, zeroes, and
shared members from the query result set, thus preventing return of irrelevant information,
reducing network traffic, and increasing query speed.
Label Mode and Alias Tables
Label mode enables you to select whether members are listed by ID number, description, or
both. Label mode options are database-specific and can be set for database connections,
specific documents, and specific dimensions.
Label mode indicates whether descriptions or ID numbers are used, and Analytic Services alias
table definitions provide the displayed values.
Analytic Services Database Connections
329
Analytic Services Drill Settings
Web Analysis documents use Analytic Services features to provide customized drilling,
dependent upon three factors:
●
The nature of the hierarchical navigation
●
Whether current members are replaced or augmented
●
Whether drilled members are replaced or augmented
Linked Reporting Objects (LROs)
Analytic Services LROs, which include the following types, enable users to annotate data values
by associating external media with cells.
●
Text documents
●
File attachments
●
URLs
Relational Drill-through
Web Analysis documents enable you to drill through to related relational data from the lowest
level of the Analytic Services outline by defining links on Analytic Services database
connections. Users can pass pages, filters, and row limits to focus and control the relational
query result set.
Analytic Integration Services Drill-through
Analytic Integration Services enables you to organize, format, and present relational data as
OLAP cubes in Analytic Services. Web Analysis documents enable you to access Analytic
Integration Services data through Analytic Services linked reporting objects by drilling on cells
marked for Analytic Integration Services drill-through.
Analytic Services Advanced Member Selection
In dimensions with large member sets, users can define selections with the Dimension Browser
right-click menu. Right-clicking member names enables selection by familial relationship and
database-specific options.
Attribute Dimensions and Attribute Calculations
In addition to member names, locations, and relationships, Analytic Services can store
characteristics about members. Analytic Services does not store attribute dimensions as part of
OLAP cubes, but dynamically calculates them upon request. Attribute dimensions are
displayed in dimension hierarchies and used in calculations, as standard dimensions are
displayed and used.
330
Using Web Analysis
Financial Management
Financial Management is a centralized, scalable, financial management and reporting solution.
With Financial Management, users can unify their financial information (actuals, budgets,
forecasts, statistics) in one Web-based application. Financial Management contains packaged
features to support tasks and practices:
●
Compliance with global reporting standards, currency management, automation of intercompany activities, and production of auditable results
●
Links between legal and management reporting and operating plans to achieve enterprisewide consistency and visibility
●
Multidimensional, line-of-business analysis
●
Improved collaboration through the Web
●
Key external industry metrics that provide one central point of financial intelligence
Designed for large-scale, centralized Web deployment, Financial Management acts as a shared
financial resource for thousands of users across the enterprise, enabling them to collaborate
and cooperate in the day-to-day business management. In one application, users can produce
auditable documents and forecasts for multiple consumers, such as regulatory bodies, financial
analysts, stakeholders, and business partners.
Financial Management Features Available in Web Analysis
Documents
Financial Management features extended to Web Analysis documents:
●
Organization by period
●
Advanced member selection
●
Cell text, related content
●
Line-item detail, related content
●
User-defined fields
●
Entity currency display
Related Content
The Related Content dialog box links to previously configured, related content and
applications.
When LRO indicates are enabled, blue triangles are displayed in spreadsheet cells that contain
links to related content. Right-clicking linked cells and selecting Related Content displays the
Related Content dialog box.
Cell text and line-item detail are accessed as related content.
Financial Management
331
Cell Text
You can launch cell text notes, read-only text strings stored in the Financial Management data
source.
Line-Item Detail
You can launch line-item-detail spreadsheets, read-only relational spreadsheets created from
Financial Management data sources.
Related Content Changes
Changes to cell text and line-item detail items are not displayed in Web Analysis documents
until Financial Management is recalculated and changes registered.
Organization by Period
Financial Management Organization by Period functionality enables an organization’s latest
consolidation structure to coexist with past structures in one application.
Thus, dimension hierarchies can be consolidated differently during different periods.
Organizational structures can change for many reasons, including acquisitions, disposals,
mergers, and reorganizations.
You can access Org by Period functionality when Org by Period is configured and set on the
Financial Management server.
When querying Financial Management database connections configured with Org by Period,
the Data Layout Options button displays an Org by Period item. The Org by Period dialog box
offers an interface for enabling Org by Period and selecting three members.
Note: You can review and set this feature only in Web Analysis Studio, but settings are observed by the HTML Web
client.
For information on Org by Period, See "Managing Metadata" in the Hyperion System 9
Financial Management Administrator's Guide.
Financial Management Advanced Member Selection
In dimensions with large member sets, users can define selections with the Dimension Browser
right-click menu. Right-clicking member names enables selection by familial relationship and
database-specific options.
Financial Management offers a smaller set of advanced member selection methods than does
Analytic Services.
332
Using Web Analysis
Table 69
Financial Management Advanced Member Selection Methods
Right-Click Menu Command
Description
All Members
Selects all members—a Financial Management member selection method
Select Dim Top
Selects the highest ancestor
Select Dim Bottom
Selects the lowest descendants
Also Select Descendants
Selects the currently member and its descendants
Member List
Displays the Member List dialog box, used to select lists of members—a
Financial Management member selection method
User Defined Fields 1, 2, and 3
Displays the User Defined Field dialog box, used to select members with
specific user-defined field values
Search
Displays the Search dialog box, used to locate members
User-Defined Fields
User-defined fields are typically defined only for Account, Scenario, Entity, and custom
dimensions and are limited to 20 characters.
Users can compose compound selection statements by using multiple values for one field (for
example, User Defined Field 1= West AND User Defined Field 1= East).
To define a user-defined field, users cannot use an empty string as a value.
Display Entity Currency
Financial Management stores currency metrics in the Value dimension and as Entity
dimension attributes, thus enabling users to query data sources using selected or default
currency values.
When using Financial Management data sources with defined Entity dimension currency
information, you can enable the Display Entity Currency option, to append Entity members
with their default currency values. Before querying, you use Data Layout options; after
querying, you use the Data Display right-click menu; for all subsequently created documents,
you use OLAP Server user preferences.
Note: You can use Web Analysis Studio only to review and set this feature, but settings are observed by the HTML Web
client.
Financial Management Conventions
Financial Management outlines have 12 dimensions, eight predefined (Period, View, Entity,
Account, ICP, Scenario, Value, and Year) and four custom.
Financial Management
333
No Drill To Top
When you query Financial Management, you cannot drill to top as you can when querying
Analytic Services. Financial Management and Analytic Services track parent-child
relationships differently. The Financial Management hierarchies enable multiple
consolidations, thus enabling multiple parents for one child.
No Edit Data
Users cannot write back data to Financial Management data sources, as they can to Analytic
Services data sources.
Adding and Deleting Members
Users must click the Reload button to display added or deleted members.
New Databases
Current sessions cannot interact with Financial Management data sources added during the
session. Only data sources operating when a session is established can communicate with Web
Analysis documents. To connect to new Financial Management databases, log off and then log
on again.
Deleted Users
After you establish a Financial Management session, connection is valid until you log off, even
if your user name is deleted server-side. Access is not revoked until the current session ends.
SAP BW
You can access SAP BW data sources in Web Analysis documents. Thus, you can extend your
SAP BW investment by using advanced analytics and dashboards. Using the custom document
freeform grid component, you can present OLAP, relational, and manually entered data on
one data object and leverage all data sources in integrated dynamic calculations. Visually
compelling SAP BW documents typically surpass the presentation, reporting, and distribution
requirements of information consumers.
SAP BW Prerequisites
After installation, you must download the SAP BW JCo driver 2.1.4 or 2.1.5 from an SAP Web
site.
Two Microsoft DLL files, MSvcr71.dll and MSvcp71.dll, are deployed to a common directory
during installation. The files are used by Production Reporting, Financial Reporting, and Web
Analysis.
You must locate the SAP BW JCo Driver in the DLL files directory.
334
Using Web Analysis
SAP BW Conventions
SAP data sources differ from other data sources. For example, level 0 is the highest ancestor in
SAP and the lowest descendant in Analytic Services. SAP member properties are analagous to
Analytic Services attribute dimensions.
SAP BW Advanced Member Selection
In dimensions with large member sets, users can define selections with the Dimension Browser
right-click menu. Right-clicking member names enables selection by familial relationship and
database-specific options.
SAP BW and Analytic Services offer different sets of advanced member selection methods.
Table 70
SAP BW Advanced Member Selection Methods
Right-Click Menu Command
Description
All Members
Selects all members
Select Dim Top
Selects the highest ancestor, or, in multiple hierarchies, all top level
ancestors
Select Dim Bottom
Selects all lowest level descendants
Also Select Descendants
Selects the current member and its descendants
Select Parent
Selects the parent of the current member
Also Select Ancestors
Selects the current member and its ancestors
Also Select Children
Selects the current member and its children
Also Select Siblings
Selects the current member and members on the same level and of the same
parent
Also Select Level
Selects the current member and all members on the same level and of the
same dimension
Select At Level
Selects all members at a level specified by name or number
Also Select Previous
Selects a variable number of previous members from the level of the current
member; uses MDX LAG to indicate the number of previous members to
return
Also Select Next
Selects a variable number of next members from the level of the current
member; uses MDX LEAD to indicate the number of subsequent members to
return
Date Time Series
Selects time members based on time definition criteria. SAP BW does not
return aggregated values for DTS selections and returns only members that
satisfy the criteria.
SAP BW
335
Table 70
SAP BW Advanced Member Selection Methods (Continued)
Select Top/Bottom
Returns a variable number of members, based on their rank
You can select top or bottom values, but not both. Rank can be calculated by
percentage, sum, or count. Sum uses a threshhold value to select members
up to and including the value that limits the threshhold.
Result sets may differ from Dimension Browser preview, due to custom filter
selections on the query.
Filter on Member Properties
Displays the Member Properties dialog box, used to select member subsets
by member SAP BW property values
Find in Tree
Locates members in large dimensions; expands the hierarchy but does not
add found members to the Selection list
Relational Access
Web Analysis documents, using one of five methods, can access OLAP, Hyperion, and
supported relational databases.
Custom Document SQL Spreadsheet
SQL spreadsheet objects represent relational data sources as spreadsheets, using standard SQL
syntax queries.
Custom Document Freeform Grid
Freeform grids enable users to combine data values from multiple data sources in one data
object and thus leverage custom document database connections.
Relational Drill-through
You can construct seamless liaisons between OLAP data and relational data sources.
Navigation from OLAP to relational data is typically called relational drill-through. Users can
navigate from the dimension bottom (level 0) of OLAP databases and drill down to relational
data.
Web Analysis documents store relational drill-through definitions, which can be defined with
Select statements and clauses, as database connection properties of Analytic Services database
connections. Query result sets are presented as SQL spreadsheets.
See “Integrating OLAP and Relational Data” on page 328.
Relational Database Connections
Web Analysis Studio provides users with an easy-to-use graphical interface for defining
relational database connections. You are prompted to specify relational database type and
login credentials, select a relational table, and define database-connection properties.
336
Using Web Analysis
Web Analysis documents relational data sources, aggregates result sets, and expresses data as
OLAP cubes.
Analytic Integration Services Drill-through
Analytic Integration Services Drill-through is a server-based form of relational drill-through.
Like conventional relational drill-through, you can construct seamless connections between
OLAP and relational data. Unlike conventional relational drill-through, you can drill to
relational data sources from all Web Analysis document intersections.
Analytic Services administrators must establish Analytic Integration Services drill-through
reports. Relational queries are stored as intersection-specific metadata and flagged with LRO
indicators. When users double-click flagged cells, OLAP documents navigate to the specified
relational report.
Repository
Repository access is the only mandatory form of relational database access. The repository
centrally stores system data, user names, user preferences, and document definitions in
relational database tables. Without repository access, you cannot save information.
Administrators establish repository access during installation.
Controlling Query Result Set Size
Query governors vary for relational access methods.
Custom document SQL spreadsheets and relational drill-through methods enable users to
declare query governors as they create SQL queries or relational drill-through definitions.
When you drill from OLAP to relational data, passing only the drilled OLAP member to the
relational data source may result in a large query result set. To focus and diminish query result
sets, users can pass page and filter dimensions specified in the OLAP documents.
Other relational access methods rely on the Analysis.properties file to limit query result sets.
Custom Web Analysis Documents
Web Analysis Studio provides twenty-one coding-free components, each of which can be
customized and added to custom documents multiple times. Combination options provide
almost unlimited creative opportunities for custom-document designers.
Note: Custom documents cannot be created in Web Analysis workspace.
Custom Web Analysis Documents
337
Containers
Panel and Split Panel objects enable you to control space and layers on custom documents. It is
best to use container panels to design documents and to orient components inside panels.
Components placed with absolute alignment in the main document panel maintain position
even as other components fluctuate. Thus, components may overlap and shift.
You can size, align, and establish properties for panels. Properties control appearance and
behavior.
Content Panels
Panels that provide specialized content:
●
Label—Static or dynamic text for use as titles, labels, or captions
●
Text Area—Dynamic text used for annotations
●
Image—A graphic used to include graphic backgrounds, pictures, illustrations, and graphic
controls
●
HTML Browser—Static HTML
The panels function without additional coding. Label objects support the dynamic text labels
used in printing headers, footers, and SQL spreadsheets.
Data Objects
Data objects representing display types (on the component toolbar):
●
Chart—query result sets as charts
●
Spreadsheet—query result sets as spreadsheets
●
Freeform Grid—content from freeform grids
●
Pinboard—query result sets as pinboards
SQL spreadsheet data objects are also available, at the end of the component toolbar.
Subscription Controls
You can add controls to documents to enable users to navigate dimensional hierarchies,
browse the documents, or execute commands.
338
●
Combo Box Subscription—View a list of members.
●
Radio Button Group Subscription—Select a member option.
●
Checkbox Group Subscription—Select multiple members.
●
Tab Group Subscription—Select a member tab.
●
Multi-level Combo Box Subscription—Select from interdependent lists (members
changing as selections change).
●
Slider Subscription—Select a member, based on its position on a slider bar.
Using Web Analysis
●
Selection Button Subscription—Apply member selections to data objects that use the same
data source.
●
Alias Controller—Toggle data objects between alias table labels.
●
Services Button—Execute pre-set commands and create hotspots.
Subscription buttons can control data objects that share a database connection query.
SQL Spreadsheet and SQL Subscription
Components that present and control SQL query result sets.
●
SQL Spreadsheet—a data object that displays a SQL query to a relational data source
●
SQL Subscription—a subscription button designed for SQL spreadsheets
Linking Components by Query
Specifications required for document creation:
●
Data source—provides data values
●
Data object—displays data values
●
Query—Retrieves data values from data sources and returns them to data objects
Properties that customize the specifications:
●
Database connection properties indicate data-source type, logon credentials, database
applications, dimension formatting, and drill-through properties.
●
Data objects can be set to display types that feature specific options.
●
Queries can be explicit, requesting information on members, or dynamic, requesting
information about all members that satisfy a set of criteria.
In Design Document mode, query definitions are referred to as data sources.
Common Data Sources
Design document components using the same data source are coordinated (follow the same
navigation lines).
Unlinking Components
If you do not want coordinated document components, you can assign multiple data sources
to a data object. Identical data sources with different names are treated as individual sources.
Linking Dimensions
You can use Custom settings to link dimensions within data objects on a document.
Linking Dimensions
339
Dimension linking enables data objects that share dimensions but use different data sources to
remain coordinated. Links are unidirectional. Navigation on a data object triggers coordinated
navigation on the data objects linked to it. Navigation on the other data objects triggers
coordinated navigation only the objects have defined links.
Edit Data Mode
If you have permission, you can edit cell values and write edits back to Analytic Services. You
can initiate Edit Data mode only from the spreadsheet display type.
➤ To initiate Edit Data mode in a Web Analysis document, right-click the data object, and select
Edit Data.
Edit Data buttons are added to the content area. Editable cells in Analytic Services are
converted to data-entry cells.
Table 71
HTML Web Client Edit Data Controls
Control
Description
Calculation list
Specifies the calculation script to use when the database is
recalculated from the HTML Web client
Run
Prompts the database server to recalculate the database
Exit
Closes Edit Data mode
Send Data
Applies edits to the database
Editing Data Values
➤ To edit data values:
1
Right-click the data object, and select Edit Data.
2 To recalculate the database, from Calculation, select a calculation script, and click Run.
3 Click a cell to edit its data value.
4 Enter a data value, and click the column or row heading.
5 Click Send Data.
Only authorized users can successfully write changes to the database. The Confirmation dialog
box is displayed if write-back is successful.
6 Optional: Preform step 2 to recalculate the data.
7 Click Exit.
Note: On long spreadsheets, you may need to scroll down and to the right to locate the Send Data and Exit buttons, on
long spreadsheets.
340
Using Web Analysis
Copying, Cutting, and Pasting To and From Excel
While in Edit Data mode, you can cut, copy, and paste ranges of cells from Excel spreadsheets
into Web Analysis spreadsheets. The edits can then be posted to Analytic Services. You can also
cut, copy, and paste between values.
Keyboard shortcuts:
●
To copy, select a range of cells, and press Ctrl + C.
●
To cut, select a range of cells, and press Ctrl + X.
●
To paste, select a range of cells, and press Ctrl + V.
Tips for Edit Data Mode
●
You cannot edit calculated members or attribute dimensions, because their values do not
reside in the database.
●
Dimensions composed of implied shares (or user-defined hierarchies) do not aggregate as
conventional dimension hierarchies do. Therefore, implied shares may overwrite data edits
made to parents of implied shares as the model is pivoted.
Example: Actual and Budget are implied shares of the parent Scenario. Scenario, however, is a
categorical label, not an aggregation of Actual and Budget measures.
Tips for Edit Data Mode
341
342
Using Web Analysis
Scheduling Jobs and Batches
Chapterh
13
In Workspace, you can use the Schedule module to perform the following tasks:
●
●
In This Chapter
Run and schedule job types:
❍
Interactive Reporting job – An Interactive Reporting document imported in
Workspace as a job and its associated files.
❍
Production Reporting job – A Production Reporting report or program and its
associated files. A Production Reporting job can be secure or nonsecure.
❍
Generic job – A report or program from another software provider (for example, an
Oracle report or a Crystal report), and any associated files.
Run and schedule batches, which are collections of Financial Reporting reports.
Scheduling and Running Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Scheduling Batches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Scheduling Jobs and Batches
343
Scheduling and Running Jobs
You can manually run jobs from the Explore module. Select the jobs you want to run, enter the
job parameters, then view the job output. You can also run jobs automatically by scheduling
your jobs to run using events and job parameters.
The scheduler module contains 4 panels for scheduling jobs:
●
Managing Jobs - Use this to list jobs with parameters or schedules.
●
Viewing Job Status - Use this to see the status of running jobs and notifications for jobs that
are finished.
●
Managing Events - Use this to create and manage events.
●
Using the Consolidated Job Status List - Use this to view a list of jobs with the option to filter
the list and modify the jobs, schedules or events.
If your administrator enabled the pass-through feature, you can configure foreground jobs to
run without additional requests for data source login credentials. You can run jobs in the
foreground or in the background depending upon how the job was configured by the
importer.
About Job Execution
When a job executes in the foreground, you must wait until the job completes before
continuing with other tasks. When a foreground job finishes executing, Workspace displays:
●
For Interactive Reporting jobs, a link to the output in the folder where the job resides
●
For Production Reporting jobs, the HTML frame file
●
For generic jobs:
❍
The primary output file, if there is only one
❍
A list of primary output files, if there are multiple files
❍
A list of all output files, if there is no primary one
When a job is executing in the background, you can perform other tasks in the foreground.
When the background job finishes executing, the output files are written to the repository, and
a notification message is displayed in the View Job Status panel of the Schedule module.
The Output link is displayed next to the job title. Click the Output link to view the job output.
Job Priority
When jobs are scheduled to process at the same time, jobs with High priority run first. You can
set the priority to High or Normal when you schedule the job.
344
Scheduling Jobs and Batches
Scheduling Jobs
Scheduling a job enables you to automatically run jobs at a date or time and/or on a recurring
basis. To schedule a job, you must associate a time event and a job parameter list with the job.
All types of jobs can be scheduled through Workspace.
●
●
Events define the timetable for running a job.
Job Parameters define the run time values necessary to execute a job.
Note: For Production Reporting jobs, compile time parameters may also be specified with job
parameters.
●
Schedules specify the job you want to execute, as well as the event schedule and job
parameter list for running the job.
Events
Events define when the job runs and whether the job runs only once or many times. You can
determine whether the job runs every Wednesday, or every fourth Friday, or after an event
occurred.
Because events are not associated with a particular job, you can use them to schedule multiple
jobs. You can create personal recurring time events that only you can use. You may have access
to public recurring time events and externally triggered events your administrator created.
You can create events as you schedule a job or from the Schedule module using the Manage
Events panel. You can also view, modify, access, or delete time events.
The types of events that can be used for scheduling jobs are:
●
Public recurring time events – Reusable time events created by an administrator and
accessible to you with the required access privileges.
●
Personal recurring time events – Reusable time events created by you and accessible only to
you.
●
Externally triggered events – Date based events created by an administrator and accessible
to you with the required access privileges. Jobs are scheduled to run when the event is
triggered.
●
Custom time events – Time events created by you for one time use within a job schedule.
Custom events cannot be used by other job schedules.
Event Status and Schedule Status
Events and Schedule each maintain their own status, which is displayed by a traffic light
indicator. The following table shows how the status enables a job to run. You can set the status
when you modify the event or schedule.
Scheduling and Running Jobs
345
Table 72
Event Status and Schedule Status
Event Status
Schedule
Status
active
active
The scheduled
job runs
active
inactive
The scheduled
job will not run
inactive
active
The scheduled
job will not run
inactive
inactive
The scheduled
job will not run
Description
Job Parameters
Job parameters are run-time values that are necessary to run a job. The run-time values are the
job variables or limits you are prompted for by the job. For some Interactive Reporting jobs,
job parameters also include processing and job output options. You can save job parameters
to:
●
Run or schedule jobs without being prompted for the run-time values.
●
Share Public job parameters with other users.
●
Run jobs using different parameters on a schedule.
Workspace supports the following types of job parameters:
●
Public job parameters – Reusable named job parameters created by your administrator and
accessible to you with the required access privileges.
●
Personal job parameters – Reusable named job parameters created by you and accessible
only by you.
●
Custom job parameters – Unnamed job parameters created by you and associated with a
schedule. Default job parameters are not listed or named and cannot be used with other
schedules. They are deleted when the schedule is deleted.
Note: Job parameters can only be created when creating or modifying a job schedule or when running a job. See
“Running a Job” on page 346 or “Scheduling Jobs” on page 348 to see how to get to the job parameters section.
Running a Job
This section provides general instructions for running a job and setting your default job
parameters.
➤ To run a job:
1 In the Explore module, navigate to the job you want to run, then do one of the following:
346
Scheduling Jobs and Batches
●
From the menu bar, select File > Run Job.
●
Double click the job.
●
Right-click the job, from the shortcut menu, select Run Job.
The job is opened in the Viewer module.
2 If database authentication is required, enter the user name and password for each connection in the
Database Connectivity section.
The Database Connectivity section is displayed only if database authentication is required.
3 For Production Reporting and Generic jobs, browse to specify a folder destination for the job output.
The default folder is the folder where the job is located.
4 In the Job Parameters section, define parameters using an existing job parameters list or create one.
If the job has no run-time variables, the job parameters section is not displayed.
To set personal default job parameters, see “Setting Job Parameters” on page 347.
5 If you are using default parameters, click Run Job.
6 Set values, limits, or define or modify cycles depending upon the type of job you are running.
See “Setting Job Parameters” on page 378 and “Setting Production Reporting and Generic Job
Parameters” on page 413.
7 Click Run Job.
Job parameters selected when jobs are imported are called Publisher defaults. You can override
these Publisher defaults at run time and set your own job parameters. Your jobs run with your
Publisher defaults until you change them.
Setting Job Parameters
➤ To set your default job parameters:
1 In the Explore module, navigate to the job you want to run, click it, then select File > Run Job.
2 Select an existing job parameter list or New Values.
3 Set values, set limits, or define or modify cycles depending upon the type of job you are running.
See “Setting Job Parameters” on page 378 and “Setting Production Reporting and Generic Job
Parameters” on page 413.
4 Do one or more of the following steps:
●
Check Save as my default.
●
Check Save, then select Public or Private.
Scheduling and Running Jobs
347
5 Click Run Job.
Your job parameters are not saved until you run the job.
Scheduling Jobs
This section provides general instructions for scheduling a job.
➤ To schedule a job:
1 In the Explore module, navigate to the job you want to run, click it, then do one of the following steps:
●
From the menu bar, select File > Schedule Job.
●
Right-click the job and choose Schedule Job.
The job is opened in the Viewer module.
2 Click Go.
Figure 30
Job Properties, Parameters, Events and Notifications
3 Fill in the properties.
348
●
Name—(Required) The Name can contain letters, numbers, the space character, and the
underscore character “_”.
●
Description—A meaningful description of the schedule. For example, Quarter end for all
regions. The length is limited to 254 characters.
Scheduling Jobs and Batches
●
Priority—When jobs are scheduled to process at the same time, jobs with High priority are
run first. Select High or Normal priority’
●
Active—This is displayed when you modify a schedule only. A traffic light that indicates if
the job is scheduled to run.
❍
A green traffic light indicates that the job is scheduled to run.
❍
A traffic light indicates that the job is not scheduled to run.
●
Run this job—Infinitely or a specified number of times. The job automatically becomes
inactive after it runs the indicated number of times.
●
Job Output—Enable to automatically delete job output. Indicate when to delete by
entering a number and selecting a time interval (minutes, hours, days, weeks, years) after
the job is run. Default is days.
●
User name and Password—You are prompted for database authentication if it is required.
4 Click Next.
5 In the Job Parameters section of the Select Job Parameters page, select one of the following options:
●
To create job parameters from scratch, select Define job parameters starting with and select
New Values.
●
To create job parameters from existing job parameters, select Define job parameters
starting with and select a job parameter. This enables you to quickly create a job which is
similar to an existing job. Make changes to the parameters and save the completed job
parameters using a different name.
●
To use or view job parameters, select Schedule this job with existing job parameters and
select the parameters you want to use from the drop-down list. Click View if you want to
see the parameters before you move on to the next screen.
If the job has no parameters (no run time variables or limits), the job parameters section is not
displayed.
If there are no job parameters, you must them.
6 Click Next.
7 From the Time Events page, indicate if you want to create an event or use an existing event using one of the
following options.
●
To create an event from scratch, select A New Recurring Time Event from the drop-down
list. See “Creating Personal Recurring Time Events” on page 352.
●
To create an event from an existing event, select Define when to run this job starting with
and select an event. This enables you to quickly create an event similar to an existing event.
Make changes to the event and save it using a different name. See “Creating Personal
Recurring Time Events” on page 352.
●
To use an existing event, select Schedule this job using an existing event and select the
event you want to use.
●
To view an event, select Schedule this job using an existing event and click the event you
want to view.
If there are no events, you must create one.
Scheduling and Running Jobs
349
Note: If a schedule is associated with an inactive event, the job is not run. You can check the active status of an event
by viewing your events on the Manage Events panel of the Schedule module.
8 Click Next.
9 If desired, configure notification options.
●
If you want to view your notifications in the Schedule module using the Manage Jobs panel,
select Display notification in Schedule Module.
●
If you want to E-mail the notification, enter E-mail addresses. Separate E-mail addresses by
semicolons, colons, space characters, commas, or new lines.
●
If you want to attach the latest job output to the E-mail, select Attach PDF outputs to Email messages.
For Production Reporting jobs, see additional notification options in “Output Options for
Scheduling Jobs” on page 413.
10 Specify the Save to Output options.
11 Click Finish to schedule the job.
Schedule information for your job is displayed.
Using Job Output
When a job is run, the results are place in a job output item. This section describes how to
modify job output properties and view job output. Job output deletion is streamlined. When
you delete a job, you can also delete all outputs associated with the job.
350
Scheduling Jobs and Batches
Modifying Job Output Properties
Job output properties determine which users can view the job output. Job output is listed in
the same folder as the job. Each run of the job produces job output, which is listed separately.
You can modify or view the job output properties depending on your access privileges on the
job.
➤ To modify or view job output properties:
1 From the Explore module, navigate to the job output, and click it.
2
Select File > Properties.
3 Change the properties or click Edit Permissions to change the access control.
In the Access Control section, when assigning access to additional users, groups, or roles, the
adaptive state is limited to View Only. Also, the adaptive state cannot be modified for the
existing roles, groups, and users. You can modify the adaptive state for future job output when
modifying the access control for the job.
To modify access control, see “Setting Permissions” on page 79.
4 Click OK.
Viewing Job Output
You can open job output and a table of contents is displayed to navigate through the job
output.
➤ To view job output:
1 From the Explore module, right-click the job output file, from the shortcut menu, click Open.
The table of contents is displayed for items in the job output.
2 Click an item, then click Open.
3 To return to the table of contents and view other items, select the TOC tab in the content tab.
Figure 31
Table of Contents for Job Output
Scheduling and Running Jobs
351
Managing Events
From the Schedule module, use the Manage Events panel to:
●
View events which you can access.
●
Make events accessible to other users using access control.
●
Modify, delete, or create events.
➤ To manage events:
1 From the Schedule module, select Manage Events.
2 To filter the events displayed, from Display Only select an event type, then click Update List.
All the events you can access are listed with their properties.
3 To modify or delete an event, click Modify or Delete.
4 To create a personal time event, see “Creating Personal Recurring Time Events” on page 352.
Creating Personal Recurring Time Events
➤ To create a personal recurring time event:
1 From the Schedule module, select Manage Events.
2 To filter the events displayed, from Display Only select an event type, then click Update List.
3 From Add Another, select Personal Recurring Time Event, and click Go.
Note: You must be an Administrator to add a Public Recurring Time Event or Externally Triggered Event.
4 Enter the time event name and description.
5 Click Active to make the Event available for scheduling.
Note: If a schedule is associated with an inactive event, the job will not run. You can check the event’s active status by
using the Manage Events panel in the Scheduler.
6 Select the calendar you want to use for this time event.
Company calendars are created by your administrator.
7 From the Days to Run list, select the option you want to use and click Go (By Day is the default).
By Day, By Week, By Period, By Quarter, and By Year let you specify a recurring time pattern.
Advanced Days of Week and Advanced Days of Period give you the option to select days with
no pattern.
8 From the Time to Run list, select the option you want to use and click Go (Once per hour is the default.)
352
Scheduling Jobs and Batches
The options include Once per Hour, Once Per Day, More Than Once Per Day, or External
Event.
9 Update the Starting At and Ending At time to specify a range for the event.
10 Enter a Start Date and select the option to enter an End Date or to accept the default, No End Date.
11 Click Finish.
Viewing Events
You can view all your events from the Manage Events panel in the Schedule module.
➤ To view events:
1 From the Schedule module, click Manage Events.
A recurring and externally triggered event list is displayed.
2 To filter the events list, select Public or Personal from the Display only list and click Update List.
Modifying Events
You can modify events you created from the Manage Events panel in the Schedule module.
➤ To modify an event:
1 From the Schedule module, click Manage Events.
A recurring and externally triggered event list is displayed.
A list events are displayed.
2 To filter the events list, select Public or Personal from the Display only list and click Update List.
3 Click the event title or select Modify next to the event.
4 Change properties.
5 Click Finish.
The modified event is displayed in the events list.
Deleting Events
You can delete events you created that are not being used by a schedule or another event. For
example, if an external event is used to trigger a recurring event, the recurring event needs to
be deleted or disassociated from the external event before the external event can be deleted.
➤ To delete an event f from the Manage Events panel in the Schedule module.
1 From the Schedule module, click Manage Events.
An event list is displayed.
2 To filter the events list, select Public or Personal from the Display only list and click Update List.
Scheduling and Running Jobs
353
3 Click Delete next to the event, and confirm deletion by clicking Yes.
If schedules are associated with the time event you are deleting, modify those schedules to use
another time event.
Before you delete a time event associated with an external event, disassociate the time event
from the external event or delete the external event.
Managing Jobs
From the Schedule module, use the Manage Jobs panel to:
●
Display all jobs that have schedules or parameters.
●
Add a schedule.
●
Modify job parameters.
➤ To manage jobs:
1 Select Schedule > Manage Jobs.
A page is displayed with jobs and their associated schedules.
2 To see a schedule, click the schedule link.
3 To see job parameters, click the job.
Viewing Job Status
From the Schedule module, use the View Job Status panel to:
●
Display scheduled job status or jobs running in the background.
●
Display notifications for jobs that have completed.
➤ To view job status:
1 Select Schedule > View Job Status.
A page is displayed with two lists: jobs currently running and completed job notifications.
2 To delete job completion notifications:
●
To delete one notification, select the notification, scroll to the Job Status page bottom, and
click Delete Selected.
●
To delete all notifications, scroll to the Job Status page bottom, select Select all displayed
messages, and click Delete Selected.
3 From the completed job list:
354
●
To view the job output, click the link.
●
To view the schedule, click the link.
Scheduling Jobs and Batches
Using the Consolidated Job Status List
From the Schedule module, use the Consolidated Job Status panel to:
●
Filter the job list shown in the Consolidated Job Status List, see “Filtering Consolidated Job
Status List” on page 356.
●
Modify job properties. See “Modifying Job Parameters” on page 358
●
Modify schedule properties. See “Modifying Schedules” on page 356
●
Modify event properties. See “Modifying Events” on page 353
●
Add schedules. See “Adding Schedules” on page 357
●
Delete schedules. See “Deleting Schedules” on page 357
➤ To update a scheduled job list:
1 From the Schedule module, select the Consolidated Job Status from the Navigation pane.
Without default filter criteria, the filter page is displayed before the Consolidated Job Status
List page. To filter the Consolidated Job Status List, see “Filtering Consolidated Job Status List”
on page 356.
2 Optional: Navigate multiple pages by selecting Next or Prev or by entering a page number in Page and
select Go.
Table 73 lists the column descriptions on the Consolidated Job Status List page.
Table 73
Consolidated Job Status List Columns
Job Name
Displays the job name.
Job Owner
Displays the job owner’s login id. A non-administrator user must have view
access to display jobs.
Schedule Name
Displays the job schedule name.
Schedule Owner
Displays the scheduler owner’s login id. Only administrators can see schedules
owned by others.
Event Name
Displays the event name.
Last Run Date
Displays the date the job last ran. If the schedule or event is inactive, this
column displays Schedule Inactive or Event Inactive.
Last Status
Displays the status from the last time the job ran.
Next Run Date
Displays the next date the job will run.
Displays image links. Click a icon link to:
Links
●
modify job properties
●
modify schedule properties
●
modify event properties
●
add schedules.
Scheduling and Running Jobs
355
Filtering Consolidated Job Status List
You can filter your job list using the filter criteria listed in Table 74. A particular filter is not set
when it is blank. The Consolidated Job Status List is sorted by the filter you selected in the
Default Sort Order field from the filter page.
➤ To set filters and sort criteria for the Consolidated Job Status List:
1 From the Schedule module, click Consolidated Job Status.
2 If a default filter criteria is set, click Set Job List Filters.
3 Select the filters you want to use.
See Table 74 for more details on the filter criteria.
4 Determine the sort order by selecting the Default Sort Order from the drop-down list and the options
indicating ascending or descending order.
The default sort filter is the job name. For descriptions of sorting filters, see Table 74.
5 Click a button:
●
Apply - Saves your values for one session.
●
Save As Default - Saves your values as your default values.
●
Restore to Default - Retrieves the values you last saved as your default values.
●
Cancel - Saves no values.
Table 74
Job Filters
Job Name
Select Equals, Contains, Ends with, or Begins with and enter text.
Job Owner
Select Equals, Contains, Ends with, or Begins with and enter text.
Schedule Name
Select Equals, Contains, Ends with, or Begins with and enter text.
Schedule Owner
Select Equals, Contains, Ends with, or Begins with and enter text.
Event Name
Select Equals, Contains, Ends with, or Begins with and enter text.
Last Status
Select All, Is, or Is not from the first drop-down list and Successful,
Failed, or Cancelled from the second drop-down.
Last Run Date
Select the time period from the drop-down list.
Next Run Date
Select After, Between, or Before from the drop-down list and the
year, month, and day for your selection.
Default Sort Order
Select a filter criteria from the drop-down list to sort the list. Select a
radio button for ascending or descending sort order.
Schedule State
Select the desired filter(s) for the schedule state. Active is the
default.
Modifying Schedules
When your schedule needs changes, you can modify it.
356
Scheduling Jobs and Batches
➤ To modify a schedule:
1 From the Schedule module, click Consolidated Job Status.
A list of all jobs that you can access is displayed.
2 Navigate to the job, click Modify Schedule Property
.
3 Change the properties you want to modify.
For details on the properties, see “Scheduling Jobs” on page 348.
4 To deactivate or activate the schedule on the General Properties page toggle Active.
5 To modify more properties click Apply, otherwise click OK.
Deleting Schedules
➤ To delete a schedule:
1 From the Schedule module, click Consolidated Job Status.
A list of all jobs in the system is displayed.
2 Navigate to the job with the schedule you want to delete, and click it.
3 Click Delete Checked Schedules.
The schedule is deleted from all job schedule lists.
Adding Schedules
➤ To add a schedule:
1 From the Schedule module, click Consolidated Job Status.
A list of all jobs in the system is displayed.
2 Navigate to the job where you want to add the schedule.
3 Click Add Schedule
.
4 Follow the instructions in “Scheduling Jobs” on page 348 starting on step 3 on page 348.
Viewing Job Parameters
➤ To view job parameters:
1 From the Schedule module, click Manage Jobs.
A list of all jobs with schedules and parameters is displayed.
2 Select the job from the Scheduled Job listing.
A schedule and job parameter list for the job is displayed on the Schedule Information page.
Scheduling and Running Jobs
357
3 Click View.
Modifying Job Parameters
➤ To modify job parameters:
1 From the Schedule module, click Manage Jobs.
A list of all jobs with schedules and parameters is displayed.
2 Click the job you want to change.
3 Click Modify.
4 Change the job parameters.
5 Click OK.
Deleting Job Parameters
You can delete job parameters that are not being used by a schedule.
➤ To delete job parameters:
1 From the Schedule module, click Manage Jobs.
A list of all jobs with schedules and parameters is listed.
2 Click the scheduled job to which the parameters are associated.
3 Click Delete next to the job parameters and confirm deletion by clicking OK.
If no schedules are associated with it, the job parameter is deleted.
If schedules are associated with it, you must associate the schedule with other job parameters
by modifying the schedule.
Retrieving Jobs
You can retrieve a Production Reporting job and its associated files.
➤ To retrieve a Production Reporting job:
1 From the Explore module, right-click the item, from the shortcut menu click Retrieve.
Scheduling Batches
Batch processing for Financial Reporting topics:
358
●
“Scheduling Batches to Run” on page 359
●
“Batch Deletion” on page 363
●
“Setting Up E-mail Notifications” on page 364
Scheduling Jobs and Batches
●
“Retrieving the Exported Output” on page 365
●
“Viewing the Status of Scheduled Batches” on page 365
●
“Preparing Batch Files for the Command Line Scheduler” on page 366
Batches are created, edited and saved in Workspace using the Batch Editor. You must have a
Global Administrator, Report Designer, Scheduler, or Content Publisher role in order to
perform these tasks. Batches are used to group and process sets of documents such as reports
or books. You can send the output of a generated batch to a printer, Explore. You can export
batches as HTML or PDF files to an external directory. You can e-mail users the exported
output. Administrators Designers, and Scheduler roles can access batch scheduler. For role
information, see the appendix in the Hyperion System 9 Shared Services User Management
Guide.
Note: Hyperion recommends that you print long reports or books in a batch. This keeps your computer free while
processing.
Scheduling Batches to Run
You schedule batches to run immediately or at a later date. During batch scheduling, you can
define the batch POV, set up e-mail notifications, and select the destinations of the generated
output when you run the batch. Destination types can include print, snapshot, HTML, and
PDF. After selecting scheduled batch options, the batch is added to the batch queue. The batch
can be deleted from the Batch Scheduler after a successful run.
You can edit a scheduled batch. After a batch is run, you can schedule a new batch that is based
on it, using some or all of the output options, such as destinations and e-mail recipients.
➤ To schedule a batch to run:
1 Select File > Open > Document. The Open dialog box is displayed.
Note: You can also schedule batches from the Batch Scheduler in the Schedule Module.
2 In the Type field, select Hyperion > Batch, then select a batch and click Open.
3 In Batch Editor, select Edit > Schedule Batch to display Schedule Batch.
If required, Logon Credentials is displayed. Enter a User ID and Password and click Ok. See
“Providing Logon Credentials” on page 367.
4 Enter a name and description for the scheduled batch.
5 Optional: To delete the batch from the scheduler after a successful run, select the Delete Scheduled Batch
Entry from Scheduler if Completed Successfully.
6 Click Next.
7 For Start Time, set a start time:
●
To start the scheduled batch immediately, click Now. Go to step 11.
Scheduling Batches
359
●
To start the scheduled batch in the future, select Later, Start At. Go to step 8.
8 To select the start time and date in the Start Time area:
a. In the upper left text box, enter the start time.
b. In the upper right drop-down list, select a calendar date.
9 From the lower left drop-down list, select the periodic time interval to run the batch.
10 From the lower right drop-down list, if you selected the batch to run more than once, select the end date.
11 Optional: If any of the reports and books in the batch have dimensions on the user POV, you can set the
member for those dimensions in the Scheduled Batch Point of View. For information, see “Selecting a
Member for the Batch Point of View” on page 360.
12 Click Next.
13 To change the default settings for the Destination of the batch file that you are running, click Next.
For more information about destination and output options, see “Specifying the Batch
Destination and Output” on page 361. For information about allowing other users and groups
to view snapshots and snapshot books in the repository that you create when running a batch,
see “Setting Up E-mail Notifications” on page 364.
14 To save the batch job in the Batch Scheduler with the settings you selected for the destination, click Finish.
Selecting a Member for the Batch Point of View
Each scheduled batch has a POV based on all relevant dimensions for the reports in the batch.
If none of the reports or books have a member on the user POV, then there is no batch POV.
When the batch is added to the schedule, the user POV is specified as the default batch POV.
You can override the user POV settings by specifying a member for each dimension on the
batch POV. You must verify that the members selected in the batch POV are appropriate.
Note: To run the batch POV for different points of view, you must schedule the batch several times, once for each POV.
➤ To select a member for the batch POV:
1 Repeat step 1 through step 10 from “Scheduling Batches to Run” on page 359.
2 From the Schedule Batch Point of View area, click the dimension for which you want to select a member.
Member Selection is displayed.
3 Select the member that you want to use for the POV and click OK. For more information on Member
Selection, see Chapter 8, “Using Financial Reporting.”
4 Repeat step 2 and step 3 for each POV dimension.
5 Click Next to complete the batch destination of the batch. See “Selecting the Destination for the
Scheduled Batch” on page 361.
360
Scheduling Jobs and Batches
Specifying the Batch Destination and Output
The Scheduled Batch Destinations specifies the type and location of the output the scheduled
batch creates. Select any combination of the following output options for your batch
destination:
●
Snapshot reports or snapshot books (to save them in the repository).
●
Print to (your default printer). This is the default option.
●
Export HTML and PDF.
You can e-mail the batch results to other users along with the output attachment, if successful.
When you select a printer as the destination for the scheduled batch, you can select the specific
printer and printer properties.
Note: Batch Scheduler shows all printers available to the Print Server. Print server configuration is specified in the
fr_repserver.properties file on the Hyperion Financial Reporting Server computer.
By default, when a snapshot or book is saved as a snapshot book to the repository, the snapshot
is returned to the same location as it is derived. You can select another destination folder in the
repository.
You can assign file permissions to users, groups, and roles so that they can view the snapshot
report or book.
Selecting the Destination for the Scheduled Batch
The scheduled batch destination indicates where you want to send the output, and the type of
output to create. You can also send the PDF or HTML output file to an e-mail recipient. This
task is performed after you set the time and select the members for the batch POV.
➤ To select the scheduled batch destination:
1 From the Destinations area Schedule Batch, select any actions:
Scheduling Batches
361
Figure 32
●
Destination Settings for a Batch
Save As Snapshot in Repository: If you select this option, you enable the In Same Folder as
Original Object and In Another Folder options. Perform an action:
❍
Select In Same Folder as Original Object to save snapshots and snapshot books to the
same folder as the original report or book in the repository,
❍
Select In Another Folder to save the output to another location in the repository. Click
Folder to select a destination folder in the repository. Click OK from the Destination
Folder dialog box.
Note: Selecting Save As Snapshot in Repository enables File Permissions. File Permissions allows you to assign
access to users and groups for the snapshot output you are creating. For information on assigning access
privileges, see Chapter 9, “Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books.”
●
Print to—This is the default setting. Select a different printer.
●
Export as PDF—Export the batch as a PDF file on the scheduler server. You can export to
a directory other than the one the batch is currently in by selecting Export to an external
directory.
●
Export as HTML—Export the batch as an HTML file on the scheduler server. You can
export to a directory other than the one the batch is currently in by selecting Export to an
external directory.
Note: When Export to an external directory is selected, the enabled drop-down menu is populated by folder locations
specified in the fr_scheduler.properties file in the <FinancialReporting>\lib directory on
the Hyperion Financial Reporting Scheduler Server computer. Here is a sample from that file:
# ExportFolderLabel1=ExportFolder1
# ExportFolderPath1=\\\\{machine name}\\{export folder name}
A system administrator must determine all the folders where exports are permitted. Contact your system
administrator to specify a different folder location.
362
Scheduling Jobs and Batches
●
If Successful, E-mail Details to—Select to specify the recipients you want notified by email when the batch is completed. The e-mail provides a detailed status report on the
batch. To set up e-mail notifications, see “Setting Up E-mail Notifications” on page 364.
●
Attach Exported Output—Select to send the exported PDF or HTML to the e-mail
recipients. To specify recipients, see “Setting Up E-mail Notifications” on page 364.
●
If Unsuccessful, E-Mail Details to—Select to send e-mail when the batch is unsuccessful.
The e-mail provides a detailed status report on the batch. To set up e-mail notifications,
see “Setting Up E-mail Notifications” on page 364.
2 Click Finish. The scheduled batch is processed on the date and time specified.
Batch Deletion
You can delete batches in these ways:
●
If you have a Global Administrator, Report Designer, Scheduler, or Content Publisher role
and proper file permissions, you can delete batches from the repository.
●
You can delete scheduled batches from the Batch Scheduler.
Deleting Batches from the Repository
You can delete numerous batches from the repository at once. To delete batches, see Chapter 2,
“Exploring and Managing Items”.
Deleting Batches from the Batch Scheduler
When you select the title for a batch, for example, name and description options for a
scheduled batch, the batch can be deleted from the Batch Scheduler after it runs successfully.
Scheduled batches can also be deleted from the Batch Scheduler.
➤ To delete scheduled batches from the Batch Scheduler:
1 From the View Pane Navigate Panel, select Batch Scheduler from the Schedule module.
2 In Batch Scheduler, select the batches for deletion.
Tip: Select multiple batches by holding down the CTRL key and clicking each batch in the list.
3 Select Edit > Delete.
4 When prompted, click Yes.
Scheduling Batches
363
Automatic Removal of Batch Scheduler Results
You can configure the Batch Scheduler to automatically removes batch results that exceed a
specified future age. For example, you can remove batch results that are more than a week old
and any associated result files that are stored on the scheduler server.
The automatic removal option is turned off by default. You can enable it by editing the
fr_scheduler.properties file to specify how old the results should be before they are
deleted and how often the system checks for them. The fr_scheduler.properties file is in
the <Financial Reporting>\lib directory on the Hyperion Financial Reporting Scheduler
Server computer.
Setting Up E-mail Notifications
You can set up the scheduler to send an e-mail when a scheduled batch is completed
successfully and unsuccessfully. The e-mail includes status details of the batch and optionally
the PDF or HTML output of the batch in ZIP format.
➤ To set up e-mail notifications:
1 Repeat step 1 through step 4 from “Scheduling Batches to Run” on page 359.
Note: You can also schedule batches from the Batch Scheduler in the Schedule Module.
2 From the Destinations area of Schedule Batch, select If Successful, E-mail Details to.
3 Click Select. Select E-mail Recipients for Scheduling is displayed.
4 Optional: To add new e-mail recipients:
1. Click Add. Add Addresses to List of Recipients is displayed.
2. Continue adding e-mail addresses to Enter the E-mail Addesses.
3. Click OK.
4. Perform an action:
❑
To notify recipients of a completed batch, click the e-mail address in the Available
Recipients list, then click
❑
.
To remove recipients from the notification list, click the e-mail address in the
Selected Recipients list, then click
.
5. In Subject of E-mail, enter a description for the notification.
6. Click OK.
7. In Schedule Batch - Destination area, the text box below the If Successful, E-mail
Scheduled Job to option is populated with e-mails that you added to the Available
Recipients list.
364
Scheduling Jobs and Batches
8. Select the Attach Exported Output option if you are including a PDF or HTML output of
the batch in ZIP format.
Retrieving the Exported Output
After a scheduled batch is run, you can retrieve a zipped HTML or PDF output file using the
Retrieve Output option to rename and relocate the zipped file to your local drive from the
scheduler server’s ...\data\SchedulesOutput\Output directory. You must have access to the
batch to retrieve the exported output.
Note: If you delete a batch after scheduling one, you cannot retrieve the output.
➤ To retrieve output:
1 From the View Pane Navigate Panel, select Schedule > Batch Scheduler.
2 In Batch Scheduler, select a completed scheduled batch that produced exported output.
3 Select Action > Retrieve Output.
4 In File Download, select Save, then select a location on your local drive to save the ZIP file.
5 Enter the name of the ZIP file and click Save.
6 Open the ZIP file and extract the output files.
Viewing the Status of Scheduled Batches
Scheduled batches can be viewed in a list format. Items such as the start time, destination,
status, and so on that occurred while running the batch are displayed in a row and column
format.
➤ To view the status of a scheduled batch that has run:
1 From the View Pane Navigate Panel, select Schedule > Batch Scheduler. The Batch Scheduler displays the
list of batches that have run. Information includes Name, Description, Start Time, Destination, Status, User
ID, and Path of the saved files.
Figure 33
Batch Scheduler
Tip: Click any column heading to perform a sort.
Scheduling Batches
365
Viewing Details of a Scheduled Batch
You can review the details of a particular batch which includes a summary and server activity
in Show Details.
➤ To view the details of a scheduled batch:
1 From the View Pane Navigate Panel, select Schedule > Batch Scheduler.
2 In Batch Scheduler, select a batch.
3 Select Action > Show Details. Show Details provides the following information:
●
●
Summary information:
❍
Items in the batch
❍
Status of the batch
❍
Destination of the batch
Server activity:
❍
Start time of the batch
❍
Exception messages
❍
End time and date
❍
Whether the batch was ran successfully and if e-mail was sent
4 To copy the details to the Clipboard:
1. Right-click in Show Details and select Select All.
2. Right-click and select Copy.
5 Click Close.
Preparing Batch Files for the Command Line Scheduler
You can use an external scheduler to schedule batch jobs in Workspace. You automate the
process of launching batches using an external scheduler or launching batches after an external
event occurs, such as the completion of a consolidation. For more information, see the
Workspace Administrator’s Guide.
➤ To export an existing batch file for command line scheduling:
1 From the View Pane Navigate Panel, select Schedule > Batch Scheduler.
2 In Batch Scheduler, select a completed scheduled batch that was successful and produced exported
output.
3 Select Action > Export for Command Line Scheduling.
4 In File Download, save the XML file in the <FR>\bin directory as mybatch.xml where mybatch is the
name of your batch input file. For more information, see the Workspace Administrator’s Guide.
366
Scheduling Jobs and Batches
➤ To create a batch file for command line scheduling:
1 From the View Pane Navigate Panel, select Schedule > Batch Scheduler.
2 In Batch Scheduler, select Action > Create File for Command Line Scheduling.
3
In Schedule Batch, select a batch file and click Next. File Download is displayed. To complete the
remaining steps of this dialog, see “Scheduling Batches to Run” on page 359.
4 Save the XML file in the <FR>\bin directory as mybatch.xml where mybatch is the name of your
batch input file. For more information, see the Workspace Administrator’s Guide.
Providing Logon Credentials
Logon credentials must be provided in order to run a scheduled batch at a future date.
➤ To enter logon credentials:
1 Enter a User ID and Password for the Financial Reporting server.
2 Enter a User ID and Password for the Database Connection Name you are using.
3 Select OK.
Scheduling Batches
367
368
Scheduling Jobs and Batches
Chapter
Using Interactive Reporting Jobs
14
The basic procedures for importing, executing, and scheduling jobs are presented in Chapter 3,
“Importing Items” and Chapter 13, “Scheduling Jobs and Batches.” This chapter details the
procedures and properties specific to Interactive Reporting jobs and Interactive Reporting
database connection files. Interactive Reporting jobs and documents use the database
connection files when connecting to data sources for processing queries.
In This Chapter
Interactive Reporting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Setting Interactive Reporting Job Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Selecting Database-Connection File Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Setting Job Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Job Parameter Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Example: Importing and Scheduling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Using Interactive Reporting Jobs
369
Interactive Reporting Jobs
Interactive Reporting jobs are created with Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting
Studio and defined by properties and parameters. You can import, run, and schedule
Interactive Reporting jobs.
Import Requirements
To import an Interactive Reporting, you need this information:
●
Interactive Reporting database connection file names, to connect to the database for
processing queries
●
Custom calendar name, if not using the default calendar, to resolve dynamic date
parameters
●
Filter names and values, if running a job with parameters that must be specified. (See
“Parameters” on page 370.)
●
E-mail addresses if sending results directly to users
●
Output directory name if sending results to a directory
●
Database create-and-insert privileges if processing results to a database table
●
Database grant access if giving additional users access to a database table.
See “Example: Importing and Scheduling a Job” on page 389.
Pass-Through Feature
Pass-through enables users to log on once and access data sources without additional
authentication. Pass-through is enabled per authentication system and per Interactive
Reporting database connection file. Pass-through can be used for foreground jobs and all
Interactive Reporting documents.
After your administrator enables pass-through for authentication systems, you can enable or
disable it for Interactive Reporting database connection files.
Parameters
Interactive Reporting job parameters include runtime values, processing options, and joboutput options. Processing and job-output options are defined using cycles and actions. A
cycle contains job actions and job filters. Actions define how documents are processed and
results are distributed. Filters are the values for the run-time variables. Job cycles are named
and associated with jobs.
When importing a job, you specify whether users can create cycles (multiple-cycle jobs) or use
only the default cycle (single-cycle jobs).
370
Using Interactive Reporting Jobs
●
Single-cycle jobs—Limited to one cycle. The default processing and printing actions are
used. All single-cycle job results are processed to file as job output. The job output is listed
with the job in the Browse item list.
●
Multiple-cycle jobs—Processed according to how many cycles are defined. Cycles can be
created using processing, printing, and exporting actions. You can design jobs to process as
many times as necessary at each scheduled run, each process having different parameters (or
filters) and job output options.
Example Your document queries sales transactions within a region. The region is specified through a
variable filter on the query to make the data available to each sales manager on Monday mornings.
When scheduling the job, you can add a job cycle for each region. You can resolve the variable and
filter for each run to retrieve numbers for only one region, and e-mail the numbers from each run
directly to the regional manager. All job-run cycles are part of one job, which is easier to track and
update.
Supporting Exceptions in Interactive Reporting Programs
This section is for Interactive Reporting programmers who support exception notifications to
users. (Users can receive e-mail notifications or see a graphic indicator on the Exceptions
Dashboard on Personal Pages.)
Setting Interactive Reporting Job Properties
These topics describe the properties for Interactive Reporting importing and modifying
Interactive Reporting jobs:
●
Setting Advanced Options
●
Setting Data Source and Query Properties
●
Setting Intelligence iServer General Properties and Options
●
Setting Job Defaults
For details on general properties and advanced options, see “Working with Properties” on
page 83.
➤ To access properties:
1 From the Explorer module, select an item.
2 Select File > Properties.
Setting Advanced Options
In addition to the advanced option detailed in “Working with Properties” on page 83, two
options specific to Interactive Reporting jobs are available.
Setting Interactive Reporting Job Properties
371
Figure 34
Advanced Options for Interactive Reporting Jobs
Option
Description
Run this job in the background
Enable running of your job in the background.
Auto-delete job outputs after
Select a time period and enter a number to specify when output is
automatically deleted.
Setting Data Source and Query Properties
Interactive Reporting database connection files are used by Interactive Reporting jobs and files
to connect to databases. Queries in a document can use different databases. In addition, an
Interactive Reporting database connection file can be specified for each query of an file or job.
Before you can import files and jobs, you need access to all Interactive Reporting database
connections that your document uses. Otherwise, the required database connection files are
not displayed in the connection list. Ask your administrator for access to the required
Interactive Reporting database connections.
If you use pass-through, see “Pass-Through Using Multiple, Interactive Reporting, DatabaseConnection Files” on page 376.
Note: If no Interactive Reporting database connection file is specified for a query, users accessing the document cannot
process the query unless it uses only local results.
➤ To access data source and query properties:
●
372
From Properties, click Interactive Reporting on the left.
Using Interactive Reporting Jobs
Figure 35
Data Source and Query Properties
Property
Description
Set all queries to obtain
the user name/password
To use one method for obtaining all username and password combinations for all
queries, select a method and select Go:
●
From OCE Default—Uses the username or password method selected for the
Interactive Reporting database connection file when the file was imported. The word
default is displayed in the username and password fields.
●
Prompt End-User—Prompts the user for a username and password per data
connection. The word prompt is displayed in the username and password fields.
●
Specify Now—Prompts the importer for a user name and password for all queries.
The username is displayed in all username fields. The password is not retractable.
You can override individual username or password combinations by selecting a method
for each query connection.
Connection
Select an Interactive Reporting database connection file to use the query. For queries
using only local results, select <No Connection>.
If you are using pass-through, see “Pass-Through Using Multiple, Interactive Reporting,
Database-Connection Files” on page 376.
User name
Enter a user name, set one globally with the Connecting to Data Sources list; or set a
one individually with the options list.
Password
Enter the password to use for this query; or set globally with the Connecting to Data
Sources list; or set individually with the options list.
Options
Set the username and password using the selected method (default or prompted)
Query Connections and
Processing
Validate all queries that you process at runtime.
Setting Intelligence iServer General Properties and Options
The properties page for an Interactive Reporting job contains general properties and the
Intelligence iServer options.
Setting Interactive Reporting Job Properties
373
➤ To access general properties:
●
From Properties, click the Properties tab at the top.
Table 75
General Properties
Property
Description
Calendar
Calendar selected for resolving dynamic date parameters.
Users running this
job can define their
own cycles and
actions
Allow users to define cycles and parameters for the job, thus creating a multiple-cycle job. The
default is not selected (single-cycle jobs).
Only single-cycle jobs can be viewed in View Manager.
Note: If you select the option now, you can deselect it later. If you do not select it now, you can
never select it.
Table 76
Options
Option
Description
Enable for use in HTML
Browser uses Interactive Reporting Web to display the Interactive Reporting file.
Enable ADR
Browser refreshes the document automatically.
Setting Job Defaults
Job Defaults and detailed in Table 77gives you the option to include HTML as a default, joboutput format and to set default, job-parameter values. See “Setting Job Parameters” on
page 378.
➤ To access Job Defaults:
From Properties, click the Job Defaults tab at the top.
374
Using Interactive Reporting Jobs
Job Defaults
Figure 36
Table 77
Job Defaults
Default
Description
Include static HTML as a
default output format
Select to make HTML and the default output format (the standard Interactive Reporting
document) your default output format.
Set Values
Set default job-parameter values. See For field definitions to set values, see “Setting Job
Parameters” on page 378.“Modifying Job Parameters” on page 378.
Modify Filter
Set default filter options. See “Filter Options” on page 381.
Click OK to close Properties. You can schedule the job later from the Browse web module. See
“Scheduling Jobs and Batches” on page 343.
Selecting Database-Connection File Options
Interactive Reporting jobs and files use database-connection files to connect to databases. An
Interactive Reporting, database-connection file must be specified for each query of an
Interactive Reporting file or job, except for queries that use only local results, so users can
process the query.
Selecting Database-Connection File Options
375
Pass-Through Using Multiple, Interactive Reporting,
Database-Connection Files
If enabled by your administrator, pass-through enables you to access data sources without
entering a username and password for each data source. For pass-through to work for
Interactive Reporting jobs or files associated with multiple, Interactive Reporting database
connections, these conditions are necessary:
●
Interactive Reporting database connections is configured for pass-through.
●
Credentials required to access each data source are identical.
Note: Hyperion recommends selecting similarly configured Interactive Reporting, database-connection files when
importing Interactive Reporting documents. To enable users doing imports to make this selection, Interactive
Reporting database connection names should indicate whether the database connection is configured for passthrough.
When Interactive Reporting jobs and files with some but not all Interactive Reporting database
connections configured for pass-through are processed:
●
Interactive Reporting database connections configured for pass-through—Users are not
prompted for logon credentials.
●
Interactive Reporting database connections not configured for pass-through—The
credential option selected when the job or file was imported (prompt user, specify now, or
use the default) is used.
Caution! For pass-through processing of all queries, Interactive Reporting database connections must
have identical database credentials.
Setting Processing and Metadata Options
Two option types specific to Interactive Reporting, database-connection file are offered:
processing and metadata.
Processing Open Catalog Extension (OCE) options store database connection information.
376
Using Interactive Reporting Jobs
Figure 37
Table 78
Processing and Metadata
Processing Database-Connection Options
Option
Description
Data source access
Select a method for the Interactive Reporting database-connection file to use a
username and password when a job is run or a file is processed.
●
Use the username/password specified below—You enter the database
username and password.
●
Prompt for user name/password—You are prompted for the database
username and password when the job is run or scheduled or the file is
processed. This is the default when pass-through is disabled.
User name
If Data source access is set to use this field, enter the database user name.
Password
If Data source access is set to use this field, enter in the database password.
Allow pass-through where end
user’s authentication system is
enabled for it
Select to allow pass-through credentials for data source access.
Metadata options store a file that contains extra information about the Interactive Reporting
database connection.
Table 79
Metadata Options
Option
Description
This database connection
uses metadata defined in
another connection
Metadata is used and the metadata connection is not specified in the Interactive
Reporting, database-connection file. All fields in this group are disabled if this field is
not selected.
Select metadata
connection
If metadata is used and the metadata connection is not specified in the Interactive
Reporting, database connection file, select the Interactive Reporting databaseconnection file for the metadata.
Selecting Database-Connection File Options
377
Table 79
Metadata Options (Continued)
Use processing OCE’s
credential for metadata
connection
Use that username and password associated with the Interactive Reporting database
connection to access the metadata.
Use specified user
name/password
Use the specified user name and password to access the metadata.
Setting Job Parameters
With single-cycle jobs, job parameters contain job variables filters. With multiple-cycle jobs,
job parameters contain job variables or filters and job cycles, which contain processing options
and job actions.
Note: You can create job parameters only when creating or modifying a job schedule or running a job.
Setting Single-Cycle Job Parameters
Only single-cycle jobs with variables filters have job parameters.
➤ To set job parameters for a single-cycle, Interactive Reporting job:
1 From the Explorer module, right-click the Interactive Reporting job, and select Run Job.
This job is stored in a folder to which you have Run Job access rights. The Job Parameters
window displays the parameter values that are set.
2 Select a job parameter definition.
3 Click Go to use the definition as is or click Edit to modify it.
4 If you clicked Edit, proceed to the following topic.
Modifying Job Parameters
The following procedure assumes that you clicked edit in the preceding procedure.
➤ To edit a job parameter definition:
1 From Job Parameters, click Edit.
2 Click Modify job parameter to update the job parameter list.
3 Enter a name and description.
4 Modify the process method, add another cycle, or define access privileges.
5 From the Modify Limit list, select a filter and click Go.
The table below the Modify Limit field displays the values for the filter.
6 Select values for the filter, and click Update Limit.
378
Using Interactive Reporting Jobs
7 Take one action:
●
Click Save as my default
●
To save your job parameters, select Save, select parameter type, and enter a
name.
Setting Multiple-Cycle Job Parameters
When creating job parameters for multiple-cycle jobs, you can save the cycles and the job
parameters associated with the job that you are running or scheduling.
Note:
can create job parameters only when creating or modifying a job schedule or when running a job.
➤ To set job parameters for a multiple-cycle, Interactive Reporting job:
1 From the Explorer module, right-click the Interactive Reporting job, and select Run Job.
This Interactive Reporting job is stored in a folder to which you have Run Job access rights. The
Job Parameters window shows the parameter values that are set.
Setting Job Parameters
379
2 To modify a cycle click Modify, to add a cycle click Go.
3 Enter a cycle name.
4 Select Save Job Output with the job or Save job output in another folder.
5 If you selected import output to another folder, enter or browse for the folder.
6 From the Modify Limit list, select a filter and click Go.
The table below the Modify Limit field displays the values for all filters.
380
Using Interactive Reporting Jobs
7 Select values for the filter, and click Update Filter.
8 Select process options.
The connection file and database to which you are connected determine whether you can
process the results to a database table.
9 Select action options.
For details on action options, see Table 80.
10 Click OK.
11 Select Save Job Parameters, and enter a name.
Job Parameter Options
This following topics provide details on Interactive Reporting, job-parameter options:
●
Filter options—For single-cycle and multiple-cycle jobs
●
Processing options—For multiple-cycle jobs only
●
Actions options—For multiple-cycle jobs only
Filter Options
In Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting Studio, filters enable you to control how much
data is processed and displayed during relational or OLAP database queries.
Job Parameter Options
381
Query filters which are created initially in Interactive Reporting Studio, can be static or
variable. Static filter values cannot be changed. You can change variable filter values at runtime
from Set Values. The Set Values area displays information for relational and OLAP databases.
These topics detail the information displayed in the Set Values area during relational or OLAP
database queries:
●
Setting Filter Values for Relational Databases
●
Setting Filter and Slicer Values for OLAP Queries
Setting Filter Values for Relational Databases
The Set Values area displays the values for the filters.
➤ To access properties:
1 From the Explore module, select an item.
2 Select File > Properties.
3 Select Interactive Reporting from the left pane, and select the Job Defaults tab.
Properties is displayed.
Figure 38
382
Filter Options
Using Interactive Reporting Jobs
Option
Description
Query Name
(Read-only) Query name
Filter Name
(Read-only) Name of the field that the filter is on from the Interactive Reporting job
Operator
(Read-only) The operator that the filter uses, such as =, <, or >
Values
(Read-only) The values that the filter uses (Variable system values such as $USER, are
acceptable. The values are from the database that the query is using.)
Ignore
Disables the filter when the query is processed
Don’t Prompt
Disables prompting for runtime values. (A dynamic value, such as a system variable can be
used for a value(s). This option essentially changes the variable filter to a static filter with fixed
values.)
Modify Filter
Enables modification of a selected filter.
Include nulls
Enables inclusion of an “is null” condition in the SQL sent to the database when the query is
processed.
Operator
(Read-only) The operator that the filter uses, such as =, <, and >
Show values
Retrieves from the database all available values associated with the item you can consider and
select from the range of values when applying a filter.
Custom values
Lists available values saved with the filter or read from a file, you can select values from a predefined pool. You can create and save a custom list with each filter.
Setting Filter and Slicer Values for OLAP Queries
You can set OLAP variable filters and slicers when importing or scheduling a job with an OLAP
query. In the query, you can filter data on cube dimension levels to be displayed in the top or
side labels of the query.
Slicers are filters on a dimension that are not in top or side labels but are visible in the data
displayed. The filters list on Set Values displays the slicers last.
Note: When modifying filters, you cannot remove the last filter. You need at least one filter value per filter.
➤ To access filter and slicer values:
1 From the Explore module, select an item.
2 Choose File > Schedule Job.
3 Click Go to add a schedule.
4 Enter the schedule properties and click Next until you can define the value and filter options.
Job Parameter Options
383
Figure 39
Value and Filter Options for OLAP Queries
Option
Description
Set Values (MDD)
OLAP Query Name — (Read-only) Query name
Filter On — (Read-only) The dimension level on which the filter is applied
Operator Type — (Read-only) The type that is set
Data Operator — (Read-only) The operator that the filter uses, such as =, <, and >.
(Slicers have no data operators.)
Value(s) — (Read-only) The values that the filter uses (Variable system values such
as $USER are acceptable. The values are from the database that the query is
using.)
Ignore — Disables the filter when the query is processed
Don’t Prompt — Disables prompting for runtime values. (A dynamic value such as a
system variable can be used for a value. This option essentially changes the
variable filter to a static filter with fixed values.)
384
Using Interactive Reporting Jobs
Modify Filter
Lists OLAP Query Name/Filter on On values. Toggles filter list to filters applied for
selected OLAP Query section and filter.
Operator Type
Availability determined by the database:
●
Select Members From Database
●
Select By Measure
●
Top N
●
Bottom N
●
Top Sum
●
Bottom Sum
●
Top N%
●
Bottom N%
●
Select Members
●
User Defined Attributes
●
Substitution Variables
Available operator types are displayed in the filter list. Slicers have no operator
types.
Process Options
Process options, are displayed in the section below the Modify Filters options. The connection
file and database to which you connect determine whether you can process the results to a
database table. You need Create and Insert privileges on the database to process to a database
table.
➤ To set process options for a multiple-cycle, Interactive Reporting job:
1 From the Explorer module, right-click the job and select Run Job.
2 Click Go to add another cycle to this job.
3 Click Process Options (+) to display all process options.
Job Parameter Options
385
Figure 40
Process Options for Multiple-Cycle Jobs
Option
Description
Save job output with the job
For storing the job output in the folder containing the job
Save job output in another folder
For specifying an output folder
Process results to Interactive
Reporting file
For processing queries to the Interactive Reporting file Results section
Process results to database table
For creating a database table to store the data set. (Items on the Request
line become the column headings. You can append columns to the table
and query it. You need Create and Insert privileges on the database to
process to a database table.)
Query
For selecting the query to process to a database table.
Table Name
For entering the name of the table that you are creating or to which you
are appending columns (See your database administrator if you want to
use a new table.)
Create a table for each run,
appending date to table name
For creating a table for each job run and appending the date to its name
Delete and recreate table for each job
run
For deleting the old table and creates a table for each job run (Runs use
the same table name.)
Create table on initial run, and then
append data to existing table
For creating a table on the initial run and adding data to the table
Grant access to:
For entering additional usernames (separated by commas) (You need
Grant privileges to use this field. If Grant Access to is not selected, the
table is granted only to your user name.)
Action Options for Multiple-Cycle Jobs
The action is the output method. The options on the actions page vary depending on the
action.
Actions and items to which they apply:
386
Using Interactive Reporting Jobs
●
Export—Dashboard, Report, Results, Chart, Pivot, OLAPQuery, and an entire document
as a web page
●
Save Document—Entire Interactive Reporting file
●
Print—Dashboard, Report, Results, Chart, Pivot, and OLAPQuery (Available if the
administrator defined a printer for Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting Studio)
●
Import Document—Dashboard, Report, Results, Chart, Pivot, OLAPQuery, and an entire
document as a web page.
●
E-mail Section—Dashboard, Report, Results, Chart, Pivot, and OLAPQuery
●
E-mail Document—Entire Interactive Reporting file
Note: A cycle can have only one Save As Job Output action. It can have multiple save actions but can be saved as a file
on only some output folders.
➤ To set action options for a multiple-cycle, Interactive Reporting job:
1 From the Explorer module, right-click the job, and select Run Job.
2 Click Go to add another cycle to this job.
3 From the actions list, select a value and click Go.
Figure 41
Table 80
Example Action Page: Export
Export Action Options
Option
Description
Section
Section to be saved, printed, mailed, or exported.
Filename
Export file name (no extension)
Job Parameter Options
387
Table 80
Export Action Options (Continued)
Format
Export file format:
●
Microsoft Office Web Archive (*.mhtml)
●
Excel (*.xls)
●
HTML (*.htm)
●
Lotus 1-2-3 (*.wks)
●
Text (Tab Delimited)(*.txt)
●
Text (Comma Delimited)(*.csv)
●
Adobe Acrobat (*.pdf)
●
Graphics file (*.jpg)
Note: The choices depend on the export section type and text port action type.
388
Export as job output
For exporting the section to the current job folder in the repository. (The filename is
not used with this option.)
Save as job output
For saving the section to the current job folder in the repository. (The file name is
not used with this option.)
Output Directory
The directory for saving the export file or Interactive Reporting document
Append Unique Identifier to
Filename
For appending the job ID# and report cycle name to the saved document or export
file; ensures that the file is recognizable if similar files are saved to one directory.
Append Date to Filename
For appending the date (year, month, and day) to the saved document or exported
file
Save Results with Document
For saving Results section contents with the document
Save Computed Values with
Document
For saving the computed values with the document.
Save in Compressed Format
For saving the job file in Interactive Reporting, compressed-file format.
Send Files
For including the scheduled file in an e-mail message
Send Results
For including Results section contents with the e-mailed document
Send Computed Values
For including computed values with the e-mailed document.
Send Compressed
For sending the saved job file in Interactive Reporting compressed-file format.
Additional Message
Enter e-mail message text.
Using Interactive Reporting Jobs
Example: Importing and Scheduling a Job
The example in this topic illustrates the importing and scheduling of an Interactive Reporting
job. In this example, you import and schedule sample1.bqy to run once per quarter.
➤ To import sample1.bqy:
1 Navigate to the folder to which to import the job.
2 Select File > Import > File as Job.
3 Browse for the job, enter a name and description, and click Next.
Advanced Options is displayed, with this step summary at the top:
4 Click Edit Permissions to open the access control section.
In this example, advanced options are being changed so the access control section need not be
opened.
5 Give the world group access to sample1.bqy.
a. From the list, select Groups and click Get List.
b. From the list, select World and click Edit.
c. Select the access control level for the job and the job output, and set the adaptive state.
❍
Access to file—Full Control
❍
Adaptive state—View only
d. Click OK.
Permissions is displayed.
e. Click OK.
6 Click Next.
Interactive Reporting Query is displayed.
7 From the Set all queries to obtain the username/password list, select From OCE Default, and click Go.
The username and password fields populate with the default, database-connection username
and password.
8 Under Connecting to Data Sources, from the Connection list, select Sample.
9 Click Next.
Interactive Reporting Job Properties is displayed.
10 Under General Properties, select Users running this job can define their own cycles and actions.
Enabling this field makes the job a multiple-cycle job. For single-cycle jobs, users cannot define
cycles and actions.
11 Click Next.
Example: Importing and Scheduling a Job
389
12 Click Finish.
You imported Sample1.bqy. Review the item list of the folder to which you imported the
job.
➤ To schedule sample1.bqy:
1 Navigate to sample1.bqy and, right-click, select Schedule Job.
2 Click Go to add a schedule.
Choose Job is displayed.
3 Under General Properties, type Quarterly as the schedule name and click Next.
4 On Select Job Parameters, click Next.
Cycles is displayed.
5 Click Go to add another cycle to this job.
Define Cycle is displayed.
6 In Cycle Name, type Weekly.
7 Under Process Options, select Process Results to Interactive Reporting file.
Displaying all Process Options may require clicking the plus (+) sign.
8 Under Actions, from the list, select Email Document and click Go.
Add/Modify Action is displayed.
9 Enter your e-mail information, and click OK.
10 Click OK again to save the cycle.
11 Select Save Personal Job Parameters, and, in Name field, enter a name.
390
Using Interactive Reporting Jobs
The cycle is saved as a job parameter so you can modify it later.
12 Click Next.
Time Events is displayed.
13 From the Define when to run this job starting with list, select A New Recurring Time Event.
14 Choose Next.
General Properties is displayed.
15 Enter the event name.
16 From the Days to Run list, select By Quarter and click Go.
This action returns default values for running your job every quarter.
17 Click Next.
Notification is displayed.
18 Select Display notification in Job Manager Module.
19 Click Finish.
Schedule Information for Interactive Reporting is displayed.
Your job, Sample 1, is imported and scheduled to run.
Example: Importing and Scheduling a Job
391
392
Using Interactive Reporting Jobs
Chapter
15
Using Production Reporting and
Generic Jobs
Production Reporting jobs are created with Production Reporting Studio. Generic jobs are
created using applications with a command-line Production Reporting interface. You can use
the Explore and Schedule modules to import, run, and schedule Production Reporting and
generic jobs. You also use properties and parameters to further define Production Reporting
and generic job options.
This chapter explains the properties specific to Production Reporting jobs, generic jobs, and
Production Reporting documents (Production Reporting job output).
For basic importing procedures, see Chapter 3, “Importing Items.” For basic job execution and
scheduling procedures, see Chapter 13, “Scheduling Jobs and Batches.”
In This Chapter
Prerequisites for Importing Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Generic Job Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Modifying Production Reporting and Generic Job Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Setting Production Reporting and Generic Job Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Output Options for Scheduling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Working with Secure Production Reporting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs
393
Prerequisites for Importing Jobs
Information needed for importing a Production Reporting job:
●
Database connectivity, database type, and Production Reporting version needed to run the
Production Reporting program that you are adding (select from the list); for example,
Marketing Production Reporting v. 9
●
Files that the Production Reporting program references:
❍
Include files (#INCLUDE commands)
❍
Input data files (open for-reading commands)
❍
Image files (print-image and declare-image commands)
●
Compile-time parameters (ASK commands) and runtime parameters (INPUT
commands).
●
For secure Production Reporting jobs, the security organization of the program: which
users have access to which data and how the output is (divided) (bursted).
Job Properties
The properties explained in the following topics pertain only to Production Reporting and
generic jobs. Properties that do not apply to generic jobs are noted. See “Generic Job
Properties” on page 409 for properties unique to generic jobs.
Production Reporting jobs have these properties:
●
General properties
●
Advanced options
●
Connectivity and run options
●
Parameters
●
Output
Production Reporting and generic jobs and other items, such as BQY jobs share many general
properties and advanced options. See “Working with Properties” on page 83.
Dependency Analysis Commands
When importing Production Reporting job, the system can analyze your Production Reporting
program for dependencies. The analysis occurs if you request the system to scan for required
files and INPUT and ASK parameters. Analysis can be time-consuming if your Production
Reporting program is large.
The system examines these commands in your Production Reporting program:
●
394
INCLUDE—Includes an external source file in the Production Reporting report
specification; for example, a Production Reporting code file, charts.sqi, required by
stocks.sqr when it compiles
Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs
●
OPEN—Opens an operating system file for reading or writing; for example, an OPEN
statement that opens a file for sequential reading the data in the file, which is identified to
the program as 1:
open 'stocks.dat'as 1 for-reading record=100
●
DECLARE-IMAGE—Declares the type, size, and source of an image to be printed; for
example:
declare-image control flow
type = eps-file
source = 'controlf.eps'
image-size = (321, 309)
end-declare
●
PRINT-IMAGE—Prints an image in any report section (As with the declare-image
command, the print-image command accepts type, size, and source arguments.)
●
ASK—Retrieves a compile-time substitution variable (Retrieval can be by user input,
command-line arguments, or entries in the @file on the command line.)
●
INPUT—Retrieves a runtime variable (Retrieval can receive by user input, command-line
arguments, or entries in the @file on the command line.)
●
PRINT URL=”...”—Prints the file found at the URL location, usually an image file (The file
is listed with the required files for the job.)
●
SECURE—Retrieves the secure tag
Advanced Options
The Security Tags Included property, which is read-only, indicates whether the job is secure.
Secure jobs can have only HTML output. All other advanced options are explained in
“Working with Properties” on page 83.
Figure 42
Advanced Options
Job Properties
395
Connectivity and Run Options
These topics describe all data source connection properties and run properties for Production
Reporting jobs:
●
Connection and Run Options
●
Required Files
●
Required-File Addition
●
Advanced Production Reporting Options
Connection and Run Options
Use these options, which apply only to Production Reporting jobs, to configure or change the
database connections and the Production Reporting engine for the job.
Figure 43
Connection and Run Options
Data Source and Production Reporting
Engine
For selecting a data source and a Production Reporting engine
Database Connectivity
Use Job Service connectivity for this data source—For using the
default username and password
If the data source or engine that you need is not available, see your
administrator.
Prompt for username/password—For prompting users to enter IDs and
passwords at runtime
Use the username/password specified below—For setting the
username and password now on import
Allow pass-through where end user’s
authentication system is enabled for it
396
Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs
For enabling users to access data sources without additional
credentials.
Required Files
When importing a file or job, you can identify and locate required files by scanning the
Production Reporting program, or you can manually enter the required files.
Note: Scanning the Production Reporting program to locate required files is possible only during the import process.
As you identify and locate required files, they are added to the required files screen. For generic
jobs, you must manually enter required files.
Files that can be associated with a job or Production Reporting document and required for
successful execution:
●
For Production Reporting jobs, Include, Data, Image files, and INI file
●
For generic jobs, associated files used for running the job
●
Production Reporting documents and associated files used in viewing the document
This chapter concentrates on required files managed through a listing interface, namely files
for Production Reporting and generic jobs and Production Reporting documents. The INI file
and the custom-form required files are managed through another interface.
Note: Scan for required files before manually entering required files, because the scanned results replace the required
files list. If duplicate required files are listed, you must delete the extra files.
Figure 44
Name
Required Files
Required-file name
The local file icon next to the name indicates that the file is on your local system.
Location
Required-file path
If the location is not listed, you must find the file by selecting Modify or delete the file.
Job Properties
397
Type
The type (INCLUDE, IMAGE, DATA), as determined by the system.
Manually entered JPEG, GIF, and HTML files are given the IMAGE type. You must select a type for other manually
entered files. All files must have a type before you can continue the importing process.
Action
Retrieve—For opening any type of required file
Replace—For replacing the file with one selected from your local computer or the Hyperion Foundation repository
Delete—For deleting the file
Modify—For browsing your local system for files that the system could not locate
Add Files Manually
Default method to locate required files for a job
You can enter each required file separately or zip the required files and enter the zip file manually. Hyperion
Foundation extracts the zipped files and adds them to the required files summary list.
Note: Scanning is
available only during
the import process.
Scan Folders Specified in Preferences — The Production Reporting program scans listed folders for required
files. Files not located are listed on the summary screen with the File not found message under location. Locate
missing files by selecting Modify.
Scan All of HPS — The Production Reporting program is scanned for required files, and files in the Hyperion
Foundation repository are listed on the required files summary list.
If your program uses variables for file names in the OPEN, DECLARE-IMAGE, or PRINT-IMAGE commands, you
receive a warning message that the system cannot find the files unless you provide their names. Ignore the
message, if you enter the required files manually or if the variables point to files that reside on the Job Service
numbers. Otherwise, exit the import process and modify your Production Reporting program.
Required-File Addition
Browse your local system or the repository for required files to add manually.
Figure 45
Add Required File
Advanced Production Reporting Options
Advanced Production Reporting options apply only to Production Reporting jobs. For more
information on command-line flags and the SQR.ini file, refer to see Production Reporting
Developer's Guide, Volume 2.
398
Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs
Figure 46
Advanced Production Reporting Options
Compile job now
For compiling the program
Benefits:
Command-line flags for Job
Execution
●
Save time when later when running the job
●
Validate SQL ASK parameters
●
Check program validity
Optional command-line flags
Some flags can be over-ridden by job-output option formats and demand-paging options, for
example, -burst and -printer.XX where XX is a format type.
This command-line flag option is unavailable: -EH_CSVONLY.
The system accepts 250 characters on the command line.
Use SQR.ini from File System on
Job Service Host
For using the SQR.ini file location
Custom SQR.ini
Path to a custom SQR.ini file
Browse for the file locally or in the repository.
Parameters
Production Reporting jobs have two parameter types, ASK and INPUT. ASK parameters
(variables) are used at compile time. INPUT parameters (variables) are used when the job is
executed and are displayed as prompts when users run the job. You can add ASK and INPUT
parameters to the parameter list. Only Production Reporting jobs have ASK parameters.
Production Reporting and generic jobs can have INPUT parameters. Further define a
parameter by selecting Modify for the parameter. Also select custom forms for user input of
parameters.
Job Properties
399
Parameter Settings
Figure 47 shows “Define parameters” after scanning or manually entering parameters. Table 81
details the define parameter properties.
Figure 47
Define Parameters
Table 81
Parameter Properties
Manually entering parameters
Default method for entering ASK and INPUT parameters (Parameters
are listed as you add them.)
Scanning job and reading parameters
from the Production Reporting code
Option to enable automatic scenery of the Production Reporting job
and the INPUT and ASK parameters list
Note: Available during the import process.
400
Add another parameter to this job
Select INPUT or ASK, and click GO.
Type
INPUT or ASK
Prompt
The prompt for values for the parameter
Display
The display format (Text, SQL Choice, Choice Box) for the parameters
(Default is Text.)
Default Value
Default value for the parameter
Modify
Select to modify these properties for each parameter: prompt, display
format, and default value
Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs
Table 81
Parameter Properties (Continued)
Arrow icons
Arrows to reorder the parameter. (The parameters are processed in the
order that they are displayed on this list.)
Garbage can icon
Select to delete the parameter.
ASK Parameters
ASK parameters can be entered as text or as an SQL query.
Figure 48
ASK Parameter Text Entry
Figure 49
ASK Parameter SQL Query
Job Properties
401
Table 82
ASK Parameter Properties
Display parameter on form as:
Whether the parameter is displayed as Text Entry or Choice of Values from
SQL Query
Prompt
The prompt for the parameter
Default value
For entering a default value or allowing users to change the value (text
entry only)
The system requires a default value or section of End-user can change
value.
End-user can change value
For allowing users to enter default values during runtime
INPUT Parameters
INPUT parameters can be entered as text, predetermined values, or an SQL query.
Figure 50
402
INPUT Parameter Text Entry
Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs
Figure 51
INPUT Parameters Pre-Determined Values
Figure 52
INPUT Parameters SQL Query
Job Properties
403
Table 83
INPUT Parameter Properties
Display parameter on form as:
Whether the parameter is displayed as Text Entry, Choice of Predetermined Values, or Choice of Values obtained from a SQL Query
Prompt
The prompt for the parameter
Data Type
The data type (text, numeric, or date; default is text)
Presentation
The presentation format: drop-down list, option buttons, or list box (Predetermined and SQL query only)
Default value
For entering a default value or allowing users to change the value
(predetermined and text entry)
If Value optional is unavailable, the system requires a default value or
requires that End-user can change value is selected.
When $FIXED_USERNAME is selected, Value optional and End-user can
change value are disabled.
Value optional
For allowing the parameter to have no default value and enabling users to
execute jobs with no value for the parameter
End-user can change value
For allowing users to enter default values during runtime
If no default is specified and this option is selected, users must specify
default values.
When this option is selected, the allow multiple values field is selectable
(predetermined and SQL query only).
Allow multiple values
For allowing multiple values (list box presentation only)
If multiple values selected are used to create dynamic selection criteria
within the Production Reporting program, the program must be designed
to construct a WHERE clause.
Validation Type
Validation type (text only).
Validation Mask
A standard or custom validation mask (text only)
List Values
For entering values that are moved to the list with the right-facing arrows
(predetermined only)
Delete values by selecting them in the list and selecting the left-facing
arrows.
SELECT/FROM/WHERE
SQL commands for retrieving the parameter list (SQL query only).
Custom Forms
You can select a custom JSP parameter form or use the standard form for INPUT parameter
intake when the job is run. Parameter forms JSPs with input fields. They can also be more
complex, invoking JavaScript or applets. You can select a customized parameter collection
form developed by your company.
The assigned form is stored in the repository. You can assign a custom form from your local
system or from the repository.
404
Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs
Figure 53
Custom Form
Standard Form
Default HTML parameter form, which is displayed only when properties
are being modified
Custom Form
For uploading the custom-form file by clicking ADD (next to Custom
Form) and browsing to it
Required Files
For adding supporting files, such as images, used by the selected form
Name - Required-file name
Location - Required-file path (The icon next to the name indicates that
the file is on your local system.)
Replace—For replacing the file with one selected from your local
system or the repository
Action
Delete—For deleting the file
Add Files Manually
For add required files by clicking Go.
Parameter List Options
Figure 54 and Table 83 details the INPUT parameter list options.
Figure 54
Parameter List Options
Smartform allows user to choose a
Parameter list
For allowing users to choose parameter lists at runtime
Smartform allows user to save as Job
Parameter
For allowing users to save a parameter for values entered in the input
fields
Job Properties
405
Job Output
HTML format is always selected for an output format. You can add additional output formats
by selecting them or listing them in the text box.
Output Options
Figure 55 and Table 84 details the output options.
Figure 55
406
Output Options
Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs
Table 84
Output Options
Choose Output Options for Production
Reporting Job
Output formats to be generated from your Production Reporting program:
●
HTML
●
SPF
●
Interactive Reporting Data (bqd)
●
Smart View
●
Adobe Acrobat
●
PostScript
●
HP Printer
●
XML
●
Comma Delimited
●
Line Printer
●
Excel
HTML is the default.
Values entered in other are stored as a custom property.
Formats selected here override output formats specified in other
Production Reporting Command-Line Option interfaces.
Note: “SPF output” is used to show or hide SPF output, which is always
generated, in the output listing.
Demand Paging
Demand paging offers options for splitting, or bursting, the report into separate files for better
performance. By bursting a report, you avoid downloading the report in its entirety into the
browser.
For secure Production Reporting jobs, you should choose an HTML Demand Paging option
according to how the report divides the output among users or groups.
Demand paging is for Web output types which include HTML, BQD, XLC, and CSV. Printed
output types include PDF, SPF, PS,LP, and HP.
Table 85
Demand Paging Options
Write the entire report as one file
For writing report output to one HTML file (Not available for a secure
Production Reporting job)
Job Properties
407
Table 85
Demand Paging Options (Continued)
Write a separate file every __ pages
For creating an HTML file for every N pages
For example; if you enter 1, an HTML file is created for every report page; if
you enter 20, an HTML file is created for every 20 pages.
Default: An HTML file for every page in the report
Write a separate file based on table
of contents level
For creating HTML files for the table of contents
If you enter 1, a separate HTML file is created for each level 1 entry in the
table of contents. If you enter 2, an HTML file is created for each level 1
and level 2 entry.
Default: An HTML file for each level 1 entry
Note: If no table of contents exists, the report is saved as one HTML file.
Advanced Output Options
Table 86 details the advanced output properties.
Table 86
Advanced Output Options
Allow users to add job output to a
Personal Page
For allowing users to embed job output contents (HTML only) in personal
pages
Command-line flags for Job Output
Command-line flags to be used in output bursting.
Auto delete job outputs after
For specifying when to delete job output automatically
Compile Properties
You can compile Production Reporting programs before you run them. All precompile
programs recompile if INCLUDE file is modified.
Figure 56
408
Set Compile Options
Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs
Compile-Time flags
Command-line flags for use at compile time
Database user name
Username to access the database
Database password
Password for the username
ASK parameters
For modifying default values for ASK parameters required by the
Production Reporting job
A Production Reporting document is a printer-independent file format that accommodates all
Production Reporting graphical features, including fonts, lines, boxes, shaded areas, charts, bar
codes, and images. Production Reporting portable files have a default extension of SPF or SNN
(for multiple reports).This file format is very useful for saving report output. Production
Reporting documents can be distributed electronically and read with the Production
Reporting viewer. You can decide later where to print a document.
Generic Job Properties
Most generic job properties and Production Reporting job properties are the same. General
properties, advanced options, and parameter properties are the same except where noted in the
Production Reporting Job Properties section.
Job input and output properties are unique to generic jobs and are explained in the following
topics.
Generic Job Properties
409
Generic Job Output Options
If the application that you need to run your program is not available, see your administrator to
configure a job service with the application that you need.
Figure 57
Output Options
Job Factory Application
The application to run your program
If the required application is not on the list, a job service must be
configured for the application before you proceeding with the job setup.
Contact your system administrator to configure the application.
Command-line flags for Job Execution
Command-line flags to be passed to the application
Required Files for Generic Jobs
Identify and locate required files by manually entering the required files. As you identify and
locate required files, they are added to the required files page.
Figure 58
410
Required Files
Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs
Name
Required-file name
The icon next to the name indicates that the file is on your local system.
Location
Required-file path
If the location is not listed, you must find the file by clicking the modify icon or delete the
file.
Retrieve—For downloading the file
Action
Replace—For replacing the file with one from your local computer or the Hyperion
Foundation repository with the same name
Delete—For deleting the file
Add Files Manually
Method for locating required files for a job
Enter files separately or zip them and enter the zip file name. Hyperion Foundation
extracts the zipped files and adds them to the required file summary list.
Database Connectivity for Generic Jobs
Enter a database username, password, and connect string.
Figure 59
Database Connectivity
User name
User name for the data source
Password
Password for the data source
Database Connect String
Database connect string for the data source
Allow pass-through where end user’s
authentication system is enabled for it
For allowing users to access data sources without entering credentials
Generic Job Properties
411
Output Options for Generic Jobs
Define the job and output options.
Figure 60
Define Job Options
Display this primary output file after
running the job:
Primary output format
Separate formats with semicolons; for example, *.html; *.pdf.
When a format matches, remaining formats are ignored.
Default: All formats are shown
Output types generated by this job
Value to be stored as the property SYS_OUTPUTFILETYPE.
Use API in your application to access this property.
Auto-delete output after the job is run
For specifying when job output is deleted automatically
Modifying Production Reporting and Generic Job Properties
The properties of Production Reporting and generic jobs can be modified. See “Working with
Properties” on page 83.
The Output Summary section, from which you can delete output, is available when you modify
properties.
Figure 61
412
Output Summary Section
Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs
Setting Production Reporting and Generic Job Parameters
You must to set the necessary runtime values for a job before the job is run or scheduled. You
can save the values as personal job parameters, so they can be used again.
➤ To set job parameters for Production Reporting and generic jobs:
1 Run or schedule a job.
See “Running a Job” on page 346 or “Scheduling Jobs” on page 348.
2 Enter the necessary runtime values in the Set Values section if you are running the job or on Parameters if
you are scheduling the job.
You must specify values for all ASK parameters unless you specified default values when
importing the job or unless you have a saved job parameter in the Job Parameter list.
3 Optional: To save the values as personal job parameters, click Save and enter a name for the parameters.
Output Options for Scheduling Jobs
The standard job output options are explained in “Scheduling Jobs” on page 348. Production
Reporting jobs offer additional e-mail notification options and output directory options.
E-mail Notification Options
Production Reporting jobs offers e-mail notification options.
Output Options for Scheduling Jobs
413
Figure 62
414
Email Notification Options
Email Address(es)
E-mail addresses for sending status reports; separate with semicolons, colons, space
characters, commas, or lines.
Attach job outputs to
email messages in these
formats
Format for e-mail attachments
Include Dependent Files
For including all e-mail attachment files dependent on this job
Zip Options
Zip file options:
Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs
Default: HTML
●
Do not compress attachment files—Zip file not created
●
Combine all attachments into one Zip file—Zip file contains HTML and selected
file formats
●
Combine only HTML and Graphics into Zip file—Zip file contains HTML and
selected graphic file formats
Output Directory Options
Production Reporting jobs offer output directory options.
Note: The Save to Output Directory section is displayed only if the administrator has configured an output directory.
Table 87
Output Directory Options
Output Directory
For saving job output is automatically in the directory containing the job
When you select an output directory, job output is saved to the selected directory. (Your
administrator configures the directory list.)
Save output in
these formats
For saving job output in additional formats
Include dependent
files
For including all files dependent on your job.
Status Report
For receiving all status reports
HTML is automatically generated. These options work only if you select a directory from the
list.
Default: Receive status reports only when errors occur
Email Status to
E-mail addresses for sending status reports; separate with semicolons, colons, space
characters, commas, or lines
Working with Secure Production Reporting Jobs
Secure and insecure Production Reporting jobs are handled differently. For secure jobs,
security tags are applied to report sections. The following topics explain what secure jobs are
and how their security is accomplished and protected.
If the Production Reporting programmer applies security tags to report sections, thereby
restricting access to the sections to specified users, the report is secure. Hyperion System 9 BI+
Production Reporting produces only HTML output (with images) for a secure report. For
details on programming a secure Production Reporting report, see your Production Reporting
documentation.
When a secure Production Reporting job is run, the security tags are written to the Production
Reporting. When the document is executed, each resulting HTML file is given a security tag
assuring that only users authorized to see all data in the file can see the file.
It is important to set the bursting (or demand paging) options appropriately for a secure
report, so the resulting files correspond to the way that the Production Reporting program
divided data among users. If you do not burst the Production Reporting document correctly,
security is preserved, but some users may not have access to data that they should be able to
see.
The Production Reporting document written by running a Production Reporting program can
be imported into the repository. Executing a secure document yields the same output with the
same access privileges as executing the secure job.
Working with Secure Production Reporting Jobs
415
Access Privileges on Secure Production Reporting Jobs
Access privileges on output files are derived, first, from the user’s access when the job is
executed or from the job output access privileges, if the privileges are set. Each output file may
also have an associated set of security tags. Job owners can change the access privileges on SPF
or output files. In a Production Reporting document, which contains all data, broadening
access means relaxing security on the report.
Users need all these privileges to see output files:
●
View access on the report folder
●
View access on the files
●
Access granted by the Production Reporting security tags of the output files (The access is
derived from the security tags in the code.)
Security tags are not checked when job output is deleted. Only normal access privilege
checking is performed. Thus, a job output file owner can delete the file, regardless of whether
the security tags enable the owner to view the file contents. If a secure report creates data file
through a Production Reporting OPEN statement, only the job owner has view access to the
file. The owner can relax security for the file.
Security Mode
Every item in Production Reporting has a security mode that is on or off.
The security mode for all items derived from a secure Production Reporting file is on. These
items include the Production Reporting document, all output files, the Production Reporting
ProgramOutput item, and the SPFFileOutputCollection item. If a file is secure, this
information is displayed in Properties (on the Advanced tab).
It is possible to create a secure Production Reporting program that produces secure and
nonsecure output. The Production Reporting program can be coded so that some pages are
output without security, while the rest are secure. In this case, users with access to the output
files through normal Hyperion Performance Suite access control see the nonsecure output
pages and the secure pages that they are authorized to see. The ability to create secure and
nonsecure pages within a secure Production Reporting program is governed with the
security command in Production Reporting.
You can create on replace a version of a secure report, but the security mode for the new
version and the original must match.
Recommendations for Security
Recommendations for ensuring the security of secure Production Reporting jobs and
documents in Hyperion Performance Suite:
416
●
Establish dedicated user accounts for secure Production Reporting or SPF jobs.
●
Use a dedicated account for one secure report or a group of related secure reports.
Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs
●
Ensure that secure jobs are run only from dedicated accounts.
●
Limit access to the dedicated account to as few people as possible, because everyone with
access to it can import secure jobs and access the Production Reporting document, which
contains all data.
Programmer Conventions
Hyperion System 9 BI+ Production Reporting has built-in conventions for designating security
tags to Hyperion Performance Suite users or groups. A security tag that begins with u#
represents a user. A security tag that begins with g# represents a group.
Viewing Security Information
Secure Production Reporting programs tailor their output for multiple users and restrict access
accordingly. You can determine whether a file related to the Production Reporting program is
secure by viewing its security mode.
For secure Production Reporting file and its related files, the Secure mode property is set to on.
The related files include Production Reporting output files, document collections, and
Production Reporting documents output collections.
➤ To view the security mode of a file:
1 Select the file, and Modify.
2 Open the Advanced Options section.
If the file is secure, the Security Tags Included box is checked.
Supporting Exceptions in Production Reporting or Generic
Programs
The following topics are for Production Reporting and generic report programmers, who
support exception notifications to users. (Users can receive e-mail notifications or see a graphic
indicator on the Exceptions Dashboard on personal pages.)
Production Reporting Programming
For Production Reporting programs to support exceptions, they must include these lines:
open 'output.properties' as 0 for-append record=32767:vary
write 0 from 'exception.default=on'
write 0 from 'exception.default.text=<exception text>
close 0
Supporting Exceptions in Production Reporting or Generic Programs
417
Generic Report Programming
For generic jobs or files to support exceptions. Programmers must use the Hyperion
Performance Suite API to configure exception reporting through the job output properties,
exception present and exception text.
Setting Priority on Output Programmatically
In Production Reporting programs, you can set the output as high priority. In Explore module
listings, users see the high-priority icon next to any high-priority job output or version. Users
can also sort by priority (normal or high).
To set priority to high on the output, a program writes the string rating=high-priority to
the output.properties file used by the job service. This code excerpt accomplishes this
objective:
open 'output.properties' as 0 for-append record=32767:vary
write 0 from 'rating=high-priority'
close 0
418
Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs
Chapter
16
Using Custom Parameter Forms
for Production Reporting Jobs
A Production Reporting job uses a parameter form to obtain INPUT parameter values at
runtime. This section explains how to customize parameter forms.
Note: The parameter forms are in JSP. Customizing the standard form provided with Hyperion System 9 BI+ Production
Reporting requires a working knowledge of JSP and Java.
In This Chapter
Customizing Parameter Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Parameter Form Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Standard Parameter Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Parameter Forms: Example and Tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Using Custom Parameter Forms for Production Reporting Jobs
419
Customizing Parameter Forms
By default, when you run a Production Reporting job or create or modify a parameter list,
Hyperion Foundation generates a standard form to collect parameter information. You can
customize the form. For example, some jobs may require a more sophisticated field layout, or
your organization may require certain conventions.
You can associate custom parameter forms with jobs at runtime. You run or schedule a job that
is associated with a custom form, which is displayed instead of the standard form.
A parameter form is a JSP containing input fields. Forms can also be more complex, invoking
JavaScript or an applet.
Parameter Form Process
The parameter form associated with a job or the standard form is displayed when you perform
any of these actions:
●
Select Run Job from the job shortcut menu
●
From an item list, select the job name
●
Create or modify parameter list while scheduling the job
After you submit a completed form for execution, Hyperion Foundation performs these
actions:
1. Validates parameters for which validation is defined
2. Processes the form
The form can collect parameter values and database logon information, as required by the
job. For scheduling, the form can also collect the parameter list name and description.
3. Creates or modifies the parameter list or runs the job, as applicable
4. If the job was run, retrieves and displays job output
Assigning Parameter Forms Jobs
This procedure applies only to custom parameter forms created for use in Hyperion System 9
BI+ Production Reporting.
Note: Custom parameter forms created prior to Hyperion System 9 BI+ Production Reporting are in HTML and must be
recreated as JSP forms for use with Hyperion System 9 BI+ Production Reporting.
➤ To assign a custom parameter form to a Production Reporting job:
1 In the browser, navigate to the job, and right-click the job name.
2 Select Properties from the top menu.
3 Select Custom Form, and browse to the file to use.
420
Using Custom Parameter Forms for Production Reporting Jobs
4 If your form uses additional files, such as GIFs, select Show Required Files.
5 When you finish changing form properties, click OK.
Assigning the Standard Form
After assigning a custom form to a job, you can reassign the standard form.
➤ To assign the standard form to a job:
1 In the browser, navigate to the desired Production Reporting job and right-click the job name.
2
Choose Properties.
3 Select Parameters from the top menu.
4 Select Standard Form.
5 Choose OK.
Editing Parameter Forms
Edit a custom form before you assign it to a job. To edit a form after it is assigned to a job,
download it, change it, and upload it to the repository. An edited standard form is uploaded as
a custom form.
Hyperion System 9 BI+ Production Reporting parameter forms contain JSP tags or scriptlets
that graphical HTML editors cannot display correctly. However, the tags are designed so that
you can use some graphical HTML editors to modify layouts. Before using an editor, ensure
that it does not alter code.
Using an editor to modify a parameter form requires knowledge of Hyperion System 9 BI+
Production Reporting parameter-form API and JSP tags. When editing a parameter form, keep
the scriplet code blocks together. Otherwise, it may not work correctly.
To edit a parameter form, use a nongraphical HTML editor, such as Macromedia Homesite. Be
careful not to alter the JSP tags.
➤ To edit a parameter form:
1 In the browser, navigate to the Production Reporting job, and right-click the job name.
2 Select Properties.
3 From the top menu, select parameters.
4 Select Custom Form.
5 Select Modify, select Add next to Custom Form.
6 Download the standard form, or browse your PC or the repository for a custom form.
7 If editing the standard form, specify a location for saving an editable copy, and enter a name for the new
custom form.
Customizing Parameter Forms
421
8 Edit the form locally.
See “Parameter Form Elements” on page 422.
9 Click OK to save changes.
Parameter Form Elements
You create a parameter form as an HTML file that contains special elements. Before displaying
a parameter form, Hyperion Foundation interprets and processes elements that it encounters
in the form. Typically, Hyperion Foundation processes an element by replacing it with the
value indicated by the element. For example, it replaces
<%=targetFormParameter.getJobName()%> with the job name.
Note: Parameter form elements are case sensitive.
Element Types
The main element types of parameter forms:
●
Basic
●
Conditional
●
Looping
Basic Elements
Basic elements have the form <%=(bean).getxxx()%>>.
Example: <%=targetFormParameter.getJobName()%>.
Conditional Elements
A conditional element has the standard JSP or Java conditional code:
if () {}
else {}
You can insert HTML or applicable parameter form elements between the start and end tag.
Hyperion System 9 BI+ Production Reporting evaluates whether the condition indicated by
the has Value argument is true or false. If true, the enclosed HTML is included in the
displayed form, If false, the HTML between the start and end tags is ignored.
Looping Elements
Looping elements have this form:
<getxxxLoop>
...
</getxxxLoop>.
422
Using Custom Parameter Forms for Production Reporting Jobs
An example is getParameterPickListLoop. You can insert HTML elements between the
start and end tags. When Hyperion Foundation processes the elements, it processes the loop
contents until the loop finishes. The loop termination condition depends on the element.
Required Elements
A parameter form provides required elements and elements to use if, for example, you are
setting up a parameter pick list or must access information from a database.
Required elements include elements that identify a file as a parameter form file, return
parameter information, and return the URL to use when you submit the form for processing.
Table 88.
Table 88
Required Elements
Elements
Function
setParameterAskCond(String n)
Selects the Nth ASK parameter, where n is from 1 to the total number of ASK
parameters.
getParameterFieldName()
Returns the name of the HTML form field for setting the value of the parameter selected
in ParameterInputCond or ParameterAskCond
setParameterInputCond(String n)
Selects the Nth INPUT parameter, where n is from 1 to the number of INPUT parameters
getParameterName()
Returns the current parameter name
getParameterValue()
Returns the value of the current parameter or, for a parameter list, the current value of
the parameter
The following topics show code snippets using the required elements.
Name Specification Elements
The element that follows specifies the import file name for the parameter form.
<jsp:include page=”jsp/shared/formparameterFormJavaScript.jsp'flush=true>>
Parameter List Elements
Scheduling a job requires the creation of a parameter list, which has a name and description
and contains a value for each parameter associated with the job. When scheduling a job, you
select a parameter list, which provides the set of parameters that Hyperion Foundation uses
when it runs the job.
Parameter Display Elements
The following code snippet shows the use of elements for handling parameter values. If your
form uses a parameter pick list, see the sample code at the end of this topic.
Parameter Form Elements
423
<getParameterInputCond hasValue="1">
<!-- 1st parameter -->
<!-- Name of parameter -->
<TD VALIGN="MIDDLE">
<FONT face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" size="-1">
<B><getParameterName/></B>
</FONT>
</TD>
<TD VALIGN="MIDDLE" COLSPAN="2">
<INPUT TYPE="text" NAME="<getParameterFieldName/>"
VALUE="<getParameterValue/>" SIZE="30">
</TD>
</getParameterInputCond>
The <getParameterInputCond> and <getParameterAskCond> tags select the INPUT or
ASK parameter that is used to resolve the
<getParameterName/>,<getParameterFieldName/> and <getParameterValue> tags.
You must set the hasValue argument from 1 to the number of INPUT or ASK parameters.
Nonrequired Elements
For parameter forms, you can use nonrequired and required elements.
Table 89
Nonrequired Elements
Elements
Function
getEmbedParameterValidationRoutines()
Adds the JavaScript parameter validation routines to the form
isFormUsesParameterValidationCond()
Returns true if the current job requires JavaScript validation routines
isParameterValidationCond()
Tests the current parameter for a validation function
isParameterValidationMaskCond()
Returns true if a mask is associated with the validation function of the
current parameter
resetParameterPickList()
Initializes the static or dynamic choice options of the current
parameter and prints an error message if initialization fails
isParameterMultiValuesCond()
Returns true if the parameter accepts multiple values
see getParameterType()
Returns the current parameter type number:
Text edit = 0
Drop-down list = 1
Radio button = 2
List box = 3
getParameterType()
Returns the current parameter type number:
Text edit = 0
Drop-down list = 1
Radio button = 2
List box = 3
424
Using Custom Parameter Forms for Production Reporting Jobs
Table 89
Nonrequired Elements (Continued)
Elements
Function
getParameterListPublisherDefaultsFieldName()
Returns the name of the HTML form field used for the Publisher
Defaults parameter list
processParameterPickListLoop()
Iterates through a parameter pick list values.
getPickListParameterValue()
Used within a loop construct for processParameterPickListLoop()
Returns the next value in a parameter pick list;
getParameterPickListValueSelected(String
presentationType)
Must be used within a Java loop construct. Returns "selected" if the
next value in the pick list is the current value for the parameter;
Note: You can set presentationType to "select" or "check." For
a pick list for a parameter with only a few values, you can use buttons to
display the options. In this case, setting the presentationType
to "check" returns "checked." You can use this option to indicate which
option is the current value for the parameter
getParameterValidationMask()
Returns the mask associated with the current parameter of the
validation function
getParameterValidationName()
Returns the name of the current parameter of the validation function
getPublisherDefaultsParameterValue()
Returns the value of the current parameter in the Publisher Defaults
parameter list
isRequiredParameterCond()
Returns true if the current parameter is required
getSaveDefaultsCheckboxFieldName()
Returns the name of the HTML form field that represents the “save
default” box
isShowFormsParameterListCond()
Determines whether to display parameter lists
isShowFormsSaveMyDefaultsCond()
Determines whether the publisher selected “save as my defaults”
isShowParameterListPublisherDefaultsCond()
Returns true if the job is configured to display Publisher Defaults
Standard Parameter Form
The standard parameter form for Hyperion System 9 BI+ Production Reporting is in JSP.
Notice the required import tags in the standard form example. A JavaBeanIFormParameter
View statement is used to access all form APIs to obtain information regarding the form
parameter list.
Note: You can create a custom parameter form by modifying the standard form. Java and JSP can be leveraged to
enhance the form.
Standard Parameter Form Example
<%@ include file=”/jsp/shared/common.inc”%>
Standard Parameter Form
425
<%@ page import=”com.brio.one.web.ui.JSPUtility, com.brio.one.web.browser.ui.*,
com.brio.one.web.ui.config.*, java.util.*”%>
<jsp:useBean id=”targetFormParameter” scope=”request”
type=”com.brio.one.web.ui.IFormParameterView”/>
<!-This template is used for these purposes:
1) Run a job that requires parameters or database user information
2) Create a parameter list for a job
3) Edit a parameter list for a job
This template is used when there is no custom ONE/SmartForm associated with the job.
-->
<jsp:include page=”/jsp/shared/form/parameterFormJavaScript.jsp” flush=”true”/>
<TABLE border=”0” width=”98%” cellpadding=”0” cellspacing=”0”>
<TR>
<TD WIDTH=”45”><IMG <%=imgLocator.getSrcAltAttribute(request, “space.gif”)%>
WIDTH=”45” HEIGHT=”1” ALT=””></TD>
<TD WIDTH=”15”></TD>
<TD WIDTH=”160”><IMG <%=imgLocator.getSrcAltAttribute(request,
“space.gif”)%> WIDTH=”160” HEIGHT=”1” ALT=””></TD>
<TD WIDTH=”100%”><IMG <%=imgLocator.getSrcAltAttribute(request,
“space.gif”)%> WIDTH=”10” HEIGHT=”1” ALT=””></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD COLSPAN=”4”><IMG <%=imgLocator.getSrcAltAttribute(request,
“space.gif”)%> WIDTH=”45” HEIGHT=”12” BORDER=”0” ALT=””></TD>
</TR>
<!-- Start Display of Parameters -->
<%
if (targetFormParameter.isParameterCond()) {
// initialize the parameter loop
targetFormParameter.resetParameterLoop();
while (targetFormParameter.processParameterLoop()) {
if (!targetFormParameter.isParameterHiddenCond()) {%>
<TR>
<TD><IMG <%=imgLocator.getSrcAltAttribute(request,
“space.gif”)%> WIDTH=”45” HEIGHT=”5” BORDER=”0” ALT=””></TD>
<TD VALIGN=”middle” COLSPAN=”3”><IMG
<%=imgLocator.getSrcAltAttribute(request, “space.gif”)%> width=”20” height=”5”
ALT=””></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD COLSPAN=”2”><IMG <%=imgLocator.getSrcAltAttribute(request,
“space.gif”)%> WIDTH=”45” HEIGHT=”12” BORDER=”0” ALT=””></TD>
<!-- Name of parameter -->
<TD VALIGN=”MIDDLE”
class=”SystemDataText”><%=targetFormParameter.getParameterName()%>:</TD>
<TD VALIGN=”MIDDLE” COLSPAN=”2”>
<%
int type = targetFormParameter.getParameterType();
if (type == targetFormParameter.TEXT_EDIT) {%>
<INPUT TYPE=”text” CLASS=”Inputfield” onchange=”onParamChange()”
NAME=”<%=targetFormParameter.getParameterFieldName()%>”
VALUE=”<%=targetFormParameter.getParameterValue()%>” SIZE=”30”><%
426
Using Custom Parameter Forms for Production Reporting Jobs
}
if (type == targetFormParameter.DROPDOWN_LIST) {
targetFormParameter.resetParameterPickList(); %>
<SELECT class=”DataFrameDrop”
NAME=”<%=targetFormParameter.getParameterFieldName()%>” onchange=”onParamChange()”
><%
if (!targetFormParameter.isRequiredParameterCond()) {%>
<OPTION VALUE=””></OPTION><%
}
while (targetFormParameter.processParameterPickListLoop()) {%>
<OPTION VALUE=”<%=targetFormParameter.getPickListParameterValue()%>”
<%=targetFormParameter.getParameterPickListValueSelected(“select”)%>>
<%=targetFormParameter.getHTMLEscapedCurrentPickListParameterValue()%> </OPTION> <%
}%>
</SELECT><%
}
if (type == targetFormParameter.LIST_BOX) {
targetFormParameter.resetParameterPickList();
if (targetFormParameter.isParameterMultiValuesCond()) {%>
<SELECT class=”DataFrameDrop”
NAME=”<%=targetFormParameter.getParameterFieldName()%>” onchange=”onParamChange()”
multiple size=”5”><%
} else {%>
<SELECT class=”DataFrameDrop”
NAME=”<%=targetFormParameter.getParameterFieldName()%>” onchange=”onParamChange()”
size = “5”><%
}
if (!targetFormParameter.isRequiredParameterCond()) {%>
<OPTION VALUE=””></OPTION><%
}
while (targetFormParameter.processParameterPickListLoop()) {%>
<OPTION VALUE=”<%=targetFormParameter.getPickListParameterValue()%>”
<%=targetFormParameter.getParameterPickListValueSelected(“select”)%>>
<%=targetFormParameter.getHTMLEscapedCurrentPickListParameterValue()%> </OPTION><%
}%>
</SELECT><%
}
if (type == targetFormParameter.RADIO_BUTTONS) {
targetFormParameter.resetParameterPickList();
if (!targetFormParameter.isRequiredParameterCond()) { %>
<input type=”Radio” class=”RadioButton” onchange=”onParamChange()”
name=”<%=targetFormParameter.getParameterFieldName()%>” value=”” checked><span
class=”RadioButtonText”>No Selection Made</span><br><%
}
Standard Parameter Form
427
while (targetFormParameter.processParameterPickListLoop()) {%>
<input type=”Radio” class=”RadioButton” onchange=”onParamChange()”
name=”<%=targetFormParameter.getParameterFieldName()%>”
value=”<%=targetFormParameter.getPickListParameterValue()%>”
<%=targetFormParameter.getParameterPickListValueSelected(“check”)%>><span
class=”RadioButtonText”><%=targetFormParameter.getPickListParameterValue()%></span><b
r><%
}
}
%>
<TD VALIGN=”TOP” COLSPAN=”2”></TR><%
}
if (targetFormParameter.isParameterHiddenCond()) {%>
<INPUT TYPE=”hidden”
NAME=”<%=targetFormParameter.getParameterFieldName()%>”
VALUE=”<%=targetFormParameter.getParameterValue()%>”><%
}
}
}
%>
<TR>
<TD COLSPAN=”4”><IMG <%=imgLocator.getSrcAltAttribute(request,
“space.gif”)%> WIDTH=”45” HEIGHT=”12” BORDER=”0” ALT=””></TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
All form parameter APIs are directly accessed through the Java bean; for example:
targetFormParameter.getParameterHame()
Use Java scriptlet tags to run Java code blocks within the tags.; for example:
<% String start=”abc”;%>
Use a JSP expression embedded in HTML to resolve variables to values at runtime; for
example:
<HTML>
<BODY>
The start of the alphabet is <%=start%>
</BODY>
</HTML>
Parameter form information can also be accessed through the parameter form APIs. This
example resolves the current value of the parameter name and display the name in the form:
<%=targetFormParameter.getParameterValue()%>
428
Using Custom Parameter Forms for Production Reporting Jobs
Parameter Forms: Example and Tip
The following code snippet shows tag use for parameter pick lists.
<!-- Parameter Pick List example -->
<%
if (targetForm.setParameterInputCond("1")) {%>
<SELECT NAME="<%=targetFormParameter.getParameterFieldName()%>"><%
targetFormParameter.restParameterPickList();
while(targetFormParameter.processParameterPickListLoop() {%>
<OPTION VALUE="<%=targetFormParameter.getParameterPickListValue()%>"
<%=targetFormParameter.getParameterPickListValueSelected("select")%>><%=targetFormPar
ameter.getParameterPickListValue()%>
</OPTION>
}%>
</SELECT><%
}
%>
Custom form can import JSPs and thus become more modular. For example, the standard
form example, includes a jsp include tag. The <jsp:include> tag is a standard JSP tag:
<jsp:includpage=”/jsp/shared/form/parameterFormJavaScript.jsp”
flush=”true”/>
The preceding example causes the parameterFormJavaScript.jsp file to be imported
and executed with the standard form. Custom forms that include context, such as images, must
be defined in the required files section.
Parameter Forms: Example and Tip
429
430
Using Custom Parameter Forms for Production Reporting Jobs
Glossary
access control A security mechanism that manages a
user’s privileges or permissions for viewing, modifying,
and importing files or system resources.
access privileges The level of access-for example, view,
modify, run, full control-that the importer of an item
grants to others.
accountability map A visual, hierarchical representation
of the responsibility, reporting, and dependency structure
of your organization. An Accountability map depicts how
each accountability team in your organization interacts to
achieve strategic goals. An accountability team is also
known as a critical business area (team, department, office,
and so on.
action A task or group of tasks executed to achieve one or
more strategic objectives. In a Hyperion Performance
Scorecard application, each action box represents an
activity or task that helps to accomplish a strategic
objective. Each action is usually assigned measures.
actions Job output definitions for an Interactive
Reporting job is defined in terms of a series of actions.
aggregate cell A cell comprising several cells. For example,
a data cell that uses Children(Year) expands to four cells
containing Quarter 1, Quarter 2, Quarter 3, and Quarter 4
data.
aggregate limit A limit placed on an aggregated request
line item or aggregated metatopic item.
alias An alternative name.
Analysis Server Web Analysis Server. An application
server program that distributes report information and
enables Web client communication with data sources.
Analyze The main Web Analysis interface for analysis,
presentation and reporting.
appender A Log4j term for destination.
application A program running within a system.
application server A middle-tier server that is used to
deploy and run Web-based application processes.
asymmetric analysis A report characterized by groups of
members that differ by at least one member across groups.
The number and names of members can differ.
active group A group that is entitled to access the system.
active service A service whose Run Type is set to Start
rather than Hold.
active user A user who is entitled to access the system.
active user/user group The user or user group identified
as the current user by user preferences. Determines default
user preferences, dynamic options, access, and file
permissions. You can set the active user to your user ID or
any user group to which you belong.
adaptive states Interactive Reporting level of permission.
There are six levels of permission: view only, view and
process, analyze, analyze and process, query and process,
and datamodel and analyze.
attribute Characteristics of dimension members that are
not stored in the data source but calculated on demand.
You can select, group, or calculate members that have a
specified attribute. For example, an Employee Number
dimension member may have attributes of Name, Age, or
Address.
attribute dimension A type of dimension that enables
analysis based on the attributes or qualities of dimension
members.
authentication service A core service that manages one
authentication system.
Glossary
431
authentication service repository (ASR) A database that
contains a complete model of users/groups in an external
system.
calculation script A set of instructions telling Hyperion
Essbase how to aggregate and extrapolate the values of a
database.
authentication system A security measure designed to
validate and manage users and groups.
Catalog pane A pane displaying a list of elements available
to the active section. For example, if Query is the active
section, the Catalog pane displays a list of database tables.
If Pivot is the active section, the Catalog pane displays a list
of results columns. If Dashboard is the active section, the
Catalog pane displays a list of embeddable sections,
graphic tools, and control tools.
axis A two-dimensional report aspect used to arrange and
relate multidimensional data, such as filters, pages, rows,
and columns.
bar chart A chart that can consist of one to 50 data sets,
with any number of values assigned to each data set. Data
sets are displayed as groups of corresponding bars, stacked
bars, or individual bars in separate rows.
batch POV A collection of all the dimensions on the user
POV of every report and book in the batch. While
scheduling the batch, you can set the members selected on
the batch POV.
book A container that holds a group of similar Financial
Reporting documents. Books may specify dimension
sections or dimension changes.
book POV The dimension members for which a book is
run. A book is a collection of Financial Reporting
documents that may have dimensions on the User POV.
Any dimension on a report’s user POV is added to the
book POV and defined there. The member for a
dimension on the book POV can be one of the following
items: (a) User POV. This means the member is set by the
end user just before the book is run. (b) A specific
member. If a specific member is chosen, then the selection
is stored in the book definition and can only be altered in
the Book Editor. (c) A set of member selections. A
dimension left on the user POV of a report may be iterated
over within the book. For example, a report may be run for
four entities within one book.
bookmark A link to a reporting document or a Web site,
displayed on a personal page of a user. The two types of
bookmarks are My Bookmarks and image bookmarks.
bounding rectangle The perimeter that encapsulates the
Interactive Reporting document content when embedding
Interactive Reporting document sections in a personal
page. It is required by the Interactive Reporting to generate
HTML and is specified in pixels for height and width or
row per page.
calculation The process of aggregating data, or of running
a calculation script on a database.
432
Glossary
categories Groupings by which data is organized (for
example, month).
cause and effect map A map that depicts how the
elements that form your corporate strategy are interrelated
and how they work together to meet your organization’s
strategic goals. A Cause and Effect map tab is
automatically created for each of your Strategy maps.
cell A unit of data representing the intersection of
dimensions in a multidimensional database; the
intersection of a row and a column in a worksheet.
chart A graphical representation of spreadsheet data. The
visual nature of charts expedites analysis, color-coding,
and visual cues that aid comparisons. There are many
different chart types.
chart cell value Appears in the lower right corner of a
chart on pages in the Monitor and Investigate Sections.
The Editor defines the chart cell value that you see in
Enterprise Metrics. The chart cell value might display a
metric on the chart, such as Booking $, or a calculation
based on the metrics displayed on the chart, such as ratio
of Booking $ to Forecast $.
chart column Enterprise Metrics Detail charts are
displayed in columns below each Summary chart.
Chart section With a varied selection of chart types, and a
complete arsenal of OLAP tools like group and drill-down,
the Chart section is built to support simultaneous graphic
reporting and ad hoc analysis.
Chart Spotlighter A feature that enables you to color-code
charts based on some condition in Interactive Reporting
Studio.
chart template A template that defines the metrics to
display in Workspace charts.
child A member that has a parent above it in the database
outline.
choice list A list of members that a report designer can
specify for each dimension when defining the report’s
point of view. A user who wants to change the point of
view for a dimension that uses a choice list can select only
the members specified in that defined member list or those
members that meet the criteria defined in the function for
the dynamic list.
client A client interface, such as Web Analysis Studio or a
workstation on a local area network.
clustered bar charts Charts in which categories are viewed
side-by-side within a given category; useful for side-byside category analysis. Clustering is only done with vertical
bar charts.
column A vertical display of information in a grid or
table. A column can contain data from a single field,
derived data from a calculation, or textual information.
column heading A part of a report that lists members
across a page. When columns are defined that report on
data from more than one dimension, nested column
headings are produced. A member that is listed in a
column heading is an attribute of all data values in its
column.
computed item A virtual column (as opposed to a column
that is physically stored in the database or cube) that can
be calculated by the database during a query, or by
Interactive Reporting Studio in the Results section.
Computer items are calculations of new data based on
functions, data items, and operators provided in the dialog
box and can be included in reports or reused to calculate
other data.
connection file A file used to connect to a data source.
console The console is displayed on the left side of the
Enterprise Metrics workspace. The console is context
sensitive, depending on the page displayed.
content Information stored in the repository for any type
of file.
content area The Contents pane appears on the right side
of the Workspace and provides specific information for the
page that you are using.
cookie A small piece of information placed on your
computer by a Web site.
correlated subqueries Subqueries that are evaluated once
for every row in the parent query. A correlated subquery is
created by joining a topic item in the subquery with one of
the topic items in the parent query.
critical business area (CBA) An individual or a group
organized into a division, region, plant, cost center, profit
center, project team, or process; also called accountability
team or business area.
critical success factor (CSF) A capability that must be
established and sustained to achieve a strategic objective. A
CSF is owned by a strategic objective or a critical process
and is a parent to one or more actions.
cube The query result set from a multidimensional
(OLAP) data source; a logically organized subset of OLAP
database dimensions and members.
custom calendar Any calendar created by an
administrator.
custom report A complex report from the Design Report
module, composed of any combination of components.
cycle A Interactive Reporting job parameter that is used
when scheduled Interactive Reporting jobs need to process
and produce different job output with one job run.
Dashboard A collection of metrics and indicators that
provide an interactive summary of your business.
Dashboards enable you to build and deploy analytic
applications.
Dashboard Home A button that returns you to the
Dashboard section designated as the Dashboard Home
section. If you have only one Dashboard section,
Dashboard Home returns to that section. If you have
several Dashboard sections, the default Dashboard Home
is the top Dashboard section in the Catalog pane. In
Design mode, you can specify another Dashboard section
to be the Dashboard Home section.
data The values (monetary or non-monetary) associated
with the query intersection.
data function A function that computes aggregate values
including averages, maximums, counts, and other
statistics, that summarize groupings of data. You can use
data functions to aggregate and to compute data from the
server before it reaches the Results section, or compute
different statistics for aggregated totals and items in the
other analysis sections.
Glossary
433
data layout The data layout interface is used to edit a
query, arrange dimensions, make alternative dimension
member selections, or specify query options for the
current section or data object.
data model Any method of visualizing the informational
needs of a system.
data object A report component that displays the query
result set. The display type of a single conventional data
object can be set to spreadsheet, chart, or pinboard, and it
displays OLAP query result sets. A SQL spreadsheet data
object displays the result set of a SQL query, and the freeform grid data object displays the result set of any data
source included in it.
data source 1. A data storage application. Varieties include
multidimensional databases, relational databases, and files.
2. A named client-side object connecting report
components to databases. Data source properties include
database connections and queries.
database A repository within Essbase Analytics that
contains a multidimensional data storage array. Each
database consists of a storage structure definition
(outline), data, security definitions, and optional scripts.
database connection A file that stores definitions and
properties used to connect to data sources. Database
connections enable database references to be portable and
widely used.
database function A predefined formula in a database.
default folder A user’s home folder.
descendant Any member below a parent in the database
outline. For example, in a dimension that includes years,
quarters, and months, the members Qtr2 and April are
descendants of the member Year.
Design Report An interface in Web Analysis Studio for
designing custom reports, from a library of components.
Desktop An interface that presents the icons to open
items.
detail chart A chart that provides the detailed information
that you see in a Summary chart. Detail charts appear in
the Investigate Section in columns below the Summary
charts. For example, if the Summary chart shows a Pie
chart, then the Detail charts below represent each piece of
the pie.
434
Glossary
dimension A data category used to organize business data
for retrieval and preservation of values. Each dimension
usually contains a hierarchy of related members grouped
within it. For example, a Year dimension often includes
members for each time period, such as quarters and
months.
dimension tab In the Pivot section, the tab that enables
you to pivot data between rows and columns.
dimension table 1. A table that includes numerous
attributes about a specific business process. 2. In
Enterprise Metrics, a table in a star schema with a single
part primary key.
display type One of three Web Analysis formats saved to
the repository: spreadsheet, chart, and pinboard.
dog-ear The flipped page corner in the upper right corner
of the chart header area. You can click the dog-ear to
display a shortcut menu. The dog-ear is displayed only on
charts in the Investigate Section.
drill Allows you to investigate results reflected by a chart
in the Investigate Section. You can click a chart that
hyperlinks to a lower (more detailed) level in the
Investigate Section. This concept is called “drilling.”
drill anywhere A feature that enables you to drill into and
add items to pivot reports residing in the Results section
without returning to the Query section or trying to locate
the item in the Catalog pane. Drill Anywhere items are
broken out as new pivot label items.
drill target The data to which you are drilling. Specifying
a drill target automatically creates a hyperlink enabling you
to click the chart to obtain additional detail.
drill to detail A feature that enables you to retrieve items
from a data model that are not in the Results section
without rerunning the original query. This feature
provides the ability to query the database interactively and
filter the data that is returned. Drill-to-detail sets a limit on
the query based on your selection and adds the returned
value as a new pivot label item automatically.
drill-down Navigation through the query result set using
the organization of the dimensional hierarchy. Drilling
down moves the user perspective from general aggregated
data to more detailed data. While default drill down
typically refers to parent-child navigation, drilling can be
customized to use other dimension member relationships.
For example, drilling down can reveal the hierarchical
relationships between year and quarters or between
quarter and months.
drill-through The navigation from a data value in one
cube to corresponding data in another cube. For example,
you can access context-sensitive transactional data. Drill
through occurs usually from the lowest point of atomicity
in a database (detail) to a next level of detail in an external
data source.
dynamic report A report containing current data. A
report becomes a dynamic report when you run it.
Edit Data An interface for changing data values and
sending edits back to Essbase Analytics.
employee Users responsible for, or associated with,
specific business objects. Employees do not necessarily
work for an organization, such as an analyst or consultant.
An employee must be associated with a user account for
authorization purposes.
ending period The ending chart period allows you to
adjust the date range shown in the chart. For example, an
ending period of “month” produces a chart that shows
information through the end of the current month.
exceptions Values that satisfy predefined conditions. You
can define formatting indicators or notify subscribing
users when an exception has been generated.
external authentication Logging on to Hyperion
applications by means of user information stored outside
the application, typically in a corporate authentication
provider such as LDAP or Microsoft Windows NTLM.
externally triggered events Non-time-based events that
are used to schedule job runs.
Extract, Transform, and Load Data source-specific
programs that are used to extract and migrate data to an
application.
extrapolation A means of showing projected figures.
Extrapolation from the current date to the end of the
current period is displayed on Enterprise Metrics charts
with a white area of the bar. If a line chart shows
extrapolation, the line that is extrapolated is dotted.
fact table The central table in a star join schema,
characterized by a foreign key and elements drawn from a
dimension table. This table typically contains numeric
data that can be related to all other tables in the schema.
filter A filter is used to limit data. While every dimension
in the cube must participate in every intersection, you can
make filter selections that focus the intersections on a
smaller portion of the cube. For example, in Interactive
Reporting Studio use a filter to exclude certain tables or
data values. In Enterprise Metrics Studio implement a
filter by adding a where clause on a join statement.
folder A file that contains other files for the purpose of
ordering and structuring a hierarchy.
footer The text or images that are displayed at the bottom
of each page in a report. A footer can contain a page
number, date, company logo, document title or file name,
author name, and so on. Footers can contain dynamic
functions as well as static text.
format The visual characteristics of a document or a
report object.
free-form grid A data object that present OLAP,
relational, and manually entered data together and enables
you to leverage all these data sources in integrated dynamic
calculations.
generic jobs Jobs that are neither Production Reporting
nor Interactive Reporting jobs.
grid POV A means for specifying members for a
dimension on a grid without placing the dimension on the
row, column, or page intersection. A report designer can
set the POV values at the grid level, preventing the user
POV from affecting that particular grid. If a dimension has
only one value for the entire grid, the dimension should be
put into the grid POV instead of the row, column, or page.
group A construct that enables the assignment of users
with similar system access requirements.
Glossary
435
grouping columns A feature in the Results and Table
sections that creates a new column in a dataset by grouping
data from an already existing column. Grouping columns
consolidate nonnumeric data values into more general
group values and map the group values to a new column in
the dataset.
header The text or images that are displayed at the top of
each page in a report. A header can contain a page number,
date, company logo, document title or file name, author
name, and so on. Headers can contain dynamic functions
as well as static text.
highlighting Depending on your configuration, you may
see highlighting applied to a chart cell value or ZoomChart
detail values. A value can be highlighted in red (indicating
the value is bad), yellow (indicating that the value is a
warning), or green (indicating the value is good).
Interactive Reporting document sections Divisions of a
Interactive Reporting document that are used to display
and analyze information in different formats (such as
Chart section and Pivot section).
Interactive Reporting files or jobs Files created by
Interactive Reporting and published into the repository as
files or as jobs. Files and jobs have different capabilities.
intersection A unit of data representing the intersection of
dimensions in a multidimensional database; also, a
worksheet cell.
Java Database Connectivity A client-server
communication protocol used by Java based clients and
relational databases. The JDBC interface provides a calllevel API for SQL-based database access.
job output Files or reports produced from running a job.
host A server on which applications and services are
installed.
job parameters The compile time and runtime values
necessary to run a job.
host properties Properties pertaining to a host, or if the
host has multiple Install_Homes, to an Install_Home. The
host properties are configured from the LSC.
job parameters Reusable, named job parameters that are
accessible only to the user who created them.
hyperlink A link to a file, Web page, or an HTML page on
an intranet.
Hypertext Markup Language A programming language
of tags that specify how Web browsers display data.
image bookmarks Graphic links to Web personal pages or
repository items.
implied share A member with only one child, or a
member with multiple children of which only one child is
consolidated. For this reason the parent and child share the
same value.
inactive group A group that cannot access the system
because an administrator has inactivated it.
inactive service A service that has been placed on hold or
excluded from the list of services to be started.
inactive user A user who cannot access the system because
an administrator has inactivated the user account.
Install_Home A variable name for the path and directory
where Hyperion applications are installed. Refers to a
single instance of a Hyperion application when multiple
applications have been installed on the same machine.
436
Glossary
jobs A collection of documents that have special
properties and can be executed to generate output. A job
can contain Interactive Reporting documents, Production
Reporting documents or generic documents.
join A link between two relational database tables based
on common content in a column or record or a relational
database concept indicating a link between two topics. A
join typically occurs between identical or similar items
within different topics. Joins enable row records in
different tables to be linked on the basis of shared
information in a column field. For example, a row record
in the Customer table is joined to a related record in the
Orders table when the Customer ID value for the record is
the same in each table. This enables the order record to be
linked with the record of the customer who placed the
order. If you request items from unjoined topics, the
database server has no way to correlate the information
between the two tables and leads to awkward datasets and
run-on queries.
join path A predetermined join configuration for a data
model. Administrators create join paths for users to select
the type of data model needed in a user-friendly prompt
upon processing a query. Join paths ensure that the correct
tables in a complex data model are used in a query.
JSP Java Server Pages
layer Stack a single object in relative position (sends back
and front, or brings forward or backward) to other objects.
legend box An informative box containing color-keyed
labels to identify the data categories of a given dimension.
level A hierarchical layer within the database outline or
tree structure.
line chart A chart that displays one to 50 data sets, with
automatic, uniform spacing along the X-axis. Each data set
is rendered by a line. A line chart can optionally shows
each line set stacked on the preceding ones, using either
the absolute value or a normalized value from 0 to 100
percent.
link Link files are fixed references to a specific object in
the repository. Links can reference folders, files, shortcuts,
and other links using unique identifiers. Links present
their targets in the current folder, regardless of where the
targets are located or how the targets are renamed.
linked data model Documents that are linked to a master
copy in a repository. When changes are made to the
master, users are automatically updated with the changes
when they connect their duplicate copy to the database.
linked reporting object A cell-based link to an external
file in the Analytic Services database. Linked reporting
objects can be cell notes, URLs, or files that contain text,
audio, video, or pictures. Note that support of Analytic
Services LROs in Financial Reporting applies only to cell
notes at this time (by way of Cell Text functions).
local report object A report object that is not linked to a
Financial Reporting report object in Explorer.
local results Results of other queries within the same data
model. These results can be dragged into the data model to
be used in local joins. Local results are displayed in the
catalog when requested.
locked data model Data models that cannot be modified
by a user.
logger Log4j term for where the logging message
originates; The class or component of the system in which
a log message originated.
LSC services The services that are configured with the
Local Service Configurator. They include Global Services
Manager (GSM), Local Services Manager (LSM), Session
Manager, Authentication Service, Authorization Service,
Publisher Service, and in some contexts, Data Access
Service (DAS) and Interactive Reporting Service.
Map Navigator A feature that displays your current
position on a Strategy, Accountability or Cause and Effect
map. Your current position is indicated by a red outline on
the Map Navigator.
master data model A data model that exists
independently and has multiple queries that reference it as
a source. When you use a master data model, the text
“Locked Data Model” is displayed in the Content pane of
the Query section. This means that the data model is
linked to the master data model displayed in the Data
Model section, which may be hidden by an administrator.
MDX (multidimensional expression) The language used
to give instructions to OLE DB for OLAP- compliant
databases (MS Plato), as SQL is the language used for
relational databases. When you build the OLAPQuery
section’s Outliner, Intelligence Clients translate your
requests into MDX instructions. When you process the
query, MDX is sent to the database server. The server
returns a collection of records to your desktop that answer
your query.
measures Numeric values in an OLAP database cube that
are available for analysis. Measures may be margin, cost of
goods sold, unit sales, budget amount, and so on.
member A discrete component within a dimension. A
member identifies and differentiates the organization of
similar units. For example, a time dimension might
include such members as Jan, Feb, and Qtr1.
member list A named group that references members,
functions, or other member lists within a dimension. A
member list can be system- or user-defined.
metadata A set of data that defines and describes the
properties and attributes of the data stored in a database or
used by an application. Examples of metadata are
dimension names, member names, properties, time
periods, and security.
Glossary
437
metric A numeric measurement computed from your
business data. Metrics help you assess the performance of
your business and analyze trends in your company. For
immediate and intuitive understanding, Enterprise
Metrics metrics display visually in charts.
MIME Type (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension) An
attribute that describes the format of data in an item, so
that the system knows which application to launch to open
the object. A file’s mime type is determined either by the
file extension or the HTTP header. Plug-ins tell browsers
what mime types they support and what file extensions
correspond to each mime type.
minireport A minireport is a component of a report, and
includes layout, content, hyperlinks, and the actual query
or queries to load the report. Each report can include one
or more minireports.
missing data A marker indicating that data in the labeled
location either does not exist, contains no meaningful
value, or was never entered.
model In Shared Services, a file or string of content
containing an application-specific representation of data.
Models are the basic data managed by Shared Services.
Models are of two types: dimensional hierarchies, and
nondimensional application objects. Dimensional
hierarchies include information such as entities and
accounts. Nondimensional application objects include
security files, member lists, calculation scripts, and web
forms.
multidimensional database A method of organizing,
storing, and referencing data through three or more
dimensions. An individual value is the intersection of a
point for a set of dimensions.
multithreading A client-server process that enables
multiple users to work on the same applications without
interfering with each other.
native authentication The process of authenticating a user
ID and password from within the server or application.
note Additional information associated with a box,
measure, scorecard or map element.
null value A value that is absent of data. Null values are
not equal to zero.
OLAPQuery section A document section that analyzes
and interacts with data stored in an OLAP cube. When you
use Intelligence Clients to connect to an OLAP cube, the
document immediately opens an OLAPQuery section. The
OLAPQuery section displays the structure of the cube as a
hierarchical tree in the Catalog pane.
online analytical processing (OLAP) A
multidimensional, multiuser, client-server computing
environment for users who analyze consolidated enterprise
data in real time. OLAP systems feature drill-down, data
pivoting, complex calculations, trend analysis, and
modeling.
Open Catalog Extension Files (OCE) files Files that
encapsulate database connection information. OCE files
specify the database API (ODBC, SQL*Net, etc.), database
software, the network address of the database server, and
your database username. Administrators create and
publish OCE files.
origin The intersection of two axes.
page A display of information in a grid or table often
represented by the Z-axis. A page can contain data from a
single field, derived data from a calculation, or text.
page member A member that is displayed on the page
axis.
palette A JASC compliant file with an extension of PAL.
Each palette contains 16 colors that complement each
other and can be used to set the color elements of a
dashboard.
performance indicator An image file used to represent
measure and scorecard performance based on a range you
specify; also called a status symbol. You can use the default
performance indicators or create an unlimited number of
your own.
period A time interval that is displayed along the x-axis of
a chart. Periods might be days, weeks, months, quarters or
years.
personal pages Your personal window to information in
the repository. You select what information to display, as
well as its layout and colors.
personal recurring time events Reusable time events that
are accessible only to the user who created them.
personal variable A named selection statement of
complex member selections.
438
Glossary
perspective A category used to group measures on a
scorecard or strategic objectives within an application. A
perspective can represent a key stakeholder (such as a
customer, employee, or shareholder/financial) or a key
competency area (such as time, cost, or quality).
pie chart A chart that shows one data set segmented in a
pie formation.
pinboard One of the three data object display types.
Pinboards are graphics, composed of backgrounds and
interactive icons called pins. Pinboards require traffic
lighting definitions.
pins Interactive icons placed on graphic reports called
pinboards. Pins are dynamic. They can change images and
traffic lighting color based on the underlying data values
and analysis tools criteria.
plot area The area bounded by the X, Y, and Z axes; For
pie charts, the rectangular area immediately surrounding
the pie.
predefined drill paths Paths that enable you to drill
directly to the next level of detail, as defined in the data
model.
presentation A playlist of Web Analysis documents.
Playlists enable reports to be grouped, organized, ordered,
distributed, and reviewed. Presentations are not reports
copied into a set. A presentation is a list of pointers
referencing reports in the repository.
primary measure A high-priority measure that is more
important to your company and business needs than many
other measures. Primary measures are displayed in the
Contents frame and have Performance reports.
private application An application for the exclusive use of
an product to store and manage Shared Services models. A
private application is created for a product during the
registration process.
Production Reporting A specialized programming
language for data access, data manipulation, and creating
Production Reporting documents.
property Characteristics of an object, such as size, color,
type.
proxy server A server that acts as an intermediary between
a workstation user and the Internet to ensure security.
public job parameters Reusable, named job parameters
created by an administrator and accessible to users who
have the requisite access privileges.
public recurring time events Reusable time events created
by an administrator and accessible through the access
control system.
range A set of values that includes an upper and lower
limit, and the values that fall between the limits. A range
can consist of numbers, amounts, or dates.
reconfigure URL URL used to reload servlet
configuration settings dynamically when a user is already
logged in to the Workspace.
recurring time event An event that specifies a starting
point and the frequency for running a job.
relational database A database that stores its information
in tables related or joined to each other by common pieces
of information called keys. Tables are subdivided into
column fields that contain related information. Column
fields have parents and children. For example, the
Customer table may have columns including Name,
Address, and ID number. Each table contains row records
that describe information about a singular entity, object,
or event, such as a person, product, or transaction. Row
records are segmented by column fields. Rows contain the
data that you retrieve from the database. Database tables
are linked by Joins. (See also join.)
report footer See footer.
report header See header.
report object A basic element in report designs. Report
objects have specific properties that define their behavior
or appearance. Report objects include text boxes, grids,
images, and charts.
Reports section A dynamic, analytical report writer, that
provides users with complex report layouts and easy-touse report-building tools. Pivot tables and charts can be
embedded in a report. The report structure is divided into
group headers and body areas, with each body area
containing a table of data. Tables are created with
dimension columns and fact columns. These tables are
elastic structures. Multiple tables can be ported into each
band, each originating from the same or different result
sets.
Glossary
439
request line A line that holds the list of items requested
from the database server and that will appear in the user’s
results.
score The level at which specified targets are being
achieved. It is usually expressed as a percentage of the
target for a given time period.
request line items Columns listed in the request line.
scorecard Business Object used to represent the progress
of an employee, strategy element, or accountability
element toward specific goals. Scorecards ascertain this
progress based on the data collected for each measure and
child scorecard you add to the scorecard.
resources Objects or services that the system manages.
Examples of a resource include a role, user, group, file, job,
publisher service, and so on.
result A value that an application collects for measures. If
you have the required permissions, you can use the Result
Collection report to enter or modify measure results.
result frequency The algorithm used to create a set of
dates for either the collection of data (collection
frequency) or the display of data (result frequency). The
result frequency’s algorithm is defined by: Major type (for
example, weekly, monthly, and so on.) Minor type (for
example, first, last, last Friday, 5th day of period, and so
on.) Interval (for example, every one, every two, every 5,
and so on.)
Results section A section in an Interactive Reporting
document that contains the dataset derived from a query.
Data is massaged in the Results section for use in the
report sections.
role A construct that defines the access privileges granted
in order to perform a business function; for example, the
job publisher role grants the privilege to run or import a
job.
row heading A report heading that lists members down a
report page. The members are listed under their respective
row names.
RSC services The services that are configured with the
Remote Service Configurator. They include Repository
Service, Service Broker, Name Service, Event Service, and
Job Service.
scale The range of values on the Y axis of a chart.
scale code Specification of how an individual metric or
minireport field is scaled. It may be displayed in
thousands, or multiplied by 100 in conjunction with a
percent format.
schedule Specify the job that you want to run as well as
the time and job parameter list for running the job.
440
Glossary
scorecard report A report that presents the results and
detailed information about scorecards attached to
employees, strategy elements, and accountability elements.
secondary measure A low-priority measure that is less
important to you than primary measures. Secondary
measures do not have Performance reports but can be used
on scorecards and to create dimension measure templates.
Section pane Lists all the sections that are available in the
current Intelligence Client document.
security agent A Web access management solutions
provider employed by companies to protect Web
resources; also known as Web security agent. The Netegrity
SiteMinder product is an example of a security agent.
security platform A framework enabling Hyperion
applications to use external authentication and single signon using the security platform driver.
security rights Rights defined by a user’s data access
permissions and activity-level privileges as explicitly
defined for a user and as inherited from other user groups.
services Resources that provide the ability to retrieve,
modify, add, or delete business items. Some services are
Authorization, Authentication, Global Service Manager
(GSM).
servlet A piece of compiled code executable by a Web
server.
Servlet Configurator A software utility for configuring all
of the locally installed servlets.
shortcut A pointer to an actual program or file that is
located elsewhere. You can open the program or file
through the shortcut, if you have permission.
shortcut menu A menu that is displayed when you rightclicks a selection, an object, or a toolbar. A shortcut menu
lists commands pertaining only to that screen region or
selection.
sibling A child member at the same generation as another
child member and having the same immediate parent. For
example, the members Florida and New York are both
children of East and siblings of each other.
Single Sign-On A feature that enables you to access
multiple Hyperion products after logging on just once
using external credentials.
SmartCut A link to an item in the repository in the form
of a special URL.
snapshot Read-only data from a specific point in time. See
snapshot report.
snapshot report A report that has been generated and that
stores static data. Any subsequent change of the data in the
data source does not affect the report content. A snapshot
report is portable and can be stored on the network,
locally, or e-mailed. See snapshot.
sort Reorder or rank result sets in ascending or
descending order.
sort order An indicator specifying the method by which
you want your data to be presented. Data is typically
shown in one of two sort orders. Ascending sort order
presents data from lowest to highest, earliest to latest, first
to last, A to Z, and so on. Descending sort order presents
data from highest to lowest, latest to earliest, last to first, Z
to A, and so on.
SPF files Printer-independent files created by an
Production Reporting server that contains a representation
of the actual formatted report output, including fonts,
spacing, headers, footers, and so on.
spreadsheet One of the three data object display types.
Spreadsheets are tabular reports of rows, columns, and
pages.
SQL spreadsheet A data object that displays the result set
of a SQL query.
stacked charts A chart where the categories are viewed on
top of one another for visual comparison. This type of
chart is useful for subcategorizing within the current
category. Stacking can be used from the Y and Z axis in all
chart types except pie and line. When stacking charts the Z
axis is used as the Fact/Values axis.
Start in Play The quickest method for creating a Web
Analysis document. The Start in Play process requires you
to specify a database connection, then assumes the use of a
spreadsheet data object. Start in Play uses the highest
aggregate members of the time and measures dimensions
to automatically populate the rows and columns axes of
the spreadsheet.
strategic objective (SO) A long-term goal defined for an
organization that is stated in concrete terms whose
progress is determined by measuring results. Each strategic
objective is associated with one perspective in your
application, has one parent, the entity, and is a parent to
critical success factors or other strategic objectives. It also
has measures associated with it.
Strategy map A detailed representations of how your
organization translates its high-level mission and vision
statements into lower-level, constituent strategic goals and
objectives.
structure view A view that displays a topic as a list of
component items allowing users to see and quickly select
individual data items. Structure view is the default view
setting.
Structured Query Language The language used to give
instructions to relational databases. When you build the
Query section’s Request, Limit, and Sort lines, Interactive
Reporting translate your requests into SQL instructions.
subscribe Register an interest in an item or folder, in order
to receive automatic notification whenever the item or
folder is updated.
subset A group of members selected by specific criteria.
substitution variable A variable that acts as a global
placeholder for information that changes regularly. You set
the variable and a corresponding string value; the value
can be changed at any time.
Summary chart A chart that is displayed at the top of each
chart column in the Investigate Section and plots metrics
at the summary level, meaning that it rolls up all of the
Detail charts shown below in the same column. All colors
shown in a stacked bar, pie, or lines Summary chart also
appear above each Drill button of the Detail charts and
extend across the row, acting as the key.
super service A special service used by the
startCommonServices script to start the RSC services.
Glossary
441
table The basic unit of data storage in a database.
Database tables hold all of the user-accessible data. Table
data is stored in rows and columns.
trend How the performance of a measure or scorecard has
changed since the last reporting period or a date that you
specify.
Table catalog A display of the tables, views, and synonyms
to which users have access. Users drag tables from the Table
catalog to the Content pane to create data models in the
Query section.
trusted password A password that enables users who have
been previously authenticated in another system to have
access to other applications without reentering their
passwords.
Table section The section used to create tabular-style
reports. It is identical in functionality to the Results
section, including grain level (table reports are not
aggregated). Other reports can stem from a Table section.
trusted user A user authenticated by some mechanism in
the environment.
target The expected result for a measure for a specified
period of time, such as a day, quarter, month and so on.
You can define multiple targets for a single measure.
time events Triggers for execution of jobs.
time scale A scale that enables you to see the metrics by a
specific period in time, such as monthly or quarterly.
token An encrypted identification of one valid user or
group existing on an external authentication system.
toolbar A series of shortcut buttons providing quick
access to the most frequently used commands.
top and side labels In the Pivot section, the column and
row headings on the top and sides of the pivot. These
define categories by which the numeric values are
organized.
top-level member A dimension member at the top of the
tree in a dimension outline hierarchy, or the first member
of the dimension in sort order if there is no hierarchical
relationship among dimension members. The top-level
member name is generally the same name as the
dimension name if a hierarchical relationship exists.
trace level A means of defining the level of detail captured
in the log file.
traffic lighting Color-coding of report cells, or pins based
on a comparison of two dimension members, or on fixed
limits. Traffic lighting definitions are created using the
Web Analysis Traffic Light Analysis Tool.
transparent login A mechanism that enables users who
have been previously authenticated by external security
criteria to log in to a Hyperion application, bypassing the
login screen.
442
Glossary
Uniform Resource Locator The address of a resource on
the Internet or an intranet.
variable A value that can be modified when you run a
report. String variables are useful for concatenating two or
more database columns. Numeric variables can calculate
values based on other values in the database. Encode
variables are string variables that contain nondisplay and
other special characters.
variable limits Limits that prompt users to enter or select
limit values before the queries are processed on the
database.
Web server Software or hardware hosting intranet or
Internet Web pages or Web applications. This term often
refers to the Interactive Reporting servlets’ host, because in
many installations, the servlets and the web server software
reside on a common host. This configuration is not
required, however; the servlets and the web server software
may reside on different hosts.
weight A value assigned to an item on a scorecard that
indicates the relative importance of that item in the
calculation of the overall scorecard score. The weighting of
all items on a scorecard accumulates to 100%. For
example, to recognize the importance of developing new
features for a product, the measure for New Features
Coded on a developer’s scorecard would be assigned a
higher weighting than a measure for Number of Minor
Defect Fixes.
ws.conf A configuration file for Windows platforms.
wsconf_platform A configuration file for UNIX
platforms.
Y axis scale The range of values on the Y axis of the charts
displayed in the Investigate Section. You can use a unique
Y axis scale for each chart, the same Y axis scale for all
Detail charts, or the same Y axis scale for all charts in the
column. Often, using a common Y axis improves your
ability to compare charts at a glance.
Zero Administration A software tool that identifies the
version number of the most up-to-date plug-in on the
server.
zoom A feature that sets the magnification of a report.
The report can be magnified to fit the whole page, page
width or a percentage of magnification based on 100%.
ZoomChart A feature that makes it easy to view detailed
information by enlarging a chart displayed on a page in the
Monitor or Investigate Section. Zooming in on a chart
enables you to see detailed numeric information on the
metric that is displayed in the chart. You can click the +
(plus sign) in the lower right corner of the chart or rightclick anywhere on the chart to enlarge it.
Glossary
443
444
Glossary
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Index
Symbols
Hyperion Financial Management, 332
.bqy, 204
<, 233
<=, 233
<>, 233
=, 233
>, 233
>=, 233
overview
A
access privileges
BQY documents, setting, 82
defined, 79
descriptions of, 82
setting, 79
accessing pages, 122
actions, multiple-cycle Interactive Reporting jobs, 386
active preference, user interface, 30 to 31
active user preference, 30
adaptive states
BQY documents, 82
adding
Exceptions Dashboard to Personal Page, 112
exceptions to Exceptions Dashboard, 85
file content windows on Personal Pages, 104
image bookmarks, Hyperion Foundation items, 109
My Bookmarks, 108
Personal Page content, 102
schedules, 357
sections, 208
versions, 88
additional report detail, drilling to, 136
advanced member selection
defining subset member selections, 291, 294
searching for members, 288
Alert dialog, 203
alias tables
about, 32
setting, 32
aliases, displaying, 40
analysis tools
definitions
default, 306
disabling, 306
enabling, 306
ordering, 306
overview, 305
Restrict Data, 313
Retrieve Only Top/Bottom, 315
Sorting, 312
Traffic Lighting, 310
Analysis Tools Manager
toolbar, 305
APIs, exceptions, 418
applets in parameter forms, 420
applying
point of view, 140
area charts, 247
arranging dimensions in the layout, 283
ASK parameters, 424
asymmetrical analysis, 307
audience for this guide, xix
auto-delete
Browse web module, 85
output for Interactive Reporting jobs, 372
Automatic data type, 217
autosizing columns, 228
Index Symbols
445
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Available area, 187
Average calculation, 319
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
bookmarks
creating, 108
defined, 101
B
image
background jobs
set, 372
items, 108
bar charts, 244 to 245
bar values
showing, 245
items, 109
My, 101
books
changing data source for, 68
creating, 183 to 185
bar-line charts, 249
basic elements of parameter forms. See parameter forms
basics
Browse, 54
importing, 183
opening, 191
printing, 192
renaming, 192
batch jobs
defining, 359
defining data in selecting
POV members for a batch job, 360
saving, 191
BQY
document sections, embedding Personal Pages, 105
documents
destination, output, 361
setting access privileges on, 82
details, 365
notifying when complete, 197
files, properties of, 86
opening a batch, 196
section on a Personal Page, embedding a, 105 to 106,
108
POV, 360
retrieving output from, 365
scheduling, 196
specifying members for, 360
specifying output format and location, 196
viewing job details of, 365
batch output
retrieving, 365
specifying format and location, 365
batch POV
selecting members, 360
batch processing
notifying when complete, 197
overview, 359
batches
destination and output, 361
Browse
basics of, 54
Content pane, 54
browsers
Dimension Browser, 284
buttons
replacing, 87
Byte data type, 217
C
calculations
Average, 319
e-mail notification, 364
creating, 324
zipped output file, 365
Cumulative, 319
batches of reports, printing, 171
batches, running books in, 182
BEGINS WITH, 233
BETWEEN, 233
blob data type, 217
Book Editor dialog box, 184
446
break totals, in Results, 237
Broadcast Messages
as Personal Page element, 100
Index B
Difference from Average, 320
Divide, 320
Linear Regression, 320
Maximum, 320
Maximum Value, 321
Minimum, 321
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Minimum Value, 321
modifying, 326
Multiply, 321
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
charted metrics, 129
charts
adding items, 250
overview, 319
displaying descriptions, 129, 137
Percent, 321
drilling, 128
Percent Difference from Average, 322
enlarging, 123
Percent of Difference, 322
focusing and hiding items, 251
Percent of Member, 322
legend, 124
Percent of Total, 322
metrics, 144
Rank Ascending, 323
Monitor Section pages, displaying details, 127
Rank Descending, 323
removing items, 251
Subtract, 323
sorting, 133
Sum, 323
stacked, 126
Trend, 323
Tooltips in, 122, 126, 132
Variance, 324
Variance Percent, 324
calendar, selection, 374
changing
a page member, 172
changing member
grid POV, 178
changing, colors on Personal Pages, 114
chart cell values
on Chart Dictionary pages, 144
in ZoomCharts, 124
chart columns
chart page information and, 144
Dictionary Section, 144
Search button and, 136
sorting and, 133
Chart Description dialog box, 129
chart descriptions, displaying, 129, 137
Chart Dictionary, 144
chart dimensions, 239
chart information
viewing, 144
chart pages
elements, 131
hyperlinks, 127
selecting, 132
sorting charts, 133
viewing, 132
Chart section, 239
chart types
multi-dimensional, 245
Z
types of, 243
clustered bar charts, 246
colors
hiding by color, 307
columns
adding in Results section, 228
autosizing, 228
deleting in Results section, 228
sorting, 229
combination charts, 249
commands, Help menu, xxi
conditional elements
in parameter forms, 422
connecting to data sources, Interactive Reporting
documents, 373
Console
Dictionary Section, 142
consulting services, xxiii
CONTAINS, 233
content
adding or removing from Personal Pages, 102
customizing Personal Page, 102
displaying HTML on Personal Pages, 103
publishing, 76
viewing, 55
Content pane, 54
content windows
defined, 100
rearranging, 113
coordinating selected dimensions, 339
copying
Personal Pages, 116
Index C
447
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
creating
bookmarks, 108
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
deleting, 72
collection, 57
editing, 72
document, 57
managing, 70
Personal Pages, 115
personal recurring time events, 352
personal variables, 297
Cube Navigator
overview, 283
Cumulative calculation, 319
cumulative totals, 258
Custom Values, 234
customizing
Exceptions Dashboard, 112
Personal Page content, 102
user interface, 26
cycle
defined, 370
cycles
actions, defined, 370
T
U
V
W
database connection
adding, 71
calculations, 324
folders, 57
S
databases
web analysis preferences, 30
Date data type, 217
Date Range point of view, 140
date selections, 298
dedicated accounts, 416
default
folders, 28
permissions, 28
settings, 26
default job output format, 374
default parameter forms, 421
default Personal Page, setting the, 117
default settings,snapshot, 169
deleting
events, 353
files, 58
limits, 370
folders, 58
user defined, 374
job output, 416
job parameters, 358
Personal Pages, 117
D
reports from books, 183
Dashboard Home, 202
Dashboard, Exceptions, 109
data
Report page, sorting, 141
data function
pivot section, 259
data functions
compared to computed items, 221
in OLAP, 265
data labels in pivot tables, 254
data prompts
defining for a batch of reports, 359
responding to, 168
data source
changing, 68
old database connections, 68
repository, 69
data source, linking components by, 339
data values, hiding by, 307
448
Index D
schedules, 357
deleting sections, 209
descriptions, chart, displaying, 129, 137
descriptions, displaying, 40
destination, batch, 361
Detail charts
Search button in, 136
detail, line item, 332
Dictionary Section
Console, 142
elements, 142
using, 142
Difference from Average calculation, 320
Dimension Browser
labels in, 285
overview, 284
dimension members
selecting with Dimension Browser, 284
dimensions
X
Y
Z
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
arranging in the layout, 283
browsing, 284
coordinating selected, 339
P
Q
R
S
T
U
selecting with Cube Navigator, 283
mouse pointer and, 133
swapping, 300
overview, 302
validating that data sources have the same, 68
viewing additional detail, 135
descriptions, 40
HTML content on Personal Pages, 103
HTML files on Personal Pages, 103
mini report information, 130
object information, 143
report descriptions, 141
E
editing
Restrict Data definitions, 315
Retrieve Only Top-Bottom definitions, 317
education services, xxiii
EIS Home, 210
elements
chart pages, 131
Dictionary Section, 142
secure job information, 417
Monitor Section, 125
slices along x-axis, 126
parameter forms
Divide calculation, 320
documents
accessing, 205
conventions used, xxii
feedback, xxiii
processing, 210
saving, 205
structure of, xix
additional elements, 424
parameter display elements, 423
parameter list elements, 423
required elements, 423
types of, 422 to 423
Report pages, 138
elements, rearranging Personal Page, 113
e-mail
default, 26
understanding, 204
linking, 60
working with, 203
notification of batch processing, 197
documents, accessing
Hyperion Download Center, xx to xxi
Hyperion Solutions Web site, xx
Information Map, xx
online help, xx
documents, BQY, as Personal Page elements, 105
drill anywhere, 262
drill down
in OLAP, 264
drill linking
overview, 303
drill up
Z
substitution variables, 298
Report pages, 139
user POV, 40
Y
Dynamic Time Series
definitions, 298
removing from Personal Pages, 105
chart descriptions, 129, 137
X
in OLAP, 265
on mini reports, 128
displaying
aliases, 40
W
drilling
additional report detail, 136
moving, 300
displayed HTML files
on additional Personal Pages, 104
V
recipient list, 61
e-mail notification
batches, 364
email notifications, high priority item search, 99
embedding BQY sections on Personal Pages, 105 to 106,
108
ENDS WITH, 233
Enterprise Metrics
hyperlinks, 122
managing business with, 121
navigating, 121
EQUAL, 233
Index E
449
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
Essbase
features extended through Hyperion Analyzer, 329
substitution variables. See substitution variables.
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
adding to Personal Pages, 104
removing from Personal Pages, 105
files
events
creating a new personal recurring time, 352
deleting, 58
HTML, 75
defined, 345
HTML files as Personal Page elements, 101
deleting, 353
options of OCE, 87
modifying, 353
owner, 84
viewing, 353
properties of BQY, 86
exceptions
supporting in generic report programs, 418
publishing multiple, 76
registering, 61 to 62
supporting in Production Reporting code, 417
renaming, 58
Exceptions Dashboard
See also exceptions
searching, 59
security mode, 416
add to Personal Pages, 112
customizing, 112
described, 371, 417
using, 109
expansions, using, 174
explore
preferences, 28
export
exceptions, 64
size, 84
filter job list, 356
filters
in Results section, 231
deleting, 235
modifying, 235
Financial Reporting
changing the database connection, 68
changing the related content server, 67
Financial Reports, 66
Microsoft Office, 66
Production Reporting to Excel, 67
smart view options, 63
snapshots, 66
managing database connections, 70
Financial Reporting preferences, studio, 36
flag exception, 89
folders
creating, 57
supported web applications, 63
deleting, 58
Web Analysis, 67
moving, 58
Export to PDF, 202
Export to XLS, 202
exporting
items, 62
Production Reporting preferences, 37
renaming, 58
repository, 54
searching, 57, 59
Smart View, 63
extrapolation
slices and, 125
x-axis display and, 125
Y
subscribing to, 99
footer sections, in Personal Pages, 113
formatting
web analysis preferences, 30
F
G
fast scrolling, 136
features
Essbase, 329
generic report programs, support for exceptions, 418
grand total
in Results section, 236
Hyperion Financial Management, 331
file content windows
450
Index F
GREATER OR EQUAL, 233
GREATER THAN, 233
Z
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
grid POV, changing member, 178
grouping and ungrouping
chart labels, 252
in pivot tables, 256
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
viewing additional detail with, 139
viewing detail with, 132
I
icons
High priority, 418
H
header sections, in Personal Pages, 113
Help menu commands, xxi
hexadecimal color code settings in Personal Pages, 115
hide item, when publishing, 85
hiding
by color, 307
by data value, 307
by selected members, 307
high priority. See priority
HTML
default job output format, 374
displaying content on Personal Pages, 103
HTML documents, output of batch jobs, 196
HTML files
as Personal Page elements, 101
publishing, 75
removing from Personal Pages, 105
security tags in, 415
Hyperion Applications
launching, 119
Hyperion Consulting Services, xxiii
Hyperion Download Center
accessing documents, xxi
Hyperion Education Services, xxiii
Hyperion Financial Management
advanced member selection, 333, 335
conventions, 333
features extended through Hyperion Analyzer, 331
overview, 331
Hyperion product information, xxiii
Hyperion support, xxiii
Hyperion System 9 BI+
smart view export options, 63
Hyperion Technical Support, xxiii
hyperlinks
on chart pages, 127
modify properties, 417
image bookmark
item, adding an, 109
Personal Page elements, 101
import
Interactive Reporting, 64
information
measures, 145
metric, 144
mini report, 145
Report pages, 145
INPUT parameters, parameter display elements, 424
installing
smart view from Workspace, 65
integer (32-bit), 218
integer data type (16-bit), 217
Integer data type (32-bit), 217
Intelligence Client sections See sections.
Intelligence iServer
embedded sections, 105
Interactive Reporting
import, 64
jobs
action options for multiple-cycle, 386
properties, 371
setting job parameters for, 379
Interactive Reporting preferences, 37
Interactive Reporting toolbar, 201
intersections, paging through, 301
IS NULL, 233
item changes, subscribing to, 97
items
adding, image bookmark, 109
adding, My Bookmark, 108
exporting, 62
setting access privileges, 80
displayed in blue text, 122
Enterprise Metrics, 122
on Report pages, 128
Index H
451
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
J
JavaScript, in parameter forms, 420
job defaults, Interactive Reporting jobs, 374
job output properties, modifying, 351
job parameters
defined, 345 to 346
deleting, 358
modifying, 358
L
M
N
O
when running a job, 347
job properties
generic, 409
Interactive Reporting, 371
Production Reporting, 394
jobs
action options for multiple-cycle Interactive
Reporting, 386
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
components by data source, 339
e-mail, 60
personal default, 347
setting SQR and generic, 352
Q
LESS OR EQUAL, 233
LESS THAN, 233
LIKE, 233
line charts, 248
line item detail, 332
Linear Regression calculation, 320
linking
applications, 59
OLAP queries, 383
setting Interactive Reporting, 379
P
selected dimensions, 339
links
using on Monitor Section pages, 129
links, graphic, 101
lists
versions of file, 89
locally saving documents, 205
long text data type, 218
looping elements
parameter forms elements, 422
assigning forms to jobs, 420
deleting output, 416
M
filtering job list, 356
managing business, 121
Maximum calculation, 320
Maximum Value calculation, 321
measures, 143, 145, 265
member lists
previewing, 190
notification options when scheduling, 350
OLAP job parameters, 383
output as Personal Page elements, 101
properties of Interactive Reporting, 371
running, 346
scheduling, 348
secure Production Reporting jobs, 415
setting default job parameters, 347
defining previous, 298
member selections
changing for report, 185
K
keywords
automatically generating, 85
copying between reports, 184
members
arranging, 40
dimensions, 39
L
previewing, 190
launching
Hyperion Applications, 119
layout of a Personal Page, modifying the, 113
layout styles, of Personal Pages, 113
layouts
arranging dimensions in, 283
legends, 241
452
member prompts, 168
member selection
advanced. See advanced member selection.
Index J
prompting for in batch processing, 359
selecting for batch jobs, 360
metric information, 144
metrics
point of view, 134
Microsoft Office
Y
Z
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
export, 66
importing Web Analysis documents, 67
N
O
Minimum calculation, 321
Minimum Value calculation, 321
modifying
calculations, 326
events, 353
job output properties, 351
job parameters, 358
layout of Personal Pages, 113
properties of versions, viewing or, 88
schedule, 356
Monitor Section
elements, 125
selecting, 127
Monitor Section pages
links, 129
R
S
Native File Format, 212
navigating Enterprise Metrics, 121
navigating sections, 206
navigation
methods, 300
NOT (with operator), 233
NOT EQUAL, 233
X
Y
Z
O
object information, displaying, 143
objects, security mode, 416
OCE files
defined, 375
options of, 87
OLAP job parameters, 383
OLAP section, 263
OLAP terminology, 263
OPEN statement (Production Reporting), 416
operators, 233
options and properties, when publishing all items, 83
options,import, 64
output from jobs
as Personal Page elements, 101
deleting, 416
security mode, 416
N
W
number formatting, 229
permissions, 416
defined, 101
V
viewing an item when you receive, 100
viewing, 127
mouse pointers, drilling and, 133
moving between sections, 208
multiple files, publishing, 76
multiple-cycle Interactive Reporting jobs, action options
for, 386
Multiply calculation, 321
My Bookmarks
adding as Personal Page elements, 108
U
subscribe to items, 97
selecting, 127
monitored exceptions
as Personal Page elements, 101
T
options for job, 350
MIME types
defined, 85
mini reports
information, displaying, 130, 145
Q
notifications
deleting job, 354
versions, 66
unknown, 74
P
output properties, modifying job, 351
output, batch, 361
P
Packed Real data type, 218
packed real data type, 218
page members
changing, 172
POV, 174
page orientation, 192
page setup, changing for books, 192
pages
numbering in books, 192
pages, accessing, 122
Paging Icons, 202
paging through intersections, 301
paper size, 192
parameter forms
additional elements, 424
assigning default, 421
Index N
453
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
Q
R
S
T
U
V
assigning to jobs, 420 to 421
modifying the layout, 113
basic, conditional, and looping elements, 422 to 423
publishing, 118
examples and tips, 429
removing file content window, 105
importing files, 423
restoring, 117
parameter display elements, 423
parameter list elements, 423
required elements, 423
submit for processing code snippet, 423
switching to default form, 421
tags, 421
parameter lists
parameter display elements, 423
parameter forms elements, 423
modifying job, 358
setting
Interactive Reporting job, 379
SQR and generic job, 352
pass-through
Interactive Reporting jobs, 370
Production Reporting and generic jobs, 396
using multiple OCE files, 376
PDF files, as batch output, 196
Percent calculation, 321
Percent Difference from Average calculation, 322
Percent of Difference calculation, 322
Percent of Member calculation, 322
Percent of Total calculation, 322
permissions
default, 28
permissions, setting access privileges, 79
Personal Pages
adding a file content window on additional, 104
adding Exceptions Dashboard, 112
changing colors, 114
personalizing
view pane and content area, 43
workspace, 42
pie charts
described, 244
percent display, 244
showing negative and positive values, 244
pie values
showing, 244
pins
options for, 304
pivot dimension, 254
Pivot Section
paging, 260
Pivot section, 254
adding, 254
adding items, 255
sorting by labels, 261
pivot tables
components, 254
deleting pivot items, 255
focusing and hiding items, 255
swing feature, 257
working with, 254
Point of View
overview, 34, 297
point of view
applying, 140
applying more than one, 141
content, customizing, 102
Date Range, 140
creating, 115
metrics, 134
deleting, 117
point of view (POV)
defining for batch jobs, 360
displaying HTML files, 103
displaying members, 40
elements, rearranging, 113
Financial Reporting, 38
embedding BQY sections, 105 to 106, 108
hanging, 172
headers and footers, 113
page member, 174
Index P
X
setting the default, 117
content, adding or removing, 102
default, 117
W
personal recurring time events, creating, 352
personal variables
creating, 297
parameters
deleting job, 358
454
P
Y
Z
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
user POV for the web, 172
module, 29
R
S
T
U
V
Z
versions, 89
versions, viewing or modifying, 88
Properties dialog box, 421
publishing
about, 74
add to Exceptions Dashboard, 85
auto-delete, 85
prerequisites for using this guide, xix
previewing, selected members, 190
printing
report books and snapshot books, 194
content, 76
default job output format, 374
hide item, 85
HTML files, 75
reports, 171
jobs
snapshot reports, 171
secure and nonsecure output from same job, 416
Y
security mode, 416
web analysis, 30
OPEN statement, 416
X
Production Reporting job, 394
Production Reporting, 37
priority, set, 89
privileges, setting access, 79
process options, Interactive Reporting multiple-cycle jobs,
385
Production Reporting
jobs
W
modifying job output, 351
Financial Reporting, 36
Interactive Reporting, 37
Q
generic job, 409
point of view, navigation, 132
predefined reports, 139
preferences
explore, 28
general, 26
P
pass-through, Production Reporting, 396
multiple files, 76
Personal Pages, 118
privileges, 73
Q
queries
building OLAP queries with Cube Navigator, 283
secure jobs, 415
defining with Cube Navigator, 283
permissions, 416
Dynamic Time Series definitions for, 298
recommendations, 416
refreshing, 226
security mode, 416
security tags in, 415
viewing security information, 417
Production Reporting jobs
secure Production Reporting jobs, 415
Production Reporting preferences
folders, 37
Production Reporting programs
exceptions support, 417
Production ReportingProgramOutput object, 416
Prompts
defining, 195
prompts
defining in a batch of reports, 359
responding to when previewing, 173
properties
BQY files, 86
defined, 74
R
Rank Ascending calculation, 323
Rank Descending calculation, 323
Real data type, 218
recurring time events, creating new personal, 352
referential items
in Chart and Pivot sections, 261
Refresh button, 140
related content
cell text, 332
changing the related content server, 67
definitions, 306
using, 174
relational data
access, 336
relational drill-through
Index Q
455
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
overview, 328
removing
embedded BQY sections, 108
file content windows from Personal Pages, 105
Personal Page contents, adding or, 102
subscriptions, 99
removing Request items, 216
removing Request line items, 216
renaming
files, 58
folders, 58
renaming sections, 209
replacing
BQY jobs and OCE files, 87
buttons, 87
report books, printing, 194
report descriptions, displaying, 141
report detail, drilling to additional, 136
report details, refreshing, 140
Report pages
displaying, 139
elements, 138
hyperlinks, 128
information, 145
selecting, 139
Q
R
saving a document, 205
saving documents, 205
saving files locally, 212
scheduled batch
status, 365
scheduler
external, 366
schedules
adding, 357
scheduling jobs
general, 348
scrolling, fast, 136
searching, 136
files, 59
folders, 59
sections
adding, 208
deleting, 209
moving between, 208
URLs, 51
repository,changing the data source, 69
required files
Index S
Z
saving
file, 57
viewing, 170
shortcuts, 51
Y
S
searching for, 170
reports, requesting, 139
repository
folders, 54
X
running jobs, 346
modifying, 356
drilling to detail, 302
W
ribbon charts, 249
row-level security, 75
rows
deleting in Results section, 228
deleting, 357
deleting from books, 185, 194
V
Retrieve Only Top/Bottom analysis tool, 315
retrieving
batch output, 365
viewing, 139
changing display types for, 303
U
Restrict Data analysis tool, 313
editing definitions, 315
defined, 345
changing data source for, 68
T
for Production Reporting jobs, 397
using, 137
assigning to a batch, 359
S
for generic jobs, 397
sorting data, 141
Report section, 266
reports
adding to book, 184
456
P
renaming, 209
sections, BQY documents, as Personal Page elements, 105
Secure jobs, security tags, 85
Secure mode, 417
secure Production Reporting jobs. See Production
Reporting
security
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
Production Reporting job recommendations, 416
row-level, 75
viewing security information, 417
M
N
O
P
Q
R
Select Members dialog box
Available area, 187
renaming, 192
member items, 176
member lists, 187
member options, 176
members, 187
members for the User POV, 177
Monitor Section pages, 127
Report pages, 139
Selecting Dimension Members, 285
setting
access privileges, 79
alias tables, 32
default Personal Page, 117
Shortcut Menus, 203
shortcut menus, 65
shortcuts
repository, 51
Show Values, 233
show, latest version, 89
Show/Hide Only analysis tool
creating definitions, 308
editing definitions, 309
overview, 307
Show/Hide Only dialog box, 307
slices
colors used, 124
slices, displaying along x-axis, 126
smart tags, 65
features, 65
overview, 65
Smart View
exporting, 63
smart view
installing, 65
SmartCuts
defined and location, 84
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
importing, 183
opening, 191
dimension members, 284
T
snapshot books
described, 179
security tags
in secure Production Reporting programs, 417
selected members, hiding by, 307
selecting
chart pages, 132
S
printing, 192, 194
saving, 191
viewing, 179
snapshot reports
printing, 171
Snapshot, viewing, 169
snapshots
printing, 174
sorting and viewing, 178 to 179
snapshots,exporting to Microsoft Office, 66
sorting
chart page charts, 133
charts, 133
charts and pivot tables, 261
in OLAP, 264
in Pivot and Chart sections, 260
Report page data, 141
snapshots, 178 to 179
Sorting analysis tool, 312
sorting by
functions, 261
labels, 261
values, 261
special members, 187
SPF file format, 409
SPF files
publishing as jobs, 415
recommendations for security, 416
secure Production Reporting jobs, 415
SPFFileOutputCollection object, 416
SQR and generic job parameters, setting, 352
SSL
configuring for external authentication, 67
stacked area charts, 248
stacked bar charts, 246
Standard toolbar, 200
start page
default, 26
setting, 26
stoplight charts, 125
String data type, 218
Index S
457
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
subscribing
about, 92
items, 97
L
M
N
O
syntax, 297
using, 296
Subtract calculation, 323
Sum calculation, 323
Summary charts
drilling, 132
Q
R
S
T
U
user POV
see POV, 172
user preferences
Databases user preferences, 32
using
Dictionary Section, 142
hyperlinks, 122, 127 to 128, 132, 139
Monitor Section page links, 129
Report pages, 137
ZoomCharts, 123
V
table of contents, printing, 192
technical support, xxiii
termination conditions in parameter forms, 423
three-dimensional charts, viewing, 246
Time datatype, 218
time events
creating new personal recurring, 352
Variance calculation, 324
Variance Percent calculation, 324
versions
adding, 88
colors in, 122
displaying, 126
totals
cumulative totals, 258
flag exception, 89
Microsoft Office, 66
setting priority, 89
showing latest, 89
working with, 87
viewing
additional detail, 135
additional details, 135, 139
books, 178
chart information, 144
chart page details, 127
chart pages, 132
in Results section, 235
content, 55
pivot total function, 258
details, 132
surface values, 259
details of a batch job, 365
traffic lighting
Traffic Lighting dialog box, 310
events, 353
Traffic Lighting analysis tool
overview, 310
object information, 143
Trend calculation, 323
properties of versions, 88
items when receiving notification, 100
pages in Monitor Section, 127
Report pages, 139
Report pages details, 128
U
reports, 170
unlinking coordinated components, 339
458
Index T
X
resizing the view pane and content area, 43
T
time selections, 298
TimeStamp data type, 218
Toolbars, 200
Tooltips
appearance of, 133
W
customizing, 26
surface values, 259
swing feature, in pivot tables, 257
defined, 345
V
URLs,repository, 51
user interface
active preference, 30 to 31
subscriptions
removing, 99
substitution variables
Dynamic Time Series, 298
P
Y
Z
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
snapshots, 178 to 179
W
web analysis preferences
databases, 30
formatting, 30
windows, rearranging content, 113
Workspace
installing smart view, 65
user provisioning, 70
workspace
content area, 42
masthead, 42
personalizing, 42
view pane, 42
workspace library
changing data source in, 68
X
x-axis, displaying slices along, 126
Z
ZoomCharts
As of Date tick marks, 125
detail rows, 125
elements, 124
stoplight charts and, 125
Index W
459
460
Index Z
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement